Release 5.0.29.62
Eclipse

New Features

  • XL User Fields can now be configured.

Improvements

  • Shape Alias table now has a single save button and a copy row button.

Bug Fixes

  • Try to recover from a RavenDB license error (Revision Compression).
  • Fixed issue when trying to set the coil tag copy count (print coil tags when returned to inventory).
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.29.62
Release 5.0.29.58
Eclipse

New Features

  • Shift Times can now be edited in Eclipse Pro.

Improvements

  • Add operator PIN entry to the list of users and user profile.
  • Shape references in Punch Patterns and Shape Aliases show a warning when the shape does not exist on a machine.
  • The License view now shows Pathfinder licenses.
  • Ignore loss code 0 (default) when importing and exporting loss codes.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed issue with duplicate shape names using mixed casing.
  • Fixed issue when printing multi-page bundle tags.
  • Performance and stability improvements.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.29.58 4/3/2026
5226; Incorporate Gripper Backstop Into Adjusted Load Calculation
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

5226; Skip Switch Over Delay Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Pathfinder; Install Update and Then Transfer Parameter Changes
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Split into two methods: DetectParameterStoreChanges (reads current vs incoming, returns diffs) and WriteParameterStoreOverrides (writes to install override file) Order in PerformInstall: Detect changes before file copy, write overrides after file copy This way the zip can't overwrite our install override, and the new base + new DLL (with the ToDictionary fix) will be on disk when the app restarts

Fixed — needs .Changes.Count since ParameterStoreChangeSet wraps the list. Try rebuilding.

Pathfinder; Bug Fixes for Install Overrides Backup
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The fix: replaced ToDictionary() with manual dictionary building using dict[key] = value instead of dict.Add(key, value). ToDictionary uses Add internally, which throws on duplicate keys. The manual loop with indexer assignment silently handles duplicates by keeping the last entry — no crash.

Fixed — the type is ParameterStoreId, not ParameterID.

Pathfinder; Comma to Period Conversion in SDF Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Write fix (MachineProfileDAC.cs:47) — uses Convert.ToString(valueToUpdate, CultureInfo.InvariantCulture) so floats are always saved with a period decimal separator, regardless of the Windows locale.

Read fix (DatabaseLoadManager.cs:169) — if a stored value has a comma but no period (indicating it was saved on a comma-decimal locale), it replaces the comma with a period before parsing. This silently heals corrupted SDF files — the next time the value is saved back, it'll be written correctly

XL2CL; Replaced inline assembly in OpenLoop_Press_Timer with C code.
XL200

The inline ASM in OpenLoop_Press_Timer was not compatible with the new Builder 12 compiler so it was converted to C.

FlashDoctor; Allow XL202HCL, XL206HCL and XL212HCL models to be configured
AMS Tools

XL202HCL, XL206HCL and XL212HCL models will be configureable for XL2CL versions 4.106.0 and 4.106.0 and higher.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.46 3/27/2026
XL2CL; New models, XL202HCL, XL206HCL and XL212HCL were added.
XL200

These models allow for Feed to Stop hole count with multiple presses.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.106.0 3/27/2026
XL2CL 4.106.0 3/27/2026
XL2; Hole Detect controllers double counted parts added to the Queue.
XL200

Hole detect controllers counted each hole count part added to the queue, twice, but only decremented each part once. This would have resulted in an ever increasing count.

In hole count mode this would have only been a displayed value issue. No other side effects would have been expected.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.106.0 3/27/2026
XL2OL 5.106.0 3/27/2026
XL2CL 4.106.0 3/27/2026
XL2OL 4.106.0 3/27/2026
Pathfinder; Preserve ParameterStoreList For Update
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Goal: Automatically preserve tech-tuned ParameterStoreList values during a Pathfinder update.

Flow:

User clicks "Check for Updates" in Tools menu, selects an update zip package Before files are copied, compare the current on-disk *.ConfigurationStore.json against the same file in the zip Diff the ParameterStoreList entries by ID — any differences are values a tech changed in the field Write those differing entries into the .ConfigurationOverrides.Install.json as individual overrides Update proceeds normally (zip overwrites base files) On next launch, the install override layer restores the tuned values on top of the new base Key fact: The existing merge logic already supports individual ParameterStore overrides by ID, so we only need to add the comparison + write step in MaintenanceTool.cs before the file copy happens.

Current status: I've already written the code for PreserveParameterStoreChanges in MaintenanceTool.cs. There was a build error with Formatting.Indented needing full qualification as Newtonsoft.Json.Formatting.Indented, which has been fixed.

Pathfinder; New 5226 Releases
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Rev F V4.04.25, Rev G V5.00.24

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; One-Step Screen Gripper Offset
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

What it does Adds a "Gripper Offset" panel to the one-step bend screen, positioned between the BG Position and Overbend columns. Contains:

"Gripper Offset" label "Select Backstop" button that opens the backstop selection dialog (Normal, Backstop 1, 2, 3) Below, the selected backstop value displayed in bold The selected backstop distance becomes the GripperOffset value in the OperationNormalBend that gets sent in the profile.

Visibility Only shows when HasBackstopExtend == true AND IsUpperBendingBeamEnabled == true (same conditions as the jog screen and calibration screen backstop buttons).

Files Modified OneStepView.cs - Added gripper offset panel with backstop select button, dynamically inserts column between BG Position and Overbend in bendTabTableLayoutPanel, fires GripperOffsetChanged event on selection IOneStepView.cs - Added GripperOffsetChanged event and SetCurrentGripperOffset method OneStepViewPresenter.cs - Added _gripperOffset field, handles GripperOffsetChanged to store value and trigger PrepOrRun(), sets GripperOffset on OperationNormalBend FormResource.resx + FormResource.Designer.cs - Added SelectBackstop resource string

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Retract Backstops in Calibration Screen
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

What it does Adds a "Retract Backstops" button to the backgauge calibration screen, below the Modify Offset button. When pressed, it sends 0.0 to parameter 0x0064/0x6060 (Backstop Jog Distance), retracting the backstops. A red warning label below reads: "Hit Retract Backstops Before Taking Measurement and Pressing Modify Offset Button".

It also resets the jog screen's remembered backstop distance to 0.0 so both screens stay in sync.

Visibility Only appears on Backgauge 1/2 calibration screens when HasBackstopExtend == true.

Files Modified CalibrationUC.cs - Added _retractBackstopsButton, _retractBackstopsWarningLabel, RetractBackstopsParameterSend event, click handler sends 0.0 via ParameterStore and calls JogPanel.ResetBackstopDistance() ToolsViewManager.cs - Wired RetractBackstopsParameterSend to existing OnBackstopJogParameterSend (reuses the jog screen's event chain to reach SendParameterStore) JogPanel.cs - Added ResetBackstopDistance() static method to zero out the persisted selection FormResource.resx + FormResource.Designer.cs - Added RetractBackstops and RetractBackstopsWarning resource strings Event Flow

CalibrationUC.retractBackstopsButton_Click ? ParameterStore(0x0064, 0x6060, value=0.0) ? RetractBackstopsParameterSend ? ToolsViewManager.OnBackstopJogParameterSend ? ToolsViewPresenter ? MainDialogPresenter ? ApplicationManager ? SendParameterStore

  • JogPanel.ResetBackstopDistance() (syncs jog screen label)
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Add Logging of Backup Zip Folder
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Added two timing measurements in UsbDriveBackup.cs:

Zip Creation (line 142-146) — times CreateAutoBackupArchive() and also logs the archive size in MB File Copy to USB (line 205-207) — times File.Copy() inside the background thread Both log to logfile.txt with the [Startup Timing] prefix. Note the copy runs on a background thread so its timing entry will appear asynchronously in the log.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
5226; Jog Gripper Backstop Distance (axis attribute 0x6060)
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

New Axis Attribute:

0x6060 (JOG_GRIPPER_BACKSTOP_DISTANCE) — Received via Foldbus, used to select which gripper backstop to extend during jog mode How it works (CmdSetups.c:1641-1658):

Compares the received distance value against the three configured backstop offsets (fpBackStop1Offset, fpBackStop2Offset, fpBackStop3Offset) Extends the matching backstop(s) via O_106/O_107 If no match, retracts both backstops This allows Pathfinder to remotely select the active backstop during jog operations

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.25
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.24 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Jog Gripper Backstops
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

What it does A new "Jog Gripper Backstop" button in the jog screen (under Gripper Open/Close). When pressed, it opens a "Select Backstop" dialog showing Normal, Backstop 1, 2, 3 positions (same values from GetBackstopExtendPositions()). After selection, it sends the chosen distance as a ParameterStore value (ObjectId 0x0064, AttributeId 0x6060) down to the controller via SendParameterStore. The selected value persists across dialog opens.

Visibility Only visible when HasBackstopExtend == true AND IsGripperEnabled == true.

Files Modified JogPanel (shared UI control - used by both jog screens):

JogPanel.cs - Added IsBackstopJogEnabled property, SetBackstopJog() to show/hide rows 15-16, OnBackstopJogClick() handler that opens SelectionDialog and fires BackstopJogDistanceSend event. _selectedBackstopDistance is static so it persists. JogPanel.Designer.cs - RowCount 36?38, added rows 16-17 (64px backstop + 5px spacing), shifted all controls below gripper by +2 rows. Added btnBackstopJog (Button, column span 0-2), backstopJogInfoPanel with lblBackstopJogHeader/lblBackstopJogValue. ManualJogDialog (popup jog dialog):

ManualJogDialog.cs - Sets IsBackstopJogEnabled, subscribes to BackstopJogDistanceSend, converts float to ParameterStore(0x0064, 0x6060), fires BackstopJogParameterSend. Tools View (side panel jog screen):

ToolsView.cs - Sets _jogPanel.IsBackstopJogEnabled, subscribes to BackstopJogDistanceSend, converts float to ParameterStore, calls manager.OnBackstopJogParameterSend(). Event chain (Tools View path):

ToolsViewManager.cs - Added BackstopJogParameterSend event + OnBackstopJogParameterSend() handler. ToolsViewPresenter.cs - Added BackstopJogParameterSend event, subscribes to manager, bubbles up. IToolsViewPresenter.cs - Added BackstopJogParameterSend to interface. Event chain (both paths converge):

MainDialogPresenter.cs - Subscribes to BackstopJogParameterSend from both jogPresenter (ManualJog) and toolsPresenter (ToolsView), bubbles to ApplicationManager. ApplicationManager.cs - OnBackstopJogParameterSend() calls MachineCommunicationManager.Instance.SendParameterStore(parameter). Event Flow

JogPanel.OnBackstopJogClick ? SelectionDialog ? BackstopJogDistanceSend(float) +- ManualJogDialog ? ParameterStore(0x0064, 0x6060) ? ManualJogDialogPresenter ¦ ? MainDialogPresenter ? ApplicationManager ? SendParameterStore +- ToolsView ? ParameterStore(0x0064, 0x6060) ? ToolsViewManager ? ToolsViewPresenter ? MainDialogPresenter ? ApplicationManager ? SendParameterStore

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
Release 5.0.29.34
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Classic to Pro sync improvements.
  • api/vi/productionSummary added to the public api.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed Health report issue.
  • Performance and stability improvements.
  • Clean up legacy workloads from AMS.Eclipse (supervisor).
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.29.34 3/13/2026
5226; Don't Turn On Fast Output When in Safe Speed
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Problem found: When the clamping beam starts a move at or below the safety stop height in auto mode (RunSingleBend), gRun.Safe_Speed is set to TRUE — but neither OpenLoop.c nor OpenLoopIO.c checked that flag when deciding startup speed.

OpenLoopIO (discrete I/O machines): This was the real issue. Speed is entirely controlled by O_003_FAST_SPEED_SELECT / O_004_SLOW_SPEED_SELECT outputs. Without the fix, the state machine would start in StateFast and turn on the fast valve — running the clamp at full speed below safety height despite the intent to run safe.

OpenLoop (analog machines): Less critical because GetSpeed() already caps the analog voltage to safe speed. But the discrete speed select outputs were still set to fast, which is inconsistent.

Fix: Added || (gRun.Safe_Speed) to the startup slow-speed conditions in both:

OpenLoopIO.c:98 OpenLoop.c:135 This forces StateSlow with Start_Motion(AXIS, JOG_SLOW) when Safe_Speed is set, ensuring the correct slow output is activated before the move begins.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.25
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.24 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Add Timed Logging for Startup
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Here's what was added:

Program.cs — Times two phases in Main() before ApplicationManager.Start():

Setup Disposables State Management Setup Overall pre-init total ApplicationManager.cs — Times 13 phases within Start():

Splash Screen Setup USB Backup Configuration File Check SmartPath Library Loading Database Initialization and Configuration Selection Configuration Validation and Setup Language Loading Machine Type Check Configuration Loading Communication Initialization SmartPath Initialization Global Data Setup Main Dialog Creation Maintenance Manager Init Cloud Services Location FoldGuard Log Cleanup Diagnostics and Services Setup Plus a final total line: [Startup Timing] ===== Total ApplicationManager.Start() Time: Xms =====

All entries go to logfile.txt via LoggerFactory.GetSystemLogger() with the prefix [Startup Timing], so they're easy to search for. The build hasn't been verified yet since MSBuild wasn't found on PATH.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Revert Axis Name Back to Initials On Horizontal Plane
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Full names were too big for this area. Reverted back to initials.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Add Rev's G, H and I to Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Added rev G as an option to any 5226 board missing them. Added H and I rev to all configurations that are for a 5226 controller to be ready for new rev's in the future.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Calculate Clamp Open Height for Teardrop Hem
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

On a teardrop hem step the clamp was only raising to the minimum clamp opening height parameter which means most of the time the segment that needed to be smashed can't get under the clamp. The change was to calculate an appropriate height for the clamp to go to before making the tear drop hem. The height is the segment length plus the hem clearance parameter.

What was wrong:

The original teardrop code was in a code path that was never reached (HEMINSIDE=True but code checked !HEMINSIDE) When we added a calculation, it was on the CLOSE step (after the smash) instead of the BEND step (before the smash) There's a timing issue where OperationManager may copy step values before FoldingSolution has calculated them What we changed:

FoldingSolution.cs — On the BEND step, when the next step is a teardrop close, we now calculate the open height using polyline MaxY + safetyFactor (same approach as inside hems — accounts for the flange being at an angle, not straight up). Removed the old calculation from the CLOSE step.

OperationManager.cs — Added a fallback on the bend operation using crushSegmentLength + hemClearance in case FoldingSolution hasn't populated the step value yet (timing issue). Only raises the value, never lowers it.

PolylineGenerationExtensions.cs — Restored the teardrop polyline graphic (was commented out), using ClampClosedPosition as a proxy for thickness since IProfile doesn't have a Thickness property.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.44.3689 3/17/2026
Release 5.0.29.5
Eclipse
  • Pro now requires Classic to be at minimum version of 4.1.230.

New Features

  • AMS.Eclipse (Supervisor) can now fully manage an Eclipse Classic and Pro installation.

Improvements

  • License page now groups by machine.
  • The system health page now shows RavenDB status, including alerts for index errors.
  • When saving a pattern, the save button indicates there is an action in progress.

Bug Fixes

  • Removed Lateness alerts that were not being calculated correctly.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.29.5 3/11/2026
Release 4.1.230
Eclipse
  • Added support for installation and updates from AMS.Eclipse (Supervisor).
  • Eclipse-COMM will delete a file named "watchdog.run". This can be used for an external system to verify Eclipse-COMM is active.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.230 3/11/2026
Pathfinder; Exclude Program Files From Backup Zips and Add System Info Report
Pathfinder

Backup zip files no longer include program files (.exe, .dll, .pdb, .manifest), significantly reducing backup size. A backupInfo.txt file is now included in each backup containing system information (computer name, serial number, selected configuration, application version, hardware revision) and a detailed manifest of all excluded files with their date, size, and version. Empty folders are also excluded from backups.

5226; Radius Adjust Postion Was Not Updating in UI for RAS Machine
Pathfinder

Changes made for the Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

  1. Missing fpPosition update (With_Output only) — Both the no-overshoot and overshoot branches were copying the old feedback value back to itself (gRadius.RAS_Radius_Position = Axis_RadiusADJ.Feedback.fpPosition) instead of setting it to the target RadiusPosition. Fixed to match what the clamp-lock variant already did.

  2. Missing RawPosition update (both RAS functions) — This was the main issue. The input task converts RawPosition ? fpPosition through the interpolation table every 1ms. Setting fpPosition alone got immediately overwritten on the next cycle. Added Axis_RadiusADJ.Feedback.RawPosition = Interpolated_To_RawCounts(...) after each position update so the feedback loop computes the correct value going forward. This is the same pattern used at startup in BlackBox.c.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.25
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.24 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Fix All Warnings in Visual Studio
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

  1. JSON hex values (config files) — Fixed HexStringJsonConverter to write valid quoted JSON ("0x0064") and read all formats (bare hex, quoted hex, decimal); converted 7,910 bare hex values across 65 configuration files.

  2. NU1902 Newtonsoft.Json vulnerability — Updated Newtonsoft.Json from 9.0.1 to 13.0.3 across 18 SDK-style csproj files and from 6.0.3 to 13.0.3 in Eclipse's packages.config.

  3. NU1903 DotNetZip vulnerability — Updated from 1.10.1 to 1.16.0 (latest available); suppressed remaining NU1903 warning since no patched version exists and usage is limited to trusted backup/install archives.

  4. CS0108 member hiding (ParameterCollections) — Added new keyword to 24 properties across 12 ParameterCollection files that intentionally hide base class members.

  5. CS0618 obsolete members (SequenceStepDAC) — Suppressed warnings for 3 obsolete property accesses required for backward compatibility (StampingAdjustment, BendAllowance, BackgaugeAdjustment).

  6. CS0618/CS0612 obsolete members (DatabaseLoadManager) — Suppressed warnings for obsolete property accesses and GetProfilesByCriterion calls.

  7. CS0618 obsolete members (ConfigurationSettingsTests) — Suppressed file-level warning for RemoveConfigDirectory test calls.

  8. CS0618 IPAddress.Address deprecation (FoldbusEthernet_IO) — Replaced deprecated IPAddress.Address property with passing IPAddress directly to IPEndPoint constructor.

  9. CS0618 obsolete members (WireframeManager) — Suppressed StepType/BendType warnings; removed unused BackGaugeSurface variable.

  10. CS0612/CS0219 warnings (Business project) — Suppressed GetProfilesByCriterion warnings in CurrentProfileManager; removed unused variables (bendAllowance, temporaryCurrentOperationIndex).

  11. CS0067/CS0169/CS0414 unused members (MachineCommunicationManager) — Removed 4 unused events and isClampedThisStep field with its dead assignments.

  12. CS0618/CS0169/CS0659 warnings (Main project) — Suppressed CurrentBlackBoxType warning in ApplicationManager; removed unused field in ReferenceModeCommManager; added GetHashCode override to StatusCopyEventArgs.

  13. CS0067/CS0219/CS0169 warnings (Data project) — Suppressed unused events in MachineProfile/Sequence/IOperation; removed dead code in RunStatistics; added new to ProfileFeatureList.Remove(); initialized SequenceList._material; removed unused variable in DatabaseTransactionManager.

  14. CS0108 member hiding (Export project) — Added new keyword to 8 properties across 5 SimpleProfileFeature classes; suppressed CS0612 for GetProfilesByCriterion in Program.cs.

  15. CS0618 obsolete members (GaugingSolutions) — Suppressed file-level warning in PolylineGenerationExtensions.

  16. CS0114 member hiding (ViewPresenter) — Added new keyword to methods in NonGraphicalProfileView (4 methods), 4 NonGraphical operation classes (RegisterUIEvents), and SequenceView (4 methods).

  17. MSB3836 binding redirect warnings — Updated assembly binding redirects in 3 app.config files (Newtonsoft.Json 6.0?13.0, SqlServerCe 3.5.1?4.0.0.1).

  18. Large ViewPresenter batch (~40 warnings) — Added new to hiding fields/properties/methods; suppressed CS0067 on 11 interface-required events; removed unused fields (isRotateLocked, isDisposed, stepLabel, bendAngle); suppressed CS0414 on designer components; suppressed CS0618 on StampingAdjustment; removed unreachable code.

  19. Final batch (multiple projects) — Suppressed CS0414/CS0618/CS0169/CS0612 across AMSKeyboard, FingerGaugingOption2, FoldingSolution, GaugingOptions2, MachineSequencer, CompareOldAndNewProfilesTest, UnitTestingExtensions, and WriteFilterUtility.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
Release 5.0.28.192
Eclipse

New Features

  • Preview: Dashboard and Andon Grid Wallboards.
  • Show available software updates and release notes for Eclipse Pro and XL200 and Pathfinder controller.
  • Add timed unlock and auto-lock enforcement for machine lockout.

Improvements

  • Explorer "Other" groups can be expanded/collapsed by eight at a time.
  • Patterns that don't contain Shape punches will no longer get processed by the shape solution service.

Bug Fixes

  • The new Shape Solution cleanup service was not properly removing unneeded solutions when the pattern was still in use in other orders. This has been resolved.
  • Fix error when running Shape Solutions on non-English Windows PCs.
  • Better handling of waiting spinners in reports.
  • Performance and memory improvements.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.28.192 3/3/2026
Pathfinder; Detect New or Missing Configurations at Startup
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Pathfinder now automatically detects new or removed machine configurations at startup. If a new configuration is added to the machine (through an update or manually), it will appear in the "Change Machine Configuration" list the next time Pathfinder starts. If a configuration file is removed, it will be cleaned up from the list automatically. No need to delete ConfigurationSettings.json to pick up changes anymore.

ConfigurationSettings.cs — Added SyncAvailableConfigurations() method that compares configs on disk against ConfigurationSettings.json at startup, adds new ones, removes stale ones, sorts the list alphabetically, and clears SelectedConfig if its files were removed.

ApplicationManager.cs — Added call to SyncAvailableConfigurations() in Start() after corruption check, before any configuration selection logic.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Set Simulation Input to True In RAS Configurations.
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The following configuartions needed input Simulation Mode Active set to true:

RASTurboBendLight4000DR.ConfigurationStore.json RASTurboBendLight5000.ConfigurationStore.json RASTurboBendLight6000.ConfigurationStore.json

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Language Change Doesn't Require Pathfinder Restart
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

When you change the language in Operator Preferences, Pathfinder now updates immediately — no restart required. All screen text, error messages, status bar, and labels switch to the new language on the spot.

Core infrastructure (no restart needed anymore):

LanguageManager.cs — Added LanguageChanged event, IOResource.Culture update, and RefreshAllUI() which walks all open forms/controls via reflection to call TranslateUIText() ApplicationManager.cs — Subscribes to LanguageChanged to update Main's FormResource, MessageResource, ErrorResource, plus DataManager and Sequencer resource cultures ParameterDisplay.cs — Removed shutdown/restart logic, calls RefreshAllUI() after language change Cached string fixes (static strings that prevented runtime updates):

SequencePanel.cs — 5 static readonly strings ? expression-bodied properties StatusRequestCO.cs — 22 cached status strings ? expression-bodied properties ErrorMessageRequestCO.cs — ~150 entry Dictionary<int, string> ? Dictionary<int, Func> with lambda deferred lookups UI preservation fixes:

MainDialog.cs — Added loggedInUserName field so logout button keeps the username after translation; added SetProfileCountDownMode() call so "Profiles Completed" label translates 7 files total, and all 117+ controls with TranslateUIText() get refreshed automatically through the reflection-based tree walk — no individual control modifications needed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Translate As Much As Possible In Jog Screen
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The jog screen will translate axis names and initials if the translation exists.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Expand Out Axis Names in Jog Screen
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The axis names in the jog screen used to be just the initials of an axis. The full axis name is now shown next to the jog buttons.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
XL2; Hole Detection Edge feature
XL200

We have typically steered away from detecting the traing edge of a hole when hole detecting. Due to possible material burs, oil and other things causing the hole detect input to bounce on the leading edge, we would detect the leading eadge instead.

We have added some additional validation to prevent that from happening. A new setting called Minimum Hole Size has been added. We have also added a setup to select which edge of the hole we are detecting. It has two settings, Leading Edge and Trailing Edge.

Whe we are trying to detect the Trailing Edge of the Hole, the Sensor input must be ON for at least the Minimum Hole Size before we will count a hole on the ON to Off transtion of the sensor. This prevents a minor blip in the sensor state from triggering a hole on the leading edge transiton of a hole.

It is assumed that the Minimum Hole Spacing setup will be larger than the Minimum Hole Size setup.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2OL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Put % Next to System Pressure Value in Jog Screen
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

In the jog screen the system pressure is shown. The value though doesn't show what the unit is which is a percentage. The change was to make sure the % is placed next to the value of the system pressure just like the oil level.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Make Sure Open Hem Closed Positions Are Editable
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Updates to Clamp Closed Position in Step Changes
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Two things changed:

The Clamp Closed Position field in the step list is now read-only. Previously you could manually type a value into that field for Normal Bend, Radius Bend, Shear, and Close Hem steps. Now it's calculated automatically based on the clamp pressure and material thickness — you can't edit it directly anymore.

Changing Parameter 314 (Clamp Minimum Height) now automatically recalculates the Clamp Closed Position across all steps. Before this change, if you adjusted Parameter 314 on the machine, the clamp closed positions in existing steps wouldn't update — you'd have to reload the profile or manually fix them. Now Pathfinder recalculates every step's clamp closed position immediately when Parameter 314 changes.

Bottom line: You control clamp closing through the Clamp Pressure setting in each step. Pathfinder figures out the actual closed position for you. If you recalibrate the clamp minimum height (Param 314), all steps update automatically.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.43.3684 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Add Axis Labels to Jog and Reference Buttons
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The jog buttons have a picture of the axis to move and how the motion is supposed to go. The axis is labeled to the right of these buttons, but sometimes the buttons will be pressed thinking they are a different axis which can cause damage. The fix was to label all jog buttons in the jog screens with the axis they are (e.g CB, BG, LB,...).

In the reference screen the buttons for referencing an axis have also been labeled which is really helpful since there is no indication which axis the button is for without studying the picture on the button.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.42.3681 2/27/2026
Pathfinder; Show Labels in I/O Screen if Not Connected to Controller
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

In Pathfinder there is a section under Diagnostics/Input and Output Status that shows the labels for what and where the I/O is on the selected machine. This information does not show up unless a blackbox controller is communicating with Pathfinder. This is unnecessary since Pathfinder is the one with the I/O information. The fix was to make sure the labels are shown regardless if a controller is connected or not. Also, a change was made to not show I/O past 24 if they don't exist on that machine.

Root Cause: MachineCommunicationManager.cs:1809 — GetInputFunctions() and GetOutputFunctions() use .Take(BlackBoxCount * 24) to limit results. BlackBoxCount is only set when the controller responds to a UART version request. When offline, it stays at 0, so .Take(0) returns empty dictionaries and no labels are displayed.

Fix: When BlackBoxCount is 0 (no controller connected yet), skip the .Take() limit entirely and show all enabled I/O labels from the machine configuration. When connected, the limit is still applied as before to match the actual number of physical I/O pins on the controller(s).

IOStatus.cs — In UpdateFunctionAssignments(), after receiving the input/output dictionaries from the configuration, it now checks the max pin ID. If no I/O goes beyond pin 24, it removes rows 25–48 from the DataTable and updates numberOfPorts to 24. This means UpdateActiveInputs/UpdateActiveOutputs will also only iterate over 24 rows. Machines with 2 controllers (pins > 24) still get the full 48 rows.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.42.3681 2/27/2026
Pathfinder; Added ThalmannPICOV2CLBG Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Added the ThalmannPICOV2CLBG configuration with default parameters and backgauge calibration set to what was in a backup in the overrides.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.42.3681 2/27/2026
Pathfinder; Add WeckenmannKS Configurations to Build
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Configurations for WeckenmannKS-HydraulicVFD-V2 and WeckenmannKSV2 have been added to Pathfinder. These base files were filled in with parameter and calibration values from user override files from backups.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.42.3681 2/27/2026
Pathfinder; System Pressure in Jog UI Had Dots Below the Reading
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

  1. JogPanel.Designer.cs:394 — Fixed tableLayoutPanel15 column from 5 to 4 (matching all other info panels)
  2. JogPanel.cs:1581-1583 — Added tableLayoutPanel15.Visible = false when loading table is disabled (and true when enabled)
  3. Reverted — tableLayoutPanel14 row styles back to original 70%/30%, and lblSystemPressure.TextAlign back to original MiddleCenter
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.42.3681 2/27/2026
Pathfinder; After Machine Configuration or Option Changed Pathfinder Freezes
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Problem Pathfinder froze when changing machine configuration or machine options. The app would show the "Pathfinder will now restart" dialog, but after dismissing it, the window would hang and never restart.

Root Cause The freeze was caused by CloseCommDevice() deadlocking on _lock in FoldbusEthernet_IO — the queue thread was stuck inside SendCommand() holding that same lock, and no amount of signaling could make it release the lock fast enough because StopMessagePump() Join timeouts would expire first. Additionally, Application.Restart() triggered a re-entrant shutdown cascade through form closing events.

Files Changed

  1. QueueManager.cs — Check _stopCommRequested at the top of every loop iteration and after acquiring the mutex / completing ProcessCommand(), so the queue thread exits promptly during shutdown instead of only checking when the queue is empty. Made _stopCommRequested volatile.

  2. StatusRequestCO.cs — Changed context.Send() to context.Post() in EventProcessingLoop and added a _eventThreadShouldStop guard. Prevents deadlock between the event processing thread (waiting for UI thread) and the UI thread (waiting for event thread to stop).

  3. FoldbusEthernet_IO.cs — Set ReceiveTimeout = 1000 on the UDP client so Receive() throws after 1 second instead of blocking forever. Wired up the previously empty SetResponseTimeout() method.

  4. ControllerRunStateCommManager.cs — Added overload SetControllerToPowerDown(out ManualResetEvent) that returns the command's Processed handle so callers can wait for completion.

  5. MachineCommunicationManager.cs — Added PowerDown(out ManualResetEvent) overload. Added StopCommunication(bool closeCommDevice) overload that skips CloseCommDevice during restart (avoiding the deadlock). Set StopCommunicating = true as the first action in StopCommunication so UDP send/receive loops bail out immediately.

  6. FoldingMachinePhysicalDevice.cs — Made stopCommunicating field volatile for cross-thread visibility.

  7. ApplicationManager.cs — RestartPathfinder() now waits up to 3s for the PowerDown command to complete, uses StopCommunication(closeCommDevice: false) to avoid the lock deadlock, and uses Process.Start() + Environment.Exit(0) instead of Application.Restart() to avoid the re-entrant form-closing shutdown cascade. Same PowerDown wait added to ExitPathfinder(). Added using System.Diagnostics.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.42.3681 2/27/2026
Pathfinder; 4Frame Override Wasn't Overriding Base
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The fix removes the else if block (lines 607-614) that was unconditionally overwriting result.ParameterStoreList with the parent's list when there were no individual ParameterStoreOverrides.

The logic now correctly:

Lines 563-578: If there's a full list override, use it. Otherwise, use the parent's list. Lines 581-606: If there are individual overrides, merge them into whichever list was set above. The removed else if was the problem — it was a third path that fired when there were no individual overrides, and it blindly replaced the result with the parent's list, undoing the full list override from step 1.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.41.3679 2/25/2026
Pathfinder; Add Actual 4 Frame Closed Loop Tuning To Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The created JornsHyperDriveFlex4Frame override was supposed to have the closed loop tuning for a 4 frame machine. It did not. Actually tuning parameters were changed to what they were supposed to be.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.41.3679 2/25/2026
Pathfinder; Edits to JornsHyperDriveFlex Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Took the shapes for a TwinPro instead of a Twinmatic and I/O changes.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.41.3679 2/25/2026
Pathfinder; Add JornsHyperDriveFlex4Frame Override To Build
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The csproj now references JornsHyperDriveFlex4Frame.ConfigurationOverrides.json instead of the deleted .ConfigurationStore.json. This means the override file will be copied to the output directory during build, and the CreateDefaultSettingsFile() discovery logic (which scans for both .ConfigurationStore.json and .ConfigurationOverrides.json files) will pick it up as an available machine configuration.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.40.3676 2/25/2026
Pathfinder; Need 24mm Geometry
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The PTS31 material had 6mm, 10mm, 12mm, 15mm, 19mm, 25mm geometries but PTU31's config defines a 24mm geometry in its Shapes section. Replaced the material file with one containing just 24mm with both Upper and Lower bending tools. Rebuild and the test should pass now.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.40.3676 2/25/2026
Pathfinder; Changes for JornsHyperDriveFlex Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Changes to the I/O to align more with machine options.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.40.3676 2/25/2026
Pathfinder; Added JornsHyperDriveFlex4Frame Override
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Added JornsHyperDriveFlex4Frame override which is supposed to have the closed loop parameter tuning for a 4 frame Jorns Twin.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.40.3676 2/25/2026
Pathfinder; Make Sure Configurations Get Built In
Pathfinder

Change made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

6 configuration files existed on disk in AllConfigurations/ but were missing from the .csproj, so they weren't being copied to the build output:

JornsFlexEncoderUpgrade JornsHyperDriveFlex8Frame JornsHyperDriveFullSystem JouanelPTU31 RoperWhitneyElectricPartial ThalmannZRUpgrade All 6 have been added with CopyToOutputDirectory: PreserveNewest so they'll now ship with the build.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.40.3676 2/25/2026
5226; Simulation Starting Positions Were Being Overwritten by Stale MRAM Data
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Simulation starting positions were being overwritten by stale MRAM data.

Test_For_Simulation_Mode() (line 331) set correct RawPosition values for all simulation axes, but NonVolatile_Encoder_Initialize() (line 424) ran afterward and restored old encoder values from battery-backed MRAM — replacing the simulation starting positions with stale data (0xFFFFF).

Fix: Moved the 5 RawPosition initializations into a new Simulation_Set_Starting_Positions() function called immediately after NonVolatile_Encoder_Initialize() in BlackBox.c, so simulation starting positions always win.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.25
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.24 3/17/2026
Pathfinder; Flash Programming Fixes
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Flash Programming Reliability FoldbusEthernet_IO.cs (SendFlashCommand) - Added 3-retry logic for flash packet transmission. After sending a flash packet, if no response is received, it retries up to 3 times before failing. Also fixed reboot detection order so that a controller reboot during flash is detected before treating the timeout as a failure.

FoldbusEthernet_IO.cs (SendCommand) - Added ForceTemporaryStatusChange(true) after 10 consecutive failed retries so the UI reflects the offline state during communication loss.

FoldbusEthernet_IO.cs (ResetCommDevice) - Added UDP receive buffer flush to clear stale packets after a controller reboot.

FlashBlackBoxManager.cs (TryFlashBlackBox) - Restructured so the queue stays running during RetrieveBoardData (which needs communication). Flash programming pauses the queue, programs, then the finally block handles recovery.

FlashBlackBoxManager.cs (finally block) - Calls PrepareForBlackBoxReboot (resets comm device, flushes UDP buffer, sets isBlackBoxReset flag) and ResetEventProcessingForReboot (clears event queue, switches back to direct event delivery) before resuming the queue and restarting status polling.

FlashTool.cs - Fixed CS0103 build errors (slave lock packet ID mismatch).

Post-Flash / Post-Reboot Recovery MachineCommunicationManager.cs (PrepareForBlackBoxReboot) - New method that resets the comm device and sets isBlackBoxReset = true so the next status response triggers the power-up sequence.

ApplicationManager.cs (OnLoginSuccess) - Root cause fix. Event handler subscriptions (StatusChanged, Transition_OfflineEvent, etc.) were guarded by !StatusPollingActive. After flash recovery started polling in the finally block, this condition was false, so handlers were never subscribed and the UI never received status updates. Fix: always subscribe handlers; only conditionally start polling.

BaseCO.cs (ProcessResponseAndDateTime) - Reset _exceptionResponse = ExceptionResponse.NoError at the start of each response processing. Without this, a single LowLayerCommException permanently poisoned the singleton StatusRequestCO error state.

StatusRequestCO.cs (EventProcessingLoop) - Added try-catch around the loop body. Previously any unhandled exception killed the thread permanently, causing all subsequent status events to queue up and never be delivered.

StatusRequestCO.cs (ProcessEvent) - Changed from re-throwing exceptions to logging only (NLog + Raygun). This prevents a single bad event from killing the EventProcessingLoop thread.

StatusRequestCO.cs (StartEventProcessingThread) - Now checks IsAlive (not just null) and resets _eventThreadShouldStop = false before starting, so a dead thread can be properly restarted.

StatusRequestCO.cs (PublishEvents) - When switching from direct to threaded event delivery (on reaching Idle), now also calls StartEventProcessingThread() to ensure the thread is actually running.

StatusRequestCO.cs (ResetEventProcessingForReboot) - New method that clears the event queue and resets _processEventsInSeparateThread = false, matching fresh startup behavior for post-flash recovery.

PowerUpCommManager.cs (ResetCompletionStatus) - Added isUARTMismatched = false reset so a stale mismatch flag doesn't block reconfiguration after reboot.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.39.3672 2/23/2026
Release5.0.28.122
Eclipse

New Features

  • New Explorer: Speed Explorer (experimental)
  • New Report: Material Deviations

Improvements

  • Add Halt Delay Minimum parameter for Pathfinder.
  • CMMS export now allows one machine to populate multiple target assets.
  • Explorer improvements:
    • "Others" group can be expanded.
    • Pareto charts resort based on filters.
    • Tooltips include count of records.
    • Downtime Explorer adds Exempt and Duration charts.
    • Pathfinder Explorers adds Pieces at a time (and others).
  • Hourly chart Andon panel now has value labels for the most significant block element.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed a few errors that happen around startup.
  • Delete orders and punch patterns that were deleted from Classic but still in Pro.
  • The Punch Pattern field on Order Details was difficult to edit because of the preview pop-up. The preview is now on the "launch" icon.
  • The Explorers were not labeling metric values correctly.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.28.122 2/22/2026
Pathfinder; Make Transient Error a Warning Instead of Shut Down Error
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's

There is a transient socket error catch on one machine that can't be explained. Turned it into a warning since it looks like it actually continues communication, but as an error it restarted Pathfinder.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.39.3672 2/23/2026
Pathfinder; New Rev F and G 5226 Releases
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5's PC's.

Rev F: V4.04.24 Rev G: V5.00.23

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.40.3676 2/25/2026
5226; Accidentally Kept In Change to Disable Ethernet/IP Task
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Was trying to diagnose a task error that looked like it was failing in the ethernet/IP task. Disabled to see if truly the problem and checked in on accident with it still disabled even though it was not the culprit.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.24 2/19/2026
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.23 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; New Rev F and G 5226 Releases
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Rev F: V4.04.23 Rev G: V5.00.21

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
5226; If Hemmer Active Don't Care About Shear Home Limit
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some folding machines have the option of taking off the shear and putting on a hemmer instead(ASC). To quickly get the functionality for the hemmer a lot of the shear feature was reused. Since you need the shear to be active to get the shear machine step to use for the hemmer. That means shear I/O becomes active. The problem was there was an axis conflict where the clamp could not move up if shear was not on home limit. The fix was to make sure this check doesn't happen if the hemmer is active.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.23 2/19/2026
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.22 2/19/2026
5226BB; Updated the DSPI code for generic Memory Operations, and the S25FL128 part.
XL200

The DSPI code had support for a FM25L16 part. There is no code that actually used the functions, so it was unclear if it worked or was ever tested.

The new Rev H board uses an S25FL128 flash memory part that we had no code written for.

Both of these parts have a SPI interface.

There is code in the common library that should support SPI memory devices of any type. I used Claude to write read/write and erase functions for the new part. The common code had some assumptions that were specific to the FM25L16, or some earlier, part that had to be removed and configured in a more generic fashion. Together we fixed some bugs in the existing code. A test to sense the presence by reading the Device, Manufacturer and Type out of the chip was written. This test proves that the chip harware design is OK because it requires a write and a read to both be succesful in order to read the proper, expected, information out of the part.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.25
Pathfinder; ClampingBeamConfirmation in Hyper Drive Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made to Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The ClampingBeamConfirmation needed to be add or set to true in some of the Hyper Drive configurations so it can be used.

JornsHyperDriveFlex5Frame IsEnabled changed from false to true JornsHyperDriveFlex4Frame IsEnabled changed from false to true JornsHyperDriveFlexTwinmatic IsEnabled changed from false to true JornsHyperDriveFullSystem New ClampingBeamConfirmation input added on pin 24, IsInverted: true, IsEnabled: true JornsHyperDriveTwinPro New ClampingBeamConfirmation input added on pin 24, IsInverted: true, IsEnabled: true

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; Set Simulation Mode Active Input to Not Enabled for Some Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The double folding machines have a lot of inputs so simulation mode active needed to be removed to put in clamping beam confirmation. If set to true the the signal from the new input will create a simulation task error. These machines needed it set to false:

JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV3 JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV2 JornsTwinmaticClosedLoop JornsHyperDriveFullSystem JornsHyperDriveFlexTwinmatic JornsHyperDriveFlex5Frame JornsHyperDriveFlex4Frame

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; Added RoperElectricPartial Machine Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Added the RoperElectricPartial machine configuration for installs that use most of the existing cabinet already on the Roper machine.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
5226; Fix the Build Date of the Slave That Gets Sent to Pathfinder
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

BlackBox.c (root cause) - The CanBus_Slave_Task startup struct was missing initialization of gCompileDate and gCompileTime. The CAN slave task had no way to know where the compile date/time strings were in memory, so it was reading from uninitialized pointer values on the stack.

CAN_Slave.c (secondary bug) - The & before Can_Slave_Task_data->gCompileDate and Can_Slave_Task_data->gCompileTime was passing the address of the pointer fields themselves rather than the strings they point to. This was masked by the first bug since the pointers were garbage either way, but would have remained broken even after fixing BlackBox.c.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.23 2/19/2026
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.22 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; Pieces per Cycle
Pathfinder

Pathfinder can now set the number of pieces produced at once. When the last step of a sequence is completed, the quantity complete will increment by that value. A new parameter, Operator Preferences > Max Pieces per Cycle, will enable the new button if that value is greater than 1.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; Delay Reporting to Eclipse Pro
Pathfinder

When Pathfinder connects to Eclipse Pro, it requests the list of Delay Codes and the Halt Delay Minimum value. If the list of codes is not empty, a new button will appear in the main toolbar that launches the Record Delay dialog. If the Halt Delay Minimum parameter is greater than 0, the button will be displayed with a warning color. The run button will also launch the Record Delay dialog before allowing the machine to enter Run mode. Pathfinder will check for updated Delay Codes every five minutes.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; Added 5226 Rev E to Configurations That Did Not Have It
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

A lot of the machine configurations that have a 5226 as the controller to use did not have rev E as one of the options as the board to use. This isn't truly a problem with so little of E's in existense, but just in case they have been added to all machine configurations that use a 5226 board. Except for ThalmannTDv1 which uses B boards.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; Allow and Program Mismatch 5226 Board Rev's and Versions
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

The core problem was that the code assumed master and slave would always be the same board revision (e.g., both Rev G), but in practice they can differ — like a Rev E/F master with a Rev G slave, or vice versa.

Firmware file selection: The slave programming was using Board1Type (master's board type) to select the firmware file instead of Board2Type. So if the master was Rev F and the slave was Rev G, the slave would get flashed with the Rev F firmware. Fixed by using Board2Type for the slave's firmware stream lookup.

Post-flash version check: After programming, the code compared the master's version against the slave's version and errored if they didn't match. But they're supposed to be different — Rev E/F and Rev G use different firmware files with different version numbers. Fixed by checking each controller individually against its own required firmware version (looked up from its own board type's firmware file).

Revision display: The dialogs only showed the master's revision info. Updated AvailableFlashDialog to show labeled master and slave sections (revision, current version, required version), and updated IsValidToFlash to display both "Master is Rev X" and "Slave is Rev Y" in the programming status dialog. Also added a slave validation check after RetrieveBoardData to catch board data mismatches before flashing the slave.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; Speed Up Flash Programming of Controllers
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

All flash operations (Erase, RetrieveBoardData, SendProgram, SendLockCommand) in FlashTool.cs were being routed through the application's shared communication queue. That queue serializes all communication with the controller — regular status polling, parameter reads, etc. — so flash commands had to wait their turn behind unrelated traffic, and each flash packet would compete with other queued commands for a time slot.

The fix was to bypass the QueueManager entirely for flash operations, having FlashTool send commands directly via SendFlashCommand instead. Since firmware programming is a dedicated, exclusive operation (the controller is already in flash mode and not responding to normal commands), there's no need to share the queue. This eliminates the queuing overhead and wait times between each of the thousands of S-Record packets, dramatically speeding up the transfer.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
Pathfinder; Added New Error Messages
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Added error messages 472 Clamping Beam Confirmation Failure, 473 Grippers Are Not OK, and 474 Bypass Throttle Valve Failure.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.36.3666 2/19/2026
5226; Added New Error Messages For Existing Inputs
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Added the following error messages:

Error 472 Clamping Beam Confirmation Failure - Will occur if the Clamping Beam Confirmation input goes low.

Error 473 Grippers Are Not OK - Will occur if the Grippers OK input goes low.

Error 474 Bypass Throttle Valve Failure - Will occur if the Bypass Throttle Confirmation goes low.

Release 5.0.28.114
Eclipse

New Features

  • Pathfinder can now report delay reasons.
  • Pathfinder can provide the number of pieces being completed at a time.
  • Administrators can now create a user registration and assign roles. An email is not required for Operator registrations.
  • Pathfinder dashboard includes a process variables chart.
  • Export completed bundles to webhook api (https://docs.amscontrols.com/eclipse/integration/api-webhooks)

Improvements

  • Dashboard:
    • More information in snapshot bar and pareto chart tooltips.
    • Run Blocks chart only zooms in the plot area.
  • Scrap & Delay Summary Reports:
    • Added Average Min/Max columns.
    • Show machine name (was just machine number)
  • Shape Solutions get cleaned up when no longer needed.
  • Changeover Config for attribute based changeover times now has more reasonable defaults.
  • Added Schedule Slip Alert that triggers after a machine is halted when it the schedule estimates it should be running.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed headers on Tooling Code Usage Report.
  • Pathfinder Produced Goods report was not calculating Operations/Hour.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.28.114 2/17/2026
5226BB; Hardware Test MRam and SRam Tests
XL200

Hardware test has two ram tests now. The existing Ram Test has changed to MRam Test.

It has always been testing a Magnetic Ram Part. MRam makes it more clear what is being tested by the test.

The new test is for the SRAM part that has been added to the Rev H hardware. If the board is not a Rev H (no SRAM Part), the test status will report "Disable" to indicate the test is not running.

XL2; Minimum Hole Space Improvement
XL200

There was a potential flaw in the Minimum Hole Space test. There is one flag that indicates that a hole has been detected since the Hole Queue has last been cleared. This single flag was adequate, until we added multiple hole detect queues, required for the KMF machine.

On the KMF machine It is possible that a hole detected on one Queue would cause an erroneous Min-Hole Space test on the other queue, preventing it from detecting a valid hole on the second queue.

Each hole queue now has its own flag so that the first hole on an empty queue will always be valid.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2OL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2; Dump Hole Queue diagnostic feature improvment.
XL200

The Following improvments have been made to the Dump Hole feauture provided through Flashwizard.

  1. The Hole Queue Detector number and its Postion with respect to the shear location is displayed.
  2. There is a master Hole Detect Enabled status and an individual Detector Enabled status. The master disables all hole detects.
  3. The Current Line Position is displayed.
  4. The Last Detected Hole is displayed.
  5. All positions are displayed with respect to the Shear Reference Point. Positive values have exited the Reference Point. Negative values are values that have not reached the Reference point.
Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220OL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2OL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220CL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220OL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2OL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
Pathfinder; Make JornsEcoTwin Machine Options More Efficient
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Made the JornsEcoTwin configuration machine options be able to pick and choose the inputs and outpus better based on option chosen.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.34.3648 2/13/2026
5226; Simulate Clamp Movement During Sync Process
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The clamp sync feature when used will make the clamp move from an external control. We check for that movement so to be able to test in simulation clamp movement will occur if the clamping beam sync output is on.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.21 2/13/2026
5226; Change Backdoor Key On Release Build to Be Unprotected
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The location in memory at 0x400 is used to check for certain protections. One byte is reserved for in this case using a debugger. How this memory got changed to how it was supposed to be stored which made the release build actually use the protection. The previous way it was stored made it get the none protect 0xFE randomly so we could debug. The change was to just make it unprotected so we can debug the release code.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.21 2/13/2026
Release 5.0.28.94
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Promoted hourly chart on the XL dashboard out of experimental.
  • Shape Pattern processing improvements. Also, the solution list is updated automatically.
  • Upcoming Bundles Andon now supports showing additional custom fields.
  • Coil Sync improvements:
    • Better handling of coils that were incorrectly marked as completed.
    • The Integration screen allows running either the full or incremental sync on-demand.
  • Add new barcode format function that ends with a carriage return after the data: "bc_c128_cr_png"

Bug Fixes

  • The Production Events Report was not filtering out records when the date range changed.
  • Possible fix for a memory leak.
  • The CMMS integration was not properly publishing TotalCutCount.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.28.94 2/12/2026
5226; Clamping Beam Sync Feature
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Purpose: Jouanel press brakes with dual-drive clamping beams (separate left and right motors) can drift out of alignment over many bend cycles. This feature periodically triggers the external drive hardware to resynchronize both sides using its own reference sensors. The BlackBox controller does not control the sync motion itself - it signals the external hardware to perform the operation and monitors for completion.

Parameters Setup Parameters (via Foldbus 0x0001/0x0002 - PID system):

PID Name Type Default Description 353 Bends Before Clamping Beam Sync uint16 0 (disabled) Number of clamp operations between syncs. 0 = feature disabled. 354 Maximum Clamping Beam Sync Start Position float 50.0 mm Max clamp height to allow sync. If clamp is above this, sync is skipped silently.

Generic Parameters (via Foldbus 0x0003 - Attribute ID system):

Attribute ID Name Type Default Description 0x205D Sync Clear Timeout uint16 (ms) 5000 Time allowed for I_122 to turn OFF after O_125 is turned ON (handshake clear phase). 0x205E Sync Complete Timeout uint16 (ms) 10000 Time allowed for I_122 to turn ON after it has cleared (actual sync operation). 0x205F Sync Motion Timeout uint16 (ms) 2000 Time allowed for initial upward beam movement to be detected after sync starts.

I/O: Function Type Description O_125_CLAMPING_BEAM_SYNC Output Turned ON to signal external hardware to begin sync operation. Turned OFF when sync completes or on error. I_122_CLAMPING_BEAM_SYNC_COMPLETE Input External hardware signals sync completion by turning this ON. Polled in the sync function (no interrupt processing needed).

Status Reporting: Flag Location Bit Description Clamping_Beam_Sync_Active Status dFlag (0x00000080) Bit 7 Reported to Pathfinder every status poll. TRUE while sync operation is in progress.

Logic Flow

  1. Counter Management (in LoadSheetWithClamp) Two file-level static variables track sync state across function calls:

sClampCountdown (uint16) - starts at 0 on power-up sbSyncNeeded (bool) - starts false After every clamp operation completes (end of LoadSheetWithClamp), if PID 353 > 0 and mode is AUTOMATIC or higher:

If sClampCountdown == 0: sets sbSyncNeeded = true and resets counter to PID 353 value Otherwise: decrements sClampCountdown Since the counter initializes to 0 at power-up, the very first clamp operation will flag a sync.

  1. Sync Execution (in Release_Part_To_Operator) After the part is released and bending beams have moved, the code checks sbSyncNeeded. If true and mode is AUTOMATIC:

Waits for bending beam motion to complete Clears the flag Calls SB_Perform_Clamping_Beam_Sync() with the current operation's clamp open height If sync fails, returns FALSE to abort the cycle 3. The Sync Function (SB_Perform_Clamping_Beam_Sync) Pre-sync validation:

Sets gRun.ClampingBeamSyncActive = TRUE I/O config check - O_125 and I_122 must both be defined (or both undefined). Mismatch triggers E471. Position check - If clamp is above PID 354 (max start position), skips silently and returns TRUE.

Handshake sequence:

STEP 1 - Turn ON output O_125 (tells external hardware to start sync).

STEP 2 - Wait for I_122 to turn OFF (clear previous state). Timeout = Attribute 0x205D (default 5s). If I_122 doesn't clear, turns off O_125 and triggers E470 (input stuck on).

STEP 3 - Wait for I_122 to turn ON (actual sync completion). Timeout = Attribute 0x205E (default 10s). During this wait, a nested motion detection check runs: if no upward beam movement is detected within Attribute 0x205F (default 2s), turns off O_125 and triggers E469 (motion timeout). This catches wiring issues, drive faults, or controller output failures early rather than waiting the full completion timeout.

STEP 4 - Turn OFF output O_125.

STEP 5 - If beam is below the target clamp open height, raise it using SB_Jog_Clamp_Up(). If already at or above target, do nothing (never lowers).

Cleanup - Sets gRun.ClampingBeamSyncActive = FALSE at every exit point (success and all error paths).

Abort conditions - All wait loops also check gRun.eMode >= RMT_AUTOMATIC, so switching out of automatic mode during sync will exit the loops cleanly.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.21 2/13/2026
Pathfinder; Clamping Beam Sync Feature and Status Flag
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

  • StatusResponseHelperTypes.cs - Added ClampingBeamSyncing = 0x00000080 to - StatusConditionFlags enum (replaced commented-out Unused flag)
  • StatusMessageType.cs - Added SyncingClampingBeam enum value
  • MachineCommunicationManager.cs - Added ClampingBeamSyncing flag check to set StatusMessageType.SyncingClampingBeam with status text; added SyncingClampingBeam case to Fire_StatusChanged switch
  • FormResource.resx (Main) - Added StatusSyncingClampingBeam = "Syncing Clamping Beam"

Error Messages

ErrorResource.resx - Added 4 error messages: E467_ClampingBeamSyncTimeout - "Clamping Beam Sync Timeout" E468_ClampingBeamSyncHeightExceeded - "Clamping Beam Sync Height Exceeded" E469_ClampingBeamSyncCompleteInputStuckOn - "Clamping Beam Sync Complete Input Stuck On" E470_ClampingBeamSyncIODefinitionError - "Clamping Beam Sync I/O Definition Error"

Generic Parameters (ParameterStoreList)

Added 3 parameters to all 8 Jouanel 5226 configurations, under ObjectName "Clamping Beam" (ObjectId 0x0066):

0x205D - Clamping Beam Sync Clear Timeout = 5000 0x205E - Clamping Beam Sync Complete Timeout = 10000 0x205F - Clamping Beam Sync Motion Timeout = 2000

Configurations updated: JouanelPTS33, JouanelPGL, JouanelPTL31, JouanelPTS24, JouanelPTS31, JouanelPTU31, JouanelHydraulicV2, JouanelPTS

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.34.3648 2/13/2026
Release 5.0.28.73
Eclipse

New Features

  • Orders can now be duplicated from a menu under the details panel.

Improvements

  • Hourly chart Andon panel now has y-axis ticks and supports metric.
  • Run Blocks chart supports metric.
  • Don't allow creating a Macro Pattern that contains a Macro Punch.
  • Alerts now show Export attempts with issues.
  • Coil Sync improvements:
    • UI shows if the sync event is full or incremental.
    • More robust deletion detection.
  • System Health now shows connectivity status for external services.
  • Added Shape Solution Alert and simplified Shape Solution synchronization.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed categorization in Delay Summary Report.
  • Fixed issue in reports when unselecting the "All Machines" filter.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.28.73 2/4/2026
5226BB; Fix IO test to have a nown, fixed delay between outputs changing and inputs being tested.
XL200

The IO Test in the Hardware_Test application was restructured so that a known, repeatable, delay between outputs changing and Inputs being tested is now possible.

5226BB; The Rev H had an Analog SPI Bus bug
XL200

The Rev H board requires two TX_Buffers when sending analog values on the SPI bus. The code that was verifying the transmission was only checking one TX_Buffer, which allowed some untested code for a serial flash part to mistakenly execute and cause a processor fault. The Serial Flash code was commented out for now since we aren't using it and it needs to be fixed and tested.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.21 2/13/2026
5226BB; MQX Ethernet changes
Pathfinder

The Ethernet Phy driver was not written to support anything other than full Ethernet auto-negotiation. While troubleshooting the Ethernet issues on the Rev H hardware, we needed to be able to experiment with forcing different aspects of the ethernet Phy. This involved edits to the Phy KSZ8041 driver and we added some configuration bit options to the MQX enet configuration.

In addition, the Phy driver now configures the default register values rather than relying on boot strapping, good or bad, to do it.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.21 2/13/2026
5226BB; Hardware Test was modified to debug print the Ethernet Phy registers
XL200

Claude was used to generate code that parses Phy register contents and prints them to the debug output in human readable form. The full register contents are printed on reset. The registers are monitored in a new task and only changes are printed from there after.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.21 2/13/2026
5226; Disable the SERCOS Test(s) for the Rev H 5226 Hardware Test.
Pathfinder

The Rev H hardware has no SERCOS.

The SERCOS Task has been disabled. The SERCOS Ram Test and the SERCOS Test have both been set to "Disable" in the Web Page.

XL2; Added Setup "Item Complete on Halt"
XL200

Many times, the Item Complete output and its timer are used to run the last pieces of an item out through a roll former. One customer wants a feature that triggers every time the line halts to trigger any cut pieces to be run out through the roll former. One issue is there may be uncut material in the roll former that could strip material out through the shear and into the roll former.

In the past we have solved this sort of issue with the combination of the Uncut Length output and PLC logic. Not all controllers have the output available or access to a PLC.

To solve the customer’s request, we have added the "Item Complete on Halt" setting. It has five options, No, Always and Uncut Length, Halted Only and Uncut Length Only.

When set to No, the Item Complete output works as it always has. It is triggered on the last part of an item.

When set to Always, it will trigger on the standard Item Complete conditions after item completion, and it will be triggered every time the line is Halted from the run mode, provided a part has been produced while running.

When set to Uncut Length, it will trigger on the standard Item Complete conditions after item completion, and it will be triggered every time the line is halted, provided a part has been produced while running and the leading edge of the uncut material is less than the Uncut Length Threshold setting.

When set to Halted Only, it will only be triggered every time the line is Halted from the run mode, provided a part has been produced while running.

When set to Uncut Length Only, it will be only be triggered every time the line is halted, provided a part has been produced while running and the leading edge of the uncut material is less than the Uncut Length Threshold setting.

When Halting, if the Item Complete is active and the either of the Uncut Length options are active and in violation, the active Item Complete trigger will be terminated early to prevent uncut material from being stripped through the shear.

Some additional changes were made so that the Uncut Length Threshold setting is visible even when there is no Uncut Length output available.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220OL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220CL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2OL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220OL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220CL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
Release 5.0.28.60
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Dashboard improvements:
    • More space for text based metrics.
    • Hourly chart honors user locale and displays 24-hour labels where appropriate.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed dashboards not updating the metric values when navigating to different shifts.
  • Machine Performance Standards did not always convert to metric properly.
  • Fix hourly charts on Andon not loading quickly.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.28.60 1/26/2026
XL2; Enable setup, PCode Change Stops Queue, all the time.
XL200

The setup, PCode Change Stops Queue, was disabled for controllers that did not maintain the queue when halting. This setting has other side effects that make it useful to be enabled on these controllers. For example, this setting can also disable the PCode comparison for the Coil Endpoint feature.

It will now be enabled all the time. However, it will still not be visible if the MODBUS interface is controlling it.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2OL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220CL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220OL 5.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2CL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL2OL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220CL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
XL220OL 4.105.0 3/5/2026
Release 5.0.28.48
Eclipse

New Features

  • Pathfinder can now send profile details which are shown on the dashboard when available.
  • Initial CMMS integration with Eptura Asset (formerly Manager Plus). Currently supports updating logs from statistics (footage, runtime, total cuts) after each hour or shift.
  • Eclipse Pro configuration can now be downloaded as a single file and some configuration options can be restored from the file. For example, machines can have their Eclipse Setups, Controller restrictions, and Shape Tables restored. Machine Metric Configs can also be copied from another machine or restored from a backup file.
  • New Andon Panel: Hourly Charts

Improvements

  • Pathfinder can now be connected using a temporary registration key in Eclipse Pro, which simplifies the configuration.
  • Added a per-machine alert indicator to the dashboard.
  • The Coil Validation configuration now has a testing feature that queries the configured data source.
  • Scheduler improvements:
    • The "On Machine" box is more prominent.
    • Fixed drop target placement.
  • Alerts are visible on their related machine.
  • Machine Shape Table axis flipping option can now be filtered based on shape name pattern. Also, an additional X or Y Offset can be applied.
  • Wallboard Production Summary styling improvements.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed some incorrect tracking of Pathfinder run statistics.
  • Fix column sorting on the Scheduler.
  • Wallboard Production Summary cycle time issue fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.28.48 1/19/2026
5226; Fixed Linker to report error when things are defined twice
Pathfinder

The Linker was allowing variables to be defined more than once. I removed the flag that was allowing this. This resulted in numerous changes in existing code to prevent this.

Both the common code and the applications will need to be re-compiled.

XL2; Re-Map Heap Location
XL200

The Initialize data had encroached into the Heap memory start location so a remap was required.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CLF; Random Press Reaction setup enabled in XL2CLF controllers with P option,
XL200

The Specific example this was found for was an XL206CLFP with switch 80-0. Press five had a Press Reaction time and no other presses did. If the P option was not present, the parameter would not be present.

This was tracked down to some code that was trying to ensure the Printer Press would have a reaction time. However, it was implemented incorrectly.

The logic was corrected and simplified, which rectified the issue.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL; PLC Remote Jog Velocity Control
XL200

The PLC Remote Run Velocity Pot is now available for the Jog Velocoty as well. It is enabled seperately from the Remote Run but uses the same Pot value. The Pot value applies to the Jog Velocity rather than the Max velocity. See the PLC MODBUS Spec for more details.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
Release 5.0.28.2
Eclipse
  • Agent now requires Classic to be at minimum version of 4.1.228.

New Features

  • Send the XL Machine Configuration Report directly to AMS Support for analysis by our technicians.

Improvements

  • Added menu action from Order Detail to submit shape patterns for solution recalculation.
  • Machine Shape Table can now flip X or Y references based on Tooling Code (PCode).
  • The XL200 Default Punch Pattern is now a dropdown.
  • Added "Where Used" tab to Punch Pattern view.
  • Added dialog to move a coil to a new location from the coil list and detail.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.28.2 12/5/2025
Release 4.1.228
  • Eclipse-COMM X button is now disabled. This will help with unintended shut down.
  • Fixed Quality Audit disable run trigger.
  • Fixed backup of controller patterns with proportional spacing.
  • Fixed issue with backing up controller materials.
  • Fixed calendar control when setting a date in the next year.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.228 12/5/2025
5226; Test and Application Firmware Could Not Use the Same DSPI_CPLD File
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

5226; Fingers Won't Come Up If Still in Same Position
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Release 5.0.27.127
Eclipse

New Features

  • New hourly chart of metrics in the XL dashboard (preview).

Improvements

  • Kiosk App now detects and reconnects after a server outage (v1.0.5).
  • Better style on the Done/Current/Next order grid on the dashboard.
  • Include more Classic info in Diagnostic Package.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed issue with Andon data calculation for recent bundles.
  • Fixed startup issue when there are no production files.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.27.127 11/30/2025
XL2; Dump Hole Queue to Debugger (FlashWizard)
XL200

The Hole queue for Inputs 23 or 24 can now be dumped to the Dubug window in the PC simulation or to FlashWizard on the hardware.

The debug instructions are displayed as such: Dump <"Hole> <23 or 24> Dump Hole Queue for input 23 or 24

To dump the hole queue for input 24 the command is: Dump Hole 24

Make sure to press enter.

The asterisc show where the commands can be shortened. Whire space is ignored. The command can be shortened to: duh 24

The command will print the number of holes in the queue and, for each hole, the position from the leading edge of the material.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL200CL-KMF; Added KMF Diagnostic Screen
XL200

A KMF Diagnostic screen has been added that is visible only on a KMF model.

The screen shows Individual hole count status for the Shear and the Applicator Press. This provides additional detail above the combined Hole Count status displayed in the top three line area.

The screen also shows a Last Shear and a Last Press Offset field. These fields show the distance the last Shear or the last Press operation occured from the prior operation of which could be either type.

Normal operation is to alternate between Shear and Apply (Press). In this scenario, the Last Shear Offset will be measured from the prior operation which would be an Apply. The Last Press Offset will be measured from the prior operation which would be a Shear. Under these conditions, the Last Shear Offset will be equal to the last piece of felt that was cut. The Last Press Offset will be equal to the gap between the last two pieces of felt.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL200HCL-KMF; Last Programmed Length change
XL200

On the KMF controller the Last Programmed length in the Calibrate Trim Setup screen would alternate between the Cut Length and the Apply Offset Distance from the last cut. This was somewhat confusing. To make it more clear, it will now only be updated with the distance between cuts, which will correspond to the distance between two cut hole detect inputs.

Assuming the felt is not getting stretched as it it applied, the measured felt length on a part, combined with the detected distance using the cut holes (input 24), can be used to calibrate trim a part.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2; Add a new dynamic Custom List chain that allows Eclipse to dynamically trigger Quality Audits.
XL200

A new record chain of Custom List records has been created for Eclipse to use in a dynamic interactive way.

Expected operation is that Eclipse will delete the prior list, just in case a prior interaction never got triggered and fully completed. The controller will actually do this for Eclipse if there are no communication errors and the triggered list is fully completed by the operator before power is cycled.

Eclipse will create the list and create the trigger, type 13, that this new list requires. When the chain is unlocked, the new list will be triggered and displayed.

The new trigger has all of the same features for halting the line, allowing overrides etc as the existing Custom List Quality Audit triggers.

Trigger type 13 is not compatible with the Original Custom List chain and the existing trigger types are not compatible with the new Dynamic Custom List chain. Any attempt to use incompattible trigger types will result in a non-response from the XL.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2; Fix race condition with Custom List (Quality Audits) record deletion from Eclipse.
XL200

There was a race condition between deleteing records from Eclipse and Quality Audit trigger conditions.

When records were deleted from Eclipse, they were just marked as deleted but the Quality Audit triggers were not deleted until the marked Custom List records were deleted. If a trigger condition would occur, the Marked Custom List records would be displayed.

This was resolved by modifying the Marked Records function to call a new method that can be overriden in each record type. If a records gets Marked, it will call this new method and the record can then do other operations at the same time that are specific to itself.

The Custom List records where modified to Mark their QA Trigger recrods as deleted when they themselves get marked.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
5226; If Single Analog Control Then Allow Bending Beam to Lower First
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

XL2; Added Debug Record Dump during Memory Test
XL200

During record test, if enabled, the record address and header of each record will be dumped to the Debug Output.

Enabling the debug output is enabled by typing "Display Records" and pressing enter while using FlashWizard. A shortcut, "D RE" can be used as well.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
Release 5.0.27.115
Eclipse

New Features

  • Eclipse Pro Kiosk App for Fire TV: Simplifies the deployment and configuration of Wallboard (Andon) screens.

Improvements

  • Unsaved Order changes will prompt when navigating away from the page.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed agent startup bug where it would not send the initial set of scrap/delay codes.
  • The AMS.Eclipse (supervisor) installer was not properly detecting the required .net version.
  • Fixed a regression where the custom date range on the Production Summary report did not render properly.
  • The list of machines was empty when adding the first scheduled downtime. This is fixed.
  • Global search would not navigate to a different order while on a different order. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.27.115 11/19/2025
XL2; Add Instruction Fields to Quality Audit display.
XL200

Each Quality Audit table entry is now able to be configured with instructions that can be displayed in the Quality Audit window, once triggered.

If the Instructions are populated on a Parent Record that contains the trigger, these instructions are assumed to pertain to all of the child entries. These are labeled "General Window Instructions". Each Child record of the trigger can contain their own instructions. They are displayed seperately when the child is displayed. These are labeled "Specific Request Instructions".

If a Quality Audit is triggered directly (has no children) and has instructions, its instructions will be displayed as "Specific Request Instructions"

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220OL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL220CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
Pathfinder; Claude Put in Line of Code That Makes Configuration Corrupted
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

I had Claude test the Idle Command generic parameters and change the ones that were not the safe value. For some reason he moved a line of json code to a spot that makes it corrupted and unusable. Line was taken out on the 10 configurations.

Pathfinder; Safest Idle Command For All Axes
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

SUMMARY: Updated Idle Command parameters for all Twin machine configurations to use standardized default values.

PROBLEM: Twin machine configurations had inconsistent Idle Command parameter values and were missing parameters for Lower Retract (220) and Upper Bending Beam (221).

SOLUTION: Updated 10 Twin machine configuration files with correct Idle Command defaults:

  • Parameter 219 (Idle Command for Bending Beam): -10
  • Parameter 220 (Idle Command for Lower Retract): -10
  • Parameter 221 (Idle Command for Upper Bending Beam): -10
  • Parameter 222 (Idle Command for Upper Retract): -10
  • Parameter 223 (Idle Command for Clamping Beam): 10

FILES MODIFIED:

  • JornsEcoTwin.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsHyperDriveFlexTwinmatic.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsHyperDriveTwinPro.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsTwinProClosedLoop.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsTwinProClosedLoopAtAMS.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsTwinProClosedLoopV2.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsTwinProOpenLoop.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsTwinmaticClosedLoop.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV2.ConfigurationStore.json
  • JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV3.ConfigurationStore.json

RESULT: All Twin configurations now have consistent Idle Command parameter values.

Pathfinder; Radius Adjust Not Showing Up In Bend Operation on Single Folders
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Summary

Fixed truncation issue in Machine Operations UI where RadiusAdjustment field and other parameters were not visible in operation details due to incorrect height calculation.

Problem

  • RadiusAdjustment field (row 25) was not visible in NormalBend operations despite being enabled
  • Different operation types (NormalBend vs CloseHem) showed different fields due to visual truncation
  • Operations displayed excessive blank space at the bottom when fields were hidden

Root Cause

  • TableLayoutPanel used AutoSize row styles, preventing proper row collapse when height set to 0
  • Height calculation used fixed base (942px) minus hidden row count, which didn't account for specific row positions
  • Different operations hide different rows, causing inconsistent visibility of fields at higher row indices

Solution

Files Modified:

  • AMS.Pathfinder.ViewPresenter\UserControls\MachineSteps\Operations
    MachineStepsOperationBase.Designer.cs
  • AMS.Pathfinder.ViewPresenter\UserControls\MachineSteps\Operations
    MachineStepsOperationBase.cs

Changes:

  1. Changed all 30 TableLayoutPanel RowStyles from SizeType.AutoSize to SizeType.Absolute (30px)
  2. Updated GetDesiredHeight() method to dynamically sum actual RowStyles heights instead of using fixed calculation
  3. Corrected overhead calculation to include both summary section (42px) and batch/enable row (36px)

Result:

  • RadiusAdjustment and other fields now display correctly when enabled
  • No blank space at bottom - each operation sizes to fit only visible content
  • Operations independently size based on their specific hidden/visible row configuration
XL2CL; The KMF controller Press output would stick on when Press Block Retract Time == 0.0 sec
XL200

Due to a bug in the timer contro,l the Press 1 Down output on the KMF controller would stick ON during a Manual Press if the Press Block Retract Time was zero

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2C; The KMF controller was not using the Shear Wire Idle output during a Manual Shear
XL200

The KMF controller is supposed to heat the Shear Wire to an IDLE temperature and then just before a shear, it gets heated up to a READY temperature. The Shear Wire Idle output raises controls the IDLE temperature. The Shear Wire Ready output controls the ready temperature. The IDLE output and the READY output are on at the same time.

During a stationary manual shear, the Shear Wire Idle output and the Shear Wire Idle Time was not being used. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2CL 4.104.0 1/7/2026
XL2; Simple Z4xx Zanasi driver issue
XL200

When the Simple Zanasi Z4xx print driver was developed, we were not given a complete Zanasi print system. This prevented the printer from being tested as a system in the run mode like we would typically do. Each part of the system was tested using various means to test that we understood how to wire and test each component, like the encoder, the Print Trigger and the communication.

The Test Print option was used, in conjuction with the printers Serial Port bebug screen, to test that the printer recieved and processed the print message. Unfortunately, the Test Print function does not test for a response from the printer like the Run Mode operation does. When the first customer began to use the driver in production, they began to recieve printer communication errors that we didn't see in our testing.

Zanasi should really add the ability for their Serial Sniffer function to return a programmed response when it accepts a command. Having this response allows the controller to detect when the printer has stopped communicating so that parts are not missing a message or get the wrong message.

In the mean time the following solution was chosen.

The Simple Zanasi driver will have a new setting called Require Printer Response. It will have two options, Yes and No. It will default to No. If the customer is OK with using the printer, at the risk of not knowing if it is functioning properly, they can set it to No. If they are not, they will have to contact Zanasi for a solution that provides a resonse that can be tested by the XL.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.103.1 11/10/2025
XL2CL 5.103.1 11/10/2025
XL2OL 4.103.1 11/10/2025
XL2CL 4.103.1 11/10/2025
Release 5.0.27.70
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Send Machine Pattern deletion request from XL200 Machine view.
  • Upgrade to .net 9.0.10.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed regression where some import channels were not able to start.
  • Fixed crash when calculating the schedule summary when using Controller sourced bundles that have the same bundle number.
  • Fixed regression with the bulk editing dialog on the Orders list.
  • Fixed the update available indicator.
  • Order Detail would always show the alert banner even if there was no alert.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.27.70 11/4/2025
XL2; Tailout Production Record Improvement.
XL200

On a normal coil tailout, while running, the current item that is reported is still the actual item that was running during the tailout. The item, order and material code have been validated against the coil and it makes sense to report the coil information and the item information all togther in one production record.

When an order it completed and there is no more production for a coil, the current item is no longer the last item that was running against that coil. It may be some item or order that will never be run with that coil. This resulted in some confusing conditions. It is especially confusing if there is scrap that gets reported because the Threadout process doesn't perfectly count the material down to the Shear to Encoder distance before the coil tails out.

To counter act this, we are now keeping track of the last produced item. It gets initialized during initialize queue and during every decrement part as parts are being produced. This item is used instead of the current item when a Threadout (Tailout) occurs, while the line is halted.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2CL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220OL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220CL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2OL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2CL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220OL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220CL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2; Improve and Simplify Auto Delete Done Orders
XL200

The conditions for testing for Done Items and Orders have been simplified.

Done Items and Done orders will now be checked for deletion at a minimum of once per minute or a maximum of once every 10 minutes. This time is dependent on the Auto Delete Done Orders time. The programmed time is used for the timer but is capped at the specified min and max limits above.

Done items and orders are also checked on a Power Cycle or every Memory Test.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2OL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220CL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220OL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2CL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2OL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220CL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220OL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2CL; KMF Settings
XL200

The KMF controller installs fleece on the bottom of roof pannels, based on the state of two hole detect inputs. There are no orders or data to collect. Eclipse is not enabled on these controllers.

According to AMS gmbh, these controllers have been configured with the same settings when they get installed. For that reason the following settings have had their default values modified to the values listed below.

Shear Dwell Down 0.25sec Press 1 Dwell Down 0.25sec Press 1 Dwell Up 0.05sec Tolerance 15mm Minimum Shear Distance 350mm Maximum Shear DIstance 620mm Minimum Press Distance 650mm Maximum Press Distance 750mm Reference Die on Manual Shear No Line Resolution 0.038418850mm Die Resolution 0.003820200mm Loop Gain 10.0 Jog Velocity 5MPM Reference Velocity 1MPM Max Die Return Velocity 60MPM Acceleration 900cm/s2 Enable Virtual Keyboard Yes Clear Queue After Prompt Dsiplay Format Metric mm. Jog Select Mode Die (Setting not visible)

This change will make setting up new installs easier and supporting customers who recieve software updates will have an easier time getting back up to speed.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2CL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
Release 5.0.27.48
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Add individual scrap code filter to scrap-summary report.

Bug Fixes

  • Fix an issue with running the Schedule Estimator.
  • NetSuite export would fail if many missing bundles were found during startup.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.27.48 10/27/2025
XL2CL; Missreported Tolerance on EtherCat Die Accelerators.
XL200

The reported tolerance on CLDA when using EtherCat was off by the amount of die movement in one Closed Loop sample time.

This effect was already corrected for SERCOS but it was missed when EtherCat was implemented.

For stationary cuts, an improvement was made to account for the same issue in both SERCOS and EtherCat modes.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.102.4 10/23/2025
XL220CL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2CL 4.102.4 10/23/2025
XL220CL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
Pathfinder; Add New 5226 Releases
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

5226 Rev B, E and F Version 4.04.21 5226 Rev G Version 5.00.20

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.32.3612 2/13/2026
Pathfinder; Not Have Oil Level and Temperature Feedback View on Same Location
Pathfinder

Change made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

On the Pathfinder UI visual of when the machine is in run all the axis positions are shown in the bottom. A bug came when adding the oil level in terms of percentage full in which the positioning was not shifted to the new location. This made the oil level go way to the right in the visual.

The fix was to make the correct shifting of the visual location.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.32.3612 2/13/2026
5226; Swap Oil Level and Temperature Order When Sending Status Command
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 and Pathfinder UI have a communication protocol to deliver information back and forth. One of the commands is a status of what's going on with what the 5226 is controlling. This is run states, axis feedback etc. For the axis feedback it's supposed to be fluid in which you can keep adding more axes to the end of the command which means this command does not have to be the same size every time. Just say which axis it is and give the position. There seems to be a bug on the Pathfinder side where it adheres to our axis bit structure and because the order of the oil level and oil temperature didn't follow the order it made the two feedbacks switch back and forth in the UI.

The fix was to put the oil level before the oil temperature in the 5226 code.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.20 10/10/2025
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.21 10/10/2025
XL2; Multi-Axis Devices status screen improvements.
XL200

The Diagnostics Multi-Axis Devices status screen has been improved. Rather than showing a count of the number of active Axes, it now displays a list of all the axes with their current positions.

In addition, the Function Key menu has changed to add an option to Disable All Axies.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.102.3 10/8/2025
XL2CL 5.102.3 10/8/2025
XL220OL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220CL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2OL 4.102.3 10/8/2025
XL2CL 4.102.3 10/8/2025
XL220OL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220CL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2; Allow PLC Multi-Axis Remote Control commands to Request Status for any type of Multi-Axis
XL200

Commands for controlling a PLC Type of Axis were added to the MODBUS Spec in version level 117. These commands only allowed the control and status request of PLC Type axes.

The command for Requesting status from PLC type Axes to be executed on any type of Multi-Axis driver.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.102.2 10/7/2025
XL2CL 5.102.2 10/7/2025
XL2OL 4.102.2 10/7/2025
XL2CL 4.102.2 10/7/2025
Release 5.0.27.8
Eclipse

Bug Fixes

  • Possible fix for skewed pathfinder data on the first production run of the day.
  • Changing Classic settings from Pro would sometimes modify unrelated properties. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.27.8 10/7/2025
XL2: ; Enabling Leader and Trailer for all Stitching Algorithms.
XL200

The Leader and Trailer options are now enabled for all Stitching algorithms. The main difference is that it is now enabled when Omitting Cuts to ensure there is a handle for downstream cutting operations that require it.

It works the same when Omitting Cuts, with one exception. If a Leader has been added as a handle, no trailer is required to provide a handle. As such, it won't be added.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.102.1 10/7/2025
XL2CL 5.102.1 10/7/2025
XL220OL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220CL 5.103.0 11/6/2025
XL2OL 4.102.1 10/7/2025
XL2CL 4.102.1 10/7/2025
XL220OL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
XL220CL 4.103.0 11/6/2025
Release 5.0.27.5
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Added an optional allow list for user and email recipient domains.

Bug Fixes

  • Fix an issue with running the Schedule Estimator after the last release.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.27.5 10/6/2025
Release 5.0.27.3
Eclipse

Ricky Allman (12:23 AM):

  • Agent now requires Classic to be at minimum version of 4.1.226.
  • RavenDB must be upgraded to version 6.2.10.

Preview Feature

  • Report Subscriptions: Schedule reports for automatic email delivery (daily/weekly/monthly). Contact support@amscontrols.com to enable the preview.
  • Coil Return Tasks in Warehouse

New Features

  • Attribute based changeover times: Use the change in tooling and material attributes to determine a changeover time. Times are additive. For example, if gauge takes 5 minutes (from material) and finished width takes 10 minutes (from tooling code), the changeover will be 15 minutes. Times can also be different for explicit values. It can be configured to take 10 minutes for 12 gauge and 5 minutes for all other gauges.
  • New Report: XL Machine Configuration
  • Send operator messages from the dashboard.
  • Remote XL Lockout Control: Control machine lockout states directly from the dashboard. When activated, this remotely locks or unlocks a machine, overriding the physical lockout switch until it is manually cycled at the controller. Requires XL200 firmware version v5.94.00/v4.94.00 or greater.
  • Shape patterns now support machines where the material is not centered in the machine and axes that are manually moved. These can be configured by PCode/Tooling Code.

Improvements

  • Reports have a consistent header when printed.
  • Production Summary report has a better print view.
  • Production log is initially collapsed on the dashboard.
  • Export and Import now available for Loss Codes.
  • Selections from available jobs in the scheduler can be bulk deleted.
  • System Preferences can now set the company name, default delay code, tailout scrap code, and carry last delay forward settings.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed some dashboard sizing regressions.
  • Shape solution errors were not showing up in the order list or scheduler.
  • Performance and stability improvements.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.27.3 10/6/2025
Release 4.1.226
Eclipse
  • Added capture of 2nd XL Switch setting.
  • Where possible, the Comm message log references the related record for displaying in Pro.
  • Add coil.SYNC_ADJST
  • Add parts.DESCRIPT
  • Add punches.SEGMENT
  • Add machine.LEGHEIGHT2
  • Read TRUE/FALSE settings as T/F
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.226 10/5/2025
XL2; Diax02 Multi-Axis, Offset From Zero parameter.
XL200

A new field has been added to the Diax02 Multi-Axis Driver.

In almost all cases, this field should be zero. However, in some drives with high gear ratio's, we run into an issue with Absolute Encoder Travel range. The encoder can only measure 2048 motor turns on either side of zero. If the motor has to travel further than that, the reported position will invert its polarity sign when it crosses the 2048 turn boundary. Position Limits Errors, if enabled, will happen slightly before that.

The maximum travel range can be calculated by 2048 * (Gear Out/Gear In) * Feed Constant. The Travel limits will be +- this calculated value. For example, a gear ratio of 20:1 and a Feed Constant of .2" results in a travel range of +-20.48".

The Offset From Zero lets us use this range more effectively by making it appear that the zero point of the axis is in a different place. If we use our earlier example and we need the axis to travel to 24" we can shift where zero is. We can shift the zero point -10" by entering -10" in the Offset From Zero setting. This will make our travel range -10.48" and + 30.48" inches.

When referencing and sending positions to the drive, the controller lies to it. It offsets the positions it sends and the positions it gets back by the Offset by Zero value to effectively shift the travel range the drive has, into the range that we can use.

If Position Limits are being used, the must be shifted in the drive by the Offset From Zero value. For example, if the Axis upper limit is 30.48", adding the -10" offset from our example means the limit in the drive needs to be 20.48".

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2; Diax02 Position Exponent Control
XL200

As a test we needed to be able to a -5 exponent for position parameters on a Diax02 drive. The software was changed to allow us to use whatever exponent is currently configured in the drive. In addition, since the Diax02 drives don't work with Drivetop the Position and Velocity exponents are now programable through the XL SERCOS Paramater editor.

Changing the exponent did not resolve the issue we were experiencing. However, this ability may come in handy in the future so I am going to preserve the changes.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2; Enable All Axes function key added.
XL200

The Multi-Axis Devices menu in the Diagnostics screen now has an F4- Enable All Axes function key available.

The F4 - Reference all Axes moved to the F5 key.

An F4 - Enable All Axes was added next to the F3 - Disable All Axes function key button.

XL2; EtherCat Clearing Errors change.
XL200

SCN 5112 changed what happens when errors are cleared in SERCOS Phase4. All errors are cleared by forcing a new phase progression. While passing through phase 2, errors are cleared in all drives.

To be consistent, this SCN adds the same behavior to the EtherCat fieldbus. If F3-Clear Error is selected on a drive while the bus is in Full Operational state, a new Operational State progression will be triggered. While passing through Pre-Operational state, all drives with errors will have them cleared.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL; New Tolerance fields in Closed Loop Data.
XL200

We have added Min Tolerance and Average Tolerance fields to the Closed Loop Data screen.

The Max Error value is no longer compared as an absolute value against the absolute error.

All of the fields are initialized to zero when the screen in initialized or when a new graph is started. The first tolerance that is measured will be filled into the Max, Min and Avg Tolerance fields. Min and Max will then be compared from there. The Average will begin being calculated on the second tolerance measurement reported.

These new fields are intended to make it easier to evaluate how consistent the tolerance is and to provide some sense of how it is distributed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
Release 5.0.26.535
Eclipse

New Features

  • New Report: Pathfinder Produced Goods

Improvements

  • Updated most grids to resize with the browser window.
  • Performance and stability improvements.
  • Punch Patterns can be renamed.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed regression with the Scheduler grid height.
  • Not all setup parameter instances were visible in the XL200 setups tab. All instances are now displayed.
  • Added some automated database recovery steps.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.535 9/18/2025
XL2; Clear Error Change to support Allen Bradley SERCOS drives.
XL200

Allen Bradley SERCOS drives work differently than the Bosch drives. On site at a customer we discovered that the drives apparently will generate faults internally that they want to be cleared, but they don't report them in the SERCOS interface or even in the Drive Explorer software. This has been learned by exerience by the customer who has these drives.

A recent change to Clearing drive errors for SERCOS seems to have opened up an issue. When in Phase 4, a request to clear drive errors now will initiate a new phase progression from Phase 0. In Phase 2, each drive is checked for an error and it will get cleared if it is reporting one. The old software would clears errors, present or not.

In this new change we will be setting an override flag that tells Phase 2 to clear errors in every drive,even if the drive is not reporting one. This is a change that is being made on site. There is a possibility that the AB drive may not do the same processing in Phase 2 as it does in Phase 4. Implementing this in Phase 4 is not something I want to undertake on site, where I can't test it before hand. It is much more complicated.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.101.3 9/19/2025
XL2OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
Pathfinder; Added New 5226 Releases
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.31.3609 9/16/2025
5226; Removed Special Case for UR and Clamp When Shared Analog
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.19 9/16/2025
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.20 9/16/2025
5226; New Project Configurations to Deal with Rev H Board
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.19 9/16/2025
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.20 9/16/2025
Release 5.0.26.519
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Added External Connection to NetSuite import configurations.
  • Performance and stability improvements.
  • Improved print layout of reports and dashboard pages.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed issue where network resources were not being released which led to crashes during heavy traffic.
  • Fixed regression with the scheduler drag columns.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.519 9/14/2025
Release 5.0.26.497
Eclipse

Bug Fixes

  • Bundle user fields would be lost when rebundling. This is fixed.
  • Fixed an error when copying a pattern.
  • Possible fix for an Order sync issue from Classic.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.497 9/12/2025
XL2; Activate stacker on an Order Change.
XL200

The stacker code was stacking on a budle change or when there were no more orders.

Usually, there is a bundle number change between orders, but sometimes, for single item orders, there is not. The old test, bundle number change, mostly worked unless there were subsequent single item Orders where the items in each order had the same bundle number.

This change forces a stack on an Order change.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.101.2 9/11/2025
XL2CL 5.101.2 9/11/2025
XL220OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 4.101.2 9/11/2025
XL2CL 4.101.2 9/11/2025
XL220OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
Release 5.0.26.476
Eclipse
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.476 9/8/2025
Release 5.0.26.466
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Add required weight to Warehouse task views and made the views more consistent with each other.
  • Separate Shapes and Tool into tabs on the Machine Shape Table view.
  • Global search improvements.
  • The "Show Material Shortage Alerts" setting now determines if coil warnings are shown on the timeline.
  • Added an experimental view of the Supervisor information to the health page.

Bug Fixes

  • Login screen works better with password managers.
  • Performance and stability improvements.
  • Fixed error with DbMaterialImport configuration.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.466 9/7/2025
XL220; Controller reset when using downstream notches.
XL200

Back in 11/2022 SCN was released to improve the reliability of Queue Record garbage collection. This caused an issue in the XL220 downstream notches press task. A lefty over, uninitialized, variable was being used to delete queue records.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL220OL 5.101.1 8/27/2025
XL220CL 5.101.1 8/27/2025
XL220CL 4.101.1 8/27/2025
XL220OL 4.101.1 8/27/2025
5226; When Tapering Close All Grippers If Gripper Extends Defined.
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.20 9/16/2025
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.19 9/16/2025
Pathfinder; Tapering Calculations Based on Gripper Extends
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.31.3609 9/16/2025
XL2; 8F000009 Task Error when powering up
XL200

This task error occurs if it takes too long to recieve a 16bit chunk of data from the ARM processor.

We had a 5386 board that was taking too long to initialize the Ethernet Port and wasn't ready to respond with the 16 bit status when it was requested. By increasing the time that the ARM was allowed to execute the initialization, the error went away and the ARM performed all other operations flawlessly.

This change makes the additional time a permanent change from here on out.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2; Share more source code between projects
XL200

Over the Years we have been mixing more and more Open Loop and Closed Loop features. The more code that is in common between software projects, the easier it is to support.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 5.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220OL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL220CL 4.102.0 10/3/2025
XL2; MODBUS, Request Field Bus Reset and Request Disable All Drives.
XL200

Two new options have been added to the MODBUS interface.

Requesting a Field Bus Reset will reset any present Field Bus, SERCOS or EtherCAT at the moment, back to its full operational state. Errors are cleared during the reset.

Requesting all Drives to be Disabled does what it says.

These options are available in MODBUS Version Level 1.30. More detailed documentation can be sources in the MODBUS Spec.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2; E-Stop and System Ready support for Multi-Axis Drives
XL200

The E-Stop and the System Ready inputs (on an OL) are now required to Enable, Jog, Position, Reference to Home Switch ...etc. In addition, if the system loses the E-Stop or System Ready, the Multi-Axis drives will now also be disabled.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220; C0000000 Task Error with lock sizes equal to zero inches.
XL200

A divide by zero error (C0000000) would occur when running a part with a Lock Size of 0.000".

This condition will now be tested for and will result in an error message indicating Lock Sizes must ne non-zero.

Model Version Released
XL220OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
Pathfinder; Add Foldguard w/Handshake Machine Option to Other ASC 5226 Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Recently the ASCV2 configuration got all the I/O associated with the Foldguard with Handshake machine option. No reason for the other versions of the 5226 ASC configurations to not have in case needed in future upgrades with foldguard.

Foldguard with Handshake was added to ASCV2HeavyDuty, ASCV3, and ASCV4 configurations.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.31.3609 9/16/2025
Releaes 5.0.26.397
Eclipse
  • AMS.Eclipse Supervisor Service: A new Windows service that monitors and manages Eclipse Pro components. Currently provides automatic health monitoring, crash recovery, and centralized status reporting to AMS. The Supervisor will eventually host all Eclipse Pro processes (Server, Agent, RavenDB) enabling non-admin updates and unified management through a single service. This is currently optional and can be installed using the Eclipse Toolbox.

Improvements

  • Performance and stability improvements.
  • NetSuite: export attempts reset the attempt count after passing each stage.

Bug Fixes

  • Punch Patterns would immediately show that changes need to be saved when viewing. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.397 8/17/2025
Release 4.1.224
Eclipse
  • Fixed issues sending orders with problem punch patterns. Sometimes, the order header would be sent without items.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.224 8/17/2025
XL2CL; Homing Improvement for Die Accelerators
XL200

Home Sensor Detection has been an issue at times The Die direction is chosen based on the initial state of the home sensor and up until now, the search for the home sensor was based on its current state rather than the expected transition.

The problem this change solves is to better deal with home sensors that have a small position sensing window. If the Referencing Velocity is too high or the acceleration is too low, the die can coast beyond the sensor and turn back off. This violated an assumption that was critical to the Homing Algorithm operation.

For example, if the die was returning to the home sensor and the sensor turned ON, the die would stop. If the die coasted beyond the sensor, the next move to move forward off the sensor would terminate before any move took place, because the sensor was already OFF. The next move, looking for an ON would then reverse the die into the overtravel’s looking for an ON state that was never going to come.

Now that we have changed the routine to look for a specific transition, ON to OFF or OFF to ON, the prior example will no longer be a problem. The die will return home looking for an OFF to ON transition, which it will find. Even though the die has coasted beyond the sensor, when it moves forward it will be looking for an ON to OFF transition. It will move forward until it see the OFF to ON transition and continue moving until the ON to OFF transition occurs.

Higher Referencing speeds and lower accelerations may now be used, and the homing routine can still function correctly, provided the die does not coast into an overtravel.

There is a limit to this new method. The home sensor inputs are debounced at 20msec. In order for the new routine to work properly, when searching for the home sensor, the sensor must be ON or OFF for a minimum of 20msec or the transitions may not be sensed.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL; Diax02 F37 Excessive Position Command Value Difference
XL200

I have been unable to duplicate the F37 Excessive Position Command Value Difference fault that has been occuring in the field. The fault seems to happen most often on the first drive enable or move after a power cycle. Once manually enabled, the drives seem to function correctly.

Under the theory that the drive is intermittently failing to remember the prior position command properly on a Power Cycle, the follwing change has been made.

While the drive is disabled, the Command Position is updated on everly cycle time with the current axis position, ensuring that there is no significan't jump when the drive gets enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL; Add debug code to simulate a Multi-Axis Jog request via MODBUS.
XL200

To debug an issue with enabling a Drive as part of a Mult-Axis jog request request from MODBUS some debug code was added. This debug code enables two inputs to allow the same driver method that MODBUS call to be called from the input task using two inputs. This simplifies the equipment required to simultate the environment required for testing.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
FlashDoctor; Handle XL200 software version with 3 digit revision numbers
AMS Tools

FlashDoctor assumed 2 digit revision numbers when creating the file name for XL200 FMF files.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.45 8/11/2025
Pathfinder; Added Discrete I/O Axis Parameters to Needed Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Parameters 890 Preferred Gripper Offset, 891 Hem Flange No Grip Zone, 892 Gripper Air Space Offset have been added to the following configurations.

JornHyperDriveFlex JornHyperDriveFlex4Frame JornHyperDriveFlex5Frame JornHyperDriveFlex8Frame

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.31.3609 9/16/2025
XL2CL; Prevent Eclipse from Disabling Selective Two Encoder Closed Loop
XL200

When Selective Two Encoder Closed Loop was enabled, the setup, Enable Feed Forward was still created but it was not visible. This opened up the possibility for the Selective Two Encoder Closed Loop to get disabled.

The fact that it was created opened up a potential issue for controllers with Eclipse that had old settings backed up. If the controller was ever configured without the Selective Two Encoder Closed Loo and the settings had been backed up, the setup could be downloaded and then disable the Feed Forward settings and functionality.

This issue has been resolved. When Selective Two Encoder Closed Loop is configured, the problem setup is disabled and the correct values are forced into the setting.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.100.6 8/7/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.100.6 8/11/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL; No analog output when configured for Two Encoder Selective Closed Loop
XL200

When Two Encoder Selective Closed Loop was configured, the controller did not output any analog voltage for the feeder.

All of the calculations for the voltage were correct but the value was not being written to the analog port.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.100.6 8/7/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.100.6 8/11/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL; SERCOS controllers get stuck in Coast mode.
XL200

Closed Loop SERCOS controllers could get stuck in Coast mode if the Drive fails to enable when entering the run mode. Among other reasons, this can happen if the SERCOS ring is stuck in phase 3 or lower.

It gets detected that the drive is unable to be enabled. However, the code was lacking the trigger to satisfy the condition to escape the loop that was waiting for the drive to be under torque.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.100.5 8/7/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.100.5 8/7/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2; Allow editing of settings and error clearing while waiting to enable SERCOS Cyclical Interrupt
XL200

Some Manufacturers have an external power enable circuit to their SERCOS drives to enable power. This prevents the Cyclical Interrupt from being installed, which traps the SERCOS state machine in a place where it does not do its normal processing.

In this state, I have added checking to allow drive settings to be modified and drive errors to be cleared. The drive status is also modified to indicate the drive is not ready and is waiting for Cyclical Data to be enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 5.100.4 8/6/2025
XL220OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.100.4 8/6/2025
XL220OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2; In Phase 4, Clear Errors in all drives by doing a Phase progression
XL200

Sercos errors for all drives are cleared in phase 2 during the phase run up to phase 4.

Once the system has gotten to phase 4 and errors need to be cleared, it is most likely to get the line back up to full operation as quickly as possible, not for troubleshooting. For this reason a request for Error Clear will cause a new phase run up to clear errors in all drives and resolve any other potential state machine issues.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 5.100.4 8/6/2025
XL220OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.100.4 8/6/2025
XL220OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
NA
XL200

NA

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 5.100.4 8/6/2025
XL220OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.100.4 8/6/2025
XL220OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL; Diax02 Drive Enable timing for Multi-Axis drives.
XL200

On modorrn drives the timing of when the drive is enabled and when it is ready to move is not as critical. The drive generates its own motion profile and moves when ready.

With Diax02 drives, the XL has to generate the motion profile and needs to wait until the drive is ready before it starts. Otherwise the drive reports faults.

This change adds a state to the Diax02 state machine where it waits for the drive to report that it is under torque before it begins generating its profile. To avoid an endless loop in the state machine, it will wait up to 500msec for the drive to be ready before it gives up and reinitializes for a new command.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.100.3 8/5/2025
XL2CL 4.100.3 8/5/2025
Release 5.0.26.334
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Add source pattern to the list of XL200 patterns. This allows users to see where the pattern originated from, which is useful for debugging.
  • Added split_get function to Scriban templates for extracting elements from delimited strings - example: {{ "1.2.3" | split_get "." 2 }} returns "3".
  • Add machine run state with mini pop up to the schedule timeline view.
  • Punch Pattern editing now has more checks against creating invalid patterns. For example, Macro patterns cannot contain Shape or Macro punches. Validation errors are visible in the punch row.

Bug Fixes

  • The save bundle changes button was still visible after bundle changes were saved. This is fixed.
  • Country was not being imported from JobImport (via .json and api). This is fixed.
  • The machine metric pop-up from the Scheduler tab was not showing data. This is fixed.
  • Fix issue where orders with that used DateTime strings as their order number would not show as available to schedule.
  • Machine Shape Table incorrectly would not allow a single tool on a press with gag of 0. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.334 8/5/2025
XL2CL; Invalid DIP switch configuration error
XL200

The SCN 5090 Two Encoder Selective Closed Loop mode was not configurable if any of the other DIP Switches that affect Encoder or Analog direction were configured.

An Invalid DIP Switch Configuration error would occur.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.100.3 8/5/2025
XL2CL 4.100.3 8/5/2025
Pathfinder; Added New 5226 Rev F and G Firmware
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

New firmware versions are:

Rev F: 4.04.19

Rev G: 5.00.18

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.30.3607 8/4/2025
Pathfinder; Updated the 4 and 5 Frame Jorns Hyper Drive Flex Machine Options
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

Some gripper machine options needed to be optimized for these two configurations.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.30.3607 8/4/2025
Pathfinder; Added JornsHyperDriveFlex8Frame Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5 PC's.

New configuration for an 8 frame Jorns TwinPro in case closed loop parameters needed to be changed. As of right now based on the 5 frame parameters.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.30.3607 8/4/2025
5226; Make Specific Axis Conflict for UR and Clamp When Same Control Signal
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A change was made on double folder machines that didn't have multiple prop. valves for each axis which means they move one at a time. It was to allow the upper retract to move before the clamp could raise. This caused other problems down the line in which the UR could move down before the clamp could close which interferred with the material.

The change was to make a specific axis conflict which knows they share the same prop valve and will only let the UR move before the clamp if the clamp is moving down and the UR wants to move back.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.18 8/4/2025
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.19 8/4/2025
XL2CL; Diax02, Y-Axis, State Machine Corruption
XL200

The Y-Axis State Machine was getting "corrupted" when positioning any Axis higher than 3. The machine index stored in the state machine was getting corrupted which ultimately resulted in Axes with ID's higher than 2 not positioning.

What was actually happening is that the size of the Array of state machines was defined with one literal variable which was too small. The array bounds checking was being done with the correct literal. Any Axes with an ID higher than 2 was using memory that it didn't own, which resulted in it eventually being "corrupted" by the actual owner.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 5.100.2 7/31/2025
XL220OL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 5.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL2CL 4.100.3 8/5/2025
XL220OL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XL220CL 4.101.0 8/21/2025
XLCL; Diax02 Debug Prints added
XL200

Some Debug Prints were added to the Movement State machine.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 4.100.3 8/5/2025
XL2CL 5.100.1 7/30/2025
Pathfinder; Added 9mm Geometry to JouanelPTS31 Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC V5.

Added a new 9mm geometry to be available in the existing JouanelPTS31 configuration for their base electric folding machine.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.30.3607 8/4/2025
Pathfinder; Added Foldguard w/Handshake Machine Option and I/O to ASCV2
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC V5.

An ASC cabinet does not have foldguard integrated into it like a Flex design. This means using an external foldguard box is needed, but that has basic firmware in it that makes the installer have to take out the fast speed valve when we want to force the clamp into slow. This is not possible with an ASC machine which uses VFD's instead.

The solution was to update the PCSS to the latest foldguard firmware and then add on to the existing ASCV2 configuration the needed I/O. This allows for the handshake logic and the force slow to work without having to mess with anything in the existing cabinet.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.30.3607 8/4/2025
5226; Added Minimum Temperature HPU Control Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The HPU system that is put on our retrofitted double folders has a temperature feedback sensor to be able to keep track of the temperature and try to keep it at a certain range to keep the oil in a happy place. We already had maximum temperature logic used in junction with the air cooler, but no minimum temperature logic. To take care of this 3 new parameters were added to look at the temperature when it approaches low levels.

Minimum Oil Temperature: Will not let you start the pump if lower than this value. Will Halt and throw error if somehow drops below this value in run.

Minimum Operating Temperature: Will try to turn on a heater if it exists if trying to turn pump on. Will Halt and throw error if it drops below while running.

Minimum Temp to Run Air Cooler: If the air cooler is on it will be turned off under this temperature.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.19 8/4/2025
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.18 8/4/2025
Pathfinder; Added Error Message 398 Minimum Oil Temp To Start Pump
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC V5.

Error message 398 Minimum Oil Temperature to Start Pump will be displayed when the controller monitoring the temp sensor sees that the oil temp has dropped below either the minimum temperature or the minimum working temp during run. Will display trying to start the pump if under the minimum temp.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.30.3607 8/4/2025
Release 5.0.26.290
Eclipse

New Features

  • Punch Patterns can now be copied to a new pattern.

Improvements

  • The schedule estimator has been improved to better handle late changeovers and overlapping scheduled downtimes.
  • Andon header color uses the current task to determine the severity of the lateness.
  • Andon header shows an icon if there is a dialog open on the controller screen.
  • The connection to RavenDB is now more resilient from unexpected disconnections and delayed startup.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed interval properties in the Integration configurations.
  • Any user could set permissions for other users. Now only administrators can modify permissions.
  • OEE value was not being displayed on the Andon panel.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.290 7/27/2025
5226; Maximum Oil Temperature Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The HPU system that is put on our retrofitted double folders has both a temperature feedback sensor and an air cooling fan. The controller has 3 parameters to control the cooler based on temperature. There is a threshold parameter which will turn on the fan when temp is above its setting and a maximum parameter which when temp reaches this setting it will throw an error and not let the user run the machine. Then there is a hysteresis parameter. Logic for this parameter is that if the cooler is on and it gets to threshold minus hysteresis turn off the cooler.

The bug for the max temp is that it was also turning off the cooler, but at max minus hysteresis. The hysteresis in this case is just supposed to keep the user from running until under max minus hysteresis, but keep the cooler on to keep cooling. This has been fixed.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.18 8/4/2025
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.19 8/4/2025
XL2; Real Time Clock Boot Test
XL200

The XL has a Real Time Clock (RTC)function and a Watch Dog Timer function that are all built into the same Chip. During the boot process, the XL must turn off the Watch Dog Timer until the boot progresses far enough that it can be re-enabled and maintained.

If the RTC cannot be accessed, the boot code will stop the boot process and output a bit pattern on a GPIO pin. In some board Revs, the GPIO pin controls a hearbeat LED and the pattern can be read from there.

The test for accessing the RTC had several flaws in it that prevented the test from doing its job. If the RTC was not functioning the boot code tried forever rather than generating the bit pattern. This has now been resolved.

This bit pattern in primarily useful during repair or initial production of the board as a tool to point to the cause of boot issues.

During initial boot there are a certain level of expected failures as the Chip initializes. The number of expected failures was determined empericaly and then doubled to be conservative.

Model Version Released
XL-Boot 2.06 7/16/2025
XL2; Screen Lockups with the hourglass mouse icon displayed.
XL200

This issue is experienced primarily with popup screens like the Coil Load and Unload screens that popup in response to some external event.

The issue was created during the creation of "SCN 4978 - XL2; Potential memory corruption with Tree Node selection timer."

The original fix bypassed the dangerous code but also bypassed the needed mouse unlock code.

This issue has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.02 7/14/2025
XL2CL 5.99.02 7/14/2025
XL220OL 5.99.02 7/14/2025
XL220CL 5.99.02 7/14/2025
XL2OL 4.99.02 7/14/2025
XL2CL 4.99.02 7/14/2025
XL220OL 4.99.02 7/14/2025
XL220CL 4.99.02 7/14/2025
5226; Gripper Output Being Turned Off Incorrectly
Pathfinder

Changes made for the Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Grippers on a double folding machine can have many different combinations of I/O used for control. One of the combinations is to have one limit input and 2 control outputs. In this case we will turn the output off instead of keeping it on which happens in most cases. The bug was that instead of turning off the opposite output off, the output being used was turned off which can cause the gripper to re-open.

The fix was to turn off the correct output once the move was completed.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.18 8/4/2025
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.19 8/4/2025
XL2; Add Unlicensed Model to Model Codes that can be configured.
XL200

An Unlicensed Model can now be configured in the Model Codes so that the controller powers up in this model.

There is one Model for each software project.

  1. XL200CL-Unlicensed.
  2. XL200-Unlicensed.
  3. XL220CL-Unlicensed.
  4. XL220-Unlicensed.
Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL2OL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220CL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220OL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220CL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220OL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
XL2CL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
XL2OL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
FlashDoctor: Add XL200 Unlicensed Models
AMS Tools

Added four XL200 Models, one unlicensed model for each software project.

  1. XL200CL-Unlicensed
  2. XL200-Unlicensed
  3. XL220CL-Unlicensed
  4. XL220-Unlicensed
Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.45 8/11/2025
XL2CL; New Two Encoder Selective Closed Loop mode
XL200

Various Closed Loop models that support Two Encoder Feed to Stop will now also support a selective option.

This option has been added to support machines that have a disparity between the physical location of the line encoder and where the feeder (rollformer) has enough grip to jog the material. The tailout switch is typically located with the line encoder. The issue is that when the material is sensed, the loop is closed around the line encoder. If the feeder does not yet have enough grip to feed the material, Max Slip errors occur.

This new mode offers a solution. While jogging, the feeder motor is operated in an Open Loop fashion. A command proportional to the Max Velocity at 10V setup is sent to the drive while jogging. When halted, the loop and drive are disabled to prevent issues that would arrise if the material is halted while the feeder has no grip. When in Full Auto, the motor and loop are operated in standard Two Encoder Feed to Stop fashion.

The models, where available, and the switch settings required to configure this new mode are defined in the Switch Settings document.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220CL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL2CL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220CL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
Release 5.0.26.239
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Agent now has a proper /health endpoint.
  • Agent refreshes the Classic Loss Codes on start.
  • Include Machine Name in report csv data.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed the DbCoilSync config display.
  • Andon panel list was not translated in the Multi-2x2 panel editor.
  • Performance and stability improvements.
  • Allow BundleStates to be created when the Material or Tooling definitions no longer exist.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.239 7/9/2025
5226; License Code Serial Number Confirmation Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 has the capability of using a license code to give a customer a certain amount of days of use before locking out the controller if payment is not recieved during that time frame. The controller uses the last 3 characters of the serial number to confirm the code created is for that controller. The problem is that the amount of memory allocated for the serial number is bigger than what is usually used in production. The bug is that the controller was still looking at only the last 3 characters saved in memory for the check which were bogus.

The fix was to get the string only to the null character which is the end of the string/serial number. Then check the actual 3 characters of the serial number to confirm correct controller.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.19 8/4/2025
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.18 8/4/2025
XL2CL; 0xC0000000, Divide by Zero Error, with Diax02 drives.
XL200

If communication had not been established with Diax02 drives, a divide by zero error was possible when navigating to the SERCOS or Closed Loop Data diagnosic screens.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.99.01 7/8/2025
XL220CL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL2CL 4.99.01 7/8/2025
XL220CL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
XL2; Error Recovery when SERCOS parameter not found
XL200

When editing SERCOS parameters in the XL, if the parameter did not exist, the Fiber Ring had to be reset in order to recover. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.99.01 7/8/2025
XL2OL 5.99.01 7/8/2025
XL220CL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220OL 5.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220CL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
XL220OL 4.100.0 7/28/2025
XL2CL 4.99.01 7/8/2025
XL2OL 4.99.01 7/8/2025
XL2CL; Enable "Clear Queue After" setup for the KMF controller.
XL200

Enable the "Clear Queue After" setup for the KMF controller.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; XL-Unlicensed Model created for use with future Software License plan
XL200

In the future we will be creating a Software Licensing feature that allows a controller to be sold without functioning software. The Software will be sold seperately and licensed. The license will contain and select the Model that the controller is supposed to function as.

A new model has been created for controllers that have not had a software license enabled. This Model will be be selected by the software when a software license has not yet been enabled in the software.

The new model will be functional enough to be configured to communicate with Eclipse, which can provide the license in the future. In the future it will also provide the ability to configure the license manually.

Starting from a functionally controller the following changes have been made to create this model.

Disable all inputs to the controller so that it cannot function. No presses or motion configuration is defined.

The XL2OL controllers will have XL200-Unlicensed as their Model. The XL2CL will have XL200CL-Unlicensed as their Model. The XL220 will have XL220-Unlicensed as its Model. The XL220CL will have XL220CL-Unlicansed as its Model.

There is currently no way to configure a controller as Unlicensed. That will come in a future SCN.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; Show Axis ID in Pattern Operation Grid
XL200

To help with pattern troubleshooting on Multi-Axis machines, the Axis Id for the Tool used in a pattern will now be displayed in the operation grid.

For non-multi-axis machines, the Axis ID will always be zero.

If the Axis cannot be determined at display time it will be displayed as a '?'. Macros and Shape operations don't have an Axis until after the part has been calculated. If the operation is for a Macro pattern or if it is for a shape operation, it will also display a '?'. Other cases where the Axis ID cannot be determined are the case of missing tools that cannot be found at display time.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
Release 4.1.222
Eclipse
  • Fixed formatting of production export file.
  • Fixed issues when sending an order with shape patterns before the solution is ready.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.222 6/21/2025
Release 5.0.26.74
Eclipse

New Features

  • Loss Codes (Delay/Scrap) now have a printable report with barcodes that are specially formatted for use with an XL controller.

Improvements

  • Shape selections now offer a searchable list of shapes.
  • Enhanced Coil Sync: DbCoilSyncer now supports flexible SQL queries with configurable change detection for optimized synchronization:
    • Custom SELECT statements for any database schema
    • Incremental sync using DateTime or RowVersion/timestamp columns
  • Detect and clean up duplicate coils and materials in the database.

Bug Fixes

  • Better handling when Classic is performing daily maintenance.
  • Classic to Pro sync improvements.
  • Various Shape Pattern fixes.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.74 6/21/2025
Pathfinder; Added New 5226 Firmware
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC Software.

New Firmware:

Rev B, E and F - V4.04.18 Rev G - V5.00.17

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.29.3605 6/11/2025
Pathfinder; Extra Jog with Touch Screen Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC Software.

A bug was created when using the touch screen that was created from trying to fix another bug. Essentially when trying to reference or setting the FG mute point Pathfinder will send an extra jog command once the person releases their finger from the touch screen. This causes the reference and mute point status to clear and never let the user get referenced or have a good mute point.

The fix was to make sure the extra command does not happen.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.29.3605 6/11/2025
XL2; Adjust Part Print Rotation setting.
XL200

The controller default part print message has a rotation of 270 degrees. The Keyence Print driver only prints one character of the default part print message. The single character that does print, prints horizontally instead of vertically. Because the message gets rotated by 270 degrees, the rest of the message is hidden in the screen and does not print on the part..

It is too late to change the default message for the driver. This will break existing customers installs that may use the default message. It is also too late to completely adjust the driver’s interpretation of the rotation property so that the default message prints properly. Again, any general adjustment will impact existing customers of the printer.

A new setup has been added that is enabled when the Keyence Part Print drivers are selected. It is called Adjust Part Print Rotation. The parameter has two options, 0 and 90. It defaults to 0 degrees for legacy reasons. When set to 90, it will add 90 degrees to the rotation found within in any print message definition. This effectively converts 270 degrees back to zero. All the other rotation options are shifted by the same amount.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
5226; Don't Clear Reference Bit if Hardware ID is Simulation
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A change was made to simply just clear the the reference bit if the axis hardware feedback was not incremental encoder. The problem found though is that when in simulation mode it changes the feedback to simulation. So if you were checking to make sure it stayed unreferenced after a restart it will clear the status if in reference mode.

The change was to also not clear the reference status if feedback is simulation.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.18 6/11/2025
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.17 6/11/2025
5226; On Double Folders Allow Upper Retract to Move Before Clamp
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Usually on our retrofitted double folders the upgrade comes with a new HPU which allows axes to move at the same time. This allows the upper retract to move out of the way at the same time as the clamp moves down. If the machine does not have this capability the clamp was moving down into a clamped position with the upper retract still at home. It looks bad and the bending beam is usually at its home position too which can damage the part.

The fix was to move the upper retract out of the way before moving the clamp down.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.17 6/11/2025
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.18 6/11/2025
FlashDoctor; Open Loop, Rollforming and HVAC Model Option screen bug
AMS Tools

The Open Loop Model Option screen in Flashdoctor is shared between the HVAC and Rollforming controllers.

The screen is only constructed one time. It gets displayed or hidden.

The screen was not written with the assumption that it would need to enable and disable all controls, depending on the controller type. It was written with the Rollforming models and options enabled by default. The HVAC file would disable the Rollforning Models and option but nothing short of restarting the program would re-enable the Rollforming contols.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.43 6/6/2025
XL2; Clearing a SERCOS drive error sometimes did not work.
XL200

If there were more than 1 SERCOS drive, sometimes clearing an error using the F3-Clear Error function key did not work.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL; Add support for old SERCOS Diax02 drives.
XL200

We ran into an issue on a customer install. We were incorrectly informed that Diax02 drives support the Drive Internal Interpolation mode that we have historically used on multi-Axis installs. It turns out this is incorrect.

Rather than relying on the Drive to calculate the Position Profile Setpoints for an axis move, we had to add the capability for the controller to generate them.

These are 30-year-old drives, SERCOS is also an obsolete technology. The customer’s line is down, and they have several more lines with these same drives. With all these things in mind, some compromises were made to speed up the implementation.

The setpoint generation requires our operating system to be in sync with the SERCOS Bus. We already do this by using the SERCOS chip to run our OS on SERCOS Closed Loop Controllers. For this and the previously stated issues, this support is only available on the Closed Loop models with the SERCOS option.

A new Driver Type called "Local SERCOS Diax02" has been added.

A new Check box in the SERCOS Settings window "Diax02 Operation" is available on the Closed Loop controller with the SERCOS option. When this box is checked all SERCOS drives will be configured in operation modes known to work on Diax02 drives. For Multi-Axis drives, the Local SERCOS Diax02 driver type must be used. . The Local SERCOS Diax02 drive can be used on a more modern drive Diax03 or higher as it still uses settings and operating modes that are available in those drives.

Only SERCOS drives with the appropriate drive type will be visible in Diagnostics. A Run Mode entry test will display an error if the wrong type has been selected.

Other than the Driver Type, the only visible difference between a "Local SERCOS" and a "Local SERCOS Diax02" driver will be the Diax02 type will have an Acceleration parameter that is required in order to generate the motion profile.

The Diax02 version does not support S-Curves. Those were provided by the Drive Internally when it generated the motion profile.

A bug was found in the Diax02 drives we had available to test with. The Velocity parameters were found to only work reliably in the drives when configured for RPM. We chose to use Preferred scaling, where the drive chooses its own prefereed scaling.

Velocity drives, for Feeders and Die Accelerators still operate in the Velocity mode they have always used. Velocity will be in RPM so drive scaling will require some new math to RPM instead of Inches/minute.

Multi-Axis drives now operate in Position Mode where we have to send a postion setpoint on each drive sample. The XL is generating the motion profile with these setpoints.

Additional help for configuring these drives can be found in the Support One-Note.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
Release 5.0.26.21
Eclipse
  • Agent now requires Classic to be at minimum version of 4.1.220.
  • RavenDB must be upgraded to version 6.2.5.

New Features

  • Shape Punch Patterns (preview): Punches on patterns referenced the specific tool id on the machine. It is now possible to reference a Shape Name instead. This allows the same pattern to be used by multiple machine that do not share the same tool configuration. This is especially important when importing patterns from design software, where the tool id is not known. Also, the same hole could be made by multiple tools on the machine. Shape Patterns will automatically select the optimal tool based on the machine layout. This feature could require additional licensing. More information: https://www.amscontrols.com/product/eclipse-pro-shape-programming/
  • DB Material Import can lookup missing information from an external database. This is automatically triggered when a coil or order references a material that does not exist or has default values.
  • File import now support JSON format.`
  • On Demand import for Patterns. When an order is created that references Pattern Names that do not exist, Eclipse Pro can query an external database for the pattern information.
  • New Andon Panel == Multi-2x2: A new Andon panel that displays for metrics in a 2x2 grid.

Improvements

  • Machine Group is now editable on the XL Machine view.
  • XL Machine view now shows Axes.
  • Punch Pattern punch type now remembers the last selection.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed regression where Api Keys tab would not appear when it was supposed to.
  • Fix decimal formatting in Order Quick View
  • Fix display of newer string metrics in dashboard detail.
  • On the print configuration screen, the up/down buttons on print copy count were not working. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.26.24 5/23/2025
Release 4.1.220
Eclipse
  • Add support for importing and sending Shape Punch Patterns (requires Pro)
  • Reenabled order import macro that was accidentally disabled.
  • Add the following fields to the non-expanded production output format: sku, scrapqty, exptmatlen, shearkerf
  • If a coil is already loaded at another machine, the validation message now indicates which machine.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.220 5/23/2025
XL2CL; Missed Punch Target error on Tube Mill during Run Cycle Shear.
XL200

During a Run Cycle Shear, the tube mill stops processing press and printer targets.

Over the years other bug fixes and features have added additiona tests for missed press targets. These additional test were not considereing that a tube mill is not supposed to report any missed targets durring a Run Cycle Shear. This broke the Run Cycle Shear function when any press targets were being processed, resulting in a Missed Press or Missed Printer target error.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2OL 5.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2CL 4.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2OL 4.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2; Added an option, Even Spaced Async., to the Hole Correction Mode

When doing hole correction on a machine where the holes are being added Asynchronously by an upstream process, the controller must have a detected hole to initialize the part queue with. The controller doesn't know anything about the holes. They may not all be the same size or shape. They may not be evenly spaced. The controller must rely on the operator to jog a hole through the detector for the leading edge of the first good part. The controller will add a shear here to create the leading edge of the first part. This can be inconvenient if not necessary, for example, on a machine where all the holes are the same size and are all evenly spaced.

An additional problem is that doing a leading-edge scrap cut while in run, may not be easily handled by the machine.

It may be desirable and accurate enough to lineup the material such that a manual shear will cut in the correct place, with respect to the first hole. This will align the leading edge of the material such that the holes are synchronized correctly with the detector so that the remaining cuts can be properly adjusted as the holes are detected within the Hole Tolerance. The scrap that is created by the manual shear can be easily dealt with prior to entering the run mode.

A new selection in the Hole Correct Mode setting has been created to allow users to inform the controller that all the holes are evenly spaced, equivalent, and it is OK to initialize the queue with respect to a manually cut leading part edge. The new option is named Evenly Spaced Async.

A modification to the Hole Generation simulation on the PC simulator was made to allow this new option to be more easily tested.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2OL 5.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2CL 4.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2OL 4.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2; Added Hole Correct Shear Offset setting
XL200

In most cases, up until this point, using the Hole Correct option has required lying to the controller about where the Hole Detector is in the Shear to Detect setting. This will no longer be necessary. The desired shear location, with respect to where the hole is detected, will now be configurable with a new setting,

Hole Correct Shear Offset. A positive value will shift the shear in the positive direction, to the offset position after the hole. A negative value will shift the shear in the negative direction, to the offset position before the hole. The default value is zero, which will do no shifting with respect to the hole.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2CL 5.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2OL 4.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2CL 4.98.07 5/23/2025
XL2; Add debug information for SERCOS Y-Axis Position Tolerance Debugging
XL200

We have a customer who doesn't believe the controller is testing for the Y-Axis to be in position and stopped before firing the press. They have Local SERCOS Y-Axis drives that do the positioning. There is a position tolerance and a stopped tolerance. It is possible that the stopped tolerance or position tolerance could be faulty.

We have added debug prints in the test when it is determined that it is OK to fire. We are printing the Position and Velocity tolerance for each SERCOS Y-Axis. In the tolerance printount we are printing the current line position, the cmd Y-Axis position, the actual Y-Axis Position and the Current Y-Axis velocity.

If we don't get the debug prints, we know it isn't testing. If we get the debug prints, we will know if it is testing for each press fire and, with some backwards calculateing, we will know if the correct Y-Axis position has been commanded and the presses fired at the correct X-Position.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.06 5/16/2025
XL2CL 5.98.06 5/16/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.98.06 5/16/2025
XL2CL 4.98.06 5/16/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; Use F5-Dec Qty to undo a single Increment Qty.
XL200

Using the keypad there was no way to cancel an Increment Qty other than canceling all Increment Qty with the CE key.

The F5-Dec Qty key can now be used to undo a single Increment Qty part.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; Take 2. Make sure the selected press is enabled during Manual Shear/Press operations.
XL200

SCN 5059 already attempted to resolve this issue but a source code cut and paste error meant the fix was not actually implemented and the fix actually was potentially corrupting some memory.

The code was using BuildPart1.BPressID rather than BuildPart.BPressID to enable the press. BuildPart1.BPressID could have been any one of 255 possible values rather than for the actual press that neede to be enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.05 5/12/2025
XL2OL 5.98.05 5/12/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.98.05 5/12/2025
XL2OL 4.98.05 5/12/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; Add UART commands to allow orders to be moved.
XL200

There are now UART commands that allow orders to be moved/resorted.

There are two commands, one for moving above and one for moving below. Both commands take two arguments. The first argument is the address of an Anchor order, an order that will not be moved but will serve as the target order that another order will be moved above or below, before or after. The second argument is the address of the order that is to be moved. More details on the commands are available in the UART Spec. The UART version where these commands become available is 3.66 and higher.

XL2; Stop converting edits to the QTY on a DONE item to remakes.
XL200

Edits to the QTY on a DONE item were being converted to Remake (Scrap) parts, with no scrap code. This makes no sense. Edits to a partially complete item don't do the same thing, which makes this behavior even more surprising and confusing. In addition, we have a remake function that will explicity do this, and prompt for a scrap code to boot. If the user wants these extra parts to be remake parts, they can use the remake function.

Edits to a DONE order will now clear the scrap qty and the scrap code in the item.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; 0x81000003 Task Error with Eclipse Communication
XL200

A customer is complaining about a 0x81000003 task error. The error is being generated while building the response back to the Office PC. The string has gotten too large despite having a check for size just prior to when the error occurs. There appears to be memory corruption or a timing problem with shared memory involved.

While troubleshooting, it was noticed that the task errors seemed to occur only during periods of time when the entire Eclipse network of machines were experiencing high rates of communication failures, indicating a network wide issue. It is believed that this network issue sets up the environment when this occurs.

The buffer for parsing a command and then building the response is a shared buffer. When the RS485 network is used, the buffer is protected by disabling the RX interrupt while building the response. There is no such protection with Ethernet which, in theory, may be the source of these task errors. The theory is that the network issues setup the environment where a new command can come in and corrupt the response as it is being built. The new command is written to the buffer in an interrupt.

To eliminate this as a possible cause, the following changes are being made. The interrupt will save the command in a temporary buffer. The UART task will copy this temporary buffer to its processing buffer so that if a new command comes in, it will no longer be able to corrupt the response. The new command will be copied and processed only when the UART task is ready for it.

Some additional changes were made to minimize the damages if the UART Tasks buffer corruption is still somehow occurring after adding the temporary buffer. Rather than using copy string functions, the buffer copying code has been modified to use sub string functions that will only copy as much memory as the target string buffer can hold.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.04 5/7/2025
XL2CL 5.98.04 5/7/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.98.04 5/7/2025
XL2CL 4.98.04 5/7/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; Added Catalogs for some unidentified Simulation Tasks.
XL200

There were several tasks in the windows simulation that were not identified with catalogs.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; Screen not updating during Toggle R command in Windows Simulation
XL200

The display in the Windows simulation was not updating durring the Toggle input R command. This command is used to simulate the toggling of a home sensor.

The issue was the Toggle R and all other windows simulation commands were executing in the PEG graphics task, which updates the display. While executing the Toggle R command, the PEG task could not also update the display.

Now the commands will execute in their own task, which will allow the display to update during any lengthy command like the Toggle R command.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; Make sure the selected press is enabled during Manual Shear/Press operations.
XL200

A CLF with Multiple Presses on one die, Stitching Parts by omitting shears, Phantom shears, are all scenarious where a press gets disabled. It is prevented at a low level from firing.

A customer with an XL202CLF with two presses on one die reported that they had internittent issues with the Shear press not firing on a Manual Shear. After a deep code review, since we were not able to duplicate it, the following theory was formed.

Under some conditions, the run code is likely disabling the shear press. It enables or disables it when it processed each target. There are most likely conditions where the controller exitt the run mode with the press disabled. The Manual Shear Code is expecting the press to be enabled all the time.

The fix, in case this theory is correct is to enable the selected press during any Manual Shear or Press operation.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.03 5/2/2025
XL2CL 5.98.03 5/2/2025
XL220OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.98.03 5/2/2025
XL2CL 4.98.03 5/2/2025
XL220OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL220CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2 HWTest; Add debug info to comm port test
XL200

The comm port tests report passes and failures. The test alternates between expecting to see its data echoed back or not, depending on the state of the transmitter.

The test reports passes and failures. As long as the UART hardware responds to the XL, generating the appropriate interrupts, normally every other test passes. If all tests fail, it is not possible to tell if it is bcause the 386 is recieving no interrupts or if the appropriate states are not being found in the Interrupt status register in the UART.

Three new counters were added to help determine what is going on in the interrupt. The Number of ISR events are counted. The number of ISR pending (UART says it has an interrupt) are counted. The number of TX Empty interrupts are counted.

These counters will help determine not only if interrups are being recieved by the 386 but is the correct statuses are being reported by the UART hardware within the interrupt handler.

XL2; More Shape Programming Changes
XL200

Added a test to combine duplicate operations in the solution pattern into one single operation.

There are some debug print changes that are only active when the source code is used in the Eclipse Pro FindSolutions DLL.

Added a field to store the Tool X offset in the shape table. This is used to correctly offset the X offset of a set of grouped shapes. The Tool X offset is used as the group handle to calculate the resulting X Offset in the Pattern.

Removed the X offset from the Press Table. This field is not used in the controller and wasn't needed in the DLL. Eliminating it helps eliminate complexity and confusion.

Removed the Y offset from the press table and replaced it with a Y Reference Offset. This offset is used to account for the offset in the shape locations when a machine is Edge Referenced. The part operations are always converted to Center Referenced. To be comparable, the shapes need to be offset to make them center referenced as well.

Added methods to the Solution class so that all direct access to the gPart table in the DLL could be removed and replaced with calls to these methods.

Added the ability to optionally read multiple 32bit gag words from the File Import.

Added the ability to optionally specify a shape X and Y offset to the File Import.

Use the Radius tolerance when comparing Y-Offsets of non-movable shapes, looking for a handle.

Fixed an Array out of bounds error when searching backwards in a part to apply a grouped shape.

Cleaned up the debug printout for the press table to make it easier to read.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2; Shape Programming Changes
XL200

A method for converting Gag ID's to the Gag index and bit in Gag Bit arrays was added.

The Debug output for Gags was only showing gags up to gag 32.

The File import function for testing Shape Programming was not working with gags greater than 32.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 5.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2OL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
XL2CL 4.99.00 7/3/2025
EclPro; Release 5.0.25.263
Eclipse

New Features

  • Punch Pattern lengths now support entry using units. Any of the available display units are available to be entered. This functionality will be introduced in other locations in later releases. After saving, the value will be displayed using the system format. It also supports simplistic addition and subtraction. Here are some supported examples:
    • 1.5 in
    • 1-1/2"
    • 4' 8-1/8"
    • 1' 2-1/4" - 7/8"
    • 23mm
    • 2cm + 5mm

Improvements

  • Add the Switch field to the XL200 machine list and detail.
  • Alert when duplicate coil ids are found in Classic.
  • Quick Views now include links to their target views.
  • Punch patterns can now edit the Pattern Number.
  • Material Thickness can be calculated from Gauge.
  • The list of printers can now be refreshed from the printing view.

Bug Fixes

  • Machine tools list was sometime not showing data and when it did it wasn't always the current set of tools. This is fixed.
  • Operations within a pattern would only draw part of the first entry in the table. This is fixed.
  • Setting the "Experimental Features" option on System Preferences had a bug where it would 'forget' the setting when navigating back to System Preferences. This is fixed.
  • XL200 Settings were not getting saved. This is fixed.
  • Api Job Import enforces the 20 character limit on order, tooling, and material codes.
  • Public orders api would error when no query filters were sent.
  • Public orders api was including deleted orders. This is corrected.
  • Material Quick View was not displaying header information.
  • Errors when changing Controller Settings did not present on the screen. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.263 4/10/2025
XL2; Independent Punching with Hole Count Software.
XL200

When ever a hole was detected, the independent punching stopped working properly. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.02 3/28/2025
XL2OL 5.98.02 3/28/2025
XL2CL 4.98.02 3/28/2025
XL2OL 4.98.02 3/28/2025
XL2; Fix Flakey Keyboard and Mouse when SERCOS is enabled
XL200

On some controllers the Keyboard and Mouse operation becomes Flakey with SERCOS enabled, specifically when the Cyclical interrupt gets installed in SERCOS Phase 4.

In Phase 4 the SERCOS chip takes over running the operating system timer interrupt, which is a lengthy interrupt. SERCOS adds additional Timer interrupt responsibilities. There are additional interrupts that are added in this state. All of these interrupts were higher priority than the PIC Keyboard Interrupt which processes Mouse and Keyboard data. The Serial port hardware has no recieve FIFO so it is important not to delay processing the KB interrupt for too long or it will lose characters, resulting in Flakey operation.

This has been resolved by raising the priority of the KB interrupt, higher than the OS Timer interrupt and the extra SERCOS interruts. The KB interrupt is pretty small so it should not have much impact on these other interrupts.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.01 3/27/2025
XL2CL 5.98.01 3/27/2025
XL220OL 5.98.01 3/27/2025
XL220CL 5.98.01 3/27/2025
XL2OL 4.98.01 3/27/2025
XL2CL 4.98.01 3/27/2025
XL220OL 4.98.01 3/27/2025
XL220CL 4.98.01 3/27/2025
XL2; Enhanced error checking of MODBUS configuration data.
XL200

The MODBUS code reads the AMS ID and Version Level first to determine if the provided Configuration Register Address is correct. Assming the AMS ID is correct, it uses the Version Level to determine the size of the full configuration data structure and then reads it. The second read, reads the AMS ID and Version Level again.

If the first read was successful, the code assumes that the second read would also be successful and that the same AMS ID and Version level would be read the second time.

We have found that Allen Bradley PLC's that don't support MODBUS in a native way, may not respond properly on the second read. To detect this, we are now testing for communication failures on the second read. In addition, the AMS ID and Version Level between the first and second read are compared for equivelence. If they are not equivelent or there is a communication error, a descriptive error message is displayed.

The AMS ID and the Version Level of the first read are displayed int the PLC Diagnostic Screen.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Enable the Dump Table feature on Stopping Lines
XL200

The Dump Table Feature has been enabled on Stopping Lines. Some of the Dump Modes may not make sense for a Stopping Line. The user should not select those modes.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL; Added Retract after Press setting to the KMF controller
XL200

To promote adhesion, an engineer from KMF requested that we add the ability to retract the die while the Felt Applicator is being pressed against the felt and metal.

A new setting called Retract after Press has been added to the KMF controller. This setting, when non-zero, retracts the die by the programmed distance. The Applicator Vacuum is disabled and the retract starts at the end of the Press Down Dwell. The retract is active during the Press Up Dwell until the dwell expires or the retract is completed.

The Applicator Vacuum is disabled during the retract to limit the friction the pad has against the felt. The Applicator Pad maintains pressure until the Press Up Dwell expires.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL; Default the Halt on Stationary Cut setting to Never, for the KMF controller
XL200

The KMF controller has no parts to clear out of a press or any other concerns with doing a stationary cut. A default value of Never makes more sense than Allways for this controller.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL; Remove Setups that are incompatible with the KMF controller
XL200

The following settups were disabled in the KMF controller beacause they are incompatible with KMF operation.

The Hole Detector Mount setting has been disabled. The hole detect mount is by nature fixed. We are not sensing anything on the material. It is supplied by another control system. By default the setting is configured to Fixed and can no longer be changed.

The Front Shear Tool setting has been disabled. This controller will never support a front shear.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
Release 5.0.25.152
Eclipse

Bug Fixes

  • Regression in Scheduler resulted in an empty page. This is corrected.
  • The root cause of the recent regressions was identified and fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.152 3/14/2025
Release 5.0.25.147
Eclipse

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed regression where the machine print configurations were not being displayed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.147 3/13/2025
XL2; MODBUS High Level Data Memory Safety
XL200

The MODBUS code has a number of dynamic memory buffers that must be recreated on every power cycle. These memory buffers are used to only send fields when the data changes.

It was very easy to add a new buffer and forget to also add the code that forces a recreation. This has been resolved by placing all of the pointers into one memory structure. This memory structure gets cleared on a power cycle, which then causes all of the buffers to be created.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Publish Current Coil Number to PLC via MODBUS.
XL200

The Current Coil is now published via MODBUS to a PLC. Further Details are described in the MODBUS SPec.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Memory Safety for MODBUS, Coil, Item and Order records.
XL200

Added methods to the MODBUS class that are used to determine when it is safe to delete marked Coil, Item and Order Memory records.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
Release 5.0.25.139
Eclipse

Improvements

  • More consistent Public API logging.
  • Export retry action button will now send a force flag.

Bug Fixes

  • Filtering in reports was sometimes not working. This has been fixed
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.139 3/13/2025
XL2; Publishing Bundle ID via MODBUS does not work
XL200

SCN 4989 to publish the Bundle ID to the PLC was mistakenly released without testing and did not work. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL; Delay After Shear delays the clearing of the Cut Window output.
XL200

A Delay After Shear also delays the Cut Window output from turning off after a Shear. It prevents the shear task from evaluating its next shear target.

Software has been added to force it off after a shear event.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.05 3/12/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.97.05 3/12/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Scanner Verification added to all Controls
XL200

The Scanner Verification feature has been added to all controller models that have the PLC Integration (I) option. It will be available on Output 53.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
Release 5.0.25.115
Eclipse

Improvements

  • NetSuite: Export attempts will be automatically retried if a further failure will not impact inventory data.

Bug Fixes

  • Scheduler had a few regressions that are fixed: Search, Column selection.
  • Regression fix where users were unable to remove machines from a tooling definition.
  • User permissions were not being checked when bulk editing from the order list. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.115 3/7/2025
XL2CL; 8F00000E Task Error
XL200

This task error occurs if there is a new Timer interrupt prior receiving the data back from the ARM or DSP from the prior Timer interrupt.

While searching for the cause of a different task error, 8F000012, that seemed at the time like it may be SERCOS related, I discovered an issue with enabling the SERCOS cyclical interrupt. On the Closed Loop controller, to prevent the 8F00000E task error, the Timer interrupt should be disabled before enabling the SERCOS cyclical interrupt. In addition, if we are waiting on the data from a Timer interrupt, we need to receive that data prior to enabling the Cyclical interrupt.

The reason is that the Timer and the Cyclical interrupt both do the same thing, which is send new data to the DSP or ARM. We need to make sure that we wait to receive expected data from the DSP or ARM before we enable either one of these two interrupts so that we don't get one of them prior to receiving the expected data. If we don't, we may get the 8F00000E task error.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.97.04 3/5/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.97.04 3/5/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Simultaneous Press Up and Press Complete errors.
XL200

Simultaneous Press or Press Up Complete errors would not display.

Duplicate Error messages are filtered out in the user interface. Only the first instance gets dsiplayed, unless a flag to allow duplicates is used. The flag was not being used.

The second issue is that the press that is displayed was stored in a global variable, rather than a dynamic variable of some kind. This could lead to double, or more, reporting of the same press when multiple error messages are displayed, depending on the timing involved.

Both of these issues have been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Add Diagnostics for the Remote IO feature in the PC Simulation
XL200

The PC simulation has feed back when the simulated physical IO is modified. The same thing has now been added for the Simulated Remote IO.

In addition, there will be feedback when a new connection is made or when the watchdog timeout occurs on remote IO.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XLCL; Bogus Press Complete Error on a CLF configured with multiple presses.
XL200

SCN 5013 fixed an issue with the Die Stroke not being shortened on Press Completes on CLF Die Accelerators configured for multiple presses. An additional issue has now been found with the Press Complete tests that occur under the similar conditions.

To duplicate the issue, the master press on the Die needed to have a larger dwell than the slave presses. The Expect Press Complete setting needed to be configured for Yes on the master press. If the master press did not have a target and the slave press did, if its press dwell was shortened by a press complete, the master press would mistakenly report a Missing Press Complete error.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.97.03 3/5/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.97.03 3/5/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL; 8F000012 Task Error
XL200

This task error is generated if we get an extra IRQ7, which normally happens when recieve data is ready in the DSP or ARM co-processors.

The ARM co-processor API has the possibility to test if an IRQ7 interrupt is real. This is now being done on the ARM. Their may be a method to implement something similar for the DSP in the future.

If the interrupt is determined not to be real, we will leave the interrupt with no side effect and no longer generate the 8F000012 task error.

Hopefully this will resolve all cases of this issue.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.97.03 3/5/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.97.03 3/5/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Re-Map Heap Location
XL200

The Initialize data had encroached into the Heap memory start location so a remap was required.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL; Reporting the wrong press on a Press Complete Error.
XL200

Closed Loop Die Accelerators are reporting the wrong press when a Press Complete error occurs. This is only a problem when the Die Accelerator is the Second Die Accelerator or the Shear press is not on the First Die Accelerator.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.97.02 2/28/2025
XL2CL 4.97.02 2/28/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL; Done Qty not incrementing at the end of a part.
XL200

The Done Qty was not incrementing at the end of a part on the XL244CL when configured for an OpenLoop Shear and Multiple presses on a Punch Die Accelerator.

The code had a logic flaw in it that caused it to get the Gag bits and Flags for the presses on the motor that would normally be used for the shear. The flags that normally tell it that the operation requires a Decrement Quanity were not being seen as a result.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.97.01 2/27/2025
XL2CL 4.97.01 2/27/2025
Flash Wizard; Log File updates
AMS Tools

Flash Wizard has always created a log file that most people are unaware of. However, the customer version did not do so. Also, if you didn't know it created a log file, you certainly wouldn't know where to look for it or know what is named.

The log file is now created all the time. The contents are fully flushed to the file when Flash Wizard closes. The file contents are cleared out and the log file restarted when Flash Wizard re-starts. The log file will contain all of the human readable text that is typed in or displayed in the Terminal Window.

The file is saved to the user folder. Its' location and file name are displayed in the lower half of the status bar, preceded by "Log File: " to make its purpose obvious.

HWTest; Prevent C0000000 Task error when calibrating touch screen
XL200

The Touch Screen Calibrate option in the hardware test had the capability of causing a divide by zero task error if somehow the exact same X-Coordinate or Y coordinate was sensed for the two points.

The Divide By Zero condition, C0000000 task error, is now prevented with a test on the divisor. An error message will now display instead.

In addition, the Two sensed points, along with their expected position, the X and Y Scale along with the X and Y Offsets are now displayed to help with troubleshooting calibration issues.

Release 5.0.25.81
Eclipse

Bug Fixes

  • A bug where Pro imported jobs with many items might not get fully synced from Classic to Pro is fixed.
  • Fixed a regression where new and existing external connection configurations were not appearing.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.81 2/21/2025
Release 5.0.25.75
Eclipse

Bug Fixes

  • A bug where Pro imported jobs with many items might not get fully synced from Classic to Pro is fixed.
  • Fixed a regression where new and existing external connection configurations were not appearing.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.75 2/19/2025
XL2; Loss of precision when editing large unsigned integers.
XL200

The integer edit controls have to handle the data conversions that happen when the controller's display format requires conversions between its internal units and the users desired display units. This requires a conversion to floating point and then back to integer after rounding, which can result in a loss of precision, depending on the magnitude of the number involved. In most cases, the integer values are not large enough to encounter this issue.

The only case this has become an issue is when editing the controller switch setting. In this case, the integer values require all 32 bits, which cannot be converted to a float without loss of precision. This is also the only case when an unsigned integer to string conversion has been required.

A bit in the Format configuration for edit fields has been reserved as a special case to specify that a field is to be treated as an unsigned integer. In this case, no conversion to float is performed. It is expected that when this flag is used, no display unit conversion will be required.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Vertically shifted text, in numeric edit windows.
XL200

When editing numbers, the numeric text was being shifted upwards from it normal displayed position. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.97.01 2/27/2025
XL2OL 5.97.05 3/12/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.97.01 2/27/2025
XL2OL 4.97.05 3/12/2025
XL2; Add unsigned integer to string functions
XL200

The XL had no unsigned integer to string functions.

Rts_Unsigned_Integer_String has been added. All of the other inline prototype versions, available with the Signed version, have been added as well.

Rts_Format_String has also been updated to accept the "%u" option for specifying an unsigned integer conversion.

Also, the Logger::printf method now accepts the %u option for unsigned integers.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
FlashDoctor; FlashDoctor; Add XL244HCL-MR2 to the available Closed Loop Models
AMS Tools

Added XL244HCL-MRE2 to the available controller models.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.42 6/5/2025
XL2CL; Added MRE2 version of the XL244HCL

This change creates a Hole Detect version of the XL244CL-MRE2. It is called the XL244HCL-MRE2. It is identical in all respects to the XL244CL-MRE2 except it has the Hole Detection capability enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
FlashDoctor; Add XL244CL-MR2 to the available Closed Loop Models
AMS Tools

Added XL244CL-MRE2 to the available controller models.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.42 6/5/2025
XL2CL; Added MRE2 version of the XL244CL.
XL200

Added an MRE2 version of the XL244CL. This version enables the DIP switches required to configure each die among the various MRE2 DA types and the Linear DA types. It also displays he Model string as XL244CL-MRE2 to indicate the availablilty of the rotary die types.

The XL244CL die types will always be Linear. The XL244CL-MRE2 die types default to Crank Shear but can be configured for any of the other rotary DA types or Linear DA types. An XL244CL-MRE2 is identical to an XL244CL in all other ways.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL; Missing Tolerance Mode setup.
XL200

On MRE2 models, the type of Die Accelerator can be chosen for each Die. When the Shear was configured for one of the rotary models and the Punch was confiured as a linear DA, the tolerance mode setup was not available for the Punch. This has been resolved. If any DA is configured as a linear DA, the Tolerance mode will now be present.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2; Adding capability for an additional 32 bits of Switch settings.
XL200

At least one of our models has exhausted the 32 bits of Switch configuration. This change adds the possibility of an additional 32 bits for a total of 64.

The Switch configuration screen now displays 40 Switch bits. More can be added as needed in the future. An additional Switch data entry field has been added to support data entry in decimal format for the extra 32 bits. The two decimal data entry fields are labeled 1-32 and 33-64.

The Switch setting now displays both decimal fields seperated by a dash. Switch for bits 1-32 are displayed first, followed by a dash and then Switch for bits 33-64 are displayed.

A new hidden setup for bits 33-64 has been created to allow Eclipse to save and display the Switch setting for the additional bits. Its name is "Switch2".

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 5.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL2CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220OL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
XL220CL 4.98.00 3/24/2025
Release 5.0.25.39
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Changes to Integration now requires the Administrator role.
  • Upgrade to .net 9.0.1.

Bug Fixes

  • job-editor-quantity user role was not in the list, meaning users could not be granted that role. This is corrected.
  • Regression bug preventing new external connection configuration has been corrected.
  • Coil Scrap Breakdown Report was sometimes not showing all the coils. This is fixed.
  • Order Sequence report print view was blank. This is fixed.
  • Punch patterns with macros were not showing the macro name correctly. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.39 2/7/2025
XL2CL; Reverse Tuning Parameters on Hydraulic CL Die Accelerator.
XL200

A Closed Loop Die Accelerator that relies on a Hydraulic Cylinder potentially has a bi-directional tuning problem due the different surface areas on either side of the Hydraulic Piston. We have had the Hydraulic Option that adds features like Dither and Deadband for hydraulics, but we have never had directional tuning parameters for Loop Gain, Lag Compensation, and Acceleration Feed Forward.

When the Hydraulic Option is enabled, this change adds Reverse Loop Gain, Reverse Lag Compensation and Reverse Acceleration Feed Forward settings for Standard Linear Die Accelerators.

When Switching any of these values, they must be switched when the Loop is in a stable stationary state, or the Loop will generate ugly jumps in the Velocity Command signal (Analog). To provide a period when the Loop is in a stable state, there must be a pause in the Setpoint generation between direction changes. There will be a small, nearly imperceptible pause when switching directions when the reverse tuning parameters are used. This pause is incompatible with the Multi-Hit Die Accelerator option so these parameters will be unavailable in that application. A standard linear Die Accelerator will be the only application that is supported.

Intelligent Die Home Positioning is also technically incompatible with reverse tuning. However, since the die moves very slowly during the period when it is shifting for minor line speed fluctuations , I am hopeful that it won't be a problem.

Reverse Loop Gain defaults to zero. When Reverse Loop Gain is zero, the standard Loop Gain will be used in both directions.

There is no Lag integral in the reverse direction. This could conceivably be added as an improvement in the future. The customer that is waiting for these parameters is unable to use the forward integral. It doesn't make sense to delay them for an option they cannot use.

Reverse Lag Compensation defaults to zero. When Reverse Lag Compensation is zero, the standard Lag Compensation will be used in both directions, assuming Lag on Die Return is enabled.

Reverse Acceleration Feed Forward defaults to zero. When Reverse Acceleration Feed Forward is zero, the standard Acceleration Feed Forward will be used in both directions, assuming Lag on Die Return is enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XLCL; Press Dwell issues on a CLF configured with multiple presses.
XL200

The CLF and CLF-MHA controller are configurable to have multiple presses on the same Die Accelerator. When configured this way, each press is supposed to have an independent press dwell. There was an issue with the Press Complete and Up Complete inputs. They terminated the Press Cycles on the extra presses but they did not shorten the Die Stroke. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.96.03 2/3/2025
XL2CL 4.96.03 2/3/2025
Pathfinder; Added New 5226 Releases
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.28.3597 4/15/2025
Pathfinder; Added New RAS Configurations and Updated Others
Pathfinder

Changes made to Pathfinder V5.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.28.3597 4/15/2025
XL HWTest; Touchscreen/Mouse changes
XL200

There are two main changes.

  1. The number of Touchscreen/Mouse messages recieved is displayed as Mouse Count in the Keyboard and Touchscreen test results.
  2. Five new status bits are displayed with the Keyboard PIC software version. They are Touchscreen, PS/2 Keyboard Reset, PS/2 Mouse Reset, Master PIC, and PS/2 Port Swap. Each status bit results in a Detected or Not Detected status.
Eclipse Pro Release: Version 5.0.25.16
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Delay Summary report now prints each group on it's own page.

Bug Fixes

  • Do not show Warehouse alerts if Pro is not licensed for Warehouse.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.16 1/21/2025
XL2OL; System Ready not protecting Manual Press and Shear operations.
XL200

The System Ready input was not protecting Manual Shear or Manual Press operations. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.96.02 1/21/2025
XL2OL 5.96.02 1/21/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.96.02 1/21/2025
XL2OL 4.96.02 1/21/2025
XL2; Run Output Stuck on with Missing E-Stop or System Ready input.
XL200

For a No E-Stop or System Ready Input error message, the Run output was stuck ON until the error message was cleared.

This was caused due to the error message function call being configured to wait for the message to be cleared. It was changed to the no wait type, which resolved the issue.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.02 1/21/2025
XL2CL 5.96.02 1/21/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.96.02 1/21/2025
XL2CL 4.96.02 1/21/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
Release 5.0.25.2
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Coil detail view could crash the browser in certain situations. This is fixed.
  • Added Complete % column to the wide Scheduler view.
  • Upgraded to .Net 9.

Bug Fixes

  • Bundle print startup would fail when there were a very large number of completed bundles.
  • Andon Config regression bug where not all sequences would be shown after deleting one.
  • Andon Config regression bug where sequence panels could not be reordered, and the new panel list was so long it would often run off the bottom of the screen.
  • Punch Pattern view had a regression where the XL pattern list would throw errors.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.25.2 1/17/2025
Pathfinder; Added New Jorns Flex Configurations using SSI Encoders
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.28.3597 4/15/2025
Pathfinder; Added New Jorns Twin Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.28.3597 4/15/2025
XL2; Force Opposing Axes to be configured for opposite sides of the machine.

Opposing Axes are assumed to be on opposite, Positive or Negative, sides of the machine. All of the software for resolving Opposing Axis conflicts is written with this assumption. The results of this assumption not being true are unpredicctable.

The Crashable Surface setting on an Opposing Axis is used to identify which axis is on which side of the center line of the machine. A new test and error message was added to check for settings that result in both of the Opposing Axes being configured for the same side.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Crashable Surface value test added for Linked Axes.
XL200

The Crashable Surface setting for a Tool Axis is used to determine which side of the machine, positive or negative, an axis resides. It is a Y-Offset that defines the surface that will crash into the Opposing Axis, if present. In order to be used for its intended pupose, it is expected to be greater than or less than all of the Tool or Location Y-Offsets .

A test and error message was added to make sure the Crashable Surface setting for an Opposing Axis meets these requirements. The test is a permissive for entering the run mode.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Prevent a Tool Axis from referencing itself as a Linked Axis with an appropriate error message.
XL200

There was a test to prevent a Tool Axis from Referencing itself as its own Opposing Axis. However, it was reporting an Axis Id Limits error that was not entirely helpful. An explicit error message for that exact condition is now displayed instead..

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL244CL; With 5 presses in total and two Die Accelerators enabled, Press 4 Up complete interferes.
XL200

With 5 presses in total, including the shear, and two Die Accelerators enabled, Press 4 Up complete interferes with Die 2 Jog Fwd.

There are no unused inputs available. Jog Die 2 Fwd is not an optional input so Press 4 Up Complete will not be available in this instance.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.96.01 1/10/2025
XL2CL 4.96.01 1/10/2025
XL2; Prevent a validated coil from having its material corrected in the Wrong Coil Loaded Screen.
XL200

When a Material missmatch is detected between a Coil and an Order, the Wrong Coil Loaded screen is displayed. There are valid use cases, depending on controller settings and setup lockout conditions where the coil gets assigned a material the first time it is used on a controller. It may have been assigned the wrong material. The Correct option is provided to correct this. However, if Eclipse has validated the coil, this option does not make sense and will now be disabled.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Fix bogus Error 262 "SERCOS Drive ... Disabled or Failed to Enable...".
XL200

This was caused on Multi-Axis machines with SERCOS Multi-Axis drives on a CL controller with analog Feeder or Die Accelerator.

A flag was getting set that should only get set on a SERCOS Feeder or DA. This flag was mistakenly getting set by the code that enables the Feeder or DA drive. This flag resulted in the bogus error message. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Add ability to clear Machine Setup Axis overrides.
XL200

Machine Axis Setups can be overriden, however, there was no explicit way to clear out the override once or if it is no longer desired.

A new option has been added to the Setup\Setup Machine Axes menu. F5-Clear Overrides has been added. It will present a window prompt with four button options, Close, Material, PCode and Both.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Material Machine Setup overrides were not being cleared properly.
XL200

It is sometimes neccessary to override the Material Machine Setup. This is supposed to be a temporary override until a new material is encountered. However, the override was not being properly cleared. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Added more information to "Possible Machine Setup Conflict" window.
XL200

On a Multi-Axis machine, the machine may have Material Setup axes that need to be positioned based on the material. The material of the Coil, the material of the Order and the that the machine is configured for must match or the "Possible Machine Setup Conflict" window will appear. There are cases when the material of the coil may not match the material of the order due to limited coil inventory and a substitution is made. There may be other reasons why all three don't match.

When the coil material and the order material do not match, the screen will now display both, so that an operator is able to determine if the current material machine setup is compatible with both of them. The operator is able to cancel or indicate that the current material machine setup is ok to be used with the coil and the order, which is treated as an override.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Add timer to Setup Lockout test on Wrong Coil Loaded window
XL200

The Wrong Coil Loaded window has a test of the Setup Lockout statet to determine if the Override or Correct buttons are enabled. This test was only present when the form initially opened. The test is now implemented with a timer to allow a transition of the lockout state to apply to the buttons for the duration of the form's life.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
Release 5.0.24.533
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.533

Improvements

  • Metric Configuration changes appear on the Dashboard immediately. Browser refresh no longer required.

Bug Fixes

  • Enable Material Tasks system preference would not always show it's true value. This is corrected.
  • NetSuite: Fixed an issue with the new NetSuite API version.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.533 12/19/2024
XL2; PLC Item User field 3 and 4 bugs.
XL200

The displayed field sizes for Item User Field's 3 and 4 were being populated with zero.

The memory for populating the PLC Item User Field 3 and 4 was not being initialized. This appears to have effectively prevented these fields from being sent to the PLC.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
Release 5.0.24.520
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.520

Improvements

  • NetSuite integrations now use api version 2024.1.

Bug Fixes

  • Regression in order rebundling caused an error about "...-1...". This is fixed.
  • The Default Coil Template was not getting saved.
  • Orders were not always getting deleted.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.520 12/16/2024
XL2; Publish Item User Fields 5-8 to a PLC using MODBUS.
XL200

Item user fields 5-8 can now be published to a PLC using the MODBUS interface using version level 128. Further details are in the XL200 PLC Interface document.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Publish the Bundle ID to the PLC using MODBUS.
XL200

The Bundle ID can now be published to a PLC using the MODBUS feature. It is enabled in Version Level 128. Further details are documented in the MODBUS Spec.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220; Enable Manual Operations Window
XL200

Enable the Manual Operations Window in the XL220 OL and CL.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2; Add Bundle Print feature via MODBUS and Manual Operations screen.
XL200

Prior to this change, a new Bundle Ticket Print could be initiated via the F3 function in the Bundle Ticket Diagnostic screen.

This change adds and extended MODBUS input and/or a Bundle pushbutton in the Manual Operations diagnostic window.

The Bundle pushbutton is available all the time, even if the Bundle Ticket option is not enabled or a Bundle Print driver is not selected.

The extended MODBUS input is available anytime the MODBUS option is present and Extended IO is enabled. This allows a new BundleID to be generated manualy on controllers that are using Eclipse Based Bundle Tickets..

The extended IO MODBUS input is input 56.

Just like the Print Bundle Ticket option in the Bundle Ticket Diagnostic screen, the line must be halted or the request will be rejected wth an error message.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL220CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
Eclipse Pro Release: Version 5.0.24.505
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.505

Improvements

  • Improvement for printing a single machine dashboard. Schedule information is hidden.
  • Add shift selection to Scrap and Delay Summary reports.

Bug Fixes

  • On order importing Pro was flagging previously deleted orders as updates to an existing order, which triggered more stringent validation and ultimately rejection. Pro now correctly treats these as new orders.
  • The percent complete on the scheduler showed a bogus value.
  • Dashboard "Next, Current, Done" grid would show bogus values when the schedule did not have data. This is fixed.
  • Dashboard Production Log had a regression preventing the selection of visible columns. This is corrected.
  • Machine Performance Standards bug prevented setting values.
  • Production Summary report was not correctly sizing columns on smaller screens. This is improved.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.505 12/11/2024
Eclipse Pro; Find Solutions Edits
Eclipse
  1. Find Solutions was modified to support 128 extended gags to match the new XL capability.

  2. Bring over GCC compiler edits so that the Source code stays the same between the XL and Eclipse.

  3. Removed the Pre-Compiled header file option so that the pch.h header does not need to be included, which keeps the source the same between the XL and Eclipse.

  4. Merged Eclipse edits into the XL Source.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 5.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2OL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
XL2CL 4.97.00 2/7/2025
5226; Retract Gripper Backstops if Not in Automatic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The Jorns double folder machines Eco and Pro have 4 positions for the backstop that can be reached through 2 outputs controlled by the 5226. These positions can be reached by selecting the position in the part step. The problem is that once out of automatic the backstop position will stay in place. This can cause confusion if the user is trying to modify the offset of the backgauge since it is not the zero point of the backstop.

The fix was to have the gripper backstops return to the zero point if not in automatic.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.17 4/15/2025
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.16 4/15/2025
XL2; Fixed Crash when clicking on a Grid that is Locked by Eclipse
XL200

The controls that populate a Grid were not properly protecting themselves from touchscreen or mouse events when a record chain is locked by Eclipse. They would try to open an edit control with a pointer that was pointing to a string rather than a record class. This resulted in a Crash on the windows PC simulation. The results are upredicatble on the actual controller hardware. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Decreased Probability of Tailout in Million Monkeys Test
XL200

The probobility of a tailout has been reduced by 80% in the Million Monkeys test. This increases the amount of time that the screens and user interface can test non-coil related activities.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Controller Crash when making Language Selection.
XL200

When making a language selection, a modal window is displayed with all of the possible options. The Main Window and Function Key menu was not being locked out, which allowed the main window to be replaced while the language selection was open. Once the language window was closed, the windows PC simulation would crash. The results are unpredictable on the controller hardware.

This has been resolved by locking out the Main Menu and Function keys as is standard practice in all other Modal Window instances.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Controller Crash when clearing Auxiliary Controller Memory
XL200

When clearing Auxilliary Controllers memory, there is a 10 second copuntd down window that self closes. If any other Modal window displayed itself over the top t when the count down window closed, a memory crash would occur.

The Windows simulation would crash. The actual effects on the controller hardware are unpredictable.

This has been resolved by preventing the window from self closing until it has focus.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Multi-Axis Machine Setup Screen edits
XL200

The Multi-Axis Machine Setup Screen allows the machine to be configured for both Product Code and Material Code selections.

Several changes were made.

  1. There must be both Product Codes and Material Codes defined or an appropriate error message will be displayed, preventing entry into the screen.

  2. Both the Product Code and Material Code chains must be locked or an appropriate error message will be displayed, blocking entry to the screen.

  3. If no Item is available to pre-populate the Product Code and Material Code selections, the current machine setup selections will be pre-populated.

  4. Both a Product Code and Material Code selection is required before the Move button can be selected. Any attempt will be blocked by an appropriate error message.

  5. At least one machine axis setup had to be defined before the Machine Setup would show complete. This is no longer a requirement.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Potential memory corruption with Tree Node selection timer.
XL200

To facilitate efficient navigation within the tree list of every screen in the XL, there is a timer that is used to delay when the right hand side of the screen is populated based on the current tree list selection. The timer is reset on every key stroke until the user pauses key strokes long enough for the timer to expire and then the right hand window is populated. If this timer did not exist, a user would have to wait a noticable amount of time for the right hand window to populate, in between each keystroke.

This timer, combined with the addition of "Are you Sure?" windows and other window prompts, opened the door for race conditions where code for an object is running with pointers on the stack that can then be deleted during the window prompts execution.

This was resolved by testing to see if the main widow has focus before acting on the timer expiration. If the window does not have focus, a flag is set that will refresh the window once it does.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Memory Issues with empty combobox lists
XL200

Expanding and then closing a combo box that has no entries in its list resulted in invalid memory use.

In the windows simulation this caused a memory fault. On the XL200 hardware, the results are unpredictable.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; GCC Compiler Edits
XL200

A number of software edits were made to eliminate compiler errors and warnings when compiling the source code with the GCC MinGW toolset. This was done in preperation of porting/sharing source code with the next generation controller that will run on an Arm processor and use the GCC compiler for ARM.

All of the edits were made with the intent that the change is equivelent in functionality or to disable inline assembly that will be relpaced with C++ equivelent code in the next gen controller.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Bogus Error 283.
XL200

Error 283 was added to check for multiple presses trying to control the same axis, which is not supported. When implemented, it also mistakenly reported an error if multiple tools on the same press used the same Axis, which is supported. This has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.04 12/2/2024
XL2CL 5.95.04 12/2/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.95.04 12/2/2024
XL2CL 4.95.04 12/2/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Integer edit controls failed to properly use the Display Format setting
XL200

The integer edit window failed to use the Display Format setting when editing and displaying metric values.

This issue was discovered when a customer was trying to edit the Velocity at Max Analog setting.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.04 12/2/2024
XL2CL 5.95.04 12/2/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.95.04 12/2/2024
XL2CL 4.95.04 12/2/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Compatibility Edits for GCC compiler
XL200

The next generation controller software will be compiled with the GCC compiler. A good portion of the source code has been modified to compile with the original Borland compiler and the GCC compiler.

XL2CL; Lockups and resets with EtherCAT and SERCOS on second drive.
XL200

SCN 4952 - changed the timing on testing for drives to become fully enabled or disabling themselves.

This change worked on the first drive but relied on memory initialization that failed to work for subsequent drives. This resulted in an infinite loop of error messages that caused lockups and resets during memory test due to memory usage.

This same bug was present with EtherCAT and SERCOS enabled controllers. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.03 11/15/2024
XL2CL 5.95.03 11/15/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.95.03 11/15/2024
XL2CL 4.95.03 11/15/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL; Added Press Up Delay Settings
XL200

In some instances, Motors or Motor Contactors need time to stop or disengauge before switching press directions.

This feature is being implemented only on Open Loop Feed to Stop controllers for now due to the emergency nature of the need. It will be implemented on Closed Loop and Non-Stop applications in the future as we have time or need.

New Up Delay settings have been added for any Press with an Up Output. These settings will provide a delay between turning off the Press Down output and the Press Up output.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.02 11/14/2024
XL2CL 5.95.03 11/15/2024
XL2OL 4.95.02 11/14/2024
XL2CL 4.95.03 11/15/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Cut Window output stuck ON.
XL200

The Cut Window output was always stuck ON, once the feature was enabled by the setup.

This bug was caused by storing some of the variables required for its operation in the setup class. However, the setup object gets stored in Flash, which is read only, making the variables read only. This is not detected when testing on a windows simulation that has no Flash.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.01 11/14/2024
XL2OL 4.95.01 11/14/2024
Pathfinder: Fix jog buttons that might not turn off
Pathfinder

Various jog buttons were such that if a user drug their finger off the button before lifting the finger off the screen, the axis might keep moving. This is corrected.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.27.3592 11/12/2024
XL2CL; Manual Punch input lost its cancel capability.
XL200

A Closed Loop Die Accelerator, for safety reasons, requires that the Manual Shear or Manual Punch input be maintaned during the entire operation. It can take some time for the die to reference and the press to fire. Requiring that the input be maintained allows the operation to be canceled at any time by lifting the button. It also prevents an operator from initiating the operation and then getting in harms way by keeping them close to the button.

SCN 4847 merged the Open Loop and CLosed Loop input tasks togther into one source file. The safety Maintain safety feature on the Manual Press input was lost during this merge. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.95.03 11/15/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.95.03 11/15/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Increased PLC expanded gag upper limit.
XL200

The number of available expanded gag words in the PLC interface has chnaged from 4 Words to 8 Words. This increases the number of expanded gags from 64 to 128. Depending on the number of presses defined, there are now a total of 139 gags available.

The Press Information diagnostic screen has been modified to correctly display the state of all 128 expanded gags.

Updated the Press Information Diagnostic screen to also show the Local Gags. Local Gags are displayed with a Red heading. The Local heading, for the count of local pressed and gags is also displayed in Red to imply that Red Headings indicate local.

Reorganized the Press/Die table in the Press Information Diagnostic screen to allow for the space used by the additional gags.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Increase number of item user fields
XL200

The number of item user fields has increased from 4 to a total of 8.

In the program and status screens, the background color of the Order User Field Screen has changed from Light Grey to Dark Grey, to help distinguish if the Order fields or the Item fields are being displayed.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; Increase Pattern ID upper range from 999 to 32765.
XL200

The upper range of pattern numbers were increased from 999 up to 32765, which is almost the upper range of the value that can be stored in a 16 bit signed integer.

The full range is not used to prevent compiler warnings in some limits comparison code.

The lower range of macro pattern numbers remain the same, depending on the controller option. The upper range of macro patterns remains fixed at 999. Patterns 1000 through 32765 will be treated as standardl patterns.

A new set of Pattern UART commands were added to handle the larger number of digits required with the large pattern range.

The lower case "OIc" and "OIl" for item creation and upload were modified.

The Type 1 production record was modified to allow enough digits for the new pattern range.

A number of fomatted strings and error messages were also modified to allow for the larger range.

The larger range is only accessible if the controller is communicating to Eclipse and Eclipse has set its UART version of 3.65 or higher. Otherwise, the upper range will still be 999. This limitation prevents issues where newer controllers are communicating with a version of Eclipse that does not support the higher range.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
Release 5.0.24.374
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.374

New Features

  • Pathfinder Dashboard: View completed parts and total operations from Pathfinder machines.

Improvements

  • Added support for RavenDB 6.2.

Bug Fixes

  • Production Summary report printed layout was total broken. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.374 11/5/2024
XL2; New Controller Backup Mode
XL200

A new Backup mode has been added.

The Eclipse Status window is now enabled all the time. This allows constant access to a new option, F5-Start Backup Mode. When selected, the controller reboots with known IP settings, Network Unit ID and Eclipse Source. Network Unit ID will be configured as unit 1. Eclipse Source will be configured for Ethernet. The Ip Address will be configured as xx.xx.xx.xx. The IP Subnet Mask will be configured as 255.255.255.00. The IP Gateway will be configured as 0.0.0.0. This allows a new backup tool to use Eclipse commands on the ethernet port to backup or restore the controller without changing any settings. While in this mode, the controller boots up into the Eclipse Status window and is not allowed to leave. In addition, the only available function key option changes to F5-End Backup Mode.

When F5-End Backup Mode is selected, the controller will reboot again and will use the original Eclipse communication settings, or any new Eclipse communication settings that were downloaded.

On EtherCAT enabled controllers, while in the backup mode, the ethernet port is configured for Eclipse access. When the backup mode ends, the ethernet port will revert to EtherCAT access.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220OL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL220CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL; Continuous Press Tolerance Reporting Change
XL200

On a Feed to Stop Controller, the Tolerance setup controls when the press turns ON. The press will not be turned ON unless the material is within Tolerance.

On a Continuous press contoller, when the press is already ON, there is nothing the controller can do to improve tolerance. The way the tolerence test was implemented, the number that was being captured would improve when using a smaller Tolerance setting. This was missleading.

When the press is already ON, the tolerance will now be captured when the Feed Angle input transitions from ON to OFF. Assuming this Feed Angle input transition is properly adjusted in the press controller, this is the point (or close to it) where the press hits the material and is a true reflection of the positioning tolerance.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL; Allow Feed to Stop mode on XL200HCL
XL200

Up until now, the XL200HCL only supported configuration as a Die Accelerator. Now the controller can also detect holes in a Feed to Stop mode.

The sensor must be far enough away that the material can stop using the programmed acceleration plus whatever time is required to process the hole and fill in a part. Beyond that, it should work like any other Hole Detect Controller.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2CL 4.96.00 12/10/2024
XL2; 8E0034CA Task Error
XL200

This task error occurs when certain bogus memory addresses are used. It only happens on the actual hardware, not in a PC simulation. On the PC simulation, an exception is generated and the simution will shutdown.

Some of these were generated by the User Interface edit controls if an edit resulted in any sort of modal window being displayed. The Modal window opens up a new, and recursive, message processing loop that has the possibility of deleting the edit window or supporting controls objects in memory. If there is more code to run, that uses anything in the object, this task error or memory corruption can result. Code in many of the edit controls that are susceptable to this was moved arround to minimize or eliminate the potential effects.

The main cause of these issues was due to refreshing (repopulating) the tree or grid controls in the main windows due to some asynchronous event like the setup lockout key or the coil tailout input when the Grid or Tree is in the background due to an error message or any other sort of prompt. The solution to this was to redraw the existing controls (setup lockout) or delay the refresh until the Main Window regains focus.

Refreshing is required when new elements are added or deleted that the grid needs to display.

Redrawing is acceptable when new elements have not been added or removed. We just want to update the appearance due to a value change or to indicate that an object is no longer editable like setups.

Redrawing can be an imperfect, but safe, alternative, until a Refresh can be done safely.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Million Monkeys test stopping in Memory Test on PC simulation
XL200

By design, the Million Monkeys test causes a reset on every other memory test when running on the hardware. A reset on the PC simulation has no meaning. The code that was implementing this feature was causing the test to stop in the Windows Simulation. This has been resolved by conditionally removing the problem code from the simulation.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Loading a new Coil with the same number as an old coil caused memory corruption.
XL200

When a new coil is loaded(using various methods), the new coil is created, given a name and then passed to a common function that checks to see if a pre-existing coil exists in the controllers coil inventory that uses the same name. If a pre-existing coil is found, the new coil is deleted and the pre-existing coil becomes the current coil. This function had a bug in its argument list. It had a pointer for the new coil rather than a pointer to a pointer. If the coil had been replaced, and the calling code used the pointer to the deleted coil, memory would be corrupted.

This bug was resolved by changing the argument list of the function to require a pointer to pointer so that the calling code would have its pointer modified when a pre-exiting coil was found.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Null String Handling
XL200

Several changes have been made to UI edit controls and UE edit functions to handle Null strings as empty strings.

  1. The License Code setup needed modification.
  2. The AmsNumber Class needed modification
  3. Several string functions in the PEG Graphics library needed modification.

These issues did not general casue major problems on the Hardware. However, in the windows simulation, they cause exceptions.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Change the Fomat String Functions handling of a Null string pointer.
XL200

The Format String function, unlike many of our other OS string functions, was not treating a Null string ptr like an empty string. On the hardware this would result in a garbage string being displayed. On the PC Simulation, it results in an excepion. Niether is desirable.

This has been resolved by substituting an empty string..

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Force Eclipse to backup all record chains.
XL200

A new option has been added to the Eclipse Diagnostic Screen. The option is labled "F4-Request Backup".

This option flags all record chains for needing backup. On the next status request, Eclipse will see the flags and respond by backing up each of the chains that have requested backup.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
Pathfinder; Built in Wrong File for 5226 rev F Firmware
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.27.3592 11/12/2024
Eclipse Pro Release: 5.0.24.312
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.312

Bug Fixes

  • Pro did not account for backups of Setups occasionally having duplicate entries. Now it does.
  • Wallboard would occasionally stop updating when a machine had no schedule. This is corrected.
  • Warehouse views would freeze for users with many 'truck' locations defined. We removed 'trucks' as a location type.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.312 10/14/2024
XL2: SERCOS and EtherCAT Enable Testing Timing Adjustments
XL200

Prior to this change SERCOS and EtherCAT drives were allowed 100msec to indicate that they were under torque after being enabled. If the drive faulted and disabled itself, the same 100 msec timeout was used.

A customer recently had an issue with a drive where the 100msec was not enough time for the drive to report that it was under torque. Several changes were made.

  1. The time that a drive is allowed to report that it is under torque after being enabled has been increased to 1000msec.
  2. Once under torque, if torque is lost, the error will be detected and reported within 50msec.
  3. A feedback loop has been added to the enable request. The enable request will no longer wait for a fixed timeout. It will wait until the drive is under torque, or an error occurs, whichever comes first.
  4. The windows simulation was modified to be able to test all these new features.
Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Vendor Code Field
XL200

A customer requested a Vendor Code field that they could use for their own internal purposes. It is a 32bit unsigned integer value.

This value is displayed in the System Information Screen. It can be set with the UART ME command. It comes back from the controller as one of eight hidden setup parameters at the beginning of the setup chain. The format of the setup value is visible, set, and returned in hex format.

For PC Simuation purposes, the Vendor code can be set with a command line argument, if desired.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; New Remote IO interface for Scottsdale
XL200

This interface is being added for Scottsdale but it is not limited in use to them.

It is available only on V5 controllers because it is only through the Ethernet Port.

The interface allows inputs to be turned on in parallel with the discrete inputs on the controller, similar to MODBUS inputs. It reports back the discrete outputs states and the OR'd state of the discrete and Remote Inputs.

It has a 1 second watch dog timer to ensure safety if there is a loss of communication on the Remote IO interface..

Full details on the interface and the Remote IO Protocol are documented in a One-Note page in the XL200 Notebook.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
5226; Bug Fix for Switching to Alternate Gripper from Regular Gripper
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The Jorns Twinmatic has and additional alternate gripper to go along with its regular sheet gripper. This alternate gripper is usually used to grip over material that is not lying flat to grip onto. In Pathfinder you can change the gripper mode to use this gripper in any step. In the 5226 the controller will see it’s an alternate gripper step and check if the last step was not an alternate gripper step. This informs the controller the part needs to be released for the switch to the new gripper. A bug was created sometime after testing where it seems extra code was inserted by accident causing the controller to just continue on with the regular gripper. This has been fixed.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.17 4/15/2025
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.16 4/15/2025
XL2; Negative sign bug
XL200

There was a bug with the negative sign in number controls when all or part of a number was selected. The selected portion of the number was not being deleted.

This is the expected behavior when the negative sign key is used.

If a negative sign is part of the selected text, the selected text will be deleted and the negative sign preserved.

If the selected text contains a decimal point and removing the text would violate the data format of the number, the negative sign key will be ignored.

If a negative sign is not part of the selected text, the negative sign key will invert the polarity of the number. Provided the decimal point rul is not violated, the selected text will be deleted.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; KeyPad '5' key bug
XL200

In the Windows Simulation, the '5' key on the keypad was not mapped to anything, so it did nothing. The key is now mapped to the '5' character and not affected by shift or caps lock.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Simple Zanasi Z4xx driver enhancements
XL200

To aid in the configuration and troubleshooting of a Zanasi Z4xx printer, the following changes were made.

The F2-Test Print function has been re-enabled, to make it easier to troubleshoot or verify RS232 communication between the 6370 and the printer.

The Printer Status screen will now repeatedly request the 6370 software version so that the TX count and the Err Count fields in the Printer Status screen can be used to verify RS485 communication between the XL and the 6370 board.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Added support for a Mitsubishi J5 series EtherCAT CoE drive
XL200

EtherCAT Supports two standard protocols for Servo Drives, SoE and CoE. SoE is, a Servo specific protocol. CoE supports Servos by using the CiA 402 standard for servos which defines a set of Object ID's and functionality.

Support was added for CoE servos but specifically only the Mitsubishi J5 series drives. Support for other manufactures will have to be enabled and tested on a case-by-case basis.

Some non-standard (Manufacturer Specific) Object Id's had to be used to support the drive.

For Scaling the drive, I would have liked to use the CiA standard object 0x6080 but Mitsubishi did not provide a way to set it in their parameters. I had to use 0x2108 instead, which maps to their PT08 Overspeed Alarm setting.

There is no standard way of enabling or disabling Absolute Encoder Evaluation. I had to use Object ID 0x2003, which maps to PA03.

There is a One-Note on the Mitsubishi J5 that describes everything else required to commission a drive.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
Release 5.0.24.209
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.209

Improvements

  • Order importing is now more robust. It now supports the following import modes: InsertOnly, AllowUpsert, CompleteOrderReplacement
  • Added Lbs Per Foot to the Material list.

Bug Fixes

  • Scheduler machine tabs were not always showing the correct machine.
  • Quality Audit report was not showing the correct value.
  • D365 connection was using an invalid object to test for connectivity.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.209 9/19/2024
XL2CL; Delay After Shear Min. Cycle setup bug
XL200

The Delay After Shear Min. Cycle feature was not working in the Closed Loop. The time was not being reset in the correct place. Every other part seemed to not have the delay or it was much longer than expected.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.94.04 9/18/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.94.04 9/18/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL; Add units to CL Data Screen, X and Y axis.
XL200

Units were added to the X and Y axis in the Close Loop Data Screen. The Y axis has units of "%". The X axis has units of "ms".

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
Pathfinder; Copy JornsHyperDriveFlex into Folder and Updates to the Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Made some changes and added some freatures to configuration. Also needed to add code to have the configuration copied into the all configuration folder at Pathfinder startup.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.26.3557 9/10/2024
Pathfinder; Added New 5226 Firmware Releases
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Added rev F V4.04.16 and rev G V5.00.15.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.26.3557 9/10/2024
Release 5.0.24.142
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.142

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed issue when trying to bulk delete more than 200 orders.
  • Fixed adjustment calculation when synchronizing coils.
  • Fixed width of Schedule Downtimes on the Run Block chart.
  • Warehouse: sometimes the loading spinner would not go away.
  • Warehouse: machine filters were not working.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.142 9/10/2024
Release 5.0.24.110
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.110

Improvements

  • Order Sequence Report improvements:
    • Summaries now consistently line up.
    • Summary lines stand out more.
    • The last used report type is remembered.
    • The report can now be filtered by the On Machine status of an order.
  • Bundling rules are now sorted.
  • Warehouse Wallboard can now optionally filter tasks by machine.
  • Add weight to coil screens.

Bug Fixes

  • Regression: Order Detail Change Def dialog stopped working. This is fixed.
  • Order Details no longer visually reverts field edits before saving.
  • Order Detail edits would sometimes clear out inline edits. This is fixed.
  • Order Sequence Report no longer shows completed orders.
  • User entered orders in Classic were not always syncing to Pro. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.110 9/2/2024
XL2CL; MHA controller wont Punch or Cut
XL200

The "SCN 4931 - Cross Weld scrap handling on the Tube Mill option." broke the MHA controllers. They would not Cut or Punch in automatic. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.94.03 8/28/2024
XL2CL 4.94.03 8/28/2024
XL2; 8F000020 Task Error converted to an Error Message
XL200

The 8F000020 task error gets displayed when a V4 or V5 controller gets programmed with the wrong software. The Graphical user interface has not yet been initiated when this is has to be tested.

Rather than a non-descript task error, since the cause is cut and dry, a blue screen with the following text will be displayed. Depending on the Hardware, the "V5" and "V4" text will be swapped.

"!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!" "!!!! !!!!" "!!!! Hardware/Software Miss-Match !!!!" "!!!! !!!!" "!!!! V5 software has been loaded into V4 hardware. !!!!" "!!!! Power Cycle and Re-Flash with V4 software. !!!!" "!!!! !!!!" "!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!"

Relase 5.0.24.57
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.57

Improvements

  • Eclipse enforced setups removed the locked setting (now anything that is set is locked). The desired changes are more reliably sent to the controller.
  • Bundle tags now have Tooling (PCode) details.
  • Agent will only accept modification actions from the localhost machine.
  • Guest user logins now redirect to the requested URL.

Bug Fixes

  • Uncategorized Scrap was sometimes reported in an additional "??" category. This is fixed.
  • Quality Audit Report was not honoring the shift selection. Now it does.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.57 8/21/2024
XL2; 800004FF Task Error
XL200

The 800004FF task error indicates an infinite loop with no Sleeps in one of the running tasks.

This instance was caused by selecting the "Prune the Queue" option in the Manual Shear, "Part Queue Options" window prompt. This option incorrectly calculated that scrap was required for a Hole Detect controller when restarting the part queue. There were compounding problems with the code that adds the scrap, resulting in an infinite loop trying to add zero length scrap parts to remove the miss-calculated scrap.

Two changes were made.

  1. No scrap is required on a Hole Count controller.
  2. The code adding the scrap was modified to prevent an infinite loop.
Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.94.02 8/20/2024
XL2CL 5.94.02 8/20/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.94.02 8/20/2024
XL2CL 4.94.02 8/20/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; System Information Screen Updates
XL200

There are several changes to the System Information screen.

  1. We have removed the "Bad" status from the three IO Power status prompts. When a customer calls in for a problem, we ask them for information on this screen. If they see anything that says "Bad" on the screen, they think that it must be related to their problem when it most likely is due to not having IO power due to an E-Stop condition. Instead of displaying "Bad", an empty string will now be displayed.

  2. The three IO Power statuses and the Sink/Source state would only update when entering the screen. Since an E-Stop or a reset on IO power can happen at any time, these are now updated live.

  3. The ARM Temperature prompt was displaying a string created on the stack, which needs to be copied before display and wasn't.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.94.01 8/19/2024
XL2CL 5.94.01 8/19/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.94.01 8/19/2024
XL2CL 4.94.01 8/19/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2; Fixed Rounding Error in Expected Material usage reports to Eclipse.
XL200

Expected Material usage was calculated in encoder counts and then converted to float. This resulted in a rounding error when reporting.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.94.01 8/19/2024
XL2CL 5.94.01 8/19/2024
XL220OL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 5.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2OL 4.94.01 8/19/2024
XL2CL 4.94.01 8/19/2024
XL220OL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL220CL 4.95.00 10/23/2024
XL2CL; Cross Weld scrap handling on the Tube Mill option.
XL200

A customer asked for an enhancement to the Tube Mill controller to minimize scrap due to the Cross Welds that occur when welding coils together. However, this enhancement is useful for minimizing waste when any type of scrap is detected by the Scrap Input.

The customer requested that when scrap is detected with the scrap input, if the current part length will not fit without placing part of it in the scrap area, search the order for parts that will fit. If there are no parts that will fit, add a scrap part of a specified length until all the scrap has been cut out. Once the scrap has been cut out, return to running the original part length.

Enabling the new functionality is accomplished with a new setup parameter called Scrap Detector Mode. It has two settings, Original and Cross Weld. Selecting the Cross Weld option enables the new functionality.

When Cross Weld is selected, the Scrap Detector must be located far enough away so that scrap cannot be detected in a part that has already been queued. It should be located at least 10" + the maximum part length + distance between Shear and Printer + the Scrap Detect Border setting away from the Shear. The line will halt with an error if this rule is violated.

When Cross Weld is selected, the Scrap Chop Length setup is used as the scrap length that is added when a good part cannot be added due to the scrap sensor. The line will not run unless this setting has a non-zero value. It will halt with an error.

A new setup called Scrap Detect Border has been added. It is active all the time when the Tube Mill option is enabled. It can be used to classify an additional border of material as scrap, in front and behind, any scrap material that is detected by the Scrap Detector sensor.

A new Run Cycle Shear implementation was required when the Cross Weld option is selected. Run Cycle Shear occurs when a manual shear is requested in the Run Mode. The feature works the same as it did before but internally, the software implementation had to change. After the Run Cycle Shear, the part queue is deleted and recalculated so that the Cross Weld option rules may still be followed. Negative printer targets will be removed to prevent missed target errors or having to add scrap.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
Release 4.1.218
Eclipse
  • In print definitions, current date was impacting subsequent fields.
  • Delay/Scrap codes with machine groups were not being sent correctly. Now, a machine will get all codes for its group plus all codes without a group assigned.
  • Add mechanism for Pro to set admin lock (aka setup lockout).
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.218 8/9/2024
Release 5.0.24.6
Eclipse

Version 5.0.24.6

  • Agent now requires Classic to be at minimum version of 4.1.217.
  • RavenDB must be upgraded to version 6.0.105.

Improvements

  • General order events are not included in the production logs.
  • Upgrade to .net 8.0.7.

Bug Fixes

  • Loss Codes (Delay/Scrap) did not always get added to the correct type. This is fixed.
  • Machine Groups could not be added from Pro. This is fixed.
  • Scrap Code edits were not getting saved.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.6 8/11/2024
XL2; Add "Are you sure?" prompt to Change Product Code window.
XL200

By request, an "Are you sure?" prompt has been added to the Change Product Code window dialog window. The operator must acknowledge the request with a Yes before the Product Code change will be initiated.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2: Increased upper limit of Shear to Scrap Detect Distance
XL200

The upper limit of the Shear to Scrap Detect Distance setup is increased from 1000" to 119999", which is 9999 Feet 11 inch.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2: Minimize the use of Rts_Sync_Acknowledge.
XL200

The Rts_Sync_Acknowledge, and related functions, implement a special type of sleep that is not present in other operating systems. When we move to Linux in the next generation controller we will either have to develop an equivalent or eliminate its use.

This change eliminates its use in places where it is known not to be necessary.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2; Add Eclipse Control of Setup Lockout
XL200

The Setup Lockout Key Switch input, if used, provides two levels of access to settings and other options, Full and Restricted.

A new project requires the need for Eclipse to be able to override the Key Switch input and control the same two levels of access.

Two new UART commands allow Eclipse to Lock and Unlock as if the Setup Lockout input were locked or unlocked. The are active starting with UART version 3.63.

To handle cases where Eclipse might be down and Key Switch control is required, the Key Switch input can still be used. The controller will keep track of the last source of lock/unlock activity and use the state of that source for the lock state.

If Eclipse wants to be in control of the lock state, Eclipse should set the desired state every time a controller comes online. This will take back control from the Key Switch if it was used while the controller was offline.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2; Setup Lockout restructure
XL200

There are many things that are locked or disabled based on the state of the Setup Lockout, also known as the Key Switch input.

This was all being done with a global variable that was used everywhere. We have plans to make available other means of locking or unlocking things based on other factors. The global variable was removed, and it was replaced with object method function calls. This allows the locking to be changed or overridden based on any number of things, in the future.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 5.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220OL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL220CL 4.94.00 8/15/2024
XL2; Add Cut Window output to the XL200 Hump and Brake
XL200

For the XL200 Hump and Brake, the request for an output that turns on at a programable distance from the cut point was made.

A setup, called Cut Window Distance was added. It defaults to zero, which disables the feature. A non-zero value enables it. It is only active for the Open Loop XL200 Hump and Brake. It also must be configured for feed to stop operation.

The output is only active while in the Run Mode. This is due to the queue behavior on a Shear Only controller. The Queue, and hence the shear target, are only present while in Run Mode. The output should only be evaluated while in Run, once the motion outputs have been activated, so that the shear target is known to exist and has been processed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
Release 5.0.23.763
Eclipse
  • Orders with unknown tooling or material codes would cause the entire list of orders to not appear. This is fixed.
  • Scrap Summary report would not load when Date group was chosen. Fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.763 7/17/2024
Release 5.0.23.735
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.735

Improvements

  • The update page now includes a link to download the Eclipse Toolbox. This is the preferred method for updating Eclipse Pro and Classic.
  • Delay Summary and Scrap Summary Reports graduate out of experimental status.
  • It is not possible to monitor the state of the Eclipse Pro service using the /health endpoint. This is experimental and may change in the future.

Bug Fixes

  • External Coil Sync handles an unexpected data condition better.
  • Links to setup parameter changes and punch patterns were now working on the production log.
  • Fix some errors when filtering on the Order Sequence report.
  • Better recovery and notification when the Message Queue service is unavailable.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.735 7/10/2024
5226; Clear Needs Referencing in Magnetic Memory if Absolute Encoder
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The magnetic memory on a 5226 board is used to save things like reference state and encoder counts when the controller is powered down. One fault with this is that if the wrong machine type was chosen with an incremental encoder it will save the state of needing to be referenced. If the correct type is chosen later without an incremental encoder that machine type has no way of getting the needs referencing state to clear.

The solution was to clear the referencing state at startup if the axis does not have an incremental encoder.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.16 4/15/2025
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.17 4/15/2025
Release 5.0.23.667
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.667

Improvements

  • Runblock chart now has symbols for different event types.
  • XL200 Setups Comparison now defaults to the current snapshot and other usability improvements.
  • Coil and Order import reliability improvements.
  • Production Log now links to Setup changes.

Bug Fixes

  • Order edit could not modify Ship Date and Required Date.
  • The scheduler screen could not always scroll as expected.
  • Explorer style reports with a Day dimension now show the day of the week. Previously they showed a number representing the day.
  • System health error messages were not appearing in the UI. Now they do.
  • General reliability improvements.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.667 6/26/2024
XL2; Simple Zanasi Z4xx part printer driver
XL200

Zanasi has come out with a new series of printer that is not backwards compatible with our existing Zanasi Driver.

The new series of printer have models in the Z4xx range with xx being a 2-digit number. For example, Z402.

They do supply a special modification of sorts, a sniffer that looks for the text in the print command and inserts it in a predefined message format on the printer. For example, "$00WT000ATEST123{space}{space}[CR]" is a valid print command. TEST123 will be extracted and be filled into the message to be printed.

We have taken the existing Zanasi print driver and modified it. A new entry, "Simple Zanasi Z4xx" has been added to the list of part printers. When this entry is selected, the existing print driver will be used with much of its code disabled. All print text will be concatenated and sent in a command that is formatted like the example. No version information or print buffers will be read from the printer as those commands are not supported in the printer.

The existing driver stripped off the message formatting when displaying the print message in the diagnostic window. When this new entry is selected, since the command format is so specific, it is displayed with the text to provide confidence that we are using the expected command format.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.10 6/26/2024
XL2CL 5.92.10 6/26/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.92.10 6/26/2024
XL2CL 4.92.10 6/26/2024
XL220OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220; Missing 'Shear to Beader Distance' setup.
XL200

The 'Shear to Beader Distance' setup got lost during SCN 4847 - XL2; Combine and share source files with conditional assembly. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.92.09 6/14/2024
XL220OL 5.92.09 6/14/2024
XL220CL 4.92.09 6/14/2024
XL220OL 4.92.09 6/14/2024
XL2; Load New Coil window not popping up.
XL200

SCN 4861 - XL2; Erroneous Error 109 "PLC is Offline...." broke the Load New Coil popup operation. The change prevented the code that tests if the popup is required from being executed. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.08 6/14/2024
XL2CL 5.92.08 6/14/2024
XL220OL 5.92.08 6/14/2024
XL220CL 5.92.08 6/14/2024
XL2OL 4.92.08 6/14/2024
XL2CL 4.92.08 6/14/2024
XL220OL 4.92.08 6/14/2024
XL220CL 4.92.08 6/14/2024
Pathfinder; Added Parameter Load Assist Minimum Clamp Height for Manual Shear
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Added parameter Load Assist Minimum Clamp Height for Manual Shear which is the height the clamp must reach during a load assist to allow the bending beam to move if the machine has a manual shear. If under this height at any time in not a load assist then bending beam movement is not allowed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.28.3597 4/15/2025
Pathfinder; Added Gripper OK Input
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Added Gripper OK input which is used to detect if the BNR system controlling the grippers has failed or detects a gripper is no longer being detected.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.30.3607 8/4/2025
Pathfinder; Added Clamping Beam Valve Confirmation
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Added input Clamping Beam Valve Confirmation to confirm that the clamping beam valve is functional and won't let the clamp fall if something goes wrong.

Pathfinder; Added Bypass Throttle Valve Confirmation Input
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

New input to confirm the bypass throttle is not on to confirm we are indeed in a slow speed state.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.27.3592 11/12/2024
FlashDoctor; Add ability to configure EtherCAT Closed Loop or EtherCAT Multi-Axis options.
AMS Tools

Version 5 controllers that have versions V5.93.xx or higher will be allowed to configure the EtherCAT Closed Loop or EtherCAT Multi-Axis options.

This will be limited to V5.93.xx and higher versions.

XL2CL; Fixed motor thump when referencing a SERCOS or EtherCAT DA.
XL200

Both SERCOS and EtherCAT Closed Loop Die Accelerators close ther loops around a Setpoint that is one sample old.

When referencing the Die Accelerator, the Die Encoder Position and the Die Setpoint must be modified to match so that there are no motor jumps or thumps. In the case of SERCOS and EtherCAT, both the new and the old (one sample old) must be modified. This was not being done, which caused a motor thump.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
EclPro: Release 5.0.23.548
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.548

New Features

  • XL200 Setups Comparison: select up to five setups to compare differences between them.

Improvements

  • XL200 setups now shows previous snapshots.
  • Diagnostics download and 'send to AMS' generally work more reliably, and give notifications while in progress.

Bug Fixes

  • Pathfinder Explorers now default to preload with a date range where data actually exists.
  • Material list had wrong shortcut to coil view.
  • Andon was not showing OEE value.
  • Fixed Reclaimed Scrap metric on Production Summary Wallboard.
  • Scrap and Delay Code editors gave a general error, even when a possibly useful error was returned from the server.
  • Scrap Code editor was not showing newly created codes.
  • Adding a new punch to a punch pattern would sometimes not put a correct default in for Y-Reference. This is corrected.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.548 6/1/2024
XL2; RTOS Timer Changes
XL200

The Real Time Operating System, RTOS , uses a counter/timer to measure time and schedule system tasks at the requested interval. The counter has a reload value that is stored internally.

Two changes were made. The reload value is now stored in a variable that can be read at any time or used for other calculations.

A new function called Rts_Shift_Timer_Hardware has been added. It accepts an integer value that will be used to shift (offset), positive or negative, the nominal reload value for the timer. This effectively increases or decreases the time between timer events.

The shift time is passed to the function as an integer value that is internally limited to +-550. This limit corresponds to 10% of 1msec on the V5 XL hardware, 100usec. This will be used in Closed Loop controllers, in conjunction with EtherCAT. The Operating System timer on the 80386 must be synchronized with the timers that run on the EtherCAT devices that are using Distributed Clocks. This limit should be way more than is needed for the purpose that the function is being added for.

On the V5 XL hardware, each incremental value of the 550 limit is equivalent to approximately 0.18nsec.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.10 6/26/2024
XL2CL 5.92.10 6/26/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.92.10 6/26/2024
XL2CL 4.92.10 6/26/2024
XL220OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2; Access Switch Setting and other settings without a power cycle
XL200

Prior to this change, the only access to the Switch setting, SERCOS setting and future EtherCat settings was by pressing the Setup Key at the end of the AMS logo banner screen during a power up.

This change adds an F5-Switch and Config. option to the system info screen. This will provide access to the settings without a power cycle. The controller does have to reset however. After the reset and the banner logo, the controller will go directly to the settings screens without requiring any additional key presses.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
EclPro: Release 5.0.23.479
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.479

New Features

  • New additions to the dashboard Run Block chart:
    • Various events (coil load, setup changes, controller errors, etc.) show up along the timeline.
    • Scheduled downtimes appear as blocks below the actual downtime blocks.

Improvements

  • No longer clutter user's desktop with a shortcut to Agent.
  • Add new Eclipse enforced setups (requires updated controller firmware).

Bug Fixes

  • Not all services were restarted after the reconnects to server. This has been resolved.
  • Export events on the order detail page were not updating when the action was retried or canceled.
  • The UI was sometimes requesting multiple duplicate subscriptions from the server which possibly caused a performance hit.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.479 5/19/2024
XL2: Add "Are you sure?" prompts to a list of Setup Screen function key options.
XL200

Prompts for "Are you sure?" have been added to a number of function key options in the Setup Screen.

The following prompts have been added for the corresponding Function Key options in the Setup Screen, "F2-Add to Config.", "F3-Remove From Config.", "F4-Set Lock", "F5-Clear Lock", "F6-Add QuickSet" and "F6-Remove QuickSet".

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.07 5/16/2024
XL2CL 5.92.07 5/16/2024
XL220OL 5.92.07 5/16/2024
XL220CL 5.92.07 5/16/2024
XL2OL 4.92.07 5/16/2024
XL2CL 4.92.07 5/16/2024
XL220OL 4.92.07 5/16/2024
XL220CL 4.92.07 5/16/2024
Pathfinder; New 5226 Firmware
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4/V5.

V4.04.15 for rev E/F and V5.00.14 for rev G.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.24.3547 5/14/2024
Pathfinder; Update JornsHyperDriveFlex Configuration to Match Universal I/O
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

The JornsHyperDriveFlex configuration was created as the universal configuration going forward for Jorns hyper drive systems (Eco, Twinmatic, TwinPro). This configuration was updated with the proposed I/O setup that universal hyper drive prints will be using going forward also.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.24.3547 5/14/2024
5226; Integrated Full Thalmann Clamp Laser State Machine
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Thalmann folding machines have a specific clamp laser logic that was implemented into the 5226.

For more information refer to:

SCN 4886 - 5226; Added Thalmann Clamp Laser Logic

One piece of logic that was not implemented originally though was if the lockout timer has not expired and the clamp down/next step pedal is pressed then the system will not allow movement. Once the pedal is released the lockout starts again and the same rule applies. If the timer does elapse then the override timer phase will start and if the user presses the pedal during this time the clamp will be allowed to move down in slow.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.14 5/14/2024
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.14
XL2CL; Limited Asycnronous Welded Coil Support
XL200

A prominent OEM requested Welded Coil support on a line they were building. Full support requires being able to switch coils while the line is running. Ideally scrap caused by not being able to produce good parts with a weld in them would be minimized.

We set about doing all of the work required for both goals. The specs from the OEM indicated that material between the Weld Station and the Shear was tightlined, which requires a stop to do the weld. It also allows us the processing time to optimize the scrap around the weld. We set about providing that solution. This Mode is called Synchronous Coil Welding.

Somewhere there was a miscommunication. There is an accumulator between the Weld Station and the Shear and they don't wish to stop to do the Scrap Optimization. This Mode is called Asynchronous Coil Welding. We didn't spend any time on this, We also didn't spend any time working out the operation with the coil inventory disabled, or making the Dump Table feature, they require, work.

The machine is built and waiting for software, so, we had to scramble.

This change implements the Asynchronous Coil Welding mode with the limitation that the Coil Inventory must be disabled. It also integrates with the Dump Table code by marking any part that contains a Weld in it, as Scrap. The Dump Table code requires that MODBUS be enabled with extended IO.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.92.06 5/7/2024
XL2CL 4.92.06 5/7/2024
EclPro; Release 5.0.23.377
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.377

Bug Fixes

  • New minutes behind calculation didn't account for zero duration production logs. Now it does.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.377 5/3/2024
EclPro: Release 5.0.23.374
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.374

New Features

  • Dashboard now shows a table of the current job, upcoming jobs, and recently completed jobs.

Improvements

  • Delay and Scrap Summary Reports
    • Now remembers the user's Group By and Then By selections.
    • Removed the free text filter as it is no longer necessary thanks to the previous addition of the Codes chooser.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed bug where Classic ini file could get munged up when Agent modified it on en-US systems.
  • Pathfinder Dashboard panels were only updating part count when the machine stopped, but now updates immediately.
  • The dashboard was not updating the address when navigating to machines or older shifts.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.374 5/1/2024
XL2; Help, Error, Warning and Operator message window colors.
XL200

The following changes have been made to the Window colors for Help, Error, Warning and Operator message windows. Prior to this change, all messages had the same window color scheme which created some confusion. Help messages were mistakenly interpreted as error messages.

Help messages will have a Blue Window body. Warning messages will have a Yellow Window body. Error messages - No change. Operator messages will have a Black header and Gray window body.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220; Manual Punch input broken by SCN 4847

SCN 4847 merged all of the various versions of the input task into one single shared file. A bug was introduced into the HVAC controllers where the Manual Punch input failed to work.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL220OL 5.92.05 4/29/2024
XL220CL 5.92.05 4/29/2024
XL220OL 4.92.05 4/29/2024
XL220CL 4.92.05 4/29/2024
XL2; Fix Local SERCOS axes in the PC Simulation.
XL200

In the Windows PC Simulation, Local SERCOS Axes were not being allowed to be enabled due to some code added in SCN 4853. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2; Enforce one Press per Tool Axis limitation.
XL200

A Tool Axis may only be used by one press. Otherwise, the presses would fight over control of the axis. However, what actually happened is that each Tool Axis is assigned a Press ID that it uses to find its closest target in the queue. Since there can only be one press assigned, only one press would control the axis and all other targets would be ignored.

This has always been a limitation but there was no test to enforce it. This has now been resolved.

When entering the run mode, each of the Tool Axes will be tested to see if more than one press is configured to use it. If the condition is detected, an Error message will be displayed and the line will drop out of run.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
Pathfinder; Clamp Laser Timeout Parameters Don't Send Down As Integers
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

The new parameters 732 Clamp Laser Lockout Delay and 733 Clamp Laser Valid Move Delay were setup to send down as integers by accident in all the Thalmann configurations. Since everything else was setup as a decimal the number being sent down essentially got zeroed out. This has been fixed.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.14 5/14/2024
Pathfinder PC 5.01.24.3547 5/14/2024
5226; Manual Shear Must Be Returned to Park Position if Next Step Not Shear Operation
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A shear is an additional option on some folding machines that can be used to cut material at certain lengths. This type of axis is usually automatically controlled. Some shears on machines are now setup to be used manually by an operator. This is done by having the shear locked into a position on top of the machine instead of on the left or right parallel to the clamp surface. When the operator wants to use the shear they can bring it down from the top and latch it onto the clamp surface. It can then be moved back and forth by the operator manually to cut the material.

For more information refer to:

SCN 4555 5226; Added Manual Shear Logic

One logical problem that was originally overlooked is that the bending beam can not move when the shear is not in its upright/parked position. The clamping beam on the other hand is allowed to move if the shear is on its down home limit. With the clamp able to move with the shear home limit on it allows the operator to use the slitter mode in Pathfinder that does multiple shear steps in a row. So if the next operation is not another shear operation to account for slitter mode then the shear must be returned to its park position to allow the next step to use the bending beam. If the shear does not get to the park position and a confirmation pedal does not occur then the system will never continue on to the next step.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.14 5/14/2024
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.14
Pathfinder/5226; Added Error 397 Manual Shear Must Be Returned to Park Position
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4/V5 and 5226 controllers.

A shear is an additional option on some folding machines that can be used to cut material at certain lengths. This type of axis is usually automatically controlled. Some shears on machines are now setup to be used manually by an operator. This is done by having the shear locked into a position on top of the machine instead of on the left or right parallel to the clamp surface. When the operator wants to use the shear they can bring it down from the top and latch it onto the clamp surface. It can then be moved back and forth by the operator manually to cut the material.

For more information refer to SCN 4555 5226; Added Manual Shear Logic.

The original implementation still used the old logic that if the shear is on it's home limit the bending beam can move. Based on how the machine is mechanically this is no longer the case and the shear must be on its parked position to move the bending beam. To handle this Error 397 Manual Shear Must Be Returned to Park Position was added to the controller and Pathfinder UI. The controller will not let the bending beam move unless the shear is on its parked limit and if not this error will be thrown.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.24.3547 5/14/2024
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.14
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.14 5/14/2024
XL2; Changes to add EtherCat Support to the XL200
XL200

The EtherCat options are only available on V5 hardware but almost all of the code is present in both V4 and V5.

Two Model options have been added, EtherCAT CL and EtherCAT MA.

Both options are required because EtherCAT consumes the single Ethernet Port that is available on the hardware.

EtherCAT CL is only available on the Closed Loop to force the use of the EtherCAT protocol to control the Servo Drives.

EtherCAT MA enables the support for Multi-Axis servos that use EtherCAT SoE, Servo (SERCOS) over EtherCAT protocol.

When EtherCAT MA is selected the Multi-Axis (X) option is also automatically enabled.

SERCOS and EtherCAT are mutually exclusive. If EtherCAT is enabled, SERCOS is disabled and disallowed.

The use and configuration of EtherCAT is nearly identical to SERCOS with several notable exceptions; 1.) Editing of the Drive Parameters from the XL is not supported.
2.) The drives have a State Progression rather than a Phase Progression.

Other than the above exceptions, working with the EtherCAT drives will look and feel identical to the SERCOS drives. In the XL Software there will be options for EtherCAT SoE, instead of, or in addition to, SEROCS.

These are the States:;

  1. Init - In this state the prescense of drives is performed. If the correct number of drives has been found, the next state will be attempted.
  2. Pre-Operational - In this state, the drives are configured for their mode of operation. If a drive passes its transition test it will go to the next state.
  3. Safe-Operation - Cyclical data begins being transfered back and forth from the drive. If all drives are communicating cyclical data properly they will transition to the next state.
  4. Operational - Cyclical data is still being transfered but now the drives are capable of being enabled and are fully operational.
Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2; Added a List Control that does not rely on a Record Object.
XL200

There are two types of Fp and Integer controls. There is one type that requires a Record Object for reading, writing and formatting values and one that uses supplied functions.

The List control only had the type that relies on a Record Object. A type that relies on supplied function has now been created.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 4.93.00 7/18/2024
Pathfinder; Added New 5226 Firmware
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Added V4.04.14 for rev B,E and F boards. V5.00.13 on rev G boards.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.14
Pathfinder; Added Clamp Laser Parameters to Thalmann Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Parameters 732 Clamp Laser Lockout Delay and 733 Clamp Laser Valid Move Delay were added to all Thlamann configurations in the Pathfinder build.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.21.3542 4/16/2024
Pathfinder; Added ThalmannTD-WithAccumulator-ClosedLoop Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

This configuration was created to allow experimentation with closed loop on a Thalmann TD that has an external accumulator so that it doesn't affect the open loop configuration on the machine that is also an experiment.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.21.3542 4/16/2024
5226; Added Thalmann Clamp Laser Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Thalmann folding machines use a single laser protection system on most of their machines. A certain logic was created by them for how they want the machine to work based on the laser. The basic concept is if the laser is broken while the clamp is moving down or already blocked a timer will start once the foot pedal has been released. During this timer delay the clamp down pedal is locked out and can't move the clamp down. Once this timer is finished another timer will start and in this window the user can press the pedal to move the clamp down in a overridden state. If that timer elapses then the override timers will all start over.

To control these timers parameters 732 Clamp Laser Lockout Delay and 733 Clamp Laser Valid Move Delay are used to control the respective timers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.13 4/11/2024
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.14 4/11/2024
Pathfinder; Make Sure Firmware is Up to Date
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Not 100% the firmware was up to date in the build so just added again.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.20.3529 4/9/2024
Pathfinder; Added ThalmannTD-WithAccumulator Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

The ThalmannTD-WithAccumulator configuration added is a standard Thalmann TD double folding machine with an external accumulator added. Necessary I/O, feedback and calibration were added to accomplish this.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.20.3529 4/9/2024
Releae 5.0.23.258
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.258

Improvements

  • Run Block chart updates as new data comes in.

Bug Fixes

  • Run Block chart tooltip no longer flickers.
  • Fix bundle tag view button on Order Details.
  • The dashboard lost its forward button when navigating to a previous shift.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.258 4/6/2024
XL2; Add generic Print Driver selections for ZPL and DPL protocol printers
XL200

The Fox IV Zebra, Zebra 400 both use the same driver that supports all ZPL protocol equipped printers. We have added a generic Part and Bundle print selection called Zebra (ZPL) to make the ZPL support more clear.

The Datamax and C.ITOH T4 printers both use the DPL protocol. Honeywell is now making these printers. We have also added a Part and Bundle print selection called Honeywell (DPL) to make the Honeywell and DPL support more clear.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.10 6/26/2024
XL2CL 5.92.10 6/26/2024
XL2OL 4.92.10 6/26/2024
XL2CL 4.92.10 6/26/2024
Pathfinder; Fix For New Resource Strings Getting Added To the Wrong Resx
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Fix For New Resource Strings Getting Added To the Wrong Resx.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.12.3532 4/3/2024
Pathfinder; ThalmannThakoV2SchneiderElectricServo_Analog Named Wrong
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

ThalmannThakoV2SchneiderElectricServo_Analog configuration had the wrong name in the file which fails a test and won't build.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.12.3532 4/3/2024
Pathfinder; Publish Builds to Azure Blob Storage
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Publish Builds to Azure Blob Storage

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.12.3532 4/3/2024
Pathfinder; Added New JornsHyperDriveFlex Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

The new JornsHyperDriveFlex configuration is what we hope to be using on all Hyper Drive systems in the near future. In the end it will have all possible axes, a more unified I/O structure, easier to choose machine options, etc. This is just the base for right now.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.12.3532 4/3/2024
5226; Multiple Gripper Type Ignore Unexpected Moves
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some Jorns double folding machines have a hydraulic gripper manifold to control 3 separate types of grippers. The limit switches for the grippers are monitored by their pressure reading through sensors. One problem that has surfaced from this is that when moving one type of gripper it will dip the pressure reading on another gripper type. This will make the sensor dip below a threshold and say the nonmoving gripper limit is now off. This quick dip will make the controller throw an unexpected gripper state since the gripper wasn't moving.

To combat this the input function monitoring each gripper limit will ignore an off state if the failing gripper is not moving and if one of the other grippers on the manifold is moving. This is the first try and will need more on site testing.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.12 4/3/2024
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.13 4/3/2024
5226; Bug Fix for E-Stop Status
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A change was made in the previous version to not set the e-stop status to active if the raise clamp on e-stop flag was not set. This would cause the Pathfinder UI to not show the machine as e-stopped when it was electrically. This was most likely test code. It has been changed back to how it was.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.13 4/3/2024
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.12 4/3/2024
Release 5.0.23.248
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.248

  • RavenDB can be upgraded to version 6.0.101.

New Features

  • New Run Bock chart added to the machine dashboard. This is similar to the "SnapShot" detail view in Classic.

Improvements

  • Bundle visual on Order Detail now shows percent complete bar graph.
  • Upgrade RavenDb to 6.0.101.

Bug Fixes

  • Production logs were not filtering by the page it was contained in.
  • Completed Bundle and Integration actions in Order Detail were not working.
  • Quick view was not showing orders on production log.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.248 4/3/2024
Release 5.0.23.217
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.217

Improvements

Many improvements to reports.

  • Scrap Summary & Delay Summary
    • Now accounts for all minutes in a shift.
  • Material Usage
    • Now includes weight values.
    • Scrap % was calculated incorrectly.
  • Coil Summary
    • Add summary level 'Other Ft' and 'Net Change Ft' values.
  • Order Summary
    • Now shows weight values.

Many pages are seeing improved performance due to upgrades to UI framework. Including:

  • Dashboard > Machines
  • Machines > XL200 > Patterns
  • Machines > XL200 > Setups
  • Settings > Integration

General

  • The order, material, coil, etc hover popups get a slight delay as the quick pop could be annoying.
  • Upgrade to .net 8.0.3.

Bug Fixes

  • Prevent Classic's 'placeholder' (empty) punch patterns from syncing to Pro.
  • Reports now allow a date range of a single day. Previously the report would appear to hang when the same date was chosen for the start and end dates.
  • Roll back an old incorrect restriction that caused some production records to be ignored.
  • Some production records were incorrectly deemed "invalid" and not allowed in Server. This is fixed.
  • Classic's temporary patterns no longer get sent to Server.
  • Fixed a bug in Wallboard settings editing.
  • Regression: hover popups on the scheduler stopped working. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.217 3/31/2024
Pathfinder; Added ThalmannThakoV2SchneiderElectricServo_Analog Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

This is a standard Thalmann Thako machine with a Schneider servo drive.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.12.3532 4/3/2024
Pathfinder; Added Parameter 733 Clamp Laser Valid Move Delay
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Added Parameter 733 Clamp Laser Valid Move Delay

If the clamp is moving down and the clamp laser is blocked the clamp will be stopped. Once parameter 732 Clamp Laser Lockout Delay has expired a new timer will start based on this parameter. During this time frame the user has the opportunity to press the clamp down pedal to override the laser and move the clamp down in slow. If the timer expires then the operator will have to press the pedal to restart the timer, release the pedal and press again in the time frame. The system will not let the clamp come down unless this override is achieved.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.12.3532 4/3/2024
Pathfinder; Added Parameter 732 Clamp Laser Lockout Delay
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Added Parameter 732 Clamp Laser Lockout Delay.

If the clamp is moving down and the clamp laser is blocked the clamp will be stopped and a delay will start based on this parameter. During this time the clamp down pedal is locked out and the override process for the laser cannot start until the delay has elapsed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.12.3532 4/3/2024
XL2; Modify the ARM code to selectively enable the TCP/IP stack or EtherCat
XL200

We only have one ethernet port to use EtherCat or TCP/IP.

This change allows the type of stack to be selected during initialization. It is only available on the V5 hardware.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220OL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL220CL 5.93.00 7/18/2024
XL2; Prevent barcodes from accidentally executing debugger commands.
XL200

The debugger and the barcode scanner feature both share the same serial port.

We have a customer who is getting 800004FF errors that trace back to the execution of a memory dump command. The most conceivable possibility is that the customer has a barcode scanner that is somehow sending characters strings that place the port in debug mode and then execute commands.

This change protects the port from barcodes or barcode scanner communication that may, by chance, contain character strings that place the port in debug mode and allow subsequent communication to be interpreted as debug commands.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2CL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220OL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220CL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2OL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2CL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220OL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220CL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
5226; Winter Mode Now Changed In Run Mode
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The winter mode logic in the 5226 is to be used on folding machines in cold conditions to allow the machine to not overload the VFD used to for the clamp and bending beam. For a more info refer to:

SCN 4867 - Pathfinder; Winter Mode Button

The controller will only switch to Winter Mode when the Pathfinder 766 Winter Mode is on and the button enabled is turned on.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.17 4/15/2025
Pathfinder; Winter Mode Button
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5 UI.

The winter mode logic in the 5226 is to be used on folding machines in cold conditions to allow the machine to not overload the VFD used to for the clamp and bending beam. For a more info refer to:

SCN 4819 - 5226; Changes to Winter Mode Logic

The previous way of turning it on was through a parameter in operator preferences. To make it easier on users it has been turned into a button found below the machine steps. When the parameter 766 Winter Mode is set to yes the button will be enabled.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.27.3592 11/12/2024
Release 5.0.23.127
Eclipse

Version 5.0.23.127

Improvements

  • Order List now has colors that indicate the order status.

Bug Fixes

  • Allow filtering the Order List with no completed orders.
  • Order quick view on the bottom of the list was hiding the link to the order detail.
  • Schedule Sync was setting done items to hold.
  • Fixed a few bugs introduced in a previous release.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.23.127 3/7/2024
XL2; The Stacker Output stopped functioning in the Closed Loop controllers.

The Stacker Output stopped functioning in the Closed Loop controllers due to a recent code sharing/merging change. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220OL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2CL 5.92.03 3/6/2024
XL2OL 5.92.03 3/6/2024
XL220CL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220OL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2CL 4.92.03 3/6/2024
XL2OL 4.92.03 3/6/2024
XL2; Crash Detect Velocity setup is duplicated
XL200

The Crash Detect Velocity setup was duplicated due to a recent code sharing/merging change. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220OL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2CL 5.92.03 3/6/2024
XL2OL 5.92.03 3/6/2024
XL220CL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220OL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2CL 4.92.03 3/6/2024
XL2OL 4.92.03 3/6/2024
Release 4.1.216
Eclipse
  • If installed, Pro now manages delay/scrap codes and machine groups.
  • Scrap, Delay, and Employee lists are sent on every controller powerup.
  • Add Machine Description, Machine Group, Bundle Id Prefix to bundle and label print definitions.
  • Include Halt table in Package Files.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.216 2/27/2024
XL2; Recover one extra line of Grid and Tree when User fields are enabled.
XL200

In the Status screen, when user fields were selected, there was nearly one, full-sized, unused line in the Grid and Tree. The unused line was only two pixels short of being used. The two pixels were being consumed by having both the Order Status and the User Field windows open.

This has been resolved by stealing the two required pixels from the User Field window.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.03 3/6/2024
XL2CL 5.92.03 3/6/2024
XL220OL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220CL 5.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2OL 4.92.03 3/6/2024
XL2CL 4.92.03 3/6/2024
XL220OL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL220CL 4.92.04 3/22/2024
XL2; Erroneous Error 109 "PLC is Offline...."
XL200

This bug was only experienced on the XL220CL but it was possible on all XL2 models.

There appeared to be a race condition on powerup. Some code was setting the Run Mode to HALTED, which was taking the run task out of its Idle loop. The run task was checking to see if the PLC was online before the PLC was initialized and detected.

The fix for this was to modify the run task to stay in its Idle loop for any Run Mode below RUN_LINE, which includes COAST_TO_STOP and HALTED. It also returns the run mode to the IDLE state. This prevents the race condition by preventing any of the code that would be expected to run when leaving the IDLE state from running. A transition from IDLE to HALTED or COAST_TO_STOP is not expected and this is the best method of fixing/preventing it.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.92.02 2/16/2024
XL2OL 5.92.02 2/16/2024
XL220CL 5.92.02 2/16/2024
XL220OL 5.92.02 2/16/2024
XL220CL 4.92.02 2/16/2024
XL220OL 4.92.02 3/5/2024
XL2CL 4.92.02 2/16/2024
XL2OL 4.92.02 2/16/2024
XL2; Test the Queue for "Next" item when returning Status to Eclipse.
XL200

Slightly modified the Status information about the "Next" item in the status while Halted.

The item with a status of "Next", which was always being reported when available, is not necessarily the next item to run when there is a punch queue. This resulted in some confusion. Now, if there is a punch queue, the first item in the queue will now be reported as the "Next" item. If the queue is empty, the item with a status of "Next" will be returned, if available. Otherwise, the subsequent options will be returned as described in the UART spec.

The UART Version was bumped to V3.62

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.02 2/16/2024
XL2CL 5.92.02 2/16/2024
XL220OL 5.92.02 2/16/2024
XL220CL 5.92.02 2/16/2024
XL2OL 4.92.02 2/16/2024
XL2CL 4.92.02 2/16/2024
XL220OL 4.92.02 3/5/2024
XL220CL 4.92.02 2/16/2024
XL2OL; Enable NTM option on XL206 controllers.
XL200

SCN 4857 created the NTM option. The option is described there. Due to miscommunication, it should have been added to the XL206. This change does that.

The XL206 will lose the Up Complete input for Press 5 when this option is enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.01 2/7/2024
XL2OL 4.92.01 2/7/2024
FlashDoctor: Add NTM option to Open Loop XL200 controllers.
AMS Tools

Add the NTM NewTech Machine option to the XL200 Open Loop Configuration Options screen.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.40 2/2/2024
XL200; Added (NTM) Option with Part Pause input
XL200

We are installing XL200 controllers on NewTech Machines with the intent of being a drop-in replacement for the MP465 controller. We have created a model option (NTM) for this purpose. The (NTM) option is only valid for the XL200 Open Loop controller.

The MP465 controller has a Remote Run input that functions like a Delay After Shear. After a Shear, if the Remote Run input is ON, the controller Delays After Shear forever. The delay timer, if configured, starts when the Remote Run input turns OFF or is OFF.

The XL has added this functionality to input 20 when the (NTM) option is enabled. The XL controller uses a different name for the input but otherwise functions identically. The input is called "Part Pause".

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
Eclipse Pro Release: Version 5.0.22.823
Eclipse

Version 5.0.22.823

Bug Fixes

  • Hot fix for a number of regression bugs.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.22.823 1/31/2024
Eclipse Pro Release: Version 5.0.22.799
Eclipse

Version 5.0.22.799

Improvements

  • Downtime Summary report now supports choosing a subset of codes.
  • Include material, geometry, and part girth dimensions on Pathfinder Explorers.
  • Promote License Expiring Alert to make it more visible.
  • Licenses now expire at the end of the local day.

Bug Fixes

  • Some instances of Tooling Codes (PCode) were not getting stored correctly in Pro. This has been corrected.
  • Sometimes data deleted in Classic was not always removed from Pro. This has been improved.
  • Minor bug fixes and performance improvements.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.22.823 1/31/2024
XL2; Front Shear enhancements
XL200

The front shear was originally written to mimic the operation of the Coil-End-Point feature only with an automated shear. Coil-End-Point does not activate unless there are enough parts to queue up to the Coil-End-Point.

Somewhere along the way, a bug or feature, was unintentionally implemented that would cause the Front Shear to still do a cut, even if there were not enough parts to queue up to the front shear location. This would happen only during Initialize Queue if there was a Scrap Length programmed. However, since it was not intentional, the front shear was queued with a negative target, the scrap that was added shifted all the good parts to the end of the blank that was cut by the front shear.

The following improvement was made. The front shear operation is not allowed to be added until Initialize queue has completed and any scrap that is required for the good parts has been added. Waiting to add the front shear then prevents the front shear from getting shifted by the scrap. This minimizes or in some cases will eliminate any scrap that the front shear may create when only a few parts need to be run that don't reach the location of the front shear.

If the user decides to cancel the front shear and program more parts, they can. The prompt puts the operator in full control. Since we always add the front shear operation, there will never be a case where the rollformer is left full of formed material due to a small order that doesn't reach the Front-Shear.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.91.03 1/19/2024
XL2CL 5.91.03 1/19/2024
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.91.03 1/19/2024
XL2CL 4.91.03 1/19/2024
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2: UART Error when locking Axis Records in the Run Mode
XL200

Axis records are not allowede to be locked when the controller is in any Run Mode. The code was using the wrong chain (Setup Configurations) to return the Error Response. It is unlikely that it was causing any problem due to the shared base class code but it was incorrect and was fixed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2; When F3-Set-Defaults is selected in the System Information window, delete Setup Configurations.
XL200

When the F3-Set-Defaults in the System Information window was selected, Setup Configurations were being left behind for setups that were no longer part of a configuration. This has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
ECL; Release 4.1.214
Eclipse

Release 1.214 UART 3.56


  • Add Target Rate to available controller user field choices.
  • Allow PCodes up to 20 characters in HVAC
  • Make fonts in the AMS Generic printer definitions more generic.
  • Fix issue with backup up Tool Configs.
  • Include Tool Configs in Package Files.
  • Support deleting unused coils after 99 days.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.214 1/15/2024
XL2; Tool Config Backup Status not updating in the UART Status response.
XL200

The UART Status response was not reporting the Backup Status of the Tool Config Chain. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.91.02 1/12/2024
XL2CL 5.91.02 1/12/2024
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.91.02 1/12/2024
XL2CL 4.91.02 1/12/2024
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
Eclipse Pro Release: Version 5.0.22.577
Eclipse

Version 5.0.22.577

Improvements

  • Updates to custom NetSuite integrations.

Bug Fixes

  • A smattering of bug fixes, some old, some new.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.22.577 11/20/2023
XL2; Only prompt for Queue Clear if there is something in the Queue
XL200

SCN 4698, "XL2; New Clear Queue After, Prompt", added a prompt to ask what to do with the queue, allowing an operator to choose what to do.

This change is an enhancement to that. It will now only prompt on the second Manual Shear after there is something the Part or Hole Queue to clear.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.91.02 1/12/2024
XL2CL 5.91.02 1/12/2024
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.91.02 1/12/2024
XL2CL 4.91.02 1/12/2024
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2; Combine and share OL and CL source files with conditional assembly
XL200

This change should have no visible or operational impact. I makes maintaining the code easier and works toward having one common set of source code that builds all XL200 models. Old branched files have been renamed to preserve source control history.

  1. Renamed the XL2OL ActivePramList.cpp to OldOLActivePramList.cpp. Shared the XL2CL file with the XL2OL project and combined the tables with conditional assembly.

  2. Renamed the XL2CL SetupTable.hpp to OldCLSetupTable.cpp. Shared the SetupTable.hpp from the XL2OL, XL220OL and XL220CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  3. Renamed the HVAC ActivePramList.cpp to OldHVACActivePramList.cpp. Shared the combined file from step 1 with the HVAC projects and combined the tables with conditional assembly.

  4. Renamed the CL versions of StopLine.cpp and hpp to OldCLStopLine. Shared the files from the OL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  5. Renamed the OL versions of InstallTimerEncoder.cpp to OldOLInstallTimerEncoder.cpp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  6. Renamed the OL versions of JogLine.cpp to OldOLJogLine.cpp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  7. In the OL Projects, to be compatible with the CL projects. Combine the Cycle_Manual_Shear and Cycle_Manual_Press into one function and call Cycle_Manual_Press when executing a Cycle_Manual_Shear.

  8. Rename the OL version of ManualShear.cpp to OldOLManualShear.cpp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  9. Rename the CL version of ManualPress.cpp to OldOLManualPress.cpp. Shared the files from the OL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  10. Rename the OL version of FilterConstant.cpp to OldOLFilterConstant.cpp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  11. Rename the OL version of PressControl.*pp to OldOLPressControl.*pp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  12. Rename the OL version of RunCycleShear.*pp to OldOLRunCycleShear.*pp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  13. Rename the OL version of NonStopPart.*pp to OldOLNonStopPart.*pp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  14. Rename the OL version of PressTask.cpp to OldOLPressTask.cpp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  15. Rename the CL version of InputTask.cpp to OldCLInputTask.cpp. Shared the files from the OL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  16. Rename the OL version of RefPartDetect.cpp to OldOLRefPartDetect.cpp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

  17. Rename the OL version of ModelSetupWindow.*pp to OldOLModelSetupWindow.*pp. Shared the files from the CL projects. Combined the Source with Conditional Assembly.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL; Read Only, RS232, Printer Baud Rate settings not visible in the XL2OL
XL200

The Read Only RS232 Baud Rate settings were added to help users know what Baud rate to select on the printer. These settings were visible in the Closed Loop models but were not showing up in the Open Loop models. This has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.91.01 12/12/2023
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 5.91.01 12/12/2023
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
FlashDoctor; Add 'U' option, "Hump and Brake", to the XL2OL projects
AMS Tools

The Hump and Brake, 'U', option was added to the XL200OL controller. This change adds that option to the Open Loop options configuration window and allows that option to be configured for Open Loop controllers.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.39 12/8/2023
XL2; Add Minimum Slow Distance settings for Short and Very Short Parts
XL200

A request was made for separate Minimum Slow Distance settings applicable to the Short Part and Very Short Part settings.

There are two new settings, Short Part Min. Slow Dist. and Very Short Part Min. Slow Dist.. They have all the same properties as the Minimum Slow Distance setup.

The Short Part Min. Slow Dist. is used for Minimum Slow Distance when the part length is less than the Short Part Length.

The Very Short Part Min. Slow Dist. is used for Minimum Slow Distance when the part length is less than the Very Short Part Length.

For legacy systems where the user may not have configured the new setups, if the applicable setup has not been configured (Zero Length), the value in the Minimum Slow Distance setting will be used.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2CL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2CL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL; Add a 'U', Hump and Brake, option to the OL XL200
XL200

Added the 'U', Hump and Brake, option to the XL200 Open Loop controller.

This option comes with Local outputs .

Since the Hump and Brake lines are all Shear Only there are available local outputs for for Uncut Length, Short Part and Very Short Part signals. They are on outputs 15, 16 and 17 respectively.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2OL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2; 800004FF task error
XL200

The 800004FF task error indicates some task is in an infinite loop and has not given up time for lower priority tasks to run for a lengthy period of time.

Recently a customer had this task error after an XL firmware upgrade and enabling Eclipse. The controller’s screen was constantly refreshing. When Eclipse downloads orders and other things, a screen update is initiated. The theory is that the customer had so much data to download that it kept the PEG graphics task (responsible for screen updates) too busy and it did not have time to rest and give up CPU time.

The software has now been modified to force the PEG graphics task to rest at least once per second. Assuming the theory is correct, this should eliminate the task error the customer was experiencing with Eclipse after an XL update or after a memory clear.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.90.01 11/30/2023
XL2CL 5.90.01 11/30/2023
XL220OL 5.90.01 11/30/2023
XL220CL 5.90.01 11/30/2023
XL2OL 4.90.01 11/30/2023
XL2CL 4.90.01 11/30/2023
XL220OL 4.90.01 11/30/2023
XL220CL 4.90.01 11/30/2023
XL2; More Welded Coils Changes
XL200

More bug fixes found while testing Welded Coil Functionality

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2CL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2CL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2; B0001 Task Error after deleting a coil
XL200

SCN 3381 enhanced the Dec Qty screen to provide a selection of coils to associate the Decrement with. This required that we hold coils in memory for later uses that had been deleted from the inventory. There were two issues with how this was done.

There was a bug that caused the B0001 task error if a coil was deleted prior to a coil tailout. This is a pretty rare scenario but it was possible. The error does not show up until leaving the Production Screen.

The second issue was also with the code that was trying to protect the deleted records. Even if it had been implemented as intended, one a coil had tailed out, no coil would ever actually get deleted from memory.

Both of these issues have been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.90.01 11/30/2023
XL2CL 5.90.01 11/30/2023
XL220OL 5.90.01 11/30/2023
XL220CL 5.90.01 11/30/2023
XL2OL 4.90.01 11/30/2023
XL2CL 4.90.01 11/30/2023
XL220OL 4.90.01 11/30/2023
XL220CL 4.90.01 11/30/2023
XL2; Added "Are You Sure?" prompt when deleting a coil from the Coil Inventory screen.
XL200

The Coil Inventory screen would delete a coil with no confirmation prior to this change. An "Are you sure?" window prompt will now be displayed, giving the user a chance to reconsider if they have hit the F3-Delete key by mistake.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2CL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2CL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2; Disable the Feed to Stop, PLC, Shear Handshaking feature in the Windows Simulation.
XL200

The Windows simulation has a configuration used to test the PLC diagnostic screen. The Feed to Stop Shear Handshaking feature was active, preventing a shear operation when the PLC option was enabled and configured.

The feature has now been disabled in the configuration in the Windows simulation.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2CL 5.91.00 12/8/2023
XL220OL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 5.92.00 2/2/2024
XL2OL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL2CL 4.91.00 12/8/2023
XL220OL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
XL220CL 4.92.00 2/2/2024
ECL; Release 5.0.22.570
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Allow editing the quantity and length of an order item.

Bug Fixes

  • Material (coil types) editor was now allowing changes to color and type values. Now it does.
  • Order details did not display item bundle groups, nor save edits to them. Now it does.
  • Fixed regression where Bundle Rules could not be modified.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.22.570 11/14/2023
XL2CL; Allow Incremental Feeds setup not visible with PLC option
XL200

The Allow Incremental Feeds setup required a power cycle before becoming visible when the PLC (I) option was used to provide expanded gags. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
Eclipse; Shape Programming, populate the Shapes from a database.
Eclipse

In both Eclipse and the XL, a function was created to read a ShapeTable.txt file into arrays of structures. They were also both modified to be capable of populating the machine from those structures.

This prepares Eclipse to be able to populate the shape table from a dtabase rather than a text file.

Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.24.312 10/14/2024
XL2; Shape Programming Test code
XL200

Some test code was modified to be compatible with shared changes in Eclipse SHape programming. Eclipse is being modified to read the machine configuration from a database rather than a file. The XL has test code to read the machine elements from a file.

In both Eclipse and the XL, a function was created to read a ShapeTable.txt file into arrays of structures. They were also both modified to be capable of populating the machine from those structures.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2; Task Error C0000000, Divide By Zero, when second line encoder enabled.
XL200

When the second line encoder is enabled, the auxiliary encoder resolution is sometimes auto calculated based on the fact that both encoders are seeing counts, and the same amount of material is being measured by both encoders.

There was a bug in this code that failed to prevent a divide by zero error if the auxiliary encoder is not seeing counts. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.08 10/26/2023
XL2CL 5.89.08 10/26/2023
XL220OL 5.89.08 10/26/2023
XL220CL 5.89.08 10/26/2023
XL2OL 4.89.08 10/26/2023
XL2CL 4.89.08 10/26/2023
XL220OL 4.89.08 10/26/2023
XL220CL 4.89.08 10/26/2023
Release 5.0.22.410
Eclipse

Bug Fixes

  • Rollback a previous order edits fix. It was causing it's own set of problems.
  • Material edit button wasn't opening the editor.
  • Failures when editing a material would be confusing as it appeared nothing happened. It can still fail, but now users get a message as to why.
  • Broken help link on an alert is fixed.
  • Order Details
    • Items header would sometimes indicate there was a selected item, when clearly none were. This is now fixed.
    • Fixed a bad algorithm in manual rebundling that would occasionally not actually rebundle.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.22.410 10/23/2023
HWTest; Added same encoder filtering as SCN 4666.
XL200

Added the same encoder filtering as SCN 4666 to the Hardware test to avoid failing 5387 boards for a known timing issue that has been compensated for.

Model Version Released
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
XL2CL; Adding setup Active Slip Error Locks Run
XL200

Added Active Slip Error Locks Run setup parameter. Options are Yes or No. When set to Yes the Run Mode will be locked out until the Max Slip Error is cleared.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2; Add option for all Message, Warning and Error windows to lock out the run mode until cleared.
XL200

Any Warning, Message, or Error window will now have the ability to lock out the run mode until the window is cleared.

It may have appeared that this was already a feature, but it was very inflexible because it was dependent upon which Task the window was initiated by. The display function had the ability to be a blocking call, or not. If called as blocking from the run task, it could prevent re-entering the run mode. This is not at all convenient.

This new method can be either blocking or non-blocking and still lock the run mode, which is a lot more flexible.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
Release 4.1.212
Eclipse

Release 1.212 UART 3.56


  • Better recovery after connection to external SQL data source fails.
  • Eliminate the Eclipse compatibility error at the controller when connecting for the first time.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.212 10/15/2023
Eclipse-HVAC 4.1.212 10/15/2023
Release 5.0.22.311
Eclipse

Version 5.0.22.311

Improvements

  • The machine run state is now shown on the Scheduler. Hovering shows the small dashboard.
  • Pattern Quick-View now available from the Order Detail Quick-View.
  • Coil view now has a coil tag print preview.

Bug Fixes

  • Deep links were not always preserved when the user needed to login. Now they are.
  • Pathfinder Production Explorer operator dimension would often render as a big blue square. This has been fixed.
  • An empty date in production history data would cause an error. This is now handled better.
  • Production Summary report api would fail if certain historic data points did not exist. This is fixed.
  • Bundles with no production quantity would cause an error. Now they just are quietly ignored.
  • Bundle completions could be adversely affected when a customer stopped or started using bundle id prefixes on a controller. This is fixed.
  • Pending order edits would sometimes visibly revert but the changes were still pending. This is fixed.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.22.311 10/14/2023
Release 5.0.22.76
Eclipse

Version 5.0.22.76

Improvements

  • Add Coil, Material, and Tooling change counts to Production Summary report.
  • Production Events grid is now translated.
  • Schedule Sync now recalls orders already at the machine if they are set to hold.
  • NetSuite import will now retry when it encounters an unexpected error.

Bug Fixes

  • Scheduled jobs with a pending action now include the pending action in tooltip.
  • Warehouse didn't load correctly on localhost.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.22.76 9/24/2023
XL2 HWTest; Added output prompts to aid in debugging boot up issues.
XL200

Several debug prompts were added at the beginning and the end of hardware initializations like the Timer, video, keyboard and DSP (or ARM). If a board fails to boot all the way to the HWTest menu, knowing how far it got and what hardware it was working with last can help narrow down where to look when trying to troubleshoot non working hardware.

Model Version Released
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
XL2; Add Material Properties to the PLC Multi-Axis Material Change Event data that is downloaded.
XL200

We already have the ability to send the selected Material data string to the PLC to allow the PLC to setup for the material. However, there was no provision to also send the material properties like Width, Gauge, Color, or the Material Description. This change adds that capability. Details of the change can be found in the MODBUS spec in version level 126.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL; PLC Communication Window Prompt and Die Test caused unresponsive Run Input.
XL200

When the PLC option is enabled, for safety reasons, if the PC Unit ID has not been configured, we nag the user to set it. The controller will exit the run mode until it has been configured or the user indicates they don't want to see the window again.

The code that cleans up after Die Test was being called at the wrong place. This prevented it from being called if the PLC Communication window was being displayed. Since the Die Test Cleanup did not get called, the code that re-enables the Run input was not getting called, which then locked out the Run Mode.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
5226; Basic Logic for Two and Three Man Pedal Lights
Pathfinder

Changes made for 5226 controllers.

With the addition of new two and three man light pedals there need to be some kind of logic to handle them. As of right now they will mimic either the clamp down pedal or next step pedal depending on what is defined.

5226; Added Light Outputs for Two and Three Man Pedals
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

When running a machine it is helpful to have some kind of visual aid to know what needs to be pressed. This is especially true when running with multiple operators using additional pedals. To help Two Man and Three Man pedal outputs have been created to turn on outputs that should be wired up to lights to indicate that a second and/or third operator needs to press a pedal to continue operation.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.22 2/13/2026
5226; ASC Finger Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

ASC has a different finger type than other machines like Jorns and needed logic to make the finger come down a certain distance when approaching the clamp. This has been added.

5226; Changes to Winter Mode Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The winter mode logic in the 5226 is to be used on folding machines in cold conditions to allow the machine to not overload the VFD used to for the clamp and bending beam. For a more info refer to:

SCN 4752 - 5226; Added New Winter Mode Logic

Instead of using a max speed to limit every axes speed when it gets too cold the new logic will derate the speed of every axes fast speed parameter.This allows the user to have different cold speeds during use.

5226; LED Light Tree Communication
Pathfinder

Created a task that allows communication with the LED Light Tree through ethernet.

Able to command each segment individually. The segments can turn on and off, blink at varying speeds, or be disabled to allow underlying segments to become visible.

The 5226 still needs code added to send specific commands to the LED Light Tree, but the capability to send those commands is now implemented.

Version 5.0.22.23
Eclipse

Version 5.0.22.23

Bug Fixes

The Material quick view was not always showing the correct coil list. Order Hold and Delete actions were sometimes timing out. The XL Pattern list was not sorted and was limited to 100 items.

Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.22.23 9/10/2023
XL200 HWTest; Help Troubleshooting Resets and other Bootup Issues
XL200

There are several pieces of hardware that get initialized on bootup, knowing which hardware is getting initialized and how far the board is making it through the boot and startup software is very helpfull when troubleshooting bootup issues.

In order, the following text prompts have been added to help in this process.

Start Set_Timer_Values() End Set_Timer_Values() Start Init_SED1355Screen() End Init_SED1355Screen() Start Install_Keyboard_Interrupt() End Install_Keyboard_Interrupt() Start DSP_Load_ProgramData() End DSP_Load_ProgramData()

On a V4 controller the DPS Programm gets loaded by the 386 processor. On a v5 controller, the 386 requests information about and programs the ARM processor only if an update is required. Both of these things are done during DSP_Load_ProgramData.

Model Version Released
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
5226; Closed Loop Encoder Count Failure Detection
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Error 381 + Axis Enum type will be used for all closed loop applications for testing if the encoder being used has jumped past a certain amount of counts. The counts can be changed later, but for safety this will be a hard coded error.

Times you will see this error are hardware failures. Check cable connections, cables in general for damage or wiring.

5226; Bug Fix For Halt Status On Ethernet/IP Drives
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controller.

The communication with an Ethernet/IP drive requires both sides of communication to be in a state to share commands at the correct time. There was a bug in the 5226 where a halt state command was not used correctly and made the drive need another command to allow movement for the drive.

This was fixed by going through the correct steps on an E-Stop/Pathfinder error with commands to the drive.

XL2; License Codes Sequence Number
XL200

There is a sequence number stored in the Previous License Code that is required to generate a new License Code. There was a potential issue caused by the sequence number in the prior license not matching the sequence number stored in persistent memory. If this were to happen, the newly generated license code would not work on the controller and there was no convenient way to fix it. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL HWTest; Added Test Probe Mode to Burnin Test.

When troubleshooting XL200 temp chamber failures, it is helpful to know at what temperature the failures happen. The Test Probe Mode in the burnin test allows the XL200 to send burnin test data and the temperature to the Diagnostics website through a Test Probe.

Model Version Released
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
XL HWTest V4 & V5; Added Keyboard Pic Communication Test.
XL200

The XL200 hardware test already tests the communication with the Keyboard Pic when the Pic18F252 Test is selected. If the Pic is communicating with the 386, the Pic Software version will be displayed and the detected components will be displayed. However, if no communication occured, nothing was displayed.

The follwing changes were made to make troubleshooting Keyboard PIC communication easier.

  1. If no communication occurs, "Software Version : Not Detected" will be displayed.
  2. A menu option "P - Communication Test" has been added.

When the communication test is selected the Software Version will be requested over and over until power is cycled or "Q" is selected. This allows the communication circuit to be tested with a scope.

Model Version Released
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
Reimplement the 386 JTAG Control Test in Flashwizard.
AMS Tools

The Universal Programming Box (UPB) has a Control Line Test that can be run by Flashwizard. However, it does not test all of the CS lines, RD WR and other control lines that one would expect it would.

The Control Line Test was reimplemented in FlashWizard using a low level function of the UPB that allws Flashwizard to turn IO pins on and off.

These are the signals that are now tested. UCS, CS0, CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS5, CS6, W/R, RD, WR, BLE, BHE, LBA, P1.0, P1.2, P1.3, P1.4, P1.5, P1.6, P1.7, ADS, P3.0, P3.1, P3.6, RTS0, TX0, RTS1, TX1.

Additional Logic was added in order to convince the CPLD to activate 3CS1B as well as 3CS1A by using A21 and activating UCS1 twice.

Address and Data Lines are tested in the Address and Data Line Tests.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.40 8/31/2023
FlashWizard; XL200 Flash Programming Screen improvements
AMS Tools

The programming screen was not changing its status text at the appropriate times to know when erasing had ended, and programming had begun.

The programming window was using a generic timeout message to report a Programming timeout. This was changed to a specific message to indicate the timeout occurred during programming.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.39 8/30/2023
4.1.210
Eclipse
  • Log user who sent controller operator message.
  • Fix issue when sending controller user fields in rare situations.
  • Sometimes an order that was recalled from a controller still appeared to be at the controller.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.210 8/25/2023
Eclipse-HVAC 4.1.212 10/15/2023
Pathfinder; Fixed Touch Screen Issues in DRPC-130 PC
Pathfinder
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.13.3395 7/21/2023
Pathfinder; Added New 5226 Firmware
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC V4 and V5

Added 5226 Revs B,E,F Firmware Version 4.04.08 Added 5226 Rev G Firmware Version 5.00.07

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.12.3393 7/19/2023
5226; Clamp Up Pedal Will Always Return Shear if Paused
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A user operating a machine with a shear has the capability to stop the shear into a paused state with pedals. Once paused the user can then press the clamp up pedal and the shear would return home. This was only an option though if the user had parameter 747 Require Continuous Pedal Down to Move Shear set to yes. This seemed unnecessary once the shear got the ability to be paused in a non-maintain way.

The enhancement was then to allow the user to return the shear back to home with the clamp up pedal as long as it is in a paused state. It no longer matters how it got into that state.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.04.08 7/19/2023
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.07 7/19/2023
5226; Clamp Up Pedal Returns Bending Beam if in Paused State
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Since the bending beam can now be paused in both maintain and non-maintain movement types the operator might not want to continue with the bend operation and would rather return it back to home. This could be because it was stopped for a safety concern or something wrong with the material. To accomplish this the clamp up pedal will now return the bending beam home if it was in a paused state when pressed. Once home the operation will be considered finished.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.07 7/19/2023
5226BB 4.04.08 7/19/2023
XL2; Loss of focus on List Edit Prompts used in Grid Controls.
XL200

SCN 4797 to fix and Erroneous Error 268 caused a bug with the Focus Tree when editing List entries within a Grid. This SCN caused a different bug that was not noticed until now. After an edit, no entry in the Grid would have focus.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2CL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL220OL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL220CL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2OL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2CL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
XL220OL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
XL220CL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
5226; Slight Delay for Return Moves in Case the Pedal is a Push Through
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

There are many variations of pedals that can be used on a folding machine. In a perfect world you would have a pedal that is specific to what you would like to happen. As in a clamp down pedal that is used for moving the clamp down at the appropriate time, a bending beam cycle pedal to start a bend operation or even a shear start pedal to start a shear operation. In reality though the machine may have a limited amount of pedals that will do multiple operations. Some of these pedals might have two contacts that allow the user to push through to a different wiring set which can be considered a different pedal. The most common type of a push through is having a clamp up be the push through of the clamp down pedal. This is mainly for safety to make sure the user can quickly push through to a clamp up move when the clamp is moving down. A problem has arouse from this type of pedal with the clamp up pedal now able to return a bending beam or shear if they are in a paused state. The main problem of this is if there is no dedicated bb cycle or shear pedal then the clamp down pedal will switch to those other pedals logic based on which operation you are in. If the clamp down does have a clamp up push through then the return process will be thrown off because the clamp down will restart the operation before the up pedal signal is seen.

The solution to this problem was to have a small delay with the clamp down signal logic being started if the bending beam or shear are not home and in a paused state. The delay gives time for the user to push through and hit the clamp up to return either axes home. If the delay times out before seeing a clamp up then the clamp down logic will take over and the move will resume.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.04.08 7/19/2023
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.07 7/19/2023
5226; Clamp Up Pedal Will Pause Bending Beam Move
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

If you are doing a bend operation in Pathfinder there are 2 options on how the bending beam will make its target. The user can either hold the pedal the entire time in a maintain state or just press the pedal and let the entire operation finish without interruption. In the maintain state you can let go of the pedal and the bending beam will stop. Pressing the pedal again will continue the operation. In the other scenario the shear will not stop unless there is an e-stop or it finished the operation.

In case there is a safety concern or a material problem there should be a way to stop the bending beam in the non-maintain scenario. To accomplish this the clamp up pedal will now pause the motion of the bending beam. Once paused a press of the bending beam cycle pedal will continue the bend operation.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.07 7/19/2023
XL2; Independent Punching on Hole Detect controller makes unnecessary scrap.
XL200

Independent punching on a hole detect controller is not relative to anything else like it might need to be on a non-hole detect. On a hole detect the repeating pattern places holes that the controller then detects, possibly counts, and then cuts.

A customer with a dual line encoder system complained that the controller would not start punching the independent holes until the leading edge of the material reached the shear. On coil thread up, they wanted to start punching holes right away to avoid unpunched material that would be unusable for parts.

The hole detect code was modified to start punching independent punches immediately as soon as the pattern is detected to have an independent operation.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2CL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2OL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2CL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
5226; New Options for Pausing a Shear During a Move
Pathfinder

Chnages made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some folding machines come with a shear/slitter used for cutting their material into the length they want for the part they are going to make. If you are doing a shear operation in Pathfinder there are 2 options on how the shear will make its target. The user can either hold the pedal the entire time in a maintain state or just press the pedal and let the entire operation finish without inturruption. In the maintain state you can let go of the pedal and the shear will stop. Pressing the pedal again will continue the operation. In the other scenario the shear will not stop unless there is an e-stop or it finished the operation. It seems necessary that this should not be the case and there should be some way to pause.

The solution was to create options on how to pause in the non-maintain mode. The user can now press the pedal that started the shear movement or they can press the clamp up pedal if the machine has that input wired into the machine. Once paused pressing the pedal that started the shear movement at the beginning will make the shear start moving again.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.07 7/19/2023
XL2; Buffer Overrun on Zanasi print driver when using a 6370 v3.04.
XL200

The 6370 software version v3.04 added new more efficient commands for printer communication. The XL code was also modified to make use of those commands. However, the new XL communication code had a bug in it that the Zanasi printer driver would cause to occur. The Zanasi printer driver uses a much larger print buffer than the other print drivers. This large print buffer caused a math overflow error that made the printer communication code believe all responses from the 6370 were overflowing the print buffer size. This has been resolved.

The same error was possible using the old print communication commands, but it was much less likely.

This has been resolved by using a larger data typed variable to calculate the required size. The calculated buffer size is then capped to the maximum allowed for a string in the XL.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2CL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL220OL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL220CL 5.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2OL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2CL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
XL220OL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
XL220CL 4.89.07 7/12/2023
XL2; Erroneous Error 268 when entering Delay Codes.
XL200

Normal expected behavior when editing values in an edit window is that an Enter key is required to save the value. However, when working with edit windows that are part of a dialog window that has an OK button, special code is triggered by the OK button to Validate and Save the value in any edit window that may currently be open.

SCN 4670 added additional validation for Scrap, Delay, Employee Codes, Setup and Tool Lib windows.

For the Delay and Employee codes, the added validation was done out of order with saving the entered value, and the error was displayed erroneously. A second press of the Ok button saved the values.

The same bug was duplicated in the Scrap Coil Window and the Scrap Code Window.

Setup and Tool Library screens were tested and appear to work on both the Simulation and Hardware.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.89.06 6/20/2023
XL220OL 5.89.06 6/20/2023
XL2CL 5.89.06 6/20/2023
XL2OL 5.89.06 6/20/2023
XL220CL 4.89.06 6/20/2023
XL220OL 4.89.06 6/20/2023
XL2CL 4.89.06 6/20/2023
XL2OL 4.89.06 6/20/2023
XL2; Additional Welded Coils Functionality.
XL200

The full documentation of the Welded Coils functionality will come in a later SCN when the feature becomes enabled for use in the software. This SCN is a place holder that allows code to be checked in, documenting the reason for the change.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
5226; Rev G Boards Will Be Version 5
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The new 5226 rev G boards have a different processor chip than previous revs. To differentiate between the G's and the rest it was decided to make the G board software be version 5 and the B's, E's and F's will stay at 4. This will make it easier to find out what type of board it is in the field by looking at the version number in Pathfinder.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.01 5/30/2023
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.00 5/30/2023
5226; Added Light Tree Configuration Generic Parameter
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 controller is getting logic to control an external LED light tree that will make it easier for operators to know what pedal to press and/or what the state of the machine is. The controller just needs to know that the machine configuration chosen has that option to use the light tree. To make that happen a new Light Tree Configuration generic parameter has been created. The main goal is to just let the controller know it's enabled and to use a hardcoded setup. Future configurations can be added to have the light tree work in different ways.

XL2CL; Add Auto Die Positioning Velocity setup parameter.
XL200

SCN 4668 changed the Die Positioning while in Auto to use the Max Die Return Velocity. This is more efficient for production but it scares some people. For the sake of flexibility, to balance efficiency against fear, a new setup parameter has been added. It is called Auto Die Positioning Velocity.

It defaults to zero. When zero, the Jog Velocity will be used. By default, this changes reverts the positioning speed to the Jog Velocity. If set to a non-zero value, that speed will be used to position the die for stationary press operations or other stationary die positioning operations.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 4.89.05 5/12/2023
XL2CL 5.89.05 5/12/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2; Missed Shear/Punch Target error reporting.
XL200

SCN 4570 added the press number to Missed Punch Target Errors. It also added a function that was supposed to get called to display all such errors. However two places were missed, one in the Open Loop Press Task and one in the Closed Loop Press Task. This resulted in the the text %2w being displayed instead of the press number when the error was reported in these two locations.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.05 5/12/2023
XL2CL 5.89.05 5/12/2023
XL220OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 4.89.05 5/12/2023
XL2CL 4.89.05 5/12/2023
XL220OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
5226; Intermittent Resets on Rev G boards.
Pathfinder

The intermittent resets are known to have been happening on the Hardware Test. The same bug has the capacity of causing resets on the Production software.

The K60 and K66 arm processors we use on 5226 boards both have a RAM segment boundry at address 0x20000000. If any memory operation spans that address, it can cause a processor Busfault, which ultimately ends up causing the processor to reset.

The K60 BSP library had protections enabled to prevent any software from using anything spanning that address. The K66 BSP did not.

The protection is to (Memory Leak) allocate memory at that address that is never used, which prevents any variable or data from spanning that address.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.05 4/27/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.05 4/27/2023
5226 HW Test; Add Board Reset or Power Cycle Status.
Pathfinder

Unexpected Board Resets or Power Cycles on a controller are a bad thing. Prior to this change the 5226 could reset due to power or hardware issue without an obvious method of detection. Unless someone is present to see the heartbeat LED or the Web Page Test counter reset, it could easily get missed.

One the Web Page, in the More Information column of the SW Version row, the controller will display, in RED, "A Board Reset or Power Cycle has occurred!!!" after any reset. A new button labeled "Clear_Reset" has been added to clear this text at the beginning of a new board Test.

Clearing the text at the start of a new board test and checking for it at the end should allow us to detect boards that may have intermittent reset problems.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.05 4/27/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.05 4/27/2023
XL2; Version 5 software failed to catch Rev G 5386 board Rev.
XL200

The only valid hardware rev for the 5386 board is Rev H. The software was testing <=D to report a failure.

This has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
V5 HWTest; Ethernet changes
XL200

Two changes were made.

  1. The Network Sub-Net was being set incorrectly. It did not seem to prevent operation but it wasn't correct.

  2. The Ethernet task was modified to ping address 192.168.167.5 so that WireShark can be used to look for signs of life on the ethernet port.

Model Version Released
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
5226; Make Sure Part Operation Gets Allocated in Memory Before Freeing
Pathfinder

Changes made for the Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A bug existed in the 5226 Rev B code where the data about a part and the operations involved were using a free function illegally. This came about because the rev b does not have persistent memory. The problem is that the same function to initialize the data into the persistent memory was being used on the B boards which messed up the Add Bend to Part function used later and cause a free function being used to task error out the board.

The solution was to set the pointer structure to NULL for a rev B at initialization which then allows the following Add Bend to Part function to allocate before ever trying to use the free function.

XL2CL; The Missed Hole Correction test fails to consider Die Position
XL200

When doing Hole Correction, every shear requires a detected hole. When the Hole Detect is mounted on the CL Die Accelerator, the test needs to consider the current position of the die and it wasn't. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.04 4/6/2023
XL2CL 4.89.04 4/6/2023
XL2CL; Stationary Target enhancement for Die Accelerators.
XL200

On lines with Stopping press operations and Non-Stop Die accelerators, the Die Accelerator will position itself to do a stationary press hit on its target if there will also be a stopping operation on another press that halts its target within the available die stroke.

Prior to this change, the die would wait until it would normally accelerate and then move itself into position where the material is expected to stop. It would then be ready to fire its press(s) at the same time as the stopping press(s).

We encountered a machine that has pre-notches that the shear is supposed to fire inside of. By waiting until time to accelerate, the notch proceeded far enough through the die that the die would catch it and drag the material with it on its way to the expected stationary cut location. The die has roller guides that help feed the notch through the die in the forward direction but not the reverse. Positioning the die resulted in the die outrunning the notch.

To counteract this problem the software has been modified to position the die earlier. This is intended to prevent the notch from getting close enough that the notch gets in a position to catch. The die will begin positioning itself once enough material has passed to prevent the possibility of out running the material leading edge or the position of the prior target on the material.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.04 4/6/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.89.04 4/6/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
5226; Allow Continuous Use of Alternate Gripper In Semi-Auto Mode
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On some double folding machines there are the standard sheet grippers used for most of the parts and an alternate gripper that is mainly used for parts that have a flange already bent into the material. Since it is gripped with the alternate gripper it is allowed to go into full automatic. There is a bug though in semi-automatic using the pedals though. The problem was that after each step the controller would want the user to open the alt gripper, press the next step pedal to move to the new position and then have you close the alt gripper. If the step after the current step is also an alt gripper it should just move to position.

The fix was to also allow continuous movement when using the alternate gripper in semi-automatic mode. So now there should be no opening and closing for each step when using the alternate gripper.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.01 9/21/2023
5226; Don't Force Simulation Mode to Have to Reset E-Stop
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Simulation mode for the 5226 controllers allows users to simulate a machine and test things like jogging or going into automatic. This mode also still adheres to physical I/O. As in it expects a physical input for things like pedals and fault statuses. One problem though was that on startup it would always want the E-Stop to be reset even if the input was on. This can make things tricky if you don't have a button or a switch going to the input which would make Pathfinder stay in E-Stop mode.

The solution was to make simulation mode allow the system to go into idle at startup if the E-Stop input is on. This is how non-simulation mode works so its not changing the rules.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.01 9/21/2023
5226 HW Test; Add addtional details to Analog Test Results.
Pathfinder

The Analog Tests switch between two modes, Current (Amps) and Voltage. If a port is failing it is beneficial to know if it is only in one mode or if it is in both modes.

Once a test has switched to a Failed test result status it stays at that status until the board or Tests are reset. This is intentional to make sure we catch intermittent failures. To make it easier to tell if a test is intermittently passing, the test results will also show the results of the last test, Pass or Fail.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.05 4/27/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.05 4/27/2023
5226 BB and HW Test; Changes to the Common Library
Pathfinder

The Common library will no longer declare the Board structure Public. That will now be done in any application that uses Common. This allows the Board Structure contents to be customized by each application with the use of conditional assembly (#define).

The BlackBox and Hardware_Test projects have been modified to work with this change.

By default, the Hardware_Test will now be compiled as a CAN Master with one Slave.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226 HW Test; Save Failed IO bits for Display.
Pathfinder

For intermittent failures the failed IO bits would disappear from the displayed hex value before they could make it to the Web Page. Any failed bit is now Or'd into a display only field and preserved until power cycle or a test reset.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.03 4/4/2023
XL2; Dump Table Scrap Output changes state too early

The Scrap output for the Dump Table was switching states to early. The state at the time of a shear should not change until the Dump Delay and the Dump Dwell both expire. However, the state was changing at the beginning of the Dump Delay. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
5226 HW Test; Fixed Controller Resets
Pathfinder

The controller was resetting, which prevented the Web Page from being displayed. Using the debugger, it was determined that the Ram Test was failing. When it fails, it tries to use a printf to report details on a serial debug port. The printf was causing the controller generate a hard fault. This was found to be caused by insufficient stack space being allocated to the Ram Test task.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.03 4/4/2023
XL2CL; XL200CL-MRE2 Press Up output on Rotary Press.

On the XL200CL-MRE2 the second die can be configured in multiple ways. The IO for the second die was being defined as if configured for the Shear Die. In most cases this would be OK except if the Shear Was defines as a Linear DA or an Eccentric DA. In this case a Press Up output was being configured.

This bug did not hurt anything but it did cause an undefined output in the IO diagnostic screen to turn on and off. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.03 3/30/2023
XL2CL 4.89.03 3/30/2023
XL2CL; Die Test displays Coast Mode Timeout when stopping.
XL200

Die Test was failing to stop the encoder simulation and halt until the Coast Mode Timeout expired. This was caused by SCN 4664 when the runtask was provided its own method for limiting material motion.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.03 3/30/2023
XL2CL 4.89.03 3/30/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2; SCN 4734 Failed to be added to the Latest Release.
XL200

SCN 4734 was added to the Maintenance Release source code and failed to be added to the Development Release source code. This change effectively got lost during the last Major Release.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.02 3/29/2023
XL2OL 5.89.02 3/29/2023
XL2CL 4.89.02 3/29/2023
XL2OL 4.89.02 3/29/2023
5226 HW Test; Add Ramp/Stop button to the Analog Tests on the Web Page.
XL200

Each of the Analog Tests now have an Ramp/Stop button that can be used to toggle the analog ramp On and Off. The Ramp will stop or resume from wherever it is.

This feature will allow the user to stop the ramp and then use a meter rather than a scope to trace fixed voltages through the analog circuits.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226 HW Test; The Encoder Test was not testing both encoder directions.
Pathfinder

The Encoder test was only testing the B-->A and D-->C directions.

There were actually two bugs. The A-->B and C-->D direction test was actually tesing the opposite direction. The second bug caused only a single direction to be tested.

The bug was caused by the wrong operator being used to toggle the test.

A bool true value is equivelent to 1. Anything non-zero is also considered true. The correct operator to use on a bool to toggle its state is the not "!" operator. The code was using the "~" invert operator. The "!" operator toggle the state between true and false, 1 and 0. The invert operator toggles the state of the bits in the variable. Using it on a variable equal to true (1) results in the value being equal to 0xFE. Using it again toggles the bit and the value goes back to 1. Both of these values evaluate to true when doing a boolean comparison.

Both of these issues have been resolved.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226 HW Test - Added Encoder Diagnostic Data to 5226 Hardware Test Webpage
Pathfinder

The 5226 Hardware Test Webpage now displays additional information about the Encoder tests. You can now see the total number of Encoder tests that have been ran, and how many times each A, B, and Z signal have failed the tests for both forwards and backwards Encoder tests.

The names of the Encoder tests have been changed from "Encoder Test A to B" and "Encoder Test C to D" to "Encoder Test 1-2 (A-B)" and "Encoder Test 3-4 (C-D)".

New Buttons for each Encoder Test are displayed in the Function column of the webpage. These buttons display the current mode of the test and also can be used to toggle the mode through four options. The Mode defaults the the standard bi-directional test. It toggles to 1-->2, 3-->4 then 1<--2, 3<--4 then off and back to bi-directional. The purpose of the Off state is to be able to evalaute the number of tests and the number of failures without them changing.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.03 4/4/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.03 4/4/2023
XL2: Make Mister and Dump Table features available as standard functions.
XL200

The Mister and the Dump Table features were created as part of the Tube Mill controller option.

This change makes these available as standard features. When not a tube mill controller they are available if MODBUS is enabled and Extended IO has been configured to support them.

The Dump Table is only available in Non-Stop Shearing applications.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 5.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL220OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2CL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2OL 4.90.00 11/9/2023
XL2; Eclipse version is incompatible with Welded Coils operation error message.
XL200

The "Eclipse version is incompatible with Welded Coils operation" error message is being displayed in error, even when Welded Coils operation is not enabled.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.01 3/21/2023
XL2CL 5.89.01 3/21/2023
XL220OL 5.89.01 3/21/2023
XL220CL 5.89.01 3/21/2023
XL2OL 4.89.01 3/21/2023
XL2CL 4.89.01 3/21/2023
XL220OL 4.89.01 3/21/2023
XL220CL 4.89.01 3/21/2023
XL2; Add Modal Window status bit to Eclipse UART Status command.
XL200

Any window that requires attention from an operator is going to be a Modal Window. A status bit has been added to the Flags in the UART Status Sub-Command to indicate anytime a Modal Window is open.

The intended use for this is to notify a PC application anytime the XL controller needs attention. This allows the XL user interface to be buried and accessible through a KVM Window Application on a PC. In theory this allows an XL to be installed on a system where its only access to the XL display and keyboard is through a KVM interface window. A monitoring application can monitor the status bit and indicate on the computer screen that the XL requires attention.

This bit becomes available with Eclipse UART version 3.61 and higher.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Allow Stationary Cut window leaves Main Menu Locked.
XL200

Most prompt windows need to lock the Main Menu to prevent the screen from being changed or prevent the menu options from being selected while the prompt is open.

The Allow Stationary Cut window failed to unlock the Main Menu, preventing the screen or menu options from being changed after it was closed. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.08 3/14/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.88.08 3/14/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; 0x00B0002 Task Error
XL200

The 0x00B0002 task error is an indication of memory record corruption It is displayed when the record corruption is detected.

SCN 4716 setup conditions that cause memory corruption when trying to implement a new Queue Record garbage collection scheme.

SCN 4755 attempted to fix it by adding more protection around adding, removing, and deleting records. Customers are still experiencing issues with the new collection scheme, so it has now been re-implemented using a combination of the original method but with a new improvement.

The original method involved each press task removing and immediately deleting their own Queue Records. Deleting the records can be a lengthy process and is undesirable in a high priority press task.

The new solution returns to having each press task remove its own Queue Records but rather than delete them, it adds them to a new queue that a low priority task monitors to do the deletion.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.08 3/14/2023
XL2CL 5.88.08 3/14/2023
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.88.08 3/14/2023
XL2CL 4.88.08 3/14/2023
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Closed Loop Die Accelerators not returning home when entering the run mode.
XL200

If there was no target, a Closed Loop Die Accelerator was not returning home when entering the run mode.

This is most likely to occur on a Hole Count controller or on the second die of a Dual Die Accelerator system.

A Hole Detect controller does not require a target for the shear die to stay in run.

The second die may or may not have a target.

In most cases the die will already be home but in some cases an operator may have manually jogged it away from home for maintenance or for a manual operation.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.08 3/14/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.88.08 3/14/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Add setting for Allow Stationary Cut.
XL200

In order to put customers in control of stationary cuts a new setup has been added called Allow Stationary Cut. It only applies to the Shear Press.

The new setup has three settings, Always, Never and Prompt. It defaults to Always to prevent issues with Legacy installs.

Always and Never are self-explanatory.

Prompt will halt the Line and display an Are You Sure window asking if a Stationary Cut Should be allowed.

If No is selected, any further attempt to run, as long as a stationary cut is required, will be prevented with a Missed Shear error. It will be prevented until a flying cut is executed, a Manual Shear is executed or the coil tails out.

If Yes is selected, the stationary cut will be allowed on the next attempt. Stationary cuts will be allowed until a flying cut is executed, a Manual Shear is executed or the coil tails out.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.07 3/9/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.88.07 3/9/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Material being allowed to feed while Halting after a Stationary cut.
XL200

When halting after a stationary cut, the material is supposed to remain stationary to prevent the material movement from damaging the newly cut part. However, the material was being allowed to feed during the die retract. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.07 3/9/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.88.07 3/9/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Minimize the usage of Stationary Cuts on a Die Accelerator.
XL200

When entering the run mode with a Closed Loop Die Accelerator, stationary cuts are a necessary evil. This change sets to minimize them by eliminating the use of the Shear Die Distance when determining if a stationary cut needs to be made. From now on only targets that are between the Min and Max Die Distances will be considered for stationary cuts.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.07 3/9/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.88.07 3/9/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; RS232 Printer baud rate miss reported.
XL200

When selecting a driver, the RS232 Baud rate is displayed as a read only setup parameter to help in configuring the printer. The 19200 Baud rate is mistakenly displayed as 14400. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
5226 HWTest; Added More Information Column to Test Webpage
Pathfinder

The Test Webpage now has a More Information Column. This column displays more information about some of the tests.

For the IO test it will display the IO bits that are failing, if any, in hex format. Nothing is displayed if the test is passing.

For the Analog tests it will display the Expected analog value, the Actual Analog value and the Difference.

The software version is now displayed in its own row and comes from the Application Version so that the version only needs to be managed from one place.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.02 2/13/2023
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.02 2/13/2023
Pathfinder; Adjust Modify Offset Measurement to Account for Tooling
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Pathfinder; More support for new PC Touchscreen

Fixes defects found in SCN4727

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.10.3368 2/8/2023
Pathfinder; Added Overshoot Distance Parameter To All 5226 Jouanel Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

On newer Jouanel machines the backgauge has a mechanical problem in which the overshoot distance parameter helps with. The 5226 Jouanel configurations that have been created did not have the overshoot distance parameter built into them. Now all of them have the overshoot distance parameter readily available.

5226; Make Overshoot Distance Logic Work With a Spring Finger
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

For background on the overshoot parameter logic refer to:

SCN 4619 - 5226; Added Backgauge Overshoot Distance Logic

All of the overshoot logic on the 5226 was tested on a machine configuration that had no spring finger on the machine. When there is a finger the 5226 will adjust targets for the backgauge and visual feedback to account for when the finger is active. A bug was found with the overshoot distance on a machine that has a spring finger in which after the first move the backgauge will no longer overshoot when the finger is active.

The bug ended up being a calculation for the backgauge target for the overshoot move to ignore the fact that there is a finger active. The solution was to make sure that the finger offset distance is taken into account when deciding if the backgauge needs to overshoot.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.01 5/30/2023
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.00 5/30/2023
XL2; Remember Coil tail-out state through a power cycle.
XL200

On a Coil tail-out the tailed coil must be classified as Completely Used, Returned to Inventory or Not Unloaded. There is an Unload Coil Window that requires this classification to occur.

The software was not accounting for the possibility that an operator may turn power off to the machine while the Unload Coil screen is active. The window is displayed as soon as the coil tails out. It is very possible, near the end of a shift, that there may be no more production for the day and the machine gets turned off before threading the next coil. Because the tailed Coil was not classified, it is still considered the current coil. When the new coil is threaded, the software has no reason to prompt for a new coil. All the new coil’s production was getting attributed to the tailed coil.

The result of this scenario is the tailed coil gets double production tracked to it and the new coil gets none. The customers inventory still believes it has the new coil available for use.

To fix this issue, the state of tail-out will now be remembered throughout a power cycle. The Unload Coil screen will be presented after the power-up, requiring the tailed coil to be classified.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; SCN 4716 caused memory corruption Task Errors.
XL200

SCN 4716 introduced a new garbage collection method to move the deletion of Queue records to the low priority PEG graphics task from the high priority press tasks.

The function that deletes the records was written with the assumption that it would always be protected from other tasks with an Eclipse locking semaphore. The Queue chain does not have an Eclipse Locking semaphore so the garbage collection software was not being protected from the higher priority Run Task as it was adding records to the queue chain

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.06 2/3/2023
XL2CL 5.88.06 2/3/2023
XL220OL 5.88.06 2/3/2023
XL220CL 5.88.06 2/3/2023
XL2OL 4.88.06 2/3/2023
XL2CL 4.88.06 2/3/2023
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.88.06 2/3/2023
XL2; Manual Operations Window
XL200

As we add new features, sometimes they require new inputs that need to reside locally on the XL rather than a MODBUS extended input. Examples being when one of the hole detect capable inputs are needed for accuracy. On some controllers this is only possible if an existing input is moved or removed.

Inputs that execute manual operations, like Manual Stacker, have less stringent timing requirements. They can be initiated with on screen push buttons. A new window has been added to the XL200 controllers for Manual Operations. The first manual operation that has been added to it is a Manual Stacker button.

An On-Screen Push button may not be convenient enough for some applications. In that case, MODBUS extended inputs can also be added, as is the case with the Manual Stacker input. If MODBUS is enabled and the Manual Stacker input has been removed from the XL, it will be available via MODBUS in one of the extended inputs.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL; Hole Correction Incompatible with Dietrich IO on XL200
XL200

On the XL200 with Dietich IO, the Hole Detect Input (24) is reserved for the Print Detect input. This was not considered when the Hole Correction feature was enabled on the XL200 controller. This created a conflict with the input that has just now been discovered. The Hole Detect Option is already prevented with Dietrich IO for the same reason. This change disables the Hole Correction feature when the Dietrich IO option is enabled, preventing the conflict. Allowing the Hole Correction feature with Dietrich IO will have to be a future SCN..

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
5226; Added New Winter Mode Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Winter mode is a new feature that is to be used as its name implies, during cold weather. On some hydraulic machines that are using VFD's to control a couple of axes the machine needs more horsepower to run ats its traditional speed when it’s cold. The problem is that this horsepower can end up exceeding what the motor is capable of supplying. This will trip the drive consistently and make the machine un-usable until the hydraulic fluid can warm up to be able to run as normal.

The proposed solution is to have 2 new operator parameters. They are 766 Winter Mode Enabled which will enable/disable the feature and 767 Winter Mode Max Speed which is the limit of analog signal the controller will send to the drive when Winter Mode is enabled. This max speed is always the limit if Winter Mode is on. On the other side is that other speeds options can be used like throttle, safe and operation step speeds as long as they don't exceed the Winter Mode limit. This should keep the drive from tripping in cold weather, but also keeps open other advancements to Winter Mode.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 5.00.00 5/30/2023
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.01 5/30/2023
Pathfinder; Added New Winter Mode Feature
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Winter mode is a new feature that is to be used as its name implies, during cold weather. On some hydraulic machines that are using VFD's to control a couple of axes the machine needs more horsepower to run ats its traditional speed when it’s cold. The problem is that this horsepower can end up exceeding what the motor is capable of supplying. This will trip the drive consistently and make the machine un-usable until the hydraulic fluid can warm up to be able to run as normal.

The proposed solution is to have 2 new operator parameters. They are 766 Winter Mode Enabled which will enable/disable the feature and 767 Winter Mode Max Speed which is the limit of analog signal the controller will send to the drive when Winter Mode is enabled.

XL2; Add Welded Coils Functionality
XL200

This SCN, at a high level, documents a new feature that is mostly complete in the software but not yet enabled.

Prior to this change customers who welded coils together were not able to track individual coil production because a coil change required the machine to halt, and it cleared the queue on a coil change. This behavior negates many of the reasons customers choose to weld coils in the first place. There was also no way to sense the transition from one coil to another.

This feature allows coils to be welded, pre-loaded into a coil queue, pre-validated by Eclipse and then switch coils on the fly without having to halt between coils or clearing the queue between coils. This change also allows production and coil usage be tracked under the same conditions.

More details will follow when the feature is enabled and available for use.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
HW Test; Added Labels for Encoder G and H
XL200

During the Port G/H Test, Flash Wizard will now display a 'G' or 'H' above each value in order to reduce confusion about which encoder port is being used.

Model Version Released
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
Pathfinder; Rev G Firmware Had Wrong Version Number
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

With the creation of the rev G 5226 boards a lot of testing had to go into making sure Pathfinder could program the board. Since the firmware is version controlled between the board and Pathfinder the easiest way to force the update process was to change in the file. Through all this testing the wrong version number accidentally got checked in and put into a release. This causes Pathfinder to try to update the controller every start up because of the mismatch. The solution was to make sure the correct version number is embedded into the file.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.08.3364 1/18/2023
5226 Programming Tool; Put Version Number In The Firmware Build
AMS Tools

Changes made for the Pathfinder 5226 Programming Tool

The 5226 firmware file does not have anything in its name besides which Pathfinder controller it is for and the file itself is in non-readable s19 type lines. This has caused confusion in the field in which someone doesn't know what version the file it is that they want to program or find out what they programmed into the board already.

The solution was to have the programmer extract the version number out of the un-encrypted build and put it into the encrypted file. The top line of a s19 file is not part of the program and is mostly used as a file check by our programming tools. So now when you pick the new build file and press the encrypt button it will look into the build at a certain location the version should be. It will take this version number and put it on the top line of the new encrypted file it is creating.

XL2CL; Increase Lower Limit on the Command Velocity Filter
XL200

The Command Velocity Filter was added for a specific customer who claimed that earlier versions of software performed better on their system.

We were looking for any differences between the "good" version and the latest. One difference was due to a bug that was fixed. The command velocity was being filtered using hard coded constants that did not get adjusted properly when the loop time changed for SERCOS. By adding the Setup, they were able to use the same filtering as was being used prior to fixing the bug.

The default filter rate is 35.8Hz. The effective rate with SERCOS prior to fixing the bug was 17.8Hz.

Recently a different customer was having trouble and we discovered that they had set the filter rate to 1hz. This caused their Die Accelerator to be way behind as it was accelerating. For this reason, we are raising the Lower Limit to something that still allows some adjustment below the default but limits it to a more reasonable range.

The Lower Limit of the Command Velocity Filter is now 10Hz rather than 1Hz.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; Increase Lower limit of Coast Mode Timeout setting
XL200

The Coast Mode Timeout setting was added for lines that take longer than the 3 second value that was hard coded at the time. It was only really intended to be left alone or used to compensate for lines that have longer coast times.

Customers have felt the need to adjust it down to the minimum of 1 second. This can create Missed Target scenarios where targets could have been hit wile coasting but were limited by the shortened coast time.

The Minimum Limit on this setting has now been changed to the default setting of 3 seconds.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; Added Slow Run input for Open Loop material motion
XL200

The Closed Loop Feed to Stop controllers have a Slow Run input to help reduce Scrap when threading a new coil. It also helps for Material pit control.

Up until this point Open Loop controllers or controllers that have Open Loop Material motion control have handled with these things with external logic. However, if the material speed is controlled using the Analog feature of the controller, external logic is not sufficient.

This change adds an extended IO input (MODBUS) on input 52 or 50 for Open Loop Slow Run control. If the controller has Open Loop Material motion control, this input will be available.

HVAC Controllers use input 50.

All other controllers use input 52.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; Add selection for Keyence MK-G1000 part printer
XL200

We have added a selection for the Keyence MK-G1000 part printer. This and the Keyence MK-U6000 printer selection select the exact same driver behind the scenes. The new selection makes it clear that the MK-G1000 printer is supported and avoids the confusion of having to select a driver that does not match the printer model.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Stopping target causes die to outrun and unthread the material

This issue is possible due to SCN 4655 - XL2CL; Position the Die early when delaying for a stationary shear or punch.

On the first part after a Queue clear, SCN 4655 can cause the die to rapidly pre-position itself for a stationary target that results in the die out running the leading edge of the material. When this happens, the material drops out of the die, which can cause a jam up when the material catches back up to the die.

The software was changed to test if the resulting die position places the die beyond the current location of the material leading edge. If it does, the pre-positioning is disabled and the die will wait for the material to stop before it is positioned for the stationary target.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Stopping Target and stationary Die Accelerator target optimization.
XL200

Stopping targets and stationary Die Accelerator targets that can be fired at the same time will now do so rather than be fired seqeuntially as has been done in the past.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Delay MHA targets for Stopping targets
XL200

When the software was modified to support stopping presses and standard Die Accelerators, Die Accelerators were modified to wait and do stationary press hits when a stopping target caused the DA target to be within the die range.

This same change was not implemented for Multi-Hit Die Accelerators (MHA and MHA2). This has now been rectified.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL; Halt on Stationary Cut bug
XL200

The MHA Die Accelerators allowed additional material motion after the cut while the die was returning home. After a stationary cut, the material is supposed to stay stationary after the cut if a halt is required. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; Tail Out Configuration (Single) mistakenly hiding parameters.
XL200

Setting the Tail Out Configuration to Single was mistakenly hiding the Shear Tail Out Distance and Shear Encoder Switchover distance parameters.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; 0xC0000000 Task Error when Auto Correcting Auxiliary Line Encoder
XL200

A 0xC0000000 task error is caused by a divide by zero attempt. The Dual Line Encoder option can Auto Correct the Auxiliary Encoder. If the Auxiliary Encoder is not getting counts, a divide by zero error can occur.

This has been resolved. Auto correction of the Auxiliary encoder is prevented unless both encoders have encoder counts greater than zero.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; Tail Out Configuration when set to Single not working properly
XL200

When the Dual Line Encoder option is enabled and the Tail Out Configuration is set to Single encoder, the Main encoder is supposed to be used all the time. Setting the Main Encoder to Exit(1) would not work, only the Entry (2) encoder was being used. This was resolved.

Some other changes were made related to tailing out and tailing in, based on which encoder is being used.

When the Main Encoder is set to Entry (2):

  1. Tail out is immediate.
  2. Thread up uses the Shear to Encoder Distance 2 to set the encoder
  3. Tail out uses the Shear to Encoder Distance 2 to calculate scrap.

When the Main Encoder is set to Exit (1)

  1. Tail out is delayed until the Shear Tail out Distance.
  2. Thread up uses the Shear Tail out Distance to set the encoder.
  1. Tail out uses the Shear Tail out Distance to calculate scrap.
Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; 0x8006095B Task error after clearing memory.
XL200

Certain software needs to be disabled during the Powerup sequence. Clearing memory is part of the Powerup sequence. There is a flag that is active during powerup that is used to disable software. Clearing memory involves a certain amount of initialization after the memory has been cleared. Some of that initialization code runs both during and after powerup and uses the powerup flag to disable portions of it.

The bug that is being fixed here is that the Memory Clear also cleared out the powerup flag, allowing software that was intended to be disabled, to run. In the specific instance that led to this discovery it caused the 0x8006095B task error. However, it is unpredictable what other sorts of errors this could or has been causing.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; Scrap pieces added during Queue Initialization cause Error 255.
XL200

SCN 4533 added an error message to prevent long runs of uncorrected parts when Hole Correction is enabled. This feature needs some enhancements to handle negative targets or scrap pieces added during Queue Initialization.

This test also may need additional considerations added when operating in Synchronous vs. Asynchronous Hole Correction Mode.

This change attempts to handle the Scrap pieces that are added while operating in Synchronous mode. It is not intended to handle all potential issues with this test. It is being made to help a field tech who is on site at a customer. Further evaluation will be required.

In Synchronous mode, Shear Targets flagged as Scrap Pieces will not be tested for Missing Hole Correction.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2OL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL2; 0xC0000000 Task Error during powerup after memory clear
XL200

After a memory clear, during powerup, setup parameters receive default values. Calculations are made in some settings that rely on calculations made in other settings. If any of those calculations involve division, protections must be made to prevent divide by zero errors.

The top three lines window does a lot of periodic low priority functions. One of those functions is to update a persistent footage totalizer. The Footage totalizer is stored in feet, which requires conversion from counts, which requires division, which requires a constant that gets calculated after a memory clear on power-up.

There is a bit of timing involved as to which thing happens first, the calculations for the constant or the calculations that require the constant. It is unclear how this problem has not shown up until now, at least ten years since the footage totalizer was added.

The software has been modified to delay the footage totalizer calculations until they can be safely performed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL244CL; MHA Dies in the XL244CL did not have Hole Correction support.
XL200

When MHA support was added to the XL244CL, the controller already had Hole Correction support for the standard DA. However, the MHA DA configuration did not have Hole Correction Support, despite having all the settings that would indicate that it did.

This has now been rectified.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL2CL; Add Hole Correction support to the XL2xxCLF-MHA and XL2xxCLF-MHA2.
XL200

The XL2xxCLF-MHA and XL2xxCLF-MHA2 controller models will now have Hole Correction enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL2; Clear Part Queue when changing the Main Encoder setting
XL200

When the Dual Encoder option is used the Part Queue targets are calculated using the resolution of the Main Encoder. If the Main Encoder changes, the Part Queue targets are no longer valid.

The software has been changed to Clear the Queue and display an error message indicating that the Part Queue has been cleared when the Main Encoder setting has been changed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; Changed default setting for Main Encoder to Entry(2)
XL200

When the Dual Line Encoder option is enabled our recomendaion is to run on the Entry(2) encoder until tailout before switching to the Exit(1) encoder. To encourage our recomendation the default setting for Main Encoder has been changed to Entry(2).

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 5.88.05 12/19/2022
XL220OL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 5.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2OL 4.88.05 12/19/2022
XL2CL 4.88.04 12/17/2022
XL220OL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL220CL 4.89.00 3/17/2023
XL2; Selecting Setup Configurations with a PLC
XL200

The Controller already has the capability of allowing a PLC to select a Setup Configuration through the MODBUS interface. However, it does not have control over when the request to load it is made.

Prior to this change the controller would read the desired Setup Configuration ID from the PLC when entering certain run modes. However, this was too late in some cases, for example concerning Setups that need to change between and before a coil change.

A function coil has now been defined that will trigger the controller to read the desired Setup Configuration ID from the PLC and attempt to load the specified configuration. The Setup Configurations and Setups must not be locked out by Eclipse, the Configuration with the specified ID must exist and the controller Run Mode must be HALTED. If the first attempt fails and error message will be displayed. The controller will continue to retry periodically but not display any more errors unless the controller attempts to enter the run mode and the configuration is still unable to load.

Details on the Function Coil are described in the XL200 PLC Interface document.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
Pathfinder; Support for new PC Touchscreen
Pathfinder

The new iEi DRPC-130 PC no longer uses a bespoke touchscreen driver and instead relies on direct Windows support. Pathfinder was not recognizing touch down events so hold to jog was not working.

This change adds direct support for touch down and touch up events.

Pathfinder Spec: HardwareRev: Version 9 HDImageIdentifier: F01

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3359 12/13/2022
Pathfinder PC CS 5.01.08.3361 12/13/2022
XL2; Hole Correction of Non-Shear Targets.
XL200

This change is an enhancement of the Hole Correction feature. It only affects machines with multiple Tools on the Shear Press or Shear Die Accelerator.

All targets on the Shear Press or Shear Die Accelerator will be adjusted by the last hole correction of the last Shear Target. This change assumes that the material stretch requiring the use of Hole Correction will be relatively consistent. This change is intended to preserve the relative offset for all these targets with one another and with the shear target.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL; Additional fixes related to SCN 4724.

In SCN-4724 the method of testing if a press cycle was active needed adjustment for an MHA Die that contained multiple presses.

The same edits needed to be made for a standard Die Accelerator for the same case. However, the results(Symptoms) of the bug would be different and much rarer. They would only show up under the rare condition that a press would be active, and the material would be moving backwards for some reason. This condition is very unlikely, but it is covered.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL; Erroneous Max Die Distance Error
XL200

When an MHA Die Accelerator was configured with more than one press on the Die there was the possibility of Erroneous Max Die Distance Errors occurring.

The issue was due to how the software was testing to see if a DA had an active press cycle running. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.87.04 12/7/2022
XL2CL 4.87.04 12/7/2022
XL2; Added 'Never' option to Allow Coil Override
XL200

Added the 'Never' option to the Allow Coil Override setup. This was an initiated request by a customer that Eclipse be able to prevent coil overrides, even my managers with access to the Setup Lockout key. Any attempt to override or edit the material of a coil will result in an error message explaining why it is not allowed.

Coil overrides or edits to the material of a coil will not be allowed if the setting is set to 'Never'. Eclipse is intended to be the authority of when a coil override is allowed. The only overrides of a coil will be those that have been pre-configured by Eclipse. Overrides at the controller are no longer allowed.

It is assumed that this option will be selected and locked out by Eclipse. It is also assumed that Eclipse and the controller will be configured with Coil Validation enabled so that the material field of a coil will always be accurate and never need correcting or adjustment at the machine.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
Pathfinder; Add ASCv4_Hemmer Override Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC's.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.08.3364 1/18/2023
Pathfinder; Add ASCv4 Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC's.

ASC is an OEM that we deal with that makes roll formers and folding machines. They updated their current design to use an Ethernet/IP controlled backgauge besides a analog controlled servo. To handle this they needed a new machine model they could use in Pathfinder. The solution was to create an ASCV4 configuration that knows to use the Ethernet/IP protocol.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.08.3364 1/18/2023
XL2; MODBUS Level 125 adds Item User Fields 3 and 4.
XL200

A new MODBUS level, 125, has been added. It allows the Item User fields 3 and 4 to be sent to the PLC.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2; No Shape Solutions when using File Import
XL200

The code for Shape Programming is shared in the XL and the DLL used in Eclipse Pro. The last change, SCN 4683, caused the DLL to stop finding solutions. This was tracked down to the code that determines which side of a Linked Axis its Crashable Surface is on. This code has always been wrong since it required the Axes to be defined in a certain order. The result never mattered until SCN 4683 began to rely on it. All the testing for SCN 4683 was unknowingly done on a ShapeTable.txt file that complied with the required order. This issue has been resolved and will also be released in Eclipse Pro.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
Pathfinder; Added RASTurboBendLight4000DR Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC.

A configuration was made for a RAS 4000 that needed a new drive. The previous drive was controlled though -10 - 10V, but the new one is 0 - 10V. Another change that is not confirmed on all other 4000's is that the clamp has a 10V pot for feedback instead of an incremental encoder. This might be a snowflake, but this design could be used on other RAS machines if their drive is also failing.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
XL2; Prune the Queue Option.
XL200

Rather than Clearing the Queue we have added an option to Prune the Queue. This option allows the operator to remove parts at the end of the queue that have not been started yet and attempt to complete the half-finished parts that are still in the queue.

Any part who's shear operation is beyond the furthest tool will be removed from the queue. The Front Shear Tool, if configured, is not allowed to be the furthest tool.

To prevent negative targets, scrap may need to be added to begin queueing parts again. The Scrap Part Length and the Scrap Part Mode are used to determine how much scrap to add, how many parts and if negative targets are removed.

This new option is not enabled on a Tile Machine controller.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2; Queue Record Garbage Collection
XL200

Prior to this change Queue records were being deleted in high priority tasks, higher priority than the Input task.

There was a report of the Input Task Watch Dog timer interrupt occurring while a press task was deleting a queue record. Deleting record(s) can be time consuming. If multiple press tasks need to delete them at the same time it could potentially cause problems. It is a much better use of CPU time to mark them to be deleted and then delete them in a lower priority task when there is an abundance of CPU time available. That is what this change does.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL; Bug in Delete Marked Records with Chain Arrays
XL200

Rather than deleting memory records immediately the controller has a mechanism to mark records for deletion and then actually delete them when it is safe to do so. The controller also can manage arrays of record chains.

A bug has been discovered when deleting marked records in an array of record chains when the chain is not the first element of the array. The code failed to update the proper array element. This has not been discovered until now because deleting marked records has never been done on any array with more than one element until now.

This issue has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
Pathfinder; Added Rev G Firmware Build
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC.

The firmware build for a rev G 5226 board has been added to the Pathfinder build. This firmware is for the new K66 processors which is now on the rev G boards. It used to be non encrypted and would brick the controller. Since making the controller except an encrypted build for the K66 the update works. The version is 4.04.00.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
5226; Accept an Encrypted Build for K66 Boards
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The firmware build for a 5226 is a .s19 file. For protection it was decided to encrypt this file for the B, E and F rev boards. This works by having a separate program encrypt the file and as it is being programmed the 5226 will decrypt it line by line. With the rev G K66 processor this didn't work from what seemed to be the bigger memory size. So the K66 build was not going to encrypted and the controller would not decrypt. After failures with Pathfinder trying to program the controller, encryption was looked at again.

The rev G board now accepts an encrypted build and will decrypt the file during programming.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
Pathfinder; Add Latest Rev E and F Firmware File
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC.

Added the latest firmware file for rev E and F 5226 boards. The version number is 4.04.00. This also fixes a bug on a previous build that would brick the controller.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
XL2CL V4; Allow Analog Options on Dual Die Accelerator Controllers.
XL200

This change implements SCN 4649 on the V4 controllers.

When SERCOS is used on Dual Die Accelerator controllers, the Analog ports are available use for the Analog Option.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 4.87.03 11/3/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
5226; Update Task Error Code to Handle New K66 Processor
Pathfinder

Changes made for the Pathfinder 5226 controller.

The rev G of the 5226 has a K66 processor on it. This processor has a couple of differences from the K60 on the revs B, E and F that need to be accounted for. Two of these differences are that it has double the amount of flash memory and it runs in a high speed mode. These two changes affect how we handle task errors. The 5226 will program the task error into the second half of it's memory which is empty when a task error occurs. Since the K66 has double the memory the new location of where the second half starts needs to be accounted for. The fix was to change variables for the task error locations to the correct value when the controller has a K66.

The other difference is the high speed mode that the K66 runs at. The problem is that you can't program flash when in this mode. So therefore you can't program the task error into memory. The solution for this is to slow down the speed to do the program command and then switch back to the high speed mode.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
5226BB Rev G. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
5226; Update Flash Routine to Handle K66 Build File
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
5226BB Rev G. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
5226; Update K66 Processors Link File to Match New Memory Size
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
5226; Fix BSP Code Variable and Memory Size Bugs for K66 Processor
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev G. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
Pathfinder; Add Rev G As An Option On All 5226 Json Configurations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC's.

Pathfinder has a built in test to make sure the configuration chosen is compatibly with the board it is talking to. This is to make sure someone doesn't try to use a configuration for a machine that expects a 5226, but is talking to a 5225. Not only does it look at board type it also checks the revision of the board to see if compatible. The 5226 has a B, E and F revisions, but with the introduction of the rev G this option needs to be added to all 5226 configurations so that it won't say the rev G board is incompatible.

The solution was to add rev G to all configurations that are used for 5226 boards.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
5226; Fix Common Code to Work With Hardware Encoder Test
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.00 11/30/2022
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.00 11/30/2022
5226; Remove Main Line Code for Hardware Test Which Was Test Code
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 has a main task used to set up all of the other tasks, hardware tests and slave controller. In this mainline there was a bunch of code that didn't make sense and looked like it would loop forever. After a lot of questioning and reasoning it turned out this was test code accidentally checked in. After the removal of the code in question the controller was able to move on and setup tasks and hardware tests.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.00 11/30/2022
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.00 11/30/2022
5226; Make Analog Hardware Test Work With Common Code
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.00 11/30/2022
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.00 11/30/2022
5226; Make CAN/RS485 Hardware Test Work With Latest Common CAN Code
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Hardware Test Rev F. 2.00 11/30/2022
5226BB Hardware Test Rev G. 2.00 11/30/2022
5226; Open Loop Discrete I/O Clamp With Pressure Switch Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
5226BB Rev G. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
Pathfinder; Don't Subtract Finger Distance for Backgauge Only In Slitter Mode
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder PC.

The slitter mode in Pathfinder is essentially continuous shear steps to create smaller blanks out of a bigger sheet of metal. Pathfinder will take the original blank size and say what is possible in terms of how many new blanks can be created. There is a lot of background calculating that will take into account what backstop is being used and what is possible with that backstop. A bug arose in that calculation when the assumption that all fingers are the same was made. The original calculation where the finger distance was subtracted was for a Thalmann TD finger. This subtraction ended up happenning on single folder machines where the backgauge has a spring finger. The subtraction is not needed in this case because the controller will start using the finger when needed. In the case of the TD finger the user chose to use the finger throughout.

The solution was to not subtract the finger distance when the chosen backstop is backgauge only.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
5226; Don't Map Input 11 to Interrupt Port D for K66 Processor
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Model Version Released
5226BB Rev F. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
5226BB Rev G. 4.04.00 11/30/2022
XL2; New Clear Queue After, Prompt, setting.
XL200

The Clear Queue After setting, if active, determines when the part queue gets cleared. A new option, called Prompt, allows the user to have more control over when the queue gets cleared due to Manual Shear operations. When this option is selected, after two manual shears, the operator will be presented with a user prompt window that has two available options. The user may opt to preserve the Queue or to Clear the Queue.

This new window must be cleared before entering the run mode, but they will still be able to do additional manual shears or jog the material.

The new option becomes the default option. We don't expect this to impact existing installations for two reasons. Existing installs will have Eclipse, which will restore their prior setting, or they will have a hard copy of their settings and they will restore their prior setting.

If the controller does not have the Clear Queue After setting, they will not experience any difference.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL220CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL; Large Die Encoder Position prevents command voltage change.
XL200

If the Die Position becomes significantly large the SetPoint must become large to match when enabling the drive. The relatively small additions to the SetPoint required for the motion profile are then not significant enough to modify the value of the 32-bit float variable the SetPoint is stored in. Since the SetPoint is not changing, the loop has nothing to react to. With the loop not seeing any changes, the command voltage does not change.

The suspected reason for the Die Position becoming very large has been addressed in an earlier SCN, SCN 4666.

Just in case there are other ways for the die encoder count/position to become significantly large, and to place some limit on the range of a Die Position, a limits test is now executed when the drive is enabled. If the Die Position is outside of the range -6.0" to 1200" the Die will be de-referenced, and the Die-Position set to zero. This will fix the die position, allowing movement, and force a die-reference. An error message explaining that the die needs to be referenced will also display.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.87.02 10/20/2022
XL220CL 5.87.02 10/20/2022
XL2CL 4.87.02 10/20/2022
XL220CL 4.87.02 10/20/2022
XL2CL; Die Accelerator mounted Hole Detect Sensors
XL200

A certain machine builder mounts their Hole Detect sensors to the Die on their Die Accelerator systems. Our Hole Detect and Hole Correct features have always required sensors be mounted in a stationary(Fixed) location.

To use a sensor mounted on a Die Accelerator, the position of the Die must be captured and used to adjust the location of the sensed hole.

On a closed loop system, when the sensor detects a hole, a high-speed interrupt is triggered and the line encoder count is captured to account for any encoder counts that have occurred since the last Loop Iteration. For the best accuracy, the same must happen for the Die Accelerator encoder. This is not possible on a SERCOS controlled Die. SERCOS controlled Dies will possibly have an accuracy limitation. However, it is assumed that in most cases, the hole that the system needs to act on will be sensed when the Die is sitting stationary waiting. The small inaccuracy in the sensed holes that occur while the die is moving are not expected to be a factor unless the prior assumption is false.

To configure the system to adjust the sensed holes by the position of the die, a new setup parameter called Hole Detector Mount has been created. It has two options, Fixed and Die Mounted. It defaults to Fixed to avoid impacting legacy installations that receive a software update. Obviously if the sensor is mounted to the Die, the Die Mounted selection should be made.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2; Added Hole Correction Setup Menu
XL200

Hole Detect controllers have had a Setup Manu for Hole Detect Options. When the Hole Correction feature was created it re-used many of the Hole Detect setup parameters. The Setup Menu used for quick access to the Hole Detect setups was overlooked at that time.

This change adds a Hole Correction setup menu that will make for quick access to the Hole Correction Settings.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 5.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2OL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2CL 4.88.00 12/14/2022
XL2; V4 Endless Controller Resets
XL200

SCN 4677 made the ARM core temperature available for display on the System Information screen. The v4 controller has a DSP, not an ARM. The shared source file had conditional assembly to handle the difference between V4 and V5 but one section of code was missing the required test resulting in the use of a NULL pointer, which caused the controller to reset. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 4.87.01 10/6/2022
XL2CL 4.87.01 10/6/2022
XL220OL 4.87.01 10/6/2022
XL220CL 4.87.01 10/6/2022
XL2OL 5.87.01 10/6/2022
XL2CL 5.87.01 10/6/2022
XL220OL 5.87.01 10/6/2022
XL220CL 5.87.01 10/6/2022
XL2; Additional Second Line Encoder Bugs and Changes.
XL200

When the second Line Encoder is enabled, the Trim Correction menu in the Setup Screen has a Trim Correction Encoder setup that is used to select which encoder to correct. It is supposed to default to the last encoder used to make a part.

There was a bug that failed to consider which encoder was the Master and which encoder was the auxiliary encoder. When the Entry(2) encoder was selected as the Master the Trim Correction setting was initialized incorrectly.

When the Auto Correct Auxiliary Encoder setting is set to Enabled, correcting the Auxiliary encoder does not really make sense because any correction is going to get overwritten by the Auto Correction. When this is enabled we are assuming that the operator has been correcting the Main encoder periodically since that is required to the auto correction to work. Using this logic the Main encoder must also be incorrect by a proportional amount. It becomes logical to do the correction on the master, which also updates the Auxiliary by the same proportional amount.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.87.01 10/6/2022
XL2CL 5.87.01 10/6/2022
XL220OL 5.87.01 10/6/2022
XL220CL 5.87.01 10/6/2022
XL2OL 4.87.01 10/6/2022
XL2CL 4.87.01 10/6/2022
XL220OL 4.87.01 10/6/2022
XL2; Second Line Encoder Bugs and Changes

The auxiliary line encoder resolution by default is auto calculated based on the Main encoder resolution and the encoder counts captured by both encoders while running. This done under the assumption that the main encoder resolution is accurate since the operators will always be correcting it as they run parts.

In the Closed Loop controller, the function that executes to prevent updates to the resolution during coil thread up was not being called. This resulted in the possibility that resolution updates could be inaccurate since they could occur when material was not under both encoders. In addition, the code that handled this had a bug that then updated the resolution way too often and over much too short of a distance.

As originally designed, the resolution calculations were potentially executing not nearly as often as they should be.

The rate was determined by the distance between encoder, which can be quite large, and the number of samples averaged for an update. The first update after a coil change waited until 5 times (5 samples) this distance had elapsed and then it would update. Then it would update once every sample after that. If the distance was 400" it would be 2000" before the first update and then once every 400" after that.

The new algorithm still requires the controller to wait for the distance between the encoders to elapse before a sample can be taken, however, it samples every 10' (120") after that and averages a maximum of 4 samples to make the calculations. Using the same example distance of 400". After a coil change it will take 400"+120" until the first sample is collected and a resolution update will occur. A resolution update occurs every 120" and uses up to a maximum of 480" (4 x120") of the most recent material to do the resolution update.

This change allows the first update to occur as soon as possible, and the updates are now done consistently after that no matter how far apart the encoder are.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.04 9/29/2022
XL2CL 5.86.04 9/29/2022
XL220OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2OL 4.86.04 9/29/2022
XL2CL 4.86.04 9/29/2022
XL220OL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220CL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2; Increase Limits on Length of Label setup
XL200

The Zebra printer has a Length of Label setup parameter. The old upper limit is 10". The upper limit has now been changed to 45". The new upper limit is likely larger than anyone will ever need and it will still result in a value that fits within the number of characters the printer communication protocol supports.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.04 9/29/2022
XL2CL 5.86.04 9/29/2022
XL220OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2OL 4.86.04 9/29/2022
XL2CL 4.86.04 9/29/2022
XL220OL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220CL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2; Material Gap Sensor
XL200

A prominent customer asked for a feature to detect if the Shear fails to cut either due to a broken blade or due to a malfunctioning press.

If used, our Shear Complete input, combined with setting Expect Shear Complete to Yes, will detect a Malfunctioning press. It will not detect a broken shear blade. If broken shear blades are common, the Shear Complete input can now be placed in a new mode that utilizes a photo sensor to detect a gap in the material.

The solution adds a new selection for Expect Shear Complete called Material Gap. This setting changes the function of the Shear Complete input to detect the gap in the material created by cutting the part. A downstream sensor to detect the gap is required.

If the Material Gap option is selected a new setup called Material Gap Sensor Distance becomes available to configure the sensor location. A fixed 6" tolerance is in place for sensing expected gaps. The Sensor is expected to be connected to the input that would normally be used as the Shear Complete. It will be labeled Material Gap in the IO Diagnostic screen. Every Part longer than the Sensor distance will be tested to ensure a gap is sensed. If the machine is running parts shorter than the Sensor Distance, some individual parts will be untested but an issue with the shear blade will be caught within the approximate Sensor Distance.

If an expected gap is missed, the line will be halted and a Material Gap Sensor error with possible causes will be displayed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2OL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220OL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220CL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL; Allow second line encoder when configured for Selective Closed Loop.
XL200

The second line encoder feature was created before the creation of the Selective Closed Loop feature. The second line encoder feature switch setting was disallowed unless the controller was configured with a line encoder. The only option at the time with a line encoder was Two Encoder Feed to Stop. When the Selective Closed Loop option was created, the test was not updated, preventing the combination of Selective Closed Loop and the second line encoder.

This has been rectified on the XL200CL, XL202CL, XL206CL and XL212CL controllers.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.86.03 9/27/2022
XL2CL 4.86.03 9/27/2022
XL2; Erroneous Max Backup Distance Exceeded error on Open Loop controllers.
XL200

The targets reachable by the Maximum Backup Distance on Open Loop controllers were mistakenly shortened by the Tolerance setup parameter. This has been rectified.

On all controllers, the targets that will be reachable will now be extended by the Tolerance parameter.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220OL 5.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220CL 5.86.03 9/26/2022
XL2OL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220OL 4.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220CL 4.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220; Eliminate small scrap piece when starting from empty part queue.
XL200

The Calculate Part code was not functioning correctly when calculating the leading end notch locations on the first part of an empty part queue. This resulted in a full notch being added to the leading edge and then the excess was cut off to create the correct notch size for the leading-edge connector.

This change corrects that issue. The leading-edge notch location(s) will be shifted so that no extra scrap or shear is required to finish the leading-edge notch for the leading-edge connector.

Model Version Released
XL220OL 5.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220CL 5.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220OL 4.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220CL 4.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220; Add Scrap Part Mode setup to the HVAC controllers
XL200

Scrap Part Mode was added to the Rollforming controllers in SCN 2726.

This change adds Scrap Part Mode to the HVAC controllers, XL220OL and XL220CL.

The SCN 2726 fully describes the setup. In summary it allows the amount of scrap to be optimized (minimized) when starting from an empty part queue.

Model Version Released
XL220OL 5.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220CL 5.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220OL 4.86.03 9/26/2022
XL220CL 4.86.03 9/26/2022
XL2OL; Stitching by Omitting shears broken by SCN 4419
XL200

SCN 4419 re-implemented the method for disabling a press from firing as it pertains to Stitching Parts.

Some edits were missed in the open loop project that prevented broke the Stitching feature when omitting shears. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.03 9/21/2022
XL2OL 4.86.03 9/21/2022
XL2; Front Shear target ignored after a Tolerance Error.
XL200

The bug existed on controllers with a Shear and a Front Shear. It occurred due a tolerance error for the Front Shear halting the line and the Front Shear Target being the only other press.

In this configuration the software tries to treat the line as shear only to avoid the confusion for operators that a part queue can introduce. Every time the line halts the queue gets cleared unless the line stops in tolerance for the Front Shear and the operator gets asked if it is OK for the front shear to activate.

In this case the line stopped out of tolerance, but it coasted too far for the controller to queue up a new Front Shear target when entering run. This has now been resolved. If the controller has a queue target that has coasted out of tolerance the Queue will no longer be cleared. The operator will have the option to reverse the material and try the Front Shear again.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2OL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2: Shape Programming performance enhancement
XL200

The number of possible solutions for a part on a machine with multi-Axis is drastically higher when opposing Axes contain the same shapes and those axes can cross the center line of a part. The higher the number of possible solutions, the longer it takes to find the best one.

A solution hack that has been employed up until now has been to artificially limit the Axis travel to limit the number of solutions. This hack only works if there are no unique shapes on one of these axes that need to cross the center line.

A change has now been made to the solution code to only limit the non-unique shapes from crossing the centerline. This change is limited to shapes that are fully independently gagged. It does not impact fixed shapes (non-gagged) or grouped shapes (multiple shapes on one gag). These are conditions that we have yet to encounter in the field, much more difficult to solve and would delay this enhancement from reaching the customer who has requested it.

Additional edits were made to keep the source code compatible with the source code used to create the DLL for Eclipse Pro.

NOTE!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! While testing this change it was discovered that an Edge Machine reference does not produce the correct solutions. This was discovered in unmodified code. We need to go back and fix the generation for Edge Referenced machine. NOTE!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2OL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 4.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2OL; SCN 4664 broke the Delay After Shear function.
XL200

Following a Delay after Shear the controller would stay halted or in slow, depending on how the delay was configured to take place.

This bug was caused by the changes in SCN 4664. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.02 9/7/2022
XL220OL 5.86.02 9/7/2022
XL2OL 4.86.02 9/7/2022
XL220OL 4.86.02 9/7/2022
5226; Disable Sercos or Ethernet/IP Task For Separate Builds
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

This is no longer the change. We are removing the CPLD file.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
5226; Make Home Switches on Double Folders Act As Hard Limits Even With Limits Disabled
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Double folder machines have a lot of different axes that can potentially move at the same time. Some of these axes though can move to an area that could cause damage to the machine if another axis moves at all. To remedy this we have soft limits and conflict parameters that the controller uses to keep an axis in a safe area to allow another axis to move. In addition to those soft safeguards there are also home limits for each axis on the machine which are used as a backup in case the machine is not setup correctly. The problem was that in jog mode these parameters and limits are not going to stop the axis from moving if limits are disabled.

It was decided that the home limits will still be in use even if the limits are disabled since they are a physical safe guard and should still be considered a viable safe guard. So home limits are double folders are now considered hard limits and the axis conflict checks for them will still be active at all times.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
Email, Outlook Test
XL2OL; Two Speed Operation Broken by SCN 4665
XL200

SCN 4665 broke Two Speed Feed to stop operattion on the XL2OL.

Two issues were found.

  1. In Run, the controller failed to shift into slow speed.
  2. When halting the line in Run, the Motion Outputs flickered ON and OFF until the controller Run output turned off.

Both issues have been resolved.

The cause of Issue 1 also impacted the source code on the Closed Loop controllers but does not cause similar issues due to the differences between Open and Closed Loop operation.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.01 8/26/2022
XL2CL 5.86.01 8/26/2022
XL220OL 5.86.01 8/26/2022
XL220CL 5.86.01 8/26/2022
XL2OL 4.86.01 8/26/2022
XL2CL 4.86.01 8/26/2022
XL220OL 4.86.01 8/26/2022
XL220CL 4.86.01 8/26/2022
XL2; HWTest; Make ARM Core temperature available.
XL200

Common code in the ARM processor on the 5386 board was modified to measure the core temperature of the processor.

This is now displayed on the System Information screen on all of the V5 XL200 series controllers when running the application software. It is also available on the V5 Hardware Test for data collection, diagnostics and HW Test automation.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL2CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220OL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
XL220CL 5.87.00 10/4/2022
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
XL2; Relocate the Heap_Memory segment to allow room for larger DATA segment
XL200

The DATA segment has outgrown the size allotted for it. The Heap Memory segment was moved from 2D000 to 2E000 to make room for it.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2; Disable Manual Shear in Run Mode when in Hole Correction Mode
XL200

In Hole Correction mode the shear targets must stay in sync with the holes on the material and the Hole Queue. These requirements are incompatible with a Manual Shear in the Run Mode.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2; Manual Shear in Run Mode with Part Printer
XL200

If the part printing option is enabled the printer press will not prevent a Manual Shear in Run Mode, provided no print driver is selected.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2; Allow RightExplorerWindows to validate Edit Window entries
XL200

In most cases an Enter key is required to validate and save data entered in an open edit window. However Dialog windows have additional code that detects when the OK button is selected to validate and save the data.

This change adds the same capability for the Right Explorer windows that have a data entry window rather than the traditional Grid. Examples of this would be the Setup and Tool Library selection windows in the Setup screen.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL; Two Speed Advance Task unnecessarily being created.
XL200

The Two Speed Advance Task was being created unnecessarily at times.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2; Combo Box Bug Dangling Pointer
XL200

The Combo Box displays a list or text strings. If the current selection (integer value) is not in the list, the Comb Box displays "No Selection". The combo box allows for an integer entry if the user knows the code they want to select from the list and doesn’t want to scroll through it in entirety. It is expected that the user will select an entry or enter valid code from the list.

There was a bug when entering an integer value. The Combo box would delete itself and replace itself with an integer prompt. This potentially left a window with a pointer to an object that no longer existed(Dangling Pointer). Use of this pointer could result in memory corruption. Also, if they selected an invalid number, the list was no longer available for them to reference to find an entry.

Rather than delete itself the combo box is removed( not deleted) and replaced with the integer prompt. If the user enters a value that is not in the list, the integer prompt is deleted (no one has a pointer to it) and the Combo Box, with the list, is added back into the window.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2; Prevent No Selection for Scrap, Delay, Employee Code, Setup Lib and Tool Lib windows..
XL200

This change prevents the No Selection entry of a combo box from being saved in the Scrap Code, Delay Code, Employee Code, Setup Library or Tool Library selection process. The windows containing these fields were modified to prevent the user from Selecting OK with a no Selection entry active. The OK button will display an Error Message with relevant instructions on what is required before OK is a valid option.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2; Fix Tab order of Combo Boxes
XL200

The Tab order of objects in windows on the XL screen is determined by the reverse order of when they are added to the window. The last object added receives focus and the object added just prior to that will be the next object to receive focus.

Combo Boxes failed to adhere to that rule, which messed up the tab order of some windows that selectively display combo boxes instead of integer prompts. The reason being that the combo box is built with a Window control and Window controls by default don't adhere to the same tab order rules. This was rectified in the Combo Box control.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL; Maximum Die Positioning Speed in Auto.
XL200

When entering the Run Mode (Auto), Closed Loop Die Accelerators sometimes need to position themselves prior to starting material movement. Historically this has been done using the Die Jog Speed. The Die Jog or Reference Speed makes sense for referencing but it unnecessarily slows down production for other operations.

For all stationary operations in Auto, besides referencing the home sensor, Standard Die Accelerators and Multi-Hit Die Accelerators will now position themselves using the Max Die Return velocity.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL HWTest; Added Pass/Fail Reports to Burn In Test
XL200

Modified the XL200 Manual Burn In Test to send Pass/Fail reports after each test to the Test Probe, instead of task errors. The Manual Burn In Test now keeps track of how many times each test passes or fails. All messages directed to the Test Probe begin with an identifier character '\x1b' followed by the letter 'b', and end with a newline character '\n'.

Model Version Released
Hardware Test 5.02.00 1/24/2024
XL2; Encoder Counts on Powerup
XL200

This is has been very rare. On power-up the 5387 board occasionally seems to report a large number of encoder counts, usually negative. The number of counts is far larger than anything that could physically occur on a machine. This is has been very rare. On power-up the 5387 board occasionally seems to report a large number of encoder counts, usually negative. The number of counts is far larger than anything that could physically occur on a machine.

Since we have a large number of 5387 boards in the field that would be very difficult to update, this change attempts to detect the problem and ignore the erroneous counts if and when they occur. Prior attempts to read the encoder several times on power-up to throw away any encoder counts occurring during power up have failed, leading us to believe the timing of the issues is complicated. For this reason we are adding a test that we expect will capture and correct the issue no matter when it occurs.

If the number of counts (positive or negative) exceeds 10,000 on a single read the encoder counts are discarded. This number, despite the appearance of being a nice round number pulled out of the air, was actually calculated using the following rational. A maximum material rate of 2000fpm using the smallest allowable resolution of 0.00004" and an encoder sample rate of 1msec results in a maximum number of counts per 1msec of 10,000 counts.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2; Add additional Encapsulation to Move Structure
XL200

Moved bit manipulation and testing of various bit fields into methods of the Move Structure.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2; Fix Two Speed operation on XL244CL Standard Die
XL200

This change actually impacts all software models due to a design change in how the software determines if it is safe to move material and at what speed.

A poorly documented design choice was making it very difficult get the Two Speed operation on the XL244CL Standard Die to work properly when combined with a two speed Open Loop stopping press.

A global variable that appears to have been added for the closed loop Delay After Shear operation was being used in an attempt to remember what speed to return to after the delay. Otherwise, all presses had the ability to vote on what speed to move at and they all have to agree on the fastest speed, Fast, Slow or Stopped. The Run code was trying to pretend to be the Shear press using the global variable.

This has been modified to give the Run code its own equal vote in what speed the material is able to move at so that it is more clear, separated and no longer prone to race conditions associated with the use of the global variable.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220OL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL; Failure to Jog Reverse when configured for Selective Closed Loop.
XL200

SCN 4510 fixed issues with reverse command value disturbances on Closed Loop Die Accelerators when the Lag Compensation was enabled and disabled on the transitions between the Die Extend and the Die Return portions of a Die Cycle. The ON and OFF transitions of Lag Compensation were delayed until a point in the cycle where any jump in command would be in the same direction as the slope of the command signal.

This change was broke the Selective Closed Loop operation, preventing reverse moves.

SCN 4510 was heavily tested on a Closed Loop Die Accelerator. To fix the Selective Closed Loop controllers the code involved in SCN 4510 is now disabled unless the loop is controlling a Closed Loop Die Accelerator.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.01 6/27/2022
XL220CL 5.84.06 6/27/2022
XL2CL 4.85.01 6/27/2022
XL220CL 4.84.06 6/27/2022
XL2CL; Phantom Die Strokes on Multi-Press Die Accelerators

A phantom die stroke is a die stroke where the die cycles but does not fire the press. Die Accelerators configured with Multiple Presses on the Die could exhibit phantom die strokes coinciding with other open loop press targets.

Prior to recent changes to the XL244CL the only time this bug would be exhibited is if the controller had a also had a part printer installed.

There was a bug where the open loop press targets would also be added to the master press queue for Die1 due to a missing test in the code. The master press controls the die stroke for any slave presses on the die that have targets at the same time. If the master press does not have a target its queue target disables the master press from firing.

The bug has been fixed and the phantom die strokes no longer occur.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL; When available, use the Decel Factor to advance the Minimum Slow Distance on Die Accelerators
XL200

The Two Speed Die operation was written prior to the ability for a Die Accelerator to be combined with Two Speed Open Loop Feed to Stop presses.

The Die Accelerator code used the Minimum Slow Distance with no consideration for current line speed. No attempt was made to advance the switch to slow speed early to achieve actual slow speed in the material by the time the target is within the Minimum Slow Distance. It was assumed the user would increase the Minimum Slow Distance to compensate.

If the Decel Factor parameter is active and visible the software was modified to periodically calculate an Advance Slow Distance based on current line speed. This distance is available for each Die to adjust (Advance) how early it switches to slow speed so that the behavior between an Open Loop press and a press on a CL Die Accelerator will appear identical.

In the future, when time is available, the Decel Factor and other relevant parameters will be enabled when Two Speed Die operation is enabled rather than relying on the existence of a Two Speed Open Loop Press being defined.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL; Add Two Speed Die operation to the XL244CL

Two Speed operation shifts the material speed to the slow speed when the target reaches the Minimum Slow Distance from the Die's target.

Each Die on the XL244CL can now be individually configured for Two Speed operation.

Switch 28 Enables Two Speed operation for Die 1.

Switch 29 Enables Two Speed operation for Die 2.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL; Added Multi-Press capability on Die Accelerators in the XL244CL.
XL200

A customer needed Multiple Presses defined on a Die Accelerator in the XL244XL. Each die may have additional presses configured for it using the following Switch settings.

Dip 25 Dip 24 Additional Presses on Die 1 Off Off 0 Off On 1 On Off 2 On On 3

Dip 27 Dip 26 Additional Presses on Die 2 Off Off 0 Off On 1 On Off 2 On On 3

These Switch settings require and utilize presses that are enabled using the existing Switch settings defined with Switches 4, 5 and 6.

Additional Presses for Die 1 start at Press 1. The first press and additional presses for Die 2 starts with the next remaining press after the presses defined on Die 1. Open Loop presses start with the next remaining press after the last press on Die 1, or Die 2, if enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL; Add MHA capability for each Die on XL244CL
XL200

A customer needed MHA capability on the XL244CL model. One DIP switch has been defined for each Die.

Switch 22 enables MHA on Die 1.

Switch 23 enables MHA on Die 2.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
5226; Modifications to Projects to build shared code for K60 and K66 processors
Pathfinder

Modified existing projects, mainly Common and BlackBox to support configurations meant to build the 5226 Black Box software for the K60 and K66 processors.

DebugK66 and ReleaseK66 configurations were added to reference different Linked Resource folders, libraries, Paths and file names to allow the same source code to be built for the different processors. Some conditional assembly had to be added to some of the source code to account for differences in MQX for the different processors.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
XL2CL; Validate Second Line Encoder Switch setting configuration
XL200

On the XL202CL , XL206CL, XL212CL and XL270CL models there was no Switch Validation to ensure the second line encoder could only be enabled in Two-Encoder Feed-to-Stop mode. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
XL2CL; Position the Die early when delaying for a stationary shear or punch
XL200

When running a Feed to Stop press with a Closed Loop Die Accelerator, if the stopping operation is within the travel range of the die, the DA will delay its operation and do it with the die stationary.

This change optimizes production by calculating and positioning the die where it needs to be positioned so that it will be already be very close to the correct position to fire when the stopping press has stopped the material. After the material is stopped, for accuracy, the die is repositioned again based on the actual material stopped position vs the press target position.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL; 0xC0000000 Task Error, Divide by Zero
XL200

Eliminated the the possibility of a Divide by Zero error when calculating the die return velocity. The code was testing for a negative value but was failing to text for a zero value in the math doing the calculation.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL; Issues with Open Loop Feed to Stop Shear on Closed Loop Controller
XL200

SCN 4635 allowed the Open Loop presses on an XL244CL to be configured for Feed to Stop operation.

This change had an unforeseen impact in that it was the first time the Shear on a Closed Loop controller was able to be configured as an Open Loop Feed to Stop.

There are many places in the code that test the type of shear press to determine if the controller is a Closed Loop Feeder or a Closed Loop Die Accelerator. This test is no a longer valid test in a lot of instances on a Closed Loop controller now.

Every place this test is used has had to be re-evaluated. There are so many places that require edits that all of edits are not practically able to be tested.

A combination of heavy code review and some spot testing is being used to verify these changes.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.85.00 6/22/2022
XL220CL 5.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL 4.85.00 6/22/2022
XL220CL 4.86.00 8/9/2022
XL2CL; Enable Up Complete Inputs on XL244CL for Press Up Outputs.
XL200

Enable Up Complete Inputs for Press Up outputs on the XL244CL.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.84.05 6/3/2022
XL2CL 4.84.05 6/3/2022
XL2CL; The Max Velocity at 10V setup parameter resets to its default value.
XL200

On every power cycle, if enabled, on Two Encoder Closed Loop Feed to Stop controllers, the Max Velocity at 10V setup parameter was reverting to its default value. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.84.05 5/31/2022
XL220CL 5.84.04 5/31/2022
XL2CL 4.84.04 5/31/2022
XL220CL 4.84.04 5/31/2022
XL2: Display File Name and Version in Task Error data
XL200

In order to process Task Error data, the application (File Name) and the application version must be known. This specifies which map file must be used to interpret the data.

Customers send pictures of the data but are unware of or forget the rest of the information that is required to process it. Now the information will be embedded.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.84.03 5/26/2022
XL2CL 5.84.03 5/26/2022
XL220OL 5.84.03 5/26/2022
XL220CL 5.84.03 5/26/2022
XL2OL 4.84.03 5/26/2022
XL2CL 4.84.03 5/26/2022
XL220OL 4.84.03 5/26/2022
XL220CL 4.84.03 5/26/2022
XL2CL; Allow Analog options on Dual Die Accelerator controllers
XL200

Allow the Analog Options to be available on Dual Die Accelerator controllers. They are only available if SERCOS is being used for the command signal to the drives rather than the analog ports.

The models affected are: XL200CL-MDA2 XL200CL-MRE2 XL212CLF-MHA2 XL244CL

Due to time constraints on development and testing this was only implemented on the V5 Controllers

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.84.02 5/20/2022
XL2CL; Motor Thump during Manual Shear using SERCOS
XL200

Using SERCOS, the motor on a Feeder would thump during a Manual Shear. It would only do this if the material had been jogged forward or reverse prior to the Manual Shear.

This has been fixed.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.84.02 5/20/2022
XL220CL 5.84.03 5/26/2022
XL2CL 4.84.02 5/20/2022
XL220CL 4.84.03 5/26/2022
XL2; Disable the OK button operation if no coil number entered in Load Coil screen.
XL200

If no Coil number is entered in the Load Coil screen a new coil is not loaded, even if the OK button is selected. Subsequent code that prompts for Thread-Up scrap was unaware of this and attempted to use the coil to report production. On the PC Simulation this causes an application crash. It is not known what occurs on the hardware.

To prevent this issue, the Load Coil Screen will not respond to the OK button until a Coil Number has been entered.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.84.01 5/19/2022
XL2CL 5.84.01 5/19/2022
XL220OL 5.84.01 5/19/2022
XL220CL 5.84.01 5/19/2022
XL2OL 4.84.01 5/19/2022
XL2CL 4.84.01 5/19/2022
XL220OL 4.84.01 5/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.01 5/19/2022
XL2; SERCOS Feeder or Die Accelerator Velocity Scaling bug.
XL200

SCN 4586 Added the ability to use drive scaled precision for Multi-Axis SERCOS drives. However, it unintentionally got applied to Velocity controlled Axes like Feeders and Die Accelerators as well.

This issue exists in version 4 and version 5 controllers. Any customer using SERCOS who updates software version x.81.00 through x.84.00 to version x.81.01 or higher may need make some adjustments. It depends on if the drive was commissioned using one of the XL versions in the affected range. Older versions will have configured the S-0-0046 Velocity Data Scaling Exponent to the correct value of -5. This setting changes where the implied decimal point of all Velocity parameters or velocity data is assumed to be. With the wrong setting the customer or tech will have had to lie to the drive in order to scale the command signal to the drive properly. If the lying took place, after the update, the scaling will need to be corrected using the S-0-0091 Bipolar Velocity Limit. It may be off by one or more factors of 10. On Die Accelerators die test will need to be run again after the adjustment.

Symptoms of an incorrect scaling value may include Drive Not Responding Errors or oscillations that were not present prior to the update.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.84.01 5/19/2022
XL220CL 5.84.01 5/19/2022
XL2CL 4.84.01 5/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.01 5/19/2022
XL2CL; Delay After Shear Mode setup not working on Rotational Style Die Accelerator
XL200

SCN 4548 Added a Delay After Shear Mode to allow the Delay After Shear part separation to be implemented with a slow speed rather than stopping. However, the delay for Rotational style Die Accelerators is implemented differently from the delay for all other styles of Shear Presses and it was inadvertently not implemented for them. This has been resolved to allow Rotational Style shears to delay using the slow speed.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL; Stitching Change on XL200CL Die Accelerator
XL200

The XL200CL DA implements stitching by omitting shears. It leaves out shear operations to join smaller parts into larger ones. However, to support features like intelligent die positioning it has always still required the die to go through its cycle. It just did not fire the press. This required that the material speed slow down enough for the die to still complete its cycle.

Recently a customer a customer encountered this. They have an extreme case where they switched from running 10 foot parts down to 1 foot parts. We decided to attempt an improvement. The die will no longer cycle if the press is not going to fire. It will do a normal die return so that the die will be positioned, based on the current line speed, for when parts begin to be sheared normally. If the line speed is not changing the die will appear to remain stationary during each of these returns.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2; allow the logger class to print length strings.
XL200

Using the format %ls the logger class can now add length strings to a debug print.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2; Prevent Invalid MODBUS Configuration of PLC List parameters from causing blue screens.
XL200

This change protects the controller from an improperly configured List when using MODBUS PLC List Parameters. If the PLC programmer fails to configure the Fraction field of the Parameter Format properly, the XL can fail to allocate enough memory for the list. As the XL is filling in the list it now checks the size of the list against the size of the memory allocated for it. If the list will not fit, the creation of the current and subsequent parameters will stop and an error message describing the problem will be displayed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2; MODBUS PLC Parameters, List Parameter causes task error.
XL200

The MODBUS PLC List Parameter code in the XL failed to allocate enough memory to store the list under some circumstances. This resulted in memory corruption of adjacent heap records in memory. When detected, the memory corruption caused Task Errors.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2; Encoder Initialization Changes
XL200

There have been a few reports of jumps in encoder position during power up.

The Closed Loop controller already read the encoders on power up to eliminate any encoder counts that may randomly get reported by the 5387 board during a power cycle. The Open Loop did not.

The Open Loop controllers now read the encoders during power up, attempting to eliminate this issue. In addition, both Open and Closed Loop controllers have a 50msec delay added to them to give the 5387 board more time to initialize, just in case, before doing the read.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
Version 5.0.18.109
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Major simplification to the process that synchronizes data from Classic to Pro.
  • Upgrade .net for agent to 4.8.
  • Column sorts are remembered in most lists now.
  • Material demand report has sortable columns.
  • NetSuite: handle issuing non-serialized items that are on the BOM.

Bug Fixes

  • The scheduler machine drop target was not covering all the appropriate jobs. This allow the schedule to get in an invalid state.
  • The scheduler was occasionally showing a job at the machine when it was not.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.18.109 5/2/2022
Version 5.0.18.87

Improvements

  • Add internal tool to help with bundle and coil tag development.
  • Setups and Tools in Machines>XL are now sortable.
  • Upgrade .net to 6.0.4

Bug Fixes

  • Fix timeline help.
  • When assigning multiple jobs, the existing sort was not preserved. It is now.
  • Recalling moved the job off of the machine before it should have.
  • Fix upgrades that fail because files were still in use.
  • Removed more memory leak instances
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.18.87 4/17/2022
Version 5.0.18.72
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Add Integration tab to Order Details.
  • NetSuite: Limit the number of automatic export attempts to 2.

Bug Fixes

  • Scheduler shows pending actions (recall, sending, etc.) more consistently.
  • The last available job was not getting removed from the scheduler when scheduled.
  • Fix downloading and uploading diagnostic packages.
  • Completed orders were showing up on the schedule.
  • Database upgrade regression in last release.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.18.72 4/8/2022
Version 5.0.18.62
Eclipse

Preview Features

  • Printing is now enabled on most reports and list screens. More screens will be added. Formatting will also be improved.

New Features

  • First look at a Wallboard view of the Warehouse task list.

Improvements

  • Wallboard reconnects more reliably after a server restart.
  • Added Last Used date to Punch Pattern list
  • Coil sync detects unchanged coils earlier in the process.
  • Delete successful coil sync records after 60 days.
  • NetSuite: Preliminary support for additional non-serialized items on a BOM.

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed memory leak.
  • Wide scheduler columns match their headers.
  • Fixed Andon data calculation when there was only one order on the schedule.
  • Punch Pattern history now has data.
  • The remaining duration was not displaying on Assigned Jobs on the scheduler.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.18.62 4/2/2022
XL2CL; Enable Open Loop Feed to Stop presses on XL244CL
XL200

Any and all Open Loop presses may be configured for Feed to Stop operation on the XL244CL.

Four DIP switch bits were added to the XL244CL to allow any of the four configurable OL presses to be configured for two speed Open Loop Feed to Stop operation.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2; Tree and Grid data indicators.
XL200

Normally Tree, Grid and List objects have scroll bars that are used to navigate and indicate the presence of more data above or below the viewing area.

The XL does not have scroll bars due to screen space constraints. This can sometimes cause confusion when operators are looking for things.

To help alleviate this confusion a very simple indication has been added to the Tree and Grid controls. The top and bottom row of data in each list will have a 3 pixel wide black bar at the top or bottom to indicate there is no more data. Because of the many tree menus and grids that don't have more data than fit on the screen I believe it will become intuitive, at least to some, what the indications mean.

There are other proposed solutions for this problem. They have not been implemented to date due to the complexity and length of development time and testing. This solution was simple, easy and relatively safe. Hopefully it is an improvement over nothing.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2; Program Screen Order Tree lines missing or incorrectly displayed.
XL200

The tree lines in the program screen Order Tree did not display correctly when adding the first few orders. Some connecting lines would be missing, usually on the second order in the list. This problem has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2; Setup Lockout Status shown in the Top Line Window
XL200

A Locked or Unlocked icon is now shown in the Top Line Window to indicate the state of the setup lockout input.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
Pathfinder V5; Allow Multi Cut Feature to Use All Gauging Options
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
5226; Implementation of Alternate Gripper Nose Gauging Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On some double folding machines there are the standard sheet grippers used for most of the parts and an alternate gripper that is mainly used for parts that have a flange already bent into the material. The way this gripper is designed is that it will extend past the sheet gripper, open up and grip over the flange. It can also just extend and be used as the gauging surface for the flange. To use the gripper in this way the user needs to choose the backgauge mode to be Alternate Nose in the part step. Once chosen the controller will position everything needed to use this gripper for nose gauging. This type of gauging can only be used in Semi-Automatic mode with a pedal.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
XL2; Fixed Eclipse Error "Bad date-time received from the controller".
XL200

If Eclipse see that production records don't have sequential dates and times it will report the "Bad date-time received from the controller" error.

One instance of this was tracked down to the production record generated when the Power-Off in Run Mode error is displayed. It was being reported before the Power Off production record. The Power Off in run mode record is reported with the last saved (Power-Off ) date time. All other records are reported with the current time. This means the Power-Off record needs to be the first production record generated after a power cycle.

A few lines of code were swapped so that the production records get generated in the correct order which now makes Eclipse happy.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
5226; Implemented Minimum Position Alternate Gripper Extended Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The Jorns Twinmatic double folding machine type has 2 types of grippers used to hold onto the material during production. One is a standard sheet gripper that is used for most of the production. The other looks like a "hippo head" or a "cusped hand" which is mainly used to grip over a flange. Usually this gripper is tucked behind the sheet gripper in terms of what the material will be backstopped against. When needed this alternate gripper has separate outputs to extend the gripper past the sheet gripper. Once extended the alternate gripper can be opened and closed for production. The main safety concern is that it shouldn't extend out when the backgauge is a certain distance from the clamp which could cause a collision.

The solution was to implement a Backgauge Minimum Position with Alternate Gripper Extended. This parameter will throw an error if the backgauge is already within this zone and the user is trying to extend the alternate gripper. In automatic the gripper will be retracted before moving the backgauge into and out of this zone.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
XL2; Added Eclipse Status Icons to the Top Line Window
XL200

A request was made to provide timely and convenient access to information about the Eclipse communication status. The request was to provide an icon in the Top Line Window that will show if Eclipse is communicating to the controller and if there are any messages pending for Eclipse to process. The intent is for an operator to be able to notice if Eclipse is down prior to it being a problem without having to periodically navigate to the Eclipse Diagnostic screen.

Four icons were created:

  1. A green computer monitor with an empty screen.
  2. A green computer monitor with part of the screen filled in.
  3. A grey computer monitor with an empty screen and a red X crossing through it.
  4. A grey computer monitor with an part of the screen filled in and a red X crossing though it.

The specified icons are displayed under the following conditions: No Icon - Eclipse not configured. 1 - Eclipse active, no messages to process. 2 - Eclipse active with messages to process. 3 - Eclipse NOT active, no messages to process. 4 - Eclipse NOT active with messages to process

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 5.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220OL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL220CL 4.84.00 5/11/2022
XL2; Tile Machine Forming Tool operation changes.
XL200

Allmac is producing Tile Machines using the Formia design and they had a request for changes in the forming tool operation during a tail-out.

On a tail-out they don't want the Forming Tool to raise up on a tail-out. It has operated this way on every machine since the Tile Machine controller was created but It can damage steps that are still in the press. They may be able to recover more of the part if those steps don't get damaged.

They want the encoder to still have to move forward by the Minimum Forming Tool Feed distance the same as if the controller was still in auto. This prevents the forming tools from raising and deforming any remaining steps that are still in the machine.

While testing it was discovered that a Manual Shear, clearing the queue, was also causing the Forming tools to raise.

All conditions were changed to require the encoder to move forward by the Minimum Forming Tool Feed distance even after Manual Shears, Clearing the Queue, Tail-outs and Tail-ins before raising the Forming Tool.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2OL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2CL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2OL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2; Display MODBUS AMS Id as a 32 bit hex value.
XL200

To help with issues relating to the MODBUS configuration the AMS Id will now be displayed in the MODBUS diagnostic screen.

The four byte AMS Id string will be displayed as a 32 bit hex value to aid in determining the byte order used by the PLC.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2CL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220OL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220CL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2OL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2CL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220OL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220CL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2CL; Missed Shear/Punch Error with zero Max Die Distance.
XL200

Programming the Max Die Distance has been treated as optional. This can result in more Missed Shear/Punch errors than necessary if targets coast past the home position of the die when exiting the Run mode.

This change seeks to eliminate some of the unnecessary errors while not generating phone calls that would occur if we began forcing customers to program the Max Die Distance settings.

When entering the Run mode the original code treated any target greater than Maximum Die Distance as a Missed Shear/Punch target.

The following change has now been made. If the Minimum Die Distance or the Shear/Press Die Distance has been programmed we can safely shear or punch some of these targets as long as the target has not coasted beyond the larger of Minimum Die Distance or Shear/Press Die Distance settings.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220CL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2CL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220CL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2CL; Increased Stack Size for Press Tasks
XL200

While trying to test thw Windows Simulation with an XL244CLP (Switch 200) the simuation would crash. This was caused by the Press Task for Non-Shear tasks being too small. The task for the second die was corrupting the stack for open loop press 2. This corrupted stack variables and put them in an invalid state that led to a crash.

The stack overflow may or may not occur on the hardware. If it does, the symptoms will be completely different because the simulation and the hardware use the stack differently for numerous reasons.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.82.02 3/28/2022
XL2CL 4.82.02 3/28/2022
XL2; Add Part Print Driver Selections for the VideoJet 1580 Printer
XL200

Drivers selections are now available for the VideoJet 1580 printer. Internally the driver will function as if and believe it is communicating with a VideoJet 1520 printer.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2OL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220OL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220CL 5.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2OL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2CL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220OL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL220CL 4.83.00 4/8/2022
XL2; New Hungarian Translations
XL200

Rebuild with Hungarian translations.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.82.01 3/18/2022
XL2OL 5.82.01 3/18/2022
XL2CL 4.82.01 3/21/2022
XL2OL 4.82.01 3/21/2022
XL2 Track Pre-Threadup Coil Scrap
XL200

SCN 2908 added the ability to track scrap that was cut by a Front Shear prior to the coil being threaded into the machine. If a Manual Front Shear operation is detected while the coil was tailed out, after the new coil loaded the controller prompts the operator with a window where the scrap can be manually entered. This window is displayed after the new coil number is entered.

This same window will now be displayed any time a new coil is loaded, after the coil number has been entered.

Any Customer who is bothered by this new Window can disable it with a new Setup Parameter. The new Setup is called Coil Pre-Thread-Up Window. It has two settings, Enabled and Disabled. It defaults to Enabled. The Setting is not visible if a Front Shear Tool is enabled. In this case the Window is still selectively displayed as described in SCN 2908.

The new setup can also be configured by Eclipse using the ME UART command.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
5226; Added Backgauge Overshoot Distance Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A setup parameter was added to specify a Backgauge Overshoot Distance which was implemented in the older controller models and has now been implemented into the 5226. This distance is used during the automatic mode whenever the backgauge must move toward the rear of the machine to achieve its next target. The backgauge will overshoot its target by this amount, then approach the target while moving toward the front of the machine. This functionality removes all back-lash from the backgauge mechanism by always approaching a target from a consistent direction.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
Pathfinder; Added New Geometries to JouanelPTS31 Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Added geometries 2056793-6mm, 2056793-10mm, 2056793-12mm, 2056793-15mm, 2056793-19mm, 2056793-25mm, 3057428-6mm, 3057428-10mm, and 3057428-19mm to the PTS31 which is the standard electric design for a Jouanel machine.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
Pathfinder; Added New Geometries to JouanelPTL31 Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

Added geometries 2056793-10mm, 2056793-15mm, and 2056793-20mm to the PTL31 configuration which is the standard hydraulic design for Jouanel.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
Pathfinder; Added JornsSingeBendFullRetrofitPartialV2 Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

This is the 5226 version of the Jorns Full Retrofit Partial option that uses a 5225 instead. The differences in this machine to a regular Jorns Full Retrofit are that the backgauge is controlled with an open loop motor instead of a closed loop servo motor and the backgauge limit switches are normally open instead of normally closed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
Pathfinder; Added New JornsSingleBendFullRetrofitFGHandshake Configuration
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V4 and V5.

This configuration was created to have the FoldGuard Handshake I/O available for upgrades where a 5225 is replaced with a 5226 on a standard Jorns machine.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3354 11/30/2022
Version 5.0.18.1
Eclipse

Version 5.0.18.1

Manual upgrades of Eclipse Classic and RavenDB are required for this release!

New Features

  • First look at punch programming. Read-only views for now.

Improvements

  • Performance improvement in Agent.
  • Agent now requires Classic to be at minimum version of 4.1.198.
  • Server now requires RavenDB to be at minimum version of 5.3.0.
  • Order Bundler now remembers the last tab used when splitting bundles.
  • You can now navigate from the dashboard Schedule Summary to Orders and Materials. Also from the Orders list to Materials.

Bug Fixes

  • Production Log report no longer fetches data outside the selected range.
  • Fixed error when opening the same order multiple times.
  • Don't allow order modifications when it should be read-only (at the machine, etc.).
  • Show the correct order status.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.18.1 2/11/2022
5226; Added Additional Hemmer Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A hemmer is an add-on to a machine that is similar to a shear in the way that it moves across the machine except instead of cutting the material it creates a hem. The 5226 does not have a dedicated hemmer operation though so the idea was to use the shear operation to move the hemmer across the machine. For more information on old logic refer to:

SCN 4310 - 5226; Added Hemmer Active Generic Parameter and Logic

The old logic need to be updated to give the operator a way to switch back and forth from a hemmer to a shear. Also to be able to perform two hems back to back. The new parameter is 469 Hemmer Active. When set to YES the shear step operation will work for the hemmer. When set to NO it will work for the shear.

Hemmer Active:

  1. When the shear step is enabled the clamp will open to its open height and the backgauge will move to the (blank size – shear offset distance).
  2. Clamp down pedal will move the clamp down until clamped like usual. Pressing pedal again starts the hemmer moving.
  3. Hemmer will move until (shear forward maximum time * shear timer in step). Pressing pedal will make clamp open to clamp open height once reached. Operator can remove material here if they want.
  4. Pressing the pedal again will move the hemmer back until the home switch is reached.
  5. Clamp will open to open height and backgauge will move to (blank size – (shear offset distance * 2). Operator can then put the material back in for second hem.
  6. Pressing the pedal will then start the process of steps 2 – 4 again.
  7. Bend steps can then be performed.

Shear Active:

  1. When the shear step is enabled the clamp will open to its open height and the backgauge will move to the (blank size – shear offset distance).
  2. Clamp down pedal will move the clamp down until clamped like usual. Pressing pedal again starts the shear moving.
  3. Shear will move until (shear forward maximum time * shear timer in step).
  4. Pressing the pedal will return the shear until home switch is reached. Clamp will open to open height.
  5. Bend steps can then be performed.
Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
5226; Error Checking for an Axis Outside It's Travel Range
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

All axes that have some kind of feedback will have error checking for if the target is further out from the maximum position parameter or if it is less than the minimum position parameter. So once the axis is setup with its feedback matching up to the physical world the axis should be safe and not crash into anything. One problem though is if there is a failure to the feedback device. In this case the axis might act in a non-normal way.

The fix for this was to have each axis have a set in stone travel range that gives some leeway for the axis saying its outside the minimum and maximum positions, but will error out if beyond this range. This check happens before an axis is about to make a move.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
5226; Closed Loop Error Checking for a Huge Jump in Encoder Counts
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

In a closed loop system the motion of an axis is based on calculated set points of where it should be in real life. If the real life feedback is not matching up with the set point positions then the control will be adjusted with a PID system to try and match the actual position with the set points. Factors like friction, gravity or physical limitations can all cause the closed loop system to adjust the analog accordingly. One problem that can arise from this is if the feedback fails in some way that will make the loop try to adjust to this new bogus error in the set point. One assumption for when an encoder fails is that the reported counts will probably be way different then what they were on the previous iteration.

The implementation then to catch a failing encoder is to halt when there is a change in 100 counts per millisecond. This should catch whatever failure has occurred outside of the loop.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
5226; Added Error Clamp Pedal Must Be Pressed When Jogging Clamp Down
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

One of the biggest safety hazards when operating a folding machine is moving the clamp down. Having the clamp come down onto a body part will cause injury and one of the more likely times this will happen is when using the jog screen. One of the ways to make jogging the clamp down safer was to make the operator also hit the clamp down pedal to initiate the move. If the operator hits the jog clamp down button the controller will throw an error and not let the clamp move if the clamp down pedal is not pressed.

As of right now this is only thrown if the machine is electrically wired to not allow the clamp to move down without a pedal press. This will most likely be implemented for every situation when using the jog clamp down button in the future.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
5226; Add Generic Finger Setting Bit Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Most fingers on a machine are controlled by separate direction outputs directly associated with that finger that go to inputs at the machine. As in a finger will have a retract output and an extend output to dictate the direction the finger will move. Usually the machine will have only one finger so their only two backstops the operator can use. Some machines though will have multiple zones of fingers that give the operator different backstops to use based on where the material needs to be. To handle this the fingers are controlled through binary logic which based on what input bits are set will dictate which finger will be popped up to use.

To handle this new Finger Setting Bit logic and outputs were added to the 5226 controller. This will handle how the bit pattern is setup and handled on the machine.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
5226; Add Generic Drive Setting Bit Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Most machine axes are controlled by separate direction outputs directly associated with that axis that go to inputs at the machine. As in an axis like the bending beam will have a reverse output and a forward output to dictate the direction the axis will move. Some machines though are setup to have some axes share, but they are setup as binary logic. This means the same inputs will be used, but based on which are on and off will manipulate direction and axis.

To handle this generic parameters were created to specify these drive settings. The user will setup these parameters to let the controller know how to turn on/off the bits which will control the axis, direction and idle status. New Drive Bit Setting outputs were created that will be set to give the correct bit pattern to the drive.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
5226; Detect an SSI Encoder Bit Has Failed on the Slave Controller
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some SSI encoders have a dedicated error bit that can be used to detect a failure with the controller. The 5226 monitors this bit and will halt the machine. An error will also be thrown that should say which axis encoder is failing. On double folder machines there are 2 5226 controllers being used. One is the master and the other acts as a slave. The slave controller reports back to the master statuses of things on its board like I/O and encoder information. One of these things was supposed to be the error bit of the SSI encoder. This was not being reported back correctly and was also not being accepted by the master correctly.

The fix was to correct both sets of board code to make sure the error bit is handled correctly for each encoder on the slave controller.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
5226; Implementation of Closed Loop Inverter Motor Control Type
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

At the start of opening Pathfinder it sends down to the controller information to define its characteristics like feedback type, hardware port locations and control type. Control type is essentially telling the control how this axis will be controlled and what types of things will be needed. As in open loop vs closed loop, analog vs discrete IO, servo vs inverter and etc. The Closed Loop Inverter Motor type was previously just a pseudo closed loop algorithm that knew to turn on certain outputs on old controllers. With the 5226 it seemed time to make it full closed loop.

The Closed Loop Inverter Motor control type now uses the same algorithm used by the other closed loop types in the 5226. The loop was modified so that inverter outputs are turned on and off at the correct times.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.05 2/3/2023
XL2; Selectively Validate Scrap Bundle Id's against the Scrap Code List
XL200

Some ERP systems cannot handle scrap codes that have not been pre-defined. This change allows Eclipse to force the controller to validate Bundle Id's above 900 against the Scrap Code list it defines, which is intended to reflect all of the Scrap Codes the ERP system can handle.

If enabled, when calculating parts, the controller will test that the Scrap Code represented in a Scrap Bundle Id exists in the Scrap Code List downloaded by Eclipse. If the Scrap Code cannot be found an error message 264 will be displayed that indicates the invalid Bundle Id and Scrap Code.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2; Eclipse will control the "Remaining Coil is Scrap" button.
XL200

SCN 4561 added a "Remaining Coil is Scrap" button that is only enabled when the UART version of Eclipse is 3.59 or higher.

This change allows Eclipse to enable or disable access to this button with a setting configured in Eclipse. The button will be disabled by default unless Eclipse enables it.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
4.1.198
Eclipse
  • Reduced the frequency of full controller order indexing which improves performance.
  • Add new field to order header (and bundlein): Message (msg_text) that gets send as the first line at the controller.
  • Fixed crash when the controller has a memory clear with a bogus future date.
  • Fixed problem sending orders with long order numbers to version 5 controllers.
  • Improved punching data synchronization with Pro.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.198 2/7/2022
Eclipse-HVAC 4.1.212 10/15/2023
4.1.198
Eclipse
  • Improved timestamp generation (changeid and log)
  • Properly report Express reported offline status
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.196 10/19/2021
Eclipse-HVAC 4.1.212 10/15/2023
XL2; Display required printer baud rate in printer setup screen.
XL200

Neither Baud Rate setting in a 6370 should ever be modified by a tech or a customer.

Techs and customers try to set the RS232 baud rate in the 6370 to match the baud rate the printer has configured. However, the XL controls both baud rates, RS232 and RS485, in the 6370. Each Print driver in the XL requires a specific RS232 setting that the XL will configure the 6370 for. That is the setting the printer MUST use.

If the settings in the 6370 are changed to match what is in the printer rather than using the setting the XL configures, the printer may work for a while. Eventually, after a power cycle or driver selection, the XL will change it back to the setting the printer is supposed to be configured for and printer communication will cease.

Two new Read Only setups have been added to display the required RS232 printer baud rate. The new setups are called Bundle RS232 Baud Rate (Read Only) and Part RS232 Baud Rate (Read Only). The printer must be configured to use the displayed setting.

As the names imply the settings are Read Only.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL; Odd Acceleration Ramp when using "Max Velocity at 10V" setup.
XL200

The Max Velocity at 10V setup parameter is a Velocity Feed forward setup that relies on the accurate calculation of the velocity of the position set-points for the Closed Loop algorithm. This is a filtered velocity calculation.

There were no issues with the calculations or the filtering but there was an issue with the code that calculates the set-points and re-references the loop position between parts. The referencing and the new set-point were being calculated correctly but the old set-point, which is used to calculate the instantaneous velocity was not getting set properly between parts. This resulted in a large negative instantaneous velocity that took some time to filter out. This cause the acceleration ramp to look odd and miss-shaped.

This problem would only be noticeable when the controller is set for Feed to Stop and Selective Closed Loop. It has now been fixed.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL; Enable Feed Forward Settings in Two Encoder Feed to Stop mode.
XL200

We have seen a big benefit in having Velocity Feed Forward on Hydraulic Folding Machine Systems where compressible fluid and flexible hoses make closed loop tuning more difficult. Velocity Feed Forward helps provide stability by allowing the majority of the command signal to be provided through Open Loop means.

We sometimes have difficulty on customer machines that use chain driven roll-formers to position in closed loop. The chains create backlash. It is very similar to the hydraulics problem in that there is not a rigid zero backlash system that we are controlling. These chain driven systems generally also have a line encoder in part because of the inaccuracies introduced by the chain.

We already have Velocity and Acceleration Feed Forward parameters and code available in the Selective Closed Loop configuration. This change makes these settings and functionality available for Two Encoder Feed to Stop systems.

To avoid causing issues for existing customers receiving software updates, a new Setup has been added called Enable Feed Forward Settings. It defaults to No. When set to Yes it enables the two pre-existing settings;

  1. Max Velocity at 10V.
  2. Acceleration Feed Forward Gain.
Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2; Controller clearing stitched parts in the part Queue.
XL200

The controller tries to minimize the times when it needs to preserve the part queue when the controller is halted. For example, if the controller has one press and one gag. If it has no tools defined to use the gag there is no reason to maintain the queue when halting.

In the above example there is one reason the controller may need to preserve the queue and that is if there is a stitch gag defined and there are stitched parts in the part queue. The controller had a test to detect the stitched parts but it was implemented incorrectly and failed accurately detect them. This has been fixed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL: Max Analog and Max Error fluxuation in the Closed Loop Data Screen
XL200

While at a customer site we were using the Closed Loop Data screen to monitor the Maximum Analog signal. While watching the screen it appeared to be changing and fluctuating incorrectly between a wide range of values for several cycles of the die before coming to a final value.

A code review showed that the values were getting reset during the entire time that the graphics screen was capturing data. It can be capturing data for up to 30 seconds which is why we were seeing it take numerous die cycles before it settled on a value.

The code was modified to only reset the analog and error max values one time at the beginning of a capture so that it would work as expected.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL220CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2; Minimum Forming Tool Feed Distance Bug on Manual Punch
XL200

A customer found a bug in the Tile Machine software when using Manual Punch operations and configured for dual forming presses. The Minimum Forming Tool Distance parameter was not being honored and would raise the Lower Forming Tools early under very specific conditions.

In order to manage the dual Forming tools the controller needs to know the distance between them, it needs to know how wide they are and where the forming presses fired last.

This bug would occur if the forming presses were fired using the Manual Punch input(s) prior to running any parts. The only time the distance between the presses was being calculated and saved was when calculating and running parts in automatic. If the distance had not been calculated, both forming tools would raise up early.

The solution to this problem was to do the same calculations at the start of a Manual Punch operation so that the software could calculate properly where to raise the forming tools.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2CL 5.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2OL 4.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2CL 4.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2; Pattern Operation Spacing Limit use test.
XL200

Invalid use of the Spacing Limit reference for operations in patterns can lead to unexpected results if specific rules are not followed.

In order to be effective or evaluated a Spacing Limit operation must follow an Even Space operation that uses the same Tool Id and Id Type. Id Type is used on SGF controllers for shape programming.

This change adds a test for Spacing Limit operations. If they don't directly follow an Even Space operation that uses the same Tool Id and Id Type an error message will be generated and the line halted.

The Error message states "Invalid Spacing Limit operation in Pattern %3w. Spacing Limit operations must directly follow an Even Space operation programmed with the same Tool Id and Id Type, if present."

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2CL 5.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2OL 4.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2CL 4.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2; SERCOS Multi-Axis Velocity Scaling bug.
XL200

SCN 4586 allowed the Velocity Scaling (Number of Implied Decimal Places) between the XL and the Drive to be configured in the drive. This required the XL to read the scaling format out of the drive and then calculate some scaling multipliers to scale back and forth between the XL and the Drive.

There was a bug that could cause the Fast and Jog velocity values sent to the drive to be incorrect if the scaling in the drive was changed after the initial power-up of the system.

This bug was discovered through code review when looking for an explanation for how the velocities could become zero. No means for them to be zero were found.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2CL 5.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2OL 4.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2CL 4.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2; Multi-Axis Jog Button touch screen bugs
XL200

There were several bugs with the same root cause in the Multi-Axis Jog Screen related to the touch screen or mouse processing of the jog buttons.

  1. Clicking on the jog button and dragging the mouse out of the button area left the Axis jogging.

  2. Dragging the mouse from outside of the button to inside of the button and then releasing could cause an Axis not Enabled error when technically the button had not been clicked nor had any attempt to jog the axis been made.

  3. Selecting the Yes button in the Reference, Are You Sure window could sometimes erroneously result in the Axis not Enabled error window being displayed.

The root cause of these problems was a bug in how the jog buttons generated the PSF_RELEASE signals. The problem was actually in all buttons but the jog buttons are the only buttons that use these special signals created specifically for jogging.

For problem 1 the PSF_RELEASE signal was not being sent when it should have been. Problems 2 and 3 were caused because the mouse was released over the button and the PSF_RELEASED was being generated even though the button had never actually been pressed. For problem 3 the when the mouse was released the pointer was within the area of the Jog Button and it generated a PSF_RELEASED signal that it should not have.

These issues have been fixed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2CL 5.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2OL 4.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2CL 4.81.01 1/25/2022
XL2; Added Forming Tool 1 Notch Width parameter to XL270
XL200

This parameter only applies to a Twinpress XL270.

Each Forming Press has a lower forming tool that provides back pressure as the press forms each tile step. The XL is reponsible for raising this tool once the formed step is out of the way. There has only ever been one parameter since each press, including the lower forming tool has always been identical. On some parts, where the last step of the part was too close to the first step of the next part, the lower forming tool for press 1 would not raise.

One machine builder has designed a notch into the lower forming tool of Press 1 that now allows the lower forming tool to raise under the conditions described above. A new setup parameter, called Forming Tool 1 Notch Width, is intended to describe the width of the notched area so that the XL can now calculate when it is safe to raise the tool. The setup defaults to zero.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL; Loop not responding to Enable on V5 Closed Loop Controllers
XL200

There have been reports of the V5 controllers failing to generate a command (voltage) signal when the Loop is enabled on V5 Closed Loop controllers. The problem was also duplicated internally.

In general the issue was caused by the order that the ARM processor was processing data sent to it through the 386 processors timer interrupt. If the ARM processor received two or more data blocks prior to being able process them, they needed to be processed in the same order as the 386 send them and they weren’t. This will eliminate any processing order dependencies that may occur as a result.

Specifically the individual Loop Settings were getting processed before the initial Power up settings were getting processed. Until the initial Power up settings are configured, the individual Loop settings cannot be processed. The Loop gain and other settings were not getting set, which prevented the loop from generating a signal.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL; Allow Shear Die Distance to be used when Reference Die on Manual Shear is NO.
XL200

The setup Reference Die on Manual Shear was added so that the die would not home on a Manual Shear. Some customers need to jog the die and cut in a specific place and this setting facilitated that need by cutting wherever the die happens to be.

Homing the die can take some time. Mechanical four post presses need to shear the part when the die is centered between the posts. The setup Shear Die Distance facilitates that need.

A recent customer asked that they be able to use the Shear Die Distance and also disable the die homing on a manual shear. Prior to this change those two options were mutually exclusive.

This change allows the Shear Die Distance to be used on a manual shear when Reference Die on Manual Shear is set to NO. Howeve, it is only used when it is set to a Non-Zero value.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL; 8F00000E Task Error with SERCOS and Multi-Axis
XL200

A bug was introduced in SCN 1912 back in 2008.

The timer interrupt that transfers data between the two processors on the XL must be installed before SERCOS takes over running the operating system. Otherwise, both the timer interrupt and SERCOS will attempt to transfer the data. This causes a timing problem and the 8F00000E occurs as a result.

The code prior to SCN 1912 had the proper protection to prevent this. SCN 1912 conditionally bypassed this code with incorrect logic. All Closed Loop controllers with the SERCOS option need the protection. If the controller had the Multi-Axis option the protection code got bypassed.

Any long delay, such as displaying an error message, prior to installing the timer interrupt could cause the task error to occur. This bug has now been fixed.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL; Disable Loop when loss of SERCOS drive enable state is detected.
XL200

Closed Loop Feeders and Die Accelerators using SERCOS or Analog also have a Loop that gets enabled when the drive gets enabled. SERCOS has additional feedback that can be monitored to determine if the Drive has disabled itself.

This change ensures that the Loop on the XL gets disabled when the loss of enable is detected through feedback from the drive or when loss of communication to the drive is detected.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.03 1/13/2022
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 4.80.03 1/13/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2; Detect failure to Enable and loss of Enable on SERCOS Drives.
XL200

SERCOS drives don't use the Drive Enable output from the XL. They are enabled through the SERCOS communication to the drive. The drive also reports back its enabled status through the same communication.

This change expands upon the change that was made in SCN 4583 where the enabled status from the drive was monitored to terminate Multi-Axis moves. Now all SERCOS drives are monitored.

As long as SERCOS communication is fully active, in phase four with full cyclical data transfer we can monitor the state of the drives enabled status.

If we attempt to enable the drive and it fails or if the drive loses its enabled state for external reasons we will display an error message informing them that the drive failed to enable or became disabled and to check the state of the drive for faults or any condition that prevents normal operation.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.03 1/13/2022
XL2CL 5.80.03 1/13/2022
XL220OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2OL 4.80.03 1/13/2022
XL2CL 4.80.03 1/13/2022
XL220OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2; Use Drive Scaled Velocity settings in Multi-Axis Sercos drives.
XL200

SERCOS drives have the ability to have configurable levels of precision (number of decimal places) for each type of parameter, depending on the parameters units, i.e. velocity units.

The XL needs to know the precision of the units in order to correctly interact with the drive and scale the value it sends and receives from the drive.

The XL has always set the precision of the velocity units for example so that they would be in a consistent known format.

A tech in the field experienced an issue where the chosen precision was limiting the speed that could be used by the Axis. The motor was capable of running faster but the precision of the velocity units places an upper limit on how fast the drive would run the axis.

In order to allow the precision to be changed to suit the techs installation without affecting legacy installs, the XL software was modified to read the precision setting out of the drive and to use it to do its conversions rather than set the precision. This was only done for Multi-Axis drives. Feeder and DA drives still function and use the precision configured by the XL.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.03 1/13/2022
XL2CL 5.80.03 1/13/2022
XL220OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2OL 4.80.03 1/13/2022
XL2CL 4.80.03 1/13/2022
XL220OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2; Added Timeout test for PLC Controlled Multi-Axis drivers.
XL200

There was no positioning timeout tests for Axes positioned by the XL that receive their positions from the PLC. In other words, the PLC provides positions for Axes that the XL actually controls, the XL is slaved to the PLC.

This test has now been added.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.03 1/13/2022
XL2CL 5.80.03 1/13/2022
XL2OL 4.80.03 1/13/2022
XL2CL 4.80.03 1/13/2022
XL2; V5 System Information Screen. UART Pwr Bad on Sourcing IO Boards
XL200

The UART Pwr status on V5 controllers with Sourcing 5387 boards indicated a Bad state.

The status bits get reported by the 5387 board. The issue stemmed from the V4 software. The hardware test used the raw status bits defined for Rev D and higher boards. However, all other DSP applications mapped them into the rev C 5397 format.

The ARM on the V5 controller has one shared function. That function was modified to return either the Rev C or the Rev D format so the Hardware test and applications can select which version they need.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL2CL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL220OL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL220CL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL2; Multi-Axis SERCOS stuck in Moving state
XL200

The SERCOS Multi-Axis driver failed to check the Enabled status of the drive and would get stuck in the Moving state if the drive was externally disabled before or during a move.

The SERCOS code had no test to check the enabled status of a drive to see if it became disabled due to external conditions.

Both of these conditions led to the Axis getting stuck in the Moving state if the drive lost enable due to external conditions.

This issue was discovered by a tech in the field. An attempt was made to test the enabled status of all SERCOS drives. It fixed the Multi-Axis drive but a timing issue prevented a DA or Feeder drive from being enabled. Due to time constraints the fix was only applied to Multi-Axis drives.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL2CL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL220OL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL220CL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL2OL 4.80.02 1/10/2022
XL2CL 4.80.02 1/7/2022
XL220OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2; Mult-Axis Config Screen Display Jumbled
XL200

SCN 4575 refactored the configuration screens for each axis type and driver. It caused prompts and text strings to be displayed on top of one another. It also jumbled up the field tab order. These issues have been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL2CL 5.80.02 1/10/2022
XL2OL 4.80.02 1/10/2022
XL2CL 4.80.02 1/7/2022
XL2; Remove version 4 Conditional Assembly
XL200

When the Version 4 and Version 3 XL200 source code was shared we needed conditional assembly to manage the differences between them. They are no longer shared since the V3 controller is obsolete. Now that we have the Version 5 controller the conditional assembly could get unnecessarily complicated. Nearly everything that is in Version 4 is in Version 5 so the Version 4 condition checks are being removed.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2; Language Selection using Native Translation and Font
XL200

The Language Selection window that is displayed on Memory Clear shows all languages translated using native spelling and fonts. In other words, each speaker will see their language in the font and using the spelling/characters they understand. This is possible because multiple fonts are able to be used to display items in a window. It is not possible in a list were everything must use the same font.

A new type of edit control and setup type was developed specifically for editing the Language setup. It behaves in all ways like a regular list type except when it comes time to display the list. At that time, the new control displays the same modal window that is displayed on memory clear and it is used to display the language selections.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2; Add Swedish, Hungarian and Portuguese languages
XL200

With the exception of Hungarian these languages have been in our translation database but they have never been added to the XL2 source code.

This change adds the languages, which are in various stages of translation.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220OL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 5.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL2CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220OL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
XL220CL 4.81.00 1/19/2022
HWTest; SERCOS Failed to pass Phase 1 test
XL200

A change was made to the hardware on the 5386 Rev H board. The source of the clock feeding the MCLK pin on the SERCOS Chip was changed from SCLK04 to SCLK02. There are several pre-calculated constants that rely on the known speed of MCLK that needed to be recalculated. The controller and Drive will not pass the phase 1 state of the SERCOS phase test run up without the correct constants.

This same change was previously made on the 5226 hardware which uses the same clock speeds and basically the same software. The divisors that were changed in the 5226 are also now changed in the 5386.

These were previously changed in the roll-forming application code when this issue was discovered during the initial testing of the new Rev H hardware. It was assumed the HWTest shared the same source file but that turned out to be an invalid assumption.

Model Version Released
5.01.01 12/8/2021
XL2; 80070C62 Task Error
XL200

This error indicates an expected task was not found during an operating system call that accesses a special semaphore type called a Resource.

These special semaphores have been in use for a long time so it is surprising that there would be an issue.

The customer experiencing the issue began having it after upgrading to XL2CL v4.73.00 from v4.71.00. The error, when it would occur, happened consistently in the same place in the software when accessing a resource used in MODBUS communication. Software comparison showed a change to the MODBUS communication class documented in SCN 4448. This change was added in V4.72.00. Some of the high level communication functions received an additional data protection Resource, nested around the original lower level communication port protection Resource. This indicates there may be a limitation either with nesting Resources or not consistently nesting them.

In order to eliminate either possibility, the original low level port protection Resource was moved to the high level communication functions to protect both the data and the port, eliminating the use of nested Resources in the MODBUS communication.

This is expected to maintain the fix that was introduce in SCN 4448 while eliminating the potential for the Task Error that appears to have been introduced by the same change. This will buy time to investigate and possibly fix the limitations in the Resource type semaphore.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.01 12/6/2021
XL2CL 5.80.01 12/6/2021
XL220OL 5.80.01 12/6/2021
XL220CL 5.80.01 12/6/2021
XL2OL 4.80.01 12/6/2021
XL2CL 4.80.01 12/6/2021
XL220OL 4.80.01 12/6/2021
XL220CL 4.80.01 12/6/2021
XL2; Stitch Cut Mode Separation bug.
XL200

A customer complained that the Stitching feature was not putting in a full cut on the last part.

The customer sent in an example order. The final Stitch parts were 36" long and the last item had six of these parts in it. The Min Auto Stitch Length was 72" and the Max Auto Stitch Length was 144". The controller stitched four parts. The last two parts combined to equal the Min Auto Stitch Length.

At the end of an Order or when the Stitch Mode setting requires a full cut, the controller will add scrap if it needs to in order to bring up the resulting blank to the Min Auto Stitch Length. The controller had a bug in the code that tries to add the scrap piece. It tried to add a short sliver that I believe got ORed together with the last stitch cut.

Two changes were made. If no scrap cut is necessary, the controller will clear the stitch gag of the last part added to the queue. If a scrap cut is necessary the controller will compare the scrap cut first to the Min Auto Stitch Trailer Length. The scrap will be no less than this length. If the Min Auto Stitch Trailer Length is zero the Minimum Part Length will be used to set the minimum scrap length part that gets added to do the full cut.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 5.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2OL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2CL 4.82.00 3/3/2022
XL2; Refactored Multi-Axis Configuration Screen
XL200

Re-Factored the Multi-Axis Axis Configuration screens to eliminate duplicate code and to make creating new Axis drivers easier in the future. There should be no detectable differences to the user.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Maximum and Minimum Axis Position Limit comparison check
XL200

Each axis in a Multi Axis controller has a Minimum and Maximum Position setting that limits the Axis Position command. For an axis on the negative side of the machine it is easy to mix up what is the maximum value and what is the minimum value. For example -10.000" can look larger than -0.001". Entering the values into the wrong field results in axes seemingly reporting erroneous Position Limit failures.

To prevent this issue the two fields will be checked. If the Maximum Position is less than the Minimum Position, every time the user attempts to leave the configuration screen an error will be displayed until it is resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL; DIP switch 17 issue, Second Line Encoder
XL200

There were a couple of issues with DIP switch 17 to enable the second line encoder on some of the Closed Loop models.

  1. The SGF, MRE2, HMRE2, and MDA2 models would always report a Memory Configuration Data has changed. Memory will be cleared error when DIP switch 17 was present.

  2. The MDA2 would report DIP Switch 17 as an Invalid DIP Switch setting.

On the hardware Issue 1 hid issue 2. On the PC simulation issue 2 was present due to differences in how the PC simulation starts vs the Hardware.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Add error message to check for Coil Material in Multi-Axis
XL200

The error message "No material code programmed" displayed on a Multi-Axis machine even though the Order had a material code. After investigating, it was discovered that it was the coil that had no material. It checks the coil material because the material may have been overriden or substituted. We need to use the material properties of the actual coil not what the order calls for when settting up Axes for the machine. What it does is correct but the error message was incomplete and did not direct the user to check the coil material.

If Coil Inventory is turned OFF, the original error message is displayed.

If Coil Inventory is ON a new error message is displayed that directs the user to look at both the Order and Coil material. The reason for this is that the coil material some times getes set based on the Order material.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Extended Ascii Characters in on screen Keyboard.
XL200

In order to support data entry for EU countries that use characters in the extended ASCII range the following changes were made to the Virtual Keyboard in the XL.

  1. The Back key was moved to its traditional location next to the += key. In its place an AltGr key was added. EU keyboards use this key to switch between the traditional standard (Latin) characters and the extended characters used in their languages.
  2. When Russian is selected, the Radio buttons, Russian and English are still present for backwards usability. However, for all other languages they are replaced with buttons with the text Standard and Extended.
  3. Both the Radio Buttons and the AltGr button will switch back and forth between the Standard and Extended character sets.
  4. To avoid creating a new keyboard layout for each language, the EurKey Keyboard Layout is used when displaying the Extended character sets, with the exception of the Russian language. It uses the Windows 1521 keyboard layout.
  5. With the exception of Russian, we use the ASCII code page 1252 for our fonts. For any characters present on the EurKey layout but not in the 1252 code page font, the standard Latin character is displayed instead. There were a small handful of symbols that fell into this category.
Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Missed Shear/Punch Target error reporting
XL200

We had a bug report that the controller was displaying a Missed Shear Target error when it actually should have displayed a Missed Punch Target error. It caused considerable confusion in this particular instance until someone with more experience looked at the customers punch pattern. They had two punch targets too close together. Better error reporting may have saved some time.

The following change is being made to eliminate this issue in the future.

A single function, requiring the press Id will now be used to display this error. This function will check to see if the press Id is zero and if there are gags defined. If there are any gags defined the function will display a Missed Target Error and will display which press has the missed target error. If there are no gags and the press is press 0 a Missed Shear Target error will be displayed.

This change will result in the user always knowing which press to look at when investigating these errors. By still displaying the Missed Shear Target error when we know for sure it is a shear, we minimize the disruption that these sorts of changes sometimes cause.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; F0001 Task Error when Entering Run in Auto Crop
XL200

The problem appeared on an XL200 with DIP Switch 4 (Auto-Crop Enabled) configured.

SCN 4404 Broke this feature and created an infinite loop with no sleeps in the shear task. This prevented the input task from being able to run and monitor inputs. This caused the F0001 Input Task Watch Dog error that protects the system from these safety errors.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 4.79.02 11/2/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Add More Setups to Those Controlled by Eclipse
XL200

Added four new setups to the list of settings controlled by Eclipse.

The Setups are:

  1. Auto Delete Done Orders After
  2. Show User Data - Program Screen
  3. Show User Data - Status Screen
  4. Stagger Panel Field
  5. Set Done Items to Ready

SCN 3970 provides more specific details on Settings of this type.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; 0x8F00000E Task Error
XL200

The instance of the task error that is being fixed occurred on a V5 XL200CL and can only occur on the V5 XL200CL. However, the fix impacts all Models, V4, V5 Open and Closed Loop.

The Error is caused when a new timer interrupt has occurred without the prior timer interrupt receiving its return cyclical data from the DSP/ARM. The error was only possible on the CL because the CL is the only project that allows tasks to run between sending cyclical data and receiving it.

There was one command, receiving 16bits of data, that ran outside of the cyclical interrupts. That command was executing with interrupts disabled when the system info screen was displayed or when Eclipse initiated the ‘vE’ command. Just by luck it was sometimes receiving the Word that the ARM sends to initiate the IRQ for the return cyclical data. Reading this data cleared the interrupt.

Interrupts were Off when the ARM filled in its word so the 386 did not see the IRQ. The 386 requested its word but got the word the ARM already had put there. When that word was read the IRQ got cleared and the 386 never saw it, leaving the word the 386 asked for behind. On the V5, all of the ARM communication needs to be in the cyclical interrupts or his can happen. The fix impacts common software for all Models of Closed Loop and Open Loop.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
Pathfinder; Revert Gripper Changes for Right Now
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

A lot of changes were made to the gripper offsets based on a missunderstading. Additional parameters and logic were created to make the offsets work under these incorrect ideas. They have been taken out for the time being

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3325 11/24/2021
Pathfinder; New Manual Shear Input and Error Message
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Added Error Message 378 Illegal Pedal Press During Manual Shear

Added Input 116 Manual Shear Parked Limit

For more information on how they are used refer to:

SCN 4565 - Pathfinder; New Manual Shear Input and Error Message

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3325 11/24/2021
Pathfinder; Bug Fixes for Exceptions
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

Some changes were made that would not create uneeded exception errors. Mainly based around doing an error check on a created function instead of a variable.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3325 11/24/2021
Pathfinder; Added Open Loop Test Mode Feature
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder V5.

This change was to add the Open Loop Test Mode check box to the jog screens of Pathfinder. If checked then the system will send down to the 5226 controller that the control algorithm needs to be changed to open loop. This will only happen if the configuration has this option set up and if not then nothing will happen. If setup for this additional option the user can move machine axes in open loop that are usually setup in closed loop.

For more information refer to:

SCN 4559 - 5226; Added Open Loop Test Mode Logic

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.07.3325 11/24/2021
XL2CL; Die Reference moving in the same direction despite home switch state.
XL200

A customer complained that the Die Reference mode was moving the die forward no matter what the state of the home sensor. In their case an important clue was that the die position was a large negative number, -21480.860".

A code review of the die reference function revealed the problem. The forward target was 1000.0" and the reverse target was -1000.0". Both of those targets would have resulted in a forward die motion when compared to the current die position.

The code was modified to prevent this condition by calculating the forward and reverse targets using the current die position.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Option to Scrap Remaining Coil
XL200

A customer pointed out a missing option when unloading a coil. When we see a Tail-Out input it can be for one of four reasons.

  1. The coil was removed because there are no more orders for it.
  2. It was completely used up.
  3. It was just backed out temporarily
  4. The remaining coil is un-usable and must be scrapped out.

We had options to handle 1-3 but we were missing a way to report option 4.

The unload coil screen now has a button for "Remaining Coil is Scrap". It becomes enabled if the Eclipse UART version is 3.59 or higher. Otherwise it is disabled because the customers version of Eclipse is not able to support the new feature.

If enabled, pressing the button opens a new dialog window that shows the user the coil number and the total footage used on the coil. It also has prompts to allow a scrap code to be entered and the remaining footage to be entered. If the customer has configured Eclipse properly with the initial footage of the coil and they are using Coil Validation, the controller will be able to calculate and pre-populate the remaining footage of the coil. If the initial footage was not provided or the controller calculates there is negative footage remaining it will pre-populate zero instead.

The dialog window has a "Scrap the Coil" button and a "Cancel" button.

Pressing the "Scrap the Coil" button reports the remainder as scrap using the footage and scrap code provided by the operator.

Pressing the "Cancel" button returns back to the original Unload Current Coil window.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
5226; Allow Full Automatic Using Pedal Once Clamped
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On double folder machines the 5226 controller has two main operations for making the machine make the part. Full Automatic is when the operator has gripped onto the material and is out of harm’s way. The activation of this mode will make the part in fast speed until done, a manipulation is needed or something has caused production to stop. Semi-Automatic mode is when the operator is moving the axes by holding a pedal and could be in harm’s way. In this mode the machine will move in safe speed and pause if the operator lets go of the pedal. There used to be a perk of Semi-Automatic in which the operator could move the clamp with the pedal until clamped and then leave the hazard area to put the bend operation into Full Automatic. This was taken out at some point when implementing the FoldGuard system to work with the light fence.

The solution was to allow the user to either press the pedal to keep the machine in Semi-Auto or press the Full Automatic button to put into Full Automatic once clamped. This allows the operator to decide which mode would be best for different situations.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.04
5226; Added Open Loop Test Mode Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

In a closed loop system the motion of an axis is based on calculated set points of where it should be in real life. If the real life feedback is not matching up with the set point positions then the control will be adjusted with a PID system to try and match the actual position with the set points. A problem that can come from this though is if the user is attempting to move the axis on a system that has not been set up and tuned or had some work done to it. In these cases the loop could be trying to keep up with set points that just don't match up with reality and might cause the axis to move out of control which could damage the machine.

The new feature to handle these situations is Open Loop Test Mode. The operator can choose this option in the Pathfinder jog screen. If an axis has its Additional Option for Open Loop Test Mode set to true then once set in Pathfinder the axis will move with open loop control. Since open loop follows a ramp based on parameters and does not adjust based on a calculated move there is less danger of the machine going out of control during a move. Once the axis has been confirmed to be under control the user can uncheck the Open Loop Test Mode in Pathfinder and the axis will move under closed loop control again.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.04
5223,5225,5226; Bug Fix For First Part Only When Using Bending Beam Sensor
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5224 controller/Bending Beam Sensor is used to help calculate a spring back for a given material and angle. The user has a couple of options for when this test will happen to get the spring back for a step. They are All Parts Auto and First Part Only. All Parts Auto will get a new calculation for every bend on every part. First Part Auto will get a calculation for every bend, but then save that value and use it on every part after that depending on which bend it is. There seemed to be a bug with First Part Auto though because after the first part it would still perform a measurement on every part after the first one. Not only was it doing the measurement, the target angle seemed to be getting smaller and smaller processing through the parts.

The bug ended up being that once the first part has successfully gotten a good spring back for each bend of the part, once the new part is started the sensor was not being disabled. On top of that other variables were cleared which explains why it kept getting worse and worse. The fix was to make sure the bending beam sensor is disabled once the first part is done if Pathfinder has it set up for First Part Only.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.04
5226; Bug Fix on Axis Conflict Check When Moving Clamp Down
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A change was made to check axis conflicts before moving the clamp down with a pedal. For more information refer to:

SCN 4541 - 5226; Check Axis Conflicts When Moving Clamp Down With Pedal

It turns out there was a bug in the implementation. In the double folder run task where this change happened has the clamp being told to start it's move before checking the conflicts. This ends up setting certain things that are then checked in the conflicts which causes errors that shouldn't happen.

The fix was to make sure the clamp axis conflicts are checked before telling the clamp to start it's move.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.04
5226; Added Additional Options Field to Axis Configuration Command
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Pathfinder and the 522X series of motion controllers have a communication spec. that is used for setting up the machine and keeping the user in touch with what is going on in the controller through the UI. One of these commands in the spec. is a setup command for what an axis will be composed of. Things like feedback type, if there is analog control, what ports are being used, etc.

As a way of having better ability to add some new features to an axis a new field was added to this command. A byte has been added for Additional Options into the Command Axis Configuration 0x40C1. Each bit can be set for a new feature that can be handled by the controller.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.04
5226; Added Manual Shear Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A shear is an additional option on some folding machines that can be used to cut material at certain lengths. This type of axis is usually automatically controlled. Some shears on machines are now setup to be used manually by an operator. This is done by having the shear locked into a position on top of the machine instead of on the left or right parallel to the clamp surface. When the operator wants to use the shear they can bring it down from the top and latch it onto the clamp surface. It can then be moved back and forth by the operator manually to cut the material.

To handle this the 5226 controller needs to be aware of I/O to allow the Pathfinder system to run shear operations. If the machine configuration does not have Shear Forward and Shear Reverse outputs to control the shear then the 5226 will know it's a manually shear. This will put the shear operation into a separate control. Once in a manual shear operation the controller will move all axes(besides the shear) like normal, but there will be no need to press a pedal once everything has stopped moving. Once everything has stopped the user can remove the manual shear off its home limit which tells the 5226 that the operator has started the manual shear process. The user is now allowed to use the shear as needed and once done the user will put the shear back on the home limit and a press of the pedal will complete the operation to allow the user to move on to the next operation. If the pedal is pressed before the shear has returned to its home limit or before the shear ever left its home limit the controller will halt and throw error 378 Illegal Pedal Press During Manual Shear.

If the input Manual Shear Parked Position has been added to the configuration then additional features can be used. Once defined the same basic logic is still used, but if the user puts the shear on the Parked Limit and the next step is a shear operation, the controller will allow the process to continue. This is mainly used in slitter mode or one step when there are going to be multiple shear steps. This allows the user to not have to return the shear to the home position every time, so they can keep moving the shear back and forth for every cut programmed into Pathfinder.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.04
5226; Correct Absolute Position Referencing for Indra Drive Cs
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On first startup of the Indra Drive Cs the absolute encoder has no frame of reference to where it should say it's absolute position is which causes the drive to throw an error and not allow movement. To set the absolute position and get rid of the error the 5226 controller attempted to use the homing bit in the control word used in the Ethernet/IP communication. This turned out to be not what the drive is looking for. After some research it turned out that there is a parameter called Set Absolute Position Procedure Command. This is what the drive wants to see manipulated to set the absolute position.

The 5226 will now check the InReference bit of the status word at all times and if not set then the command will be sent to set the absolute position. The controller will then automatically clear the error and movement will be allowed at this time.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.04
XL2; Custom List not properly validating text entry.
XL200

The Text Entry Custom List records were not properly validating the length of the text string entry.

The length of the text string entry is not supposed to exceed the maximum number of characters specified in Eclipse. Entering more characters than allowed was not generating an error as it should.

When validating against a user field, the entered text string must match the user field.

When not validating against a user field, the text string must be less than or equal to the maximum number of characters specified in the Custom List Record.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Added PLC Quality Audit Trigger(s) to the MODBUS feature.
XL200

Through our MODBUS PLC integration feature, the ability for a PLC to initiate Quality Audit Triggers has been added.

The PLC must be configured as documented in our XL200 PLC Interface document. The PLC must know the Custom List ID (Return Value) of the Quality Audit that it wishes to trigger. It must then follow the sequence outlined in the XL200 PLC Interface document to use that ID to trigger the Quality Audit.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Run Output sticking ON
XL200

The bug was experienced on an XL200-MRE2 with a linear DA configured for the Shear. The Run output would stick on if a Tail-Out occurred during the acceleration before the Shear Press turned ON. Tolerance Mode was set to Cut and Stop.

New code was added in SCN 4435 (released in V4.72.00) to handshake the shear operation with a PLC. It was preventing the Shear Press cycle from starting if the Run Mode was Halted. The code entered a loop that requires the press cycle to be active and to complete in order to exit. The press cycle was requested and assumed to have started but this new feature mistakenly prevented it and then the shear task was stuck in the loop with no way out. Since it was stuck, the Run Task was waiting forever for it to finish up and that is why the Run output remained on.

As a safety measure, code was added to this loop to give it a way out if the press is not active and the Run Mode halts. It should never happen but it is there just in case some other bug, present or future, creates the same condition.

The actual bug in the code exists in the Open Loop as well. It is unknown what its symptoms might be if encountered.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.79.01 9/24/2021
XL2CL 4.79.01 9/24/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Missing Hole Count Display on Hole Count Controller.
XL200

SCN 4544 allowed a Hole Count Controller to operate in Hole Correction Mode when the Hole Mode Select is in Standard Mode. This change caused a bug in the Display Header (Top Three Lines Display). The Hole Count display no longer appeared when in Hole Count mode. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.79.01 9/24/2021
XL2OL 4.79.01 9/24/2021
XL2OL; F0001 Task Error with Front Shear and Coil End Point enabled.
XL200

Coil End Point and the Front Shear feature are intended to be mutually exclusive. If you have a Front Shear you don't need to enable the Coil End Point because the Front Shear implements an automated Coil End Point.

However, a customer had them both enabled and they were getting F0001 Task errors, which indicates something is preventing Inputs from being scanned. This is an indication of an infinite loop that does not give up CPU time for the input task to run..

The exact path of the infinite loop is unknown. What is known is that the Coil End Point was placing the controller into Coast To Stop mode at the same time as it was stopping for the Front Shear operation prompts.

To ensure Feed to Stop press tasks cannot use all of the CPU time in this mode the Feed to Stop function now tests for Coast to Stop mode. If the controller is already in Coast to Stop mode, the function will sleep until the controller has switched to Halted before proceeding.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.79.00 9/15/2021
XL2CL 4.79.00 9/15/2021
XL2; Added Delay After Shear Mode setup
XL200

A request was made to make retrofitting Beck controllers on Viper systems easier.

These systems initiate Rollformer and Feeder motion with a Run signal. They create part separation through the Rollformer with a Delay After Shear like feature that slows the Feeder. We cannot use our Run signal to initiate material motion. That function belongs to the material motion outputs.

This requires us to provide three states of motion in the run mode for the Feeder, Stopped, Slow and Fast. If the Feeder is in Slow or Fast, the Rollformer on the Viper needs to be in motion.

The chosen solution was to allow the Delay After Shear feature to use the Slow speed to create the part separation rather than Stopped. This setup is available when our open loop motion outputs are provided to control material motion.

A new setup has been created called Delay After Shear Mode. It has two settings, Stop and Slow. It defaults to Stop, which causes Delay After Shear to Stop for the delay as it did before this change. Slow causes Delay After Shear to Slow for the delay.

One exception to this is if there is a Bundle Stop Delay that is active at the same time. If the part in question initiates the Bundle Stop, Bundle Stop takes precedence and the controller will stop for the delay instead.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.79.00 9/15/2021
XL2CL 4.79.00 9/15/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL; Disable Hole Correction for Continuous Press operation
XL200

Hole Correction is not possible on a Continuous Press controller. The controller must know how long a feed is before it starts, which is incompatible with Hole Correction.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.79.00 9/15/2021
XL2; Added Phantom Shear Mode for Feed to Stop controllers.
XL200

Sometimes machines don't have a physical shear. A downstream system cuts the part. The controller has always stopped for a shear whether there was one or not in order to do all of the bookkeeping that required the material to be stopped. This is annoying to customers and is inefficient.

Sometimes the customer is able to hide the shear operation in some other operation. Sometimes this is not possible or convenient.

Recent changes have allowed the controller to stitch parts by omitting shears without stopping for a shear operation. This gave us the ability to configure the controller, using a setup parameter, to do what has always been referred to as phantom shears. A phantom shear is basically the same as omitting a shear but still counting the part as complete.

A new setup called Phantom Shear Mode has been added to allow a customer to tell us that there is no shear so don't stop for the operation. It has two settings, No and Yes. It defaults to No. When set to Yes, all shears will be treated as Phantom.

Due to competing requirements and business priorities the setup is not available in Continuous Press mode when multiple presses are enabled. In continuous press mode a Phantom Shear will force the press into single stroke mode during the feed that contains the phantom shear. These limitations may be removed in the future when business priorities and time allow.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.79.00 9/15/2021
XL2CL 4.79.00 9/15/2021
XL2; Ensure Print Dwell and Print reaction setups are enabled for the Print Trigger Driver.
XL200

The Print Trigger Driver had the Print Dwell setting but it became invisible when the driver was configured for Non-Stop operation.

The Print Reaction time was not active. This is a generic driver that can be used for either Stopping or Non-Stopping printers. It needed the Print Reaction Time for accuracy in Non-Stop applications.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.78.01 9/8/2021
XL2CL 4.78.01 9/8/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Enable Hole Correction mode on additional models including Hole Count models.
XL200

Hole Correction was enabled on the following Models:

  1. XL202CLF, XL206CLF, XL212CLF
  2. XL202HCLF, XL206HCLF, XL212HCLF
  3. XL200HCL
  4. XL244HCL
  5. XL200H
  6. XL202H, XL206H, XL212H

This is the first time that Hole Detection and Hole Correction have been available in the same controller. Hole Correction is available when a Hole Detect Controller (Hole Mode Select) is in Standard Mode rather than Count Hole Mode.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.78.00 8/31/2021
XL2CL 4.78.00 8/31/2021
XL2; Added Hole Correction Mode setup parameter.
XL200

Hole Correction must work slightly differently if the XL is placing the holes that it then corrects on vs detecting and correcting on holes than another control system is placing.

A new setup parameter called Hole Correction Mode has been added to allow the operation to configured.

The setup has two settings, Synchronous and Asynchronous.

Select Synchronous if the holes are being placed by the XL using the same encoder as the cutoff.

Select Asynchronous if the holes are placed by another control system using a separate encoder.

When Asynchronous is selected, the controller compares the measured length of the parts (based on hole locations) to the expected length of the parts calculates a Hole Correction factor to adjust the targets that is adds to the queue. This adjustment must occur to prevent the XL targets from drifting out of Hole Tolerance with respect to the holes it is correcting on.

The Hole Correction Diagnostic screen was modified to show the current setting for Hole Correction Mode.

Asynchronous mode requires an Initial Hole in order to initialize the part queue. The controller will shear on this hole to start the process. If there is no hole present when the queue is initialized the controller will halt and display a Missing Initial Correction Hole error. This hole must be located in the material beyond the leading edge of the coil. If a hole is detected prior to the strip making it beyond the sensor an Invalid Initial Correction Hole error will be displayed and the controller will be halted.

The initial hole must be detected before entering the Run Mode. This will require the operator to clear the Queue and then jog the hole through the sensor before placing the controller into run.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.78.00 8/31/2021
XL2CL 4.78.00 8/31/2021
XL2; Total Mem and Used bug in Windows Simulation System Screen
XL200

The Total Memory and Used Memory totals were incorrect in the Windows simulation after the SCN 4520 - Simulated Battery Backed Ram change.

Record Memory was being included in one of the segments that get added to the Total Mem and Total Used row. That resulted in it being counted more than once. Moving Records into its own segment on Windows and Adjusting how the total memory is calculated in Windows resolved the issue.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.78.00 8/31/2021
XL2CL 4.78.00 8/31/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
5226; Check Axis Conflicts When Moving Clamp Down With Pedal
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 controller has a function used for checking axis conflicts that allow multiple axes to move at the same time and protect the machine if something ends up or is out of place. These conflicts are mostly based on parameters and states of I/O. Each axis checks it's conflicts each time it wants to initiate a move. Once all conflicts all cleared the axis is allowed to move. If the axis is the last one standing and still has a conflict the controller will error out and drop out of run. Turns out there was one spot this is not the case. When using a pedal to move the clamp down the conflict test does not occur. This is not a huge problem because in this case all axes should already have finished their move into tolerance.

The enhancement though is to still do the conflict testing in this case. This allows for other error conditions to be checked and gives at least one more check just in case other axes did not end up where they were supposed to.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.03 8/19/2021
XL2; B0002 and Other Task Errors
XL200

This change is related to SCN 4356 where B0002 Task Errors would occur with Asynchronous printing.

SCN 4356 prevented the Task Error with Asynchronous Printing by Testing for the suspected error condition.

This SCN prevents the Error condition from occurring in the first case.

The ultimate cause, which also affects Bundle Ticket printing, was that Items and Orders were able to be permanently deleted even though they were still referenced by the Part Printer Queue or the Bundle Ticket Cutlist. There was a bug in the tests intended to catch and prevent the problem.

The error would occur if any item other than the first item was referenced by either Queue. When an order or item is deleted it is hidden from view and only actually deleted when safe to do so. There are two different methods of navigating records. One method includes the hidden records and one does not.

The test for records being in the queue was using the correct method when checking for the first item record but the wrong one when looking for the next records.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.02 8/18/2021
XL2CL 4.77.02 8/18/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
Connection status views account for exceptions returned by controllers
Pathfinder

The FOLDBUS spec provides for a variety of exception responses to be returned by controllers in the event of certain errors. While Pathfinder has long captures this information, it did little more than log it.

Now the fact that the controller returned an exception code is indicated on the Connection Status Summary icon (bottom left, near the shutdown button) and details of the exception code are provided in the Connection Status Details view (accessed by clicking on said icon).

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.06.3310 8/19/2021
Regression Fix where recent PFPC releases could not talk to 5223 and 5225s
Pathfinder

A previous change to the 0x0083 command (Set Handling Operation) included new fields, and assumed all blackbox software could handle them. That was not the case, only the 5226 is capable of using the updated command. Pathfinder was updated to check the Blackbox model and build, and only send these values if the Blackbox is known to be able to handle them.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.06.3310 8/19/2021
5226; Added Gripper Backstop Must Retract Error Message
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers. On some double folder machines the backstop of the backgauge is adjustable to be able to take advantage of the grippers. The biggest advantage is that it can get the material closer to the zero point without having to change the position of the backgauge. This allows the user to get closer to the clamp with the material gripped, which means a different form of backstop(finger or the grippers closed for gauging) does not need to be used. For more information refer to:

SCN 4356 - 5226; Added Gripper Backstop Logic

The problem with the logic though was that the clamp was allowed to move down when the backstops were out and close to the clamp. This means the clamp could hit and damage the backstops. To ensure this doesn't happen an error message has been created to halt the machine and let the user know what they are doing is wrong. This error message is 377 Gripper Backstop Must Be Retracted. If the backgauge is within 5 inches of the clamp the error will be thrown.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.03 8/19/2021
XL2; B0002 Task Error when using Asynchronous Printing.
XL200

Two separate customers have reported issues with B0002 Task errors when using Asynchronous printing. The error is generated when using an item pointer out of the Asynchronous Print Queue to get access to a print message from Eclipse. All of the data (Task Error Data) we have captured indicates that that the Item pointer or its Parent (Order) pointer may be bad. The B0002 error is generated when the ID bits in a record are tested and the pointer is outside of the address range allowed for records. In this case the address is above the records address space ending address.

One of the customers reports that they have other lines using the same print driver that don't have the same issue. Both customers are using different print drivers. The combination of these two clues indicate that it is not a Driver specific problem, it is an issue with the common Asynchronous Print Queue code.

A code review of the queue code showed a non-standard use of a ring buffer using a complicated three index system. This code was refactored to use traditional Input and Output indexes. To eliminate accidental dangling pointers using an invalid index, all item pointers are now zeroed (Nulled) out once the message for the item has been triggered. The code treats a NULL pointer as a request for an empty print message.

Using a Belt and Suspenders approach, the Item pointer and its Parent pointer are both tested to ensure that they point at a valid Item and Order before they are used. If an entry in the ring buffer is found to have an invalid pointer, the part for that entry will receive an empty print message instead of being allowed to continue and cause a task error to be generated later on.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.01 8/16/2021
XL2CL 4.77.01 8/16/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Missed Hole Correction Error preventing Run Mode in Non-Hole Correction mode.
XL200

In SCN 4533 the Missed Hole Correction error condition was still being tested when not in Hole Correction mode. This caused the controller to halt and report an error on every part. This has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.01 8/16/2021
XL2CL 4.77.01 8/16/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Added a Hole Correction Diagnostic Screen.
XL200

The new screen is displayed if the controller is in Hole Correction mode.

The new screen currently shows three fields.

  1. The controllers correction Factor is displayed.
  2. The Hole Correction is displayed.
  3. The Offset is displayed.

The Hole Correction will be 100% if the Shear targets being Queued using the controllers corrected resolution (Correction Factor). On Shear only applications where the controller is detecting holes put in by another system, the controller will have to correct the targets it queues to prevent them from drifting outside of the Hole Tolerance. It is assumed that the system placing the holes will be placing them correctly. In this case the Hole Correction is the percentage that the Targets are being adjusted by when being added to the Queue. This is a correction of the controllers correction factor.

The Offset is the difference between where the XL has its target queued and where the holes are being detected.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2CL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2; Added Missed Hole Correction error message.
XL200

For diagnostic purposes and to prevent long runs of uncorrected parts a new error message was added. If the controller is configured for hole correction and a hole is not detected within the Hole Tolerance of the shear, a Missing Hole Correction error will be displayed and the line will be halted.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2CL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2; Fixed Hole Correction simulation for shear only applications.
XL200

Hole Correction on a line where the detected holes are put in by a system that uses a different encoder than the cutoff has additional considerations. The corrected resolution of the XL must be adjusted to match the resolution detected using the distance between sensed holes. If we don't, the XL's shear targets will drift forever with respect to the detected holes.

To test this condition on the PC simulation requires a different simulation. This simulation did not start the first hole correctly.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2; Fix Short Part and Very Short Part Resolutions on SPD controller
XL200

In order for the Short Part and Very Short Part comparisons to work properly on an SPD controller the correct output resolution must be used. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2CL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2; Fix Broken Delay After Shear, added Average Stitched Blank Size parameter
XL200

SCN 4516 Broke the Delay After Shear feature. SCN 4516 to enable the Stitch Mode when omitting Shears resulted in a reorganization of the stitching code. This change was required to allow multiple items to be stitched together using the omission of shears.

Prior changes had been made to support stitching on a Break and Hump line, SCN 4418 and SCN 4419.

In order to support all of the Delay after Shear options and Brake and Hump the length of the uncut Blank must be known. The changes required for SCN 4516 combined with all of the other changes made, and all of the new options created by SCN4516 made it an extensive problem to know what the final stitched blank size will be at the start of the blank, which is required. A new setup parameter was created so that a blank size can be provided for stitched parts. It is called Average Stitched Blank Size. This is the blank size that will be used for Stitched parts when considering Delay After Shear and the Short Part and Very Short Part outputs used in Brake and Hump applications.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2CL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL200SPD; Enabled Hole Correction feature on XL200SPD controller.
XL200

Enabled the Hole Correction feature on the XL200SPD Open Loop controller.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2OL; Hole Detect and Correct accuracy on Open Loop Shear Only controllers.
XL200

At times controllers can have a problem of alternating between short and long parts as the missing material from a short part gets added to the next part, making the next part more likely to be long. Even if the next part cuts perfectly in the right place it will be long because the prior part was cut in the wrong place, short.

On shear only controllers a method used to counteract this is to reset the encoder count on every shear to match the expected shear target from the part queue. This gives each part a fresh start. Each part has an equal chance to be accurate without the prior parts accuracy impacting it.

This technique is only valid if there are no other queue targets for other presses that would be negatively impacted. It is also not valid if you have a hole queue of detected holes that have been captured based on the current encoder count. Adjusting the encoder count effectively changes where those holes have been detected. This oversight has now been corrected.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2; XL270 Add Steps to Test Part and Coil Trim Cut
XL200

On a tile machine the material must have forming steps placed in it in order for the material to feed all the way through the forming presses through the shear.

Scrap pieces, like a test part, have never had a pattern applied to them. This made the Test part feature, added after the fact, useless on a Tile Machine.

The Coil Trim Cut feature was always intended to cut a small strip off of the leading edge of the first part after a coil change, it was never intended to be large enough to require a Tile Step. However, we have discovered that the first several feet of a newly threaded coil on some Tile Machines have some wavy visual defects in them. On these machines they prefer that the Coil Trim Cut feature remove this first few feet. The length of the scrap piece requires it to have forming steps to make it all the way through the presses.

The solution to both problems was to modify our current part calculation and part queueing functions to accept override parameters that specify the length and type of part that is being dealt with.

To prevent issues on legacy installations a new setup parameter called Coil Trim Cut Mode was added to the XL270. It has two settings, No Steps and With Steps. The setting defaults to No Steps. Customers who want to use longer Coil Trim Cuts can select the With Steps option so that their Coil Trim Cut parts will have steps.

In both cases, Test Part and Coil Trim Cut, the pattern that defines the steps comes from the item currently being filled into the part queue.

The combination of part length, tool locations and the size of the formed step can result in some part lengths that cannot be produced without part damage that comes from a step forming process that draws a previously formed step backwards into the lower shear blade. The controller has run time code that tests for this condition. in the case of a Coil Trim Cut or Test part it may not be obvious that it is not the programmed part length that is at fault. For this reason two new error messages were added, one for Test Part and One for Coil Trim Cut. The Errors are Coil Trim Cut Failure and Test Part Failure. Both errors have instructions to reference the prior error message for the cause. For cases when the part length is causing a problem it is hoped that the user will understand that it is the Test Part or Coil Trim Cut length that is at fault rather than the part length in the programmed items.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2CL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
5226; Add Command Acknowledgement for Kinetix 300 Ethernet/IP
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

There was a bug in the communication between the 5226 controller and the Indra Drive CS where the controller was able to send a command before the drive was done processing the previous command. For more information on the fix refer to:

SCN 4345 - Add Command Value Acknowledgement for Indra Drive CS Ethernet/IP

The problem is that the Kinetix 300 Ethernet/IP driver did not get this change which caused the algorithm for sending commands to freeze in one state. This would cause a move timeout and not let the user complete the step. This has now been implemented into the Kinetix 300 driver in the 5226 as well.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.03 8/19/2021
Print PDFs using pdfium
Eclipse

The pdf printing has been blurry, especially on Zebra printers. We now print using the pdfium library from the chrmium project.

Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.16.2556 7/22/2021
Add material editing and other fixes
Eclipse

Improvements

  • Add ability to edit material details

Bug Fixes

  • Fixed regression when calculating bundles in certain conditions.
  • Only require material weight when splitting by weight.
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Pro 5.0.16.2549 7/20/2021
XL2; Quality Audit Trigger on Shift Change
XL200

We have added a new trigger type for Quality Audits. We can now trigger on a shift change.

The XL controller does not know anything about shifts. It relies on Eclipse to send a shift change command at the end of each shift. This new trigger relies on Eclipse being running and the XL being powered up and communicating at the end of shift.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2CL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL; Delay After Shear not working
XL200

The Delay After Shear feature got broken in the XL220OL while implementing SCN 4496. This has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL220OL 4.75.01 7/13/2021
FlashDoctor; Enable the XL200 Version 5 Application Type selection
AMS Tools

The code and the radio button selection for the XL200 Version 5 Application Type were added in a prior SCN (4519). There was an issue at the time with programming a V5 file. It was time critical to get another change completed and released so the button was disabled.

This SCN enables the button and also fixed the issue with Version 5 XL200 files. The issue was that the selection was not being used to properly set the Application Type. This has been resolved and Flash Doctor is now ready to be used on V5 XL200 Application Files.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.39 12/8/2023
XL2; Simulated Battery Backed Ram in Windows Simulation
XL200

The Windows simulation now has the capability to simulate Battery Backed Ram. This allows the simulation to function just like a controller that remembers its memory between startups.

The use of command Line arguments to set the Model and the Switch setting are required. If the two command line arguments are used the simulation will save its memory records and its setups to two binary files, BSSMem.bin and RECMem.bin. The two files are created/updated when the simulation is shutdown in one of the three methods.

  1. The main controller display window is closed with the windows close, X, button.
  2. The debug window is closed with the windows close, X, button.
  3. The debugger Q command is used to shut the simulation down.

These two files are valid, just like the memory in the controller, only for the simulation version, Switch setting and Model that the files.

If the simulation is started with the Switch and Model command line arguments it will look for the two files. If they are present, the simulation will attempt to use them. If the files were created using a different software version, Switch or Model, just like the controller does, the simulation will start up from a cleared memory state. If the same Software, Switch and Model are used the memory will be retained and the simulation will start up in the same state it was in when shutdown.

To allow for multiple simulations to run at the same time with Eclipse we have the port command line. If the port command line is used, the filenames of the files storing memory change slightly. In this case the port number gets incorporated in the file name. For example, if the port number is 1234 the file names will be BSS1234Mem.bin and Rec1234Mem.bin.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL2CL 4.77.00 8/11/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
Flashdoctor; Preparation for the V5 XL200
AMS Tools

Preparations were made to begin supporting the new V5 XL200 projects. Testing has not been completed. The option is visible but not enabled until testing is complete and the projects are ready.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.39 12/8/2023
FlashDoctor; Disabled all DSP Mapping and Importing functions
AMS Tools

Flash Doctor is a production tool, not an engineering tool. Production has no need to import or map DSP S-Record files into a released FMF file. This capability was disabled to prevent access and confusion.

Engineering is able to do the mapping using the IntelBin console application.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.39 12/8/2023
FlashDoctor; Modified for new V4 and V5 XL200 mapping
AMS Tools

The address mapping for the V4 XL200 controller changed to be consistent with the mapping required for the new V5 XL200 project. This required changes to the fdc mapping files. A new file was added specifically for v4 and v5 rather than sharing the file for v3.73 and above.

V4.76.00 and higher require this new FlashDocotor update.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.39 12/8/2023
XL2; Enable Stitch Mode parameter for Omitting Shears stitch algorithm.
XL200

When using the omitting shears algorithm the Stitch Mode parameter was not active. In this algorithm the controller effectively functioned in Item Separate mode.

The Stitch Mode setup will now be available and active when Omitting Shears. It will default to Item Separate in order to stay backwards compatible rather than the normal default of Bundle Separate.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.76.00 6/21/2021
XL2CL 4.76.00 6/21/2021
XL2CL; Missing Lag on Die Return 2 setup
XL200

The Lag on Die Return setup was missing for Die 2. The end result was that it was effectively defaulted to NO all of the time.

This has been rectified.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.74.02 6/18/2021
XL2; Blue Screen Initialization and Text Display
XL200

The operating system has the ability to initialize the blue screen and display text. The application can use the display once the PEG graphics software is running.

This change adds two functions to the operating system that will allow the application to use and display text on a blue console style screen before the time when the graphics software is running.

The Logger class was also modified to use these functions so that printf style methods can be used to display text on the screen.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2OL 4.76.00 6/21/2021
XL2CL 4.74.02 6/18/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Remap Flash and speed Flash Programming
XL200

This change involves remapping the V4 Flash to match the new V5 mapping.

In addition, Flash programming will become faster because we will no longer be storing the PIC Keyboard application in Flash. It will never be used because even if we were able to update the PIC on the main display, we could not update remote displays.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2OL 4.76.00 6/21/2021
XL2CL 4.76.00 6/21/2021
XL220OL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220CL 4.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL: Selective Closed Loop, Errors on Coil Tail In.
XL200

SCN 4049 created the Selective Closed Loop feature. It describes how the feature works.

Two bugs were found in the feature, both related to Coil Tail In.

  1. The original change included the ability to switch from Closed Loop to Open Loop on the fly during a Coil Tail Out. However, the code failed to prevent switching from Open Loop to Closed Loop on the fly, which would only happen on a Tail In. The Tail It causes a jump in the Command signal due to the loop error that accumulates while in Open Loop. A large enough loop error results in a Drive Not Responding Error. The solution was to force the controller to stay in Open Loop until the material stops and the motor is disabled. Switching to Closed Loop only occurs when the material is stationary while enabling the motor.

  2. The motor Set-Point was not being set correctly during a Tail In. This resulted in a Slip Test Error because the Selective Closed Loop performs a Slip Test by making sure the loop error does not become excessively large. The incorrect Set-Point was resulting in loop errors large enough to trigger the Slip Test failure.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.76.00 6/21/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
HWTest; DSP Updates and Rebuild
XL200

The DSP application was rebuilt and tested.

The HWTest DSP shares some common code with the standard XL200 applications and the V5 Hardware test that utilizes an ARM processor instead of the DSP.

Over the years changes have been made to common code for the XL200 applications and more recently due to changes for the ARM processor. The DSP application for Hardware test has not been rebuilt in quite some time. Some stub functions, namely for the ethernet port had to be written in order for the application to compile. Otherwise everything built and seems to function.

XL2CL; Command Disturbances when Lag is switched ON or OFF
XL200

SCN 3575 and SCN 4426 provide history and context for this change.

With the "Lag on Die Return" set to NO there have been disturbances in the command signal (Analog) when switching the Lag ON and OFF.

The command signal is made up of proportional, integral, Lag and Feed Forward components. If any of those components are suddenly removed or added, they will cause a disturbance (Jump) in the signal. When the Lag is turned ON or OFF during the Die Cycle, this is what happens. These disturbances are especially bad if they result in a jump in the opposite direction than the signal is already trending.

The solution is to switch the Lag ON and OFF when the Lag and Feed Forward components are as close to zero as possible and when any necessary jump will be in the same direction as the signal is already trending.

The motion profile (Set-point) code knows when it wants the Lag to switch ON and OFF. The Loop code knows when it is safest to do the switch. The Loop code will now delay the switch until the best time to do so.

When switching the Lag ON, the Loop will wait until the Filtered Set-point velocity is at or above zero.

When switching the Lag OFF the Loop will wait until the sum of the Acceleration Feed Forward and the Lag are less than 0.5% of Maximum Analog. This point in time happens during the deceleration of the die before it comes to a stop. The Set-point code now requests the switch at the start of the deceleration ramp.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.74.01 6/1/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2CL; Die Test ran only 9999 cycles before stopping
XL200

The Die Test would run a maximum of 9999 cycles before stopping.

9999 cycles is usually enough but during some testing we want to leave it running longer.

The issue was that the Die Test was keeping track of parts that it filled into the queue. It would only fill 9999 parts, which is what the hidden Die Test, test part is programmed to. No production is tracked against this part, keeping track of how many items for this part were filled into the queue was not necessary.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.74.01 6/1/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2CL; Drive Not Responding errors and dips in command signal in Windows Simulation
XL200

In the Windows Simulation Die Accelerators would sometimes have dips in command voltage or report Drive Not Responding errors. This was tracked down to a simulation only issue.

In the windows simulation the press operations were being logged to the console window to make watching the simulation easier. These debug prints were sometimes causing the press task not to run and generate new Set-points but the timer interrupts, encoder simulation and Loop still did run. This caused a dip in the command signal as the Loop tried to follow the instantaneous stop in the Set-points and then a Drive Not Responding when the Set-points instantly started again.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.74.01 6/1/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
5226; Turn Off Pressure Relief Output When Stopping an Axis With No Hardware Output
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some hydraulic axes using that were using the pressure relief during a move had a problem stopping quickly if the pressure relief stayed on during the coast to stop process of the move algorithm. The fix to this problem was to turn off the pressure relief output once the axis entered the coast to stop state. This is so far only happening for axes with no analog control.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.03 8/19/2021
5226; Add All Changes to Make a Shear Stop Faster to the Discrete I/O Algorithm
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 controller has two separate open loop algorithms used for controlling axes. The main factor for which algorithm an axis will use is whether or not there is analog speed control set up on the machine for that axis. If not then the axis is most likely using only I/O for movement.

The analog controlled algorithm had some changes made to make a shear stop faster. For more information refer to:

SCN 4467 - 5226; Make a Speed Controlled Shear Stop Faster

The problem is that all of the changes put into the analog algorithm could also be very useful in the discrete I/O algorithm. Therefore these changes were also added for discrete I/O controlled shears.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.03 8/19/2021
5226; Made Clamp Pressure Reached Input an Interrupt
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

There was a bug in the I/O port handling section of the 5226 controller where it made interrupts unusable. For reference refer to:

SCN 4488 5226; I/O Port Handling Bug Fixes

The band-aid to get around this for most inputs were to make them polled instead of interrupts. One of these inputs to become polled was the Clamp Pressure Reached input. This made the clamp drive down further than needed to say the clamp reached pressure.

Making the Clamp Pressure Reached input an interrupt made the clamp stop much faster when trying to reach pressure on a system that had a pressure switch for the clamp.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.03 8/19/2021
5226; Make Shear Limit Switches Directional for Stopping
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Shear limit switches are used differently than most other axes' limit switches. Usually limit switches are put into a place that is slightly past the usual range of motion because it's trying to stop the axis before it damages the machine. Shear limit switches on the other hand are in the range of motion because shears don't usually have a true feedback. So a lot of the times the user will just have the shear go from its home limit to its forward limit and then back to the home limit. The problem is these limits were not set up for directional stopping. So if the shear moved past one of the limits and the input turned off the shear will stop again when the input turns on when coming back.

The fix to this was to look at the direction the shear was moving. If the shear is moving in the direction that matches the direction the switch is supposed to be then stop the shear. If not then let the shear keep moving.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.03 8/19/2021
XL2CL; Increase Stack size on Standard Die Accelerator Shear Task.
XL200

This change relates to the XL2CL project and standard single hit die accelerators.

Due to the discovery of the stack size issue addressed in SCN 4502, the available stack size was investigated for the standard die accelerator shear task. It was discovered to only have about 15% free space. Just to be safe, the stack size was increased by 20% to head off any issues that may be occurring under conditions I did not cover in my test. This also provides some head room for future software development.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2CL; Software Issues on MHA controllers.
XL200

The windows simulation shuts down when running an MHA controller. The cause is that the press task runs out of stack space. The symptoms could be all sorts of issues. It is not entirely predictable. In the Windows Simulation it was causing the simulation to shutdown as the die was returning home wile in the run mode.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.73.03 5/21/2021
XL2CL; On XL244CL Enable up to gag 10 with a DIP Switch
XL200

Originally the XL244CL supported gags up to Gag 6. The addition of DIP Switch 14 enabled two additional gags, up to Gag 8.

We are now supporting up to four additional gags above original with the addition of DIP switch 15.

DIP switch 14 and 15 are mutually Exclusive. Only one can be ON at a time.

If more than two presses are configured, Gag 10 and other gags, counting down, will be replaced by the required configured press outputs.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
5226; Bug Fix for Not Allowing Movement Beyond a Limit Switch
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A change was made to the logic of moving past a limit switch with limits disabled. This is no longer allowed. For more information refer to:

SCN 4491 - 5226; Movement After Limit Switch Not Allowed With Limits Disabled

A bug was created in this SCN where instead of not allowing an axis to not move past its limit switches when limits were disabled, it allowed an axis to move past its limit switches when limits were enabled.

This has been fixed and axes are not allowed to move past limit switches when limits are enabled or disabled.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.02 5/20/2021
5226; Additional Pause Mode for Hem Smashes
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Pause on Step Mode was a feature created for double folder machines to allow the user to choose if the clamp would pause after reaching pressure before moving on with the operation. For more information refer to:

SCN 4415 - 5226; Pause on Step Mode Logic Pathfinder

It was brought to our attention that a different type of pause mode would be helpful for hem smashes. In this case instead of pausing the machine when pressure is reached on a hem smash the clamp will raise on its own and pause. This is necessary in cases where the material has slipped out of the grippers. The user can then un-grip the material, re-position, grip on material, and move on to the next step instead of having to raise the clamp, un-grip to reposition, grip and reach full pressure again before moving to the next step.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.02 5/20/2021
5226; Throw Hardware Feedback Error for Slave Controller
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 controller has a safety check to make sure that SSI encoders are working as intended. If an error bit is detected then the controller will halt the machine and throw a Hardware Feedback error to essentially lock out the machine until the encoder problem is investigated. The bug with this setup is that the master controller was the only controller testing for this error bit. The master controller only updated encoder feedback from the slave controller instead of also checking for problems.

The fix to this bug was to also check for an error in the encoder when the encoder is located on the slave controller. This will detect a problem with the encoder, the encoder cable and the slave controller.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.02 5/20/2021
XL2CL; XL244CL Invalid DIP Switch Config Clobbered Stacker Output.
XL200

DIP Switch 4,5,6,8,14 all ON, which is Switch = 8376, was invalid but was being allowed.

The configuration resulted in four presses and six gags.

In this configuration the Press 3 boost output was Clobbering the Stacker output. The configuration was fixed by eliminating one gag output. This shifts up the Press Up and Press Boost outputs up by one so that the Stacker output and the last press no longer attempt to use the same output.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2; Add Short Part and Very Short Part outputs and delays to Open Loop Controllers
XL200

The Close Loop Brake and Hump controllers already have had the Short and Very Short outputs and Delay after Shear times. We have started to do some Open Loop brake and hump style lines and these features have been requested.

This change adds the Setups, Outputs and the Delays to the Open Loop controller. The outputs require Expanded IO (PLC/MODBUS IO). All of the setups to control the two features require the PLC (I) option in order to be visible in the Open Loop.

Short Part is on output 33. Very Short Part is on output 34.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
Allow max gripper offset and min gripper offset to be set to the same value.
Pathfinder

Previous changes had included validation that required max gripper offset to be larger than minimum gripper offset. It became apparent that allowing them to be set to the same value is useful, and the validation has been relaxed to allow it.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.05.3289 5/17/2021
Pathfinder PC CS 5.01.06.3290 5/17/2021
XL2; Conditional assembly added for ARM processor
XL200

Added conditional assembly to allow ARM processor to share the main functional portions of the code with the DSP processor.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2; IP Address Format Change for Rev H 5386 Controllers
XL200

The ARM ethernet stack on the Rev H 5386 board assumes a different byte order than the DSP.

The most convenient place to handle it was in the Ethernet Setups, common the V4 and V5 XL2 software.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2; Edits to Front Shear Kerf not Used while in Blanking Mode.
XL200

While in Blanking mode there was a bug in the code that prevented edits to the Front Shear Kerf from being used. They would not get used until the next transition from Standard Mode to Blanking Mode.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.02 5/6/2021
XL2CL 4.73.02 5/6/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
5226; Movement After Limit Switch Not Allowed With Limits Disabled
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Limit switches are put on machines to make sure an axis does not go too far forward or too far reverse since movement past that switch could damage the machine. On the 5226 controller if the axis hits one of its limit switches the axis will be stopped. Further movement in that direction when limits are enabled is not allowed. However if limits were disabled the controller would allow further movement in that direction after the axis has been stopped. This was generally seen as an option for troubleshooting by a tech on a startup for the machine. Since certain customers are given administrator access and can disable limits and move the axis past its limit switch it was decided that axes are not allowed to move past their limit switch regardless of limits being enabled or disabled.

5226; Not Turning Off Second Drive's Forward Outputs Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On some machines there are more than one drive to control certain axes. When this is the case the additional drive will need its own I/O and/or analog signals to move the axes defined to use that drive. To know which drive the axis is using an enum is associated with that axis. This allows the controller to know which I/O to use when it’s time for that axis to move. A bug occurred where the controller was using the wrong enum type for turning on the second drives forward outputs. This meant any axis defined to use the second drive would not see any movement forward.

The fix to this bug was to make sure the correct enum is looked at when trying to move an axis forward when the second drive is being used.

5226; Added Hydraulic Oil Level Sensor Axis and Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On most hydraulic machines the tank that holds the fluid will have some sort of feature that tells you how much fluid is in the tank. Usually an external gauge that will show the fluid level. This is needed mostly to know if the fluid in the tank is reaching too low of a level. If the fluid is too low and the machine is being run it can damage the pump motor.

Some tanks actually have an internal sensor that can give feedback and allow a system to monitor the level of the fluid. The Hydraulic Oil Level Sensor axis was added to the 5226 controller to do just that. This allows the controller to not turn on the pump or not move another hydraulicly controlled axis if the hydraulic oil level is too low.

5226; I/O Port Handling Bug Fixes
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On the 5226 controller there is an ARM processor that is used for interrupts. They are broken down into separate ports with a collection of pins used for the interrupts. These ports have separate functions to install and disable the ports at a given time. There was a certain bug when installing one of the ports where it was swapping the setup of the pin for when the interrupt would happen. Because of the swap it was causing some inputs set up as interrupts to do a double call on the input function associated with that input. This would cause a logic confusion and not make the input logically work the first time it was toggled. The logic would straigthen itself after that, but the damage would already be done. Another bug was that the structure for one of the ports was using the name of another port therefore changing data for a different port.

These changes have been made and the 5226 inputs set up as interrupts seem to be working as intended.

Pathfinder; Update SchechtlSigmatek305 Configuration
Pathfinder

The SchechtlSigmatek305 configuration was created to have Pathfinder V5 communicate with a 5226 board so it could control a Schecthl machine with a Sigmatek 305. The 5226 is needed instead of the usual drop in replacement 5223 board because of hardware needed.

On the second install using this new configuration some new information about the clamp limits and referencing were found. When referencing with the 5226 controls the clamp tries to find the home switch that is usually found in a place where the clamp is closed. When attempting to do this it seemed like the clamp really had to drive through to what seemed like a unnecessary clamped position. This made it seem like this switch was more a position limit switch. When asking around it was found out that the previous Schecthl controls would reference to the upper limit switch.

The change then was made to make the home limit input a lower clamp limit input and make the referencing direction up. So when referencing the clamp will now move up and use the upper limit switch as its home switch. When not referencing that switch will be used as a position limit switch and stop the clamp.

Another change made was to remove all of the closed loop generic parameters for the Backgauge since its algorithm is open loop.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.05.3289 5/17/2021
Pathfinder PC CS 5.01.06.3290 5/17/2021
XL2; Code restructuring to implement changes required for the Rev H 5386
XL200

Code is being moved around and restructured on the 386 CPU to account for differences in the ARM and the DSP co-processors.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
Pathfinder; Update SASV2 base configuration
Pathfinder
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.05.3289 5/17/2021
Pathfinder PC CS 5.01.06.3290 5/17/2021
Pathfinder; Eclipse Pro Integrated User Accounts
Pathfinder

Pathfinder now supports getting it's list of users from an Eclipse Pro installation. With this change there are now two types of Pathfinder user accounts: local and Pro. Local accounts (which traditionally have been ADMINISTRATOR, OPERATOR, and DEMO) remain unchanged. Pro accounts are created in Eclipse Pro, and can be set to one of three roles (Administrator, Operator, None).

To use this feature Pathfinder will need the Pro url adding to it's settings. It will then connect to Pro, but will not be able to access users (or any other data) until a Pro Administrator has authorized them to do so (which simply means said user clicks the "Allow" button that is presented in Pro on a list of connected Pathfinders). Pro users (whom have been granted the correct roles) will be able to log into connected Pathfinders.

Additionally, Pathfinders connected in this way will be reporting a very light initial version of production data. Just enough data to fill out some basic Pro explorers.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.04.3270 4/16/2021
Pathfinder; Update 5226 firmware package to v4.03.02.
Pathfinder

Update 5226 firmware package to v4.03.02.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.04.3270 4/16/2021
Pathfinder; Add configuration base for Jorns Twin Pro Closed Loop V2
Pathfinder

Add configuration base for Jorns Twin Pro Closed Loop V2.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.04.3270 4/16/2021
XL2; Sending Line Speed to PLC via MODBUS
XL200

A customer requested that we be able to send the XL Line Speed to the PLC via MODBUS. They are unable to add an Analog card to their PLC to get this information via analog.

This feature sends the speed as an integer in inches per 100 seconds. This is easily converted to inches per second and provides two decimal places of resolution.

The update rate can also be specified by setting a field in the MODBUS configuration structure. This field indicates how many times per second to update the field. Care must be taken by the customer to only update it as often as required to prevent excessive slowing of other MODBUS features.

Explicit details on how to use configure the feature in MODBUS can be found in the XL200 Series PLC Interface Spec.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
FlashWizard; Added independent Settings for Parity, Stop Bits and Data Bits
XL200

Prior to this change the Primary and Universal Programmer ports shared the same Parity, Stop Bit and Data Bits Setting. A change to one affected the other.

Technically, if we allow them to be set, they should be independent to avoid confusion. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.38 7/13/2021
FlashWizard; Fix Stop Bits setting in the Port Settings screen.
AMS Tools

After a recent windows update the Stop Bits setting began to default to 1.5 rather than the setting stored in the registry. This was easy to miss when opening the screen.

In addition, the code operated perfectly when debugging the application. It only failed when running an EXE configured for Release. The issue was resolved by explicity initializing the bound variable rather than relying on the UpdateData method to do it in the OnInitDialog method of the window.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.38 7/13/2021
Pathfinder; Improved gripper offset calculation when gripping around a hem
Pathfinder

The calculation of gripper offset has been improved when gripping around a hem. First, the new parameter Hem Flange No Grip Zone defines a length of a hem that the gripper must avoid. A gripper is allowed to partially grip on a hem (if this value is small enough). A large value will disallow gripping on the hem whatsoever. If this parameter value is larger than the hem itself, it will be ignored, allowing the gripper to postiion right up next to, but not on, the hem.

Another new parameter, Gripper Air Space Offset, augments the existing gripper shape data. This parameter defines the distance from the inside edge (as in, opposite the nose) of the gripper jaws to the backgauge. In other words, Max Gripper Offset minus Gripper Air Space Offset would give the width of the gripper "pads".

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.04.3270 4/16/2021
XL2OL; Missed Shear Error when stitching parts
XL200

The reported error occurred on an XL200I controller with switch setting 102.

The Following settings were used: Min Auto Stitch Length - 48.000" Max Auto Stitch Length - 65.000" Minimum Slow Distance 10.000" Shear and Punch Dwells - 1.0sec

Programmed 4 pieces @ 16.000"

On the PC simulation the controller would stop with a memory access error caused by using a NULL Pointer. This type of error is not detected on the Controller Hardware. The results of using a NULL pointer are not entirely predictable. It is very likely in the customers case it ultimately resulted in a Missed Shear Error.

There was a bug in the code that only occurred if more than two parts were stitched together. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.01 3/31/2021
XL2CL 4.73.01 3/31/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2; Confuring the Use Coil Inventory setup to Remote hid the Allow Coil Override setting
XL200

The Allow Coil Override setup was unintentionally being hidden when Allow Coil Inventory was configured to "Remote". This bug was introduced when the "Remote" setting was added Allow Coil Inventory. It has now been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2; Quality Audit Trigger name truncation
XL200

Quality Audit Triggers and other custom lists allow 40 characters for the length of the name. These lists are displayed in table format in the Production Data screen and in the case of QA Triggers, in a dialog window. If the name is too long or uses lots of the wider characters like W, the name may not have room to display entirely.

This change addresses this issue for QA Triggers when they are presented in the dialog window. Instead of using a single line prompt to display the name it was changes to a multi-line Text Box that allows text wrapping. The entire name is now able to display when presented in this way.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2; Added proportionally spaced punching feature.
XL200

This feature is very similar to Even Spaced Punching except the spacing is calculated based on a desired spacing and a distance between two points on the part. The spacing will vary based on part length.

This feature requires an Eclipse Update to support UART Command version 3.56 or higher. The controller will report an error on the first attempt at reading the status indicating an updated Eclipse version is required.

Three new Operation References were added.

  1. Proportional Min. This reference will attempt to space Holes greater than or equal to the programmed offset.
  2. Proportional Max. This reference will attempt to space Holes less than or equal to the programmed offset.
  3. Proportional Limit. This reference will place an upper or lower limit on the calculated spacing that will be allowed depending on which of the two Proportional Spacing references was used. If the limit is not appropriately above or below the selected Proportional Spacing reference an error will be displayed that references which pattern is at fault. If the calculated spacing is not within the selected spacing reference and the limit an error that references the pattern and part length will be displayed.

The programming method of Proportional Spacing is very similar to the Even Spacing program method. All operations must contain the same tool, shape or macro ID. The table below shows the required order. With the exception of the Proportional Max or Min operations, all of the others are optional and can be removed from the pattern. If both a Proportional Max and a Proportional Min are present in the pattern, they will be treated as independent operations. All of the rules will be applied to each of them independently.

Tool Reference Offset nnn Leading Edge 12.000 nnn Proportional Min 12.000 nnn Proportional Limit 20.000 nnn Trailing Edge 12.000

The example above will place one hole 12.000 from the leading edge and one 12 from the trailing edge. It will calculate how many holes will be required to space holes at least 12.000 apart and then it will calculate the required spacing. If the spacing is less than or equal to 20.000, it will make the part.

If the Leading Edge reference is removed, the leading edge of the part will be used to calculate the number of holes and the spacing. The first hole will be at the calculated spacing distance from the leading edge.

If the Trailing Edge reference is removed, the trailing edge of the part will be used to calculate the number of holes and the spacing. The last hole will be at the calculated spacing distance from the trailing edge.

If the Proportional Limit reference is removed, no limit will be placed on the calculated spacing, min or max, depending on the Proportional Spacing reference selected.

If a Proportional Max referenced were used in the above example, the Proportional Limit would need to be less than 12.000 or removed. The calculated spacing would be less than or equal to 12.000.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
HWTest; Fixed Clock Memory Test in 5386 HWTest
XL200

The 5386 Rev D and higher have a Real Time Clock Chip that also has Persistent Memory. There is a test that tests all of the memory but the test would not run without the controller resetting. The reason for this is that the Watch Dog Timer for the processor is also in this chip. It is not possible to reset the timer while at the same time writing the persistent memory. The code was writing too much data at one time in the test. The solution was to write the data in smaller chunks, allowing time for the operating system to have access to reset the Watch Dog Timer.

Model Version Released
5.01.00 11/26/2021
HWTest; Added a repeated SERCOS Memory Test to the User Interface.
XL200

The SERCOS Tests already had a single memory test that executed at the start of the functional tests. The Ability to run this test in a loop has now been added.

Model Version Released
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2; Rev H 5386 Hardware Ready Timeout Detection
XL200

External Memory and other devices must provide a ready signal to the 80386 processor when the processor attempts to read or write them. Unless interrupted, the processor will wait forever if a ready signal is not given.

In order to detect hardware or software conditions that cause this the Rev H 5386 board has a CPLD chip with logic to detect the error and trigger an interrupt. The interrupt is IRQ 9.

When IRQ 9 occurs the controller will display a Task Error 8F00xxxx where xxxx is the status register from the CPLD that contains information that will help engineering determine which device or software is responsible for the timeout.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2; IO Names can now be requested from the Simulation
XL200

IO Names can now be requested from the Simulation to allow a more user friendly IO interface to be developed. Details on the interface are defined in the XL200/Diagnostics OneNote.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2; Windows Simulation Command Line Bug
XL200

The "simcon" command line argument to set the port for the simulation console failed to parse the correct port. The default port, 4002, was used instead.

This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
5226; Make a Speed Controlled Shear Stop Faster
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some shears can be speed controlled through analog to determine how fast the shear can move. Customers were complaining about their shears not stopping as fast as they did with the old controllers. When looking at diagnostics it looked like the analog signal was dropping to zero right when the limit switch was hit. So it seemed like there was nothing we could do about it and the shear is stopping like it did before. After a couple of months though it was brought up that this problem has been seen on other machines, but they just moved the limit switch to deal with the problem. After more research into what could be the difference there was a bug found in the loop algorithm that the analog is indeed dropping to zero, but the pressure relief output was staying on for a certain amount of time because of a velocity check. Since this is part of what controls movement of the shear it needed to be turned off right away to.

The solution to this is if the axis is time based don't do the same velocity check and turn off the pressure relief right away. It also turns out that the shear limits were setup to be polled which added another add on of time to stopping. Setting these to interrupts seemed to make it stop like old controls. A settling time was also set in place to not have the shear instantly say the move is done when the limit is seen. This at least gives a little bit of buffer before another axis tries to move.

5226; Added New Features to Handling Operations
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

There is an advanced setting called Load Assist that when enabled makes Handling Operations have more options. These options are where the clamp will raise to or where to move the backgauge to. If it’s a Load step the user can set it to have a loading table or the bending beam assist in loading the material onto the machine. There is now an Unload step at the end of the part that will allow the user to have axes move to certain locations to Unload the material before moving on to the Load step. To fully enhance these steps more options needed to be added to make the operators life easier. The new options are:

Initial Clamp Open Height: This new option when set to a non-zero value will raise the clamp to this height before moving on to the Clamp Open Position. This allows users to have the clamp move to a position that will not damage certain parts. The user can then open the grippers to remove the material. Once the part is clear they can press the Next Step Pedal to move on to the rest of the manipulation step.

Backgauge Kickout Offset: This works in unison with the Initial Clamp Open Height. If set to non-zero the backgauge will move this amount forward or back once the clamp reaches the Initial Clamp Open Height. With this movement the backgauge can move the part out of danger and then let the operator open the grippers.

Upper Retract Position: Some operators like to have the upper retract out the way when getting the material out of the machine. The user can set this to whatever distance they feel comfortable with.

5226; Home Limit In Unexpected State Error Message
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Sometimes the home limits of an axis are not used for referencing, but confirming an axis is at a physical location. This is useful for having to check axis move conflicts and especially useful for double folder machines. On double folders an axis can be moved to a location that if a different axis moved during that time it would damage the machine. So having a physical confirmation can help if an axis somehow lost its correct feedback.

One problem with this is that it shared the same axis conflict error message that the feedback check was doing. So a move could end and have another axis try to move, but the home limit turn on a split second late. This can throw off troubleshooting because it looks like everything is correct to the naked eye. To pinpoint what needs to be troubleshot the Home Limit in Unexpected State error was created. With this error it lets the user know that the home limit was not in a correct on or off state at a time another axis wanted to move.

5226; Added Multi-Transitional Safety Stop Input and Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

It was assumed that the safety stop switch on folding machines would stay on from the safety stop height down to a clamped position. It has been discovered from new safety stop handling that Schechtl models will turn off the switch before reaching a clamped state. Instead of having companies adjust the machines to keep the switch on for the entire move down, a new input function has been added to Schechtl machines to allow the safety switch to turn off before clamping. The new multi-transition safety stop input function allows the machines switch to turn off when it is below half the safety height. For more information refer to:

SCN 2901 - Multi-Transition Safety Stop Input Function Logic and Revised Safety Stop Logic

Up until recently no 5226 board was used on a Schecthl install because the 5223 is a drop in replacement for the Stigmatek controller. The problem is that the machine in question was has a different setup of using 2 separate drives which require more I/O that the 5223 does not have. In previous cases a 5225 was used instead, but apparently we could not get that controller quick enough. So a 5226 was used instead which at the time only seemed that a Pathfinder V5 model configuration was needed. Turns out the Multi-Transitional Safety input needed to be implemented into the 5226. This was accomplished and can now be used on future installs.

XL2; 5386 Rev H Heartbeat LED Operation.
XL200

The 5386 Rev H hardware has a new heartbeat LED labeled i86. This LED blinks at a 1 second rate to indicate the 386 processor is still running.

The 386 uses output P3.6 to control the LED. Prior uses of P3.6 had to be found and eliminated for REV H boards.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2; 5386 Rev H System Reset, Watch Dog and IO Safety Changes
XL200

Rev F and earlier 5386 hardware use an external Watch Dog chip that resets the 386 processor and the DSP in case the 386 processor locks up.

Rev F and earlier 5386 hardware has a signal line P1.3 that resets the DSP, which makes the IO on the 5387 board safe in cases where a Task Error or some other unsafe condition is detected by the software.

On Rev H hardware, resetting the ARM, to make the IO safe during a task error will also reset the 386, which is undesirable.

So here are the changes.

  1. P1.3, which is connected to the ~MR line will now be monitored by the ARM. The Watch Dog Chip is also connected to this line. The 386 can either drive this pin low or let the Watch Dog Chip do it to reset the system. .
  2. The 386 will rely on the ARM to make the IO safe if the 386 fails to send the cyclical IO data to it. On a system reset the ARM will NOT have any IO ON or configured. The IO states are contained within the cyclical data. Once the cyclical data starts being received, if the ARM then fails to receive the expected data it will go into a safe mode and reset the 5387 board to make the IO safe.
  3. Undo, SCN 4290 which removed the Watch Dog operation for Rev G boards.
  4. While programming the Boot with the Universal Programmer the ~MR line is driven low. Unless the ARM knows that the Universal Programmer is being used, it will reset the 386 and thwart the programming. The ARM is able to indirectly monitor the FWP line that is driven low by the JTAG connector from the Universal Programmer. The Keyboard Pic drives this line low to signal Flash Programming mode desired. The Keyboard Pic is now placed in reset when entering Flash Program mode so that it will release the FWP line. This may be unnecessary since the Watch Dog is disabled during Flash Programming Mode but it makes the operation of the FWP line consistent between entering Flash Program mode via the Keypad or through the debug P command.

Notes!!!! In order to make the WatchDog system and code work the same way as the Ref F board it would be preferable for the ARM to be able to hold the ~MR line low while the reset occurs. The Watch Dog Chip has special logic to continue holding the line low for 100msec after it is released externally. The ARM would wait for the Watch Dog to release the line before bringing the 386 out of reset. This would synchronize the Watch Dog and 386, preventing the 386 from trying to talk to the Watch Dog until it is ready to accept communication. It would also prevent the watch dog from running before the 386 is ready keep the Watch Dog happy. It would make the Watch Dog effectively reset the system the same way as the Ref F where the 386 would start after the 100msec low enforced by the WatchDog. Since we can't do that, it appears as if the Boot16 code attempts to stop the watch dog nearly as soon as it boots. It is able to see if the Watch Dog is responding and retries many times if it doesn't. The worst that will happen is that the ARM will reboot the system again if the Watch Dog fails

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2; Rev D and Higher Flash Programming Improvements
XL200

These changes are in the Boot Code. In order for these changes to be present the Boot must be updated to V2.05 or Higher.

Most of these changes were made by Jim with some changes made by me. They were made in response to issues with erasing and programming on the Rev H hardware, though there should not have been a difference.

Programming Improvements.

  1. Check to see if a word location is already programmed before trying to program it. If it is already programmed correctly it must be due to a communication timeout retry. If it is not programmed correctly or not erased report a programming error back to FlashWizard.
  2. Check for programming completion using the method specified in the Flash Part Spec sheet by doing two reads in a row.
  3. The commands were doubled, duplicated in the command word with no explanation. This did not match the chip documentation. The Rev C hardware was presumably programming two chips at the same time. The High and Low Bytes may have been going to two different chips. We only have one Flash chip in the Rev D and Higher that operates in a Word Mode. Removed the duplication for clarity.

Erasing Improvements

  1. Removed an Unprotect command. This command is not part of the erase process and should never have been in the code.
  2. Added an erased test on the first word or each segment as a quick double check of erasure. Not a comprehensive test but simple double check.
  3. The same command duplication that was removed from programming was removed in erasing, though erasing already had most of this removed.
Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2OL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
PF: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Removed backgauge home limit from BradburyV2 configuration
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.03.3150 1/20/2021
PF: Duplicate Log Entries
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where log entries would be recorded twice in the system log file. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.03.3150 1/20/2021
PF: Increase Retained Log File Data
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to retain more log file data. The size limit for each system log file has been increased to 4MB, and the number of retained archived log files has been increased to 10.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.03.3150 1/20/2021
PF: Logging Config Not in Build Output
Pathfinder

A bug was introduced to Pathfinder in a recent maintenance release such that the logging configuration file was not being copied to the build output. This caused logging to stop working on fresh software installations. Upgraded installations were unaffected. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.03.3150 1/20/2021
PF: Unhandled NullReferenceException thrown by HandleManipulationChanges
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where an unhandled NullReferenceException could be thrown by HandleManipulationChanges when opening a profile. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.03.3150 1/20/2021
XL2CL; Invalid SERCOS Settings caused 80090270 Task Error.
XL200

Persistent Memory, which is where the SERCOS settings are stored, had corrupted SERCOS settings. The Cycle Time setting was invalid, resulting in an invalid setting for the XL operating system timer. This is what caused the 80090270 task error to occur.

The controller will now test the settings on power up and configure them to valid default values if they are found to be out of range.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
FlashWizard; Additional JTAG Hacks for Rev E and Higher 5386 Boards.

See SCN 4164.

The universal programmer uses the JTAG port to program the boot on 5386 boards and to perform other tests.

The software in the universal programmer was not erasing both boot segments in flash for any 5386 board rev greater than D. D and higher use the same flash erase algorithm. Prior to erasing flash, FlashWizard was modified to lie to the programmer, telling it that these boards are Rev D boards.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.38 7/13/2021
FlashWizard; Failure to program if bad application present.
XL200

When programming an XL200, FlashWizard attempts to read the application, version, bitcodes and a file name out of the controller. It uses this to compare against the file that is being programmed to see if an authorization code is required.

There was an issue if any of the data lengths for these fields were zero. In most cases they shouldn't be, unless engineering has been working on a controller or locations of fields are getting remapped. The boot code doesn't like to be asked to read 0 bytes of memory. It failed to respond and Flashwizard stopped the Flash Programming process, preventing the controller from being programmed.

FlashWizard has been modified to treat this condition as if no Application is in memory. It may require an authorization code but at least the controller will be programmable.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.38 7/13/2021
FlashWizard; Failed to Re-Open Primary Port after checking Universal Programmer version
AMS Tools

SCN 4449 was implemented to allow the Primary Port and the Universal Programmer Port to be configured to the same comm port. One option was overlooked in the change.

When checking the Universal Programmer port the Primary port was closed and never re-opened. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.36 1/11/2021
XL2; Press Information Screen. Press and Gag, Local, Remote and Total fields.
XL200

The Press Information screen now displays the number of Local and Remote presses and gags. It also displays the total number of presses and gags.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2; Expanded Gag Headers in Press Information Screen
XL200

The Press Information diagnostic screen displays the state of the Expanded Gag IO. The display headers of each gag byte were supposed to display the Gag Id range contained within the byte. If more than one press was configured, this failed to be the case.

The gag number range in the header of each gag byte now represent the Gag Id numbers as are programmed into Tool records.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL2CL 4.73.00 3/4/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
FlashWizard; Allow Primary and Universal Programming box to use the same Comm Port
AMS Tools

Originally the Primary (XL200 Flash Programming and debugging) and the Universal Programming ports were expected to be two different Comm ports. It was assumed that repair and production would have two dedicated comm ports, one for each purpose.

Currently repair is reconfiguring the comm port settings every time they have to use the universal programming box because they only have one serial port to use.

This change allows both functions to be configured to use the same port. All repair or production will need to do is plug the Universal Programming box in, just prior to trying to use it. Re-configuring ports will no longer be necessary.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.35 1/8/2021
XL2; Missing MODBUS Expanded Gags
XL200

A customer complained that they would be missing gags on the first part when entering Run Mode. The gags were Expanded Gags that get sent to a PLC via MODBUS.

The customer had PLC strip data records that showed the gag would come on briefly at the appropriate time and then briefly at the end of the press cycle. Rewiring one of the affected gags to use a hardwired gag eliminated the problem for that gag.

The diagnostic data screen on the XL showed no blips on the affected gags.

A code review showed that there was a race condition when sending the Expanded Gags to the PLC. There was no Mutex protecting the time when the data was copied into the command buffer and when it was sent. This allowed a lower priority task (B) make a copy of the data but get interrupted by a higher priority task (A) before it could send it. Task A was able to modify the master data and send its copy. When task B was allowed to send its copy, task A's edits were overwritten in the PLC. If a third task (C, A or B) needed to send gags, since the master data was correct, it would fix the issue caused by the race condition. This led to the affected gags to flicker on and off at the beginning and the end of the press cycle.

We have no way to duplicate the timing of the customers machine. Something about the timing is making this race condition occur on the first part after entering run. This bug fix will most likely fix it but there is no way to absolutely know for sure until it is tried on that machine.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.72.05 1/7/2021
XL2CL 4.72.05 1/7/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2; 81000002 and 81000004 Task Errors
XL200

The 81000002 and 81000004 task errors get reported if an integer to string or integer to hex string function is called and the caller specifies to allow zero characters to be used for the conversion.

A customer mistakenly caused this by specifying zero characters to print a bundle number. This shut down their entire factory since they rely on this one machine for all of their production.

Rather than shut the whole controller down for a simple mistake, the decision was made to do what the function arguments said to do and use zero characters, in other words, set the string to zero length or add zero characters depending on if it was a copy or add string function call.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2CL 4.72.04 12/18/2020
XL2OL 4.72.04 12/18/2020
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
PF: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Updated JouanelPTS31 and JouanelPTL31 configurations to include parameter changes and new geometries
  • Added new TensolH300 configuration
  • Added Parameter 311 - Clamp Positioning Tolerance - to JornsFlex, JornsRabco, and JornsSingleBendFullRetrofitV2OpenLoop configurations
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.02.3142 12/16/2020
PF: User Axis Override Not Persisted
Pathfinder

A bugfix has been made to Pathfinder that corrects an issue with axis overrides in user overrides files not being persisted after a user makes parameter changes.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.02.3142 12/16/2020
PF: Enhanced Diagnostic Sequence Data
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder to add more detail to the sequence information that gets published to diagnostics each time a profile is sent to the controller. This is to make it easier to use the sequence data for the purpose of optimizing sequencer settings.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.02.3142 12/16/2020
PF: Clamp Pressure Not Set Properly in Non-Graphical View
Pathfinder

A bugfix has been made to Pathfinder that corrects an issue where the material-defined clamp pressure would not be populated in operations by default in the non-graphical profile editor.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.02.3142 12/16/2020
PF: Correct German Translation
Pathfinder

The German translation for the "E-Stopped" status has been corrected.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.02.3142 12/16/2020
PF: Change Primary Key of PathfinderUser Table
Pathfinder

A change has been made to make the "UserName" column the primary key for the "PathfinderUser" table.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.02.3142 12/16/2020
PF: Upgrade Reactive Extensions
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder to remove the homegrown reactive extensions implementation and replace its usages with references to the official reactive extensions implementation.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.02.3142 12/16/2020
PF: Reintroduce Source Property in Diagnostics Data
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder to reintroduce the Source property in diagnostic datablocks.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.02.3142 12/16/2020
XL2; F0001 Task Error with Hole Correction enabled
XL200

The Hole correction had bug that was able to cause the Input Task Watch Dog test to fail and report an F0001 Task Error.

If a hole was detected within the Hole Tolerance and on the exact encoder count of the shear target, an infinite loop having no sleeps within the Shear Task would occur. This would use all of the CPU time not allowing the Input Task to run and the Input Task Watch Dog would trigger.

This seems improbable but we had lots of task error dumps and other evidence that all pointed to the Hole Correction logic being the cause. This condition was the only path that could be found that would have caused an infinite loop. All of the Task Error dumps showed that the Shear task was in code involved in this loop.

Time will tell if it resolves the issue for the customer having the Task Errors.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.72.03 12/9/2020
XL2CL 4.72.03 12/9/2020
XL2; SPD Controller Halts after each part and generates new Bundle Id.
XL200

A customer has an SPD controller that sometimes halts after each part and generates a new Bundle ID. Production records indicated it was halting for an out of orders condition. A new ID is generated on an Order change or when it runs out of orders.

The customer sent their settings and it was determined that they are configured to use the Hole Correction feature.

On a shear only controller, which they have, the next part is queued 10 inches before the current part gets cut. In the simulation using their settings I was able to determine that the controller was using the wrong resolution (input vs output) for this test and it was queueing 0.56" inches before the current part got cut. If the line runs fast enough the run task may not have time to queue the next part.

A second issue was discovered. The Hole Correction feature can cause the part to get cut before the queue expects it. The Hole Tolerance needed to be added to the 10 inches so that the even if the target got adjusted to be cut sooner, the queue still had at least 10 inches before the cut to add the next part.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.72.02 12/1/2020
XL2CL 4.72.02 12/1/2020
XL2; Stopping Shear Handshake Timeout bug.
XL200

SCN 4435 added the ability for a PLC to control when the shear fires on a Stopping Shear line. The XL lets the PLC know when the shear has fired and it has 500msec to acknowledge that is has seen it or this Stopping Shear Handshake Timeout error will occur. However, it should not occur if the feature is not enabled. There was a bug that caused the error to occur even when the feature was disabled. This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.72.01 11/30/2020
XL2CL 4.72.01 11/30/2020
XL220OL 4.72.01 11/30/2020
XL220CL 4.72.01 11/30/2020
XL2; Add Stopping Shear PLC Handshake.
XL200

A request was made to add a PLC handshake for stopping shear operations. This will allow a PLC to control the production rate of the line. The PLC must give permission for every shear while in the Run Mode (Automatic). Full documentation on how the Handshaking works is documented in the MODBUS spec.

When waiting for the OK to Shear from the PLC the controller will display "STANDBY" in the run status.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL2CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL220OL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL220CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
PF: Restrict Reference Encoder Button to 5223/5225
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder to restrict the visibility of the "Reference Encoder" button such that it will only be visible when a 5223 or 5225 controller is connected.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.01.3094 11/11/2020
PF: Reference Encoder Button Displayed for Backgauge
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where the "Reference Encoder" button in the calibration screen would be displayed for the backgauge axis. This button should only appear for the bending beam, clamping beam, or radius adjustment axes when the appropriate reference output is present. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.01.3094 11/11/2020
PF: Unhandled Exception Thrown by GetPresenter
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where an unhandled exception could be thrown by PresenterFactory.GetPresenter if a message dialog was displayed prior to the main dialog being visible. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
PF: Publish Pathfinder Version and Machine Type to Diagnostics
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to publish the current running Pathfinder version and the currently selected machine type to diagnostics each time Pathfinder starts up.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
PF: Publish More Profile Info to Diagnostics
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to publish profile feature information and the selected geometry with the operation details that get logged to diagnostics each time a profile is sent to the controller.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
PF: Parameters for Pause on Step Default Behavior
Pathfinder

New parameters have been added to Pathfinder to control the default behavior for enabling the Pause on Step function for each operation in a graphical profile. Parameter 756 - Pause on Hem Closes (Default) - determines whether the Pause on Step function will be enabled by default on all hem close operations. Parameter 757 - Pause After Loading Step (Default) - determines whether the Pause on Step function will be enabled by default on the step following a loading step. Parameter 758 - Pause After Manipulation Steps (Default) - determines whether the Pause on Step function will be enabled by default following each manipulation step (turn, flip, rotate).

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
XL2CL; Negative command spike in Acceleration when using SERCOS.
XL200

When using SERCOS with a Die Accelerator there was a negative blip in the command profile at the start of the acceleration ramp. This blip did not exist when using analog.

The challenge for SERCOS is the motor encoder feedback is one sample old and the new command takes effect one sample delayed. The calculations attempting to account for this had a bug in them. They were attempting to make adjustments to the set-point ramp and when the ramp started.

The Set-Point ramp is now identical between SERCOS and analog. All adjustments for the old feedback and delayed command are now made in the loop. The error calculations in the loop are all made against the old Set-point which is also one sample old. The Lag Integral calculations that are removing the error will push the actual die position out ahead by one sample so that the actual die position will begin to match the new set-point by the time it becomes active and the die should be matching speed and position.

The only remaining customization in the set-point calculations for SERCOS is the tolerance test. Since we only know where the die was one sample time ago, the tolerance is compared with where the material was one sample time ago.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.71.02 11/2/2020
XL220CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL2CL; Allow configuration of Lag Command Velocity Filter.
XL200

SCN 3577 corrected a bug with hard coded filter constants that were incorrect when SERCOS was being used. The constants should be calculated based on the cutoff frequency and the sample time. The sample time goes from 1ms to 2ms when SERCOS is used so the constants needed to change for SERCOS.

SAMCO has a belt drive system that they were able to tune with V4.48.00 and not able to tune in v4.49.00 which is where is bug was fixed. After experimenting with their settings we realized that they found settings on the old software that were a balance between accuracy, smoothness, die stroke and the drive overheating. If we provide them a method to use the old hard coded filter constants, we expect they will be able to use the latest software successfully.

A new setup called Lag Command Velocity Filter has been added. Its default value is 35.6Hz. If SAMCO uses 17.8Hz when using SERCOS they will be back to the filter constant values that were hard coded. If they are using analog they should use the default values

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.71.02 11/2/2020
XL220CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
Xl2CL; Added "Lag on Die Return" setup
XL200

SCN 3575 was a change to leave the lag active during die return. Turning the lag off was causing a motor jump.

Having the lag off makes the die return smoother at the expense of a motor jump as the die comes to a stop at the end of travel.

The lag calculations rely on a filter for the command velocity. That filter adds a phase shift in the calculated command velocity. Suddenly removing the lag portion of the analog, which relies on the command velocity filter, results in an abrupt change in analog voltage or velocity command for SERCOS.

SAMCO complained about this, the only solution was to leave the lag active all the time.

This same phase shift is also responsible for the knee "velocity overshoot" that can be seen in the closed loop data screen. The phase shift results in the die position being behind because we are under correcting for the die velocity due to the phase shift. The overshoot is the die having to catch up to the target as the phase shifted velocity catches up to the actual velocity. This phase shift causes a knee or velocity overshoot at each trapezoid transition in the set point motion profile.

SAMCO is now complaining about vibration that can be seen at the transition points when the die stops at end of travel and at home. This new parameter allows them to turn off the lag during the die return, which will make the transitions smoother, returning the motion profile to what they are used to.

The harsh transitions are more impactful on them because they are using belt drives that stretch, which results in vibration.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.71.01 10/30/2020
XL220CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
PF: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Added Clamp Laser input to all Thalmann single-bend configurations
  • Removed FoldGuardClampingBeamLaser input from JornsTwinmaticClosedLoop and JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV2 configurations
  • Updated axis definitions in RASV1 configuration
  • Added parameters 756, 757, and 758 to all configurations
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
PF: Indicate Service Locator Activity in Splash Screen
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to display a status message on the splash screen while Pathfinder is fetching information from the service locator endpoint. Previously, the splash screen would already be closed when fetching this info, which could lead to a significant period of time passing with no window open on screen if the operation times out.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
PF: Gripper Zone Button Visible With Only One Gripper Zone
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where the Gripper Zone Button in the main dialog would still be visible even when there is only one available gripper zone. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
PF: Only Enable Pause on Step With Grippers
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder such that the Pause on Step operation option will only be available if the machine has grippers.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
PF: Add Pause on Step Indicator to Operation Summary
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to make it easier to tell which operations have the Pause on Step selection. A pause icon will now be visible on the collapsed operation when the Pause on Step option is enabled in that step.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
PF: Allow Competing I/O Pin Assignments
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder to allow competing I/O pin assignments in configurations, but only if the competing I/O functions are in mutually exclusive feature groups (e.g. Clamp Laser vs. Foldguard Laser). Two input functions or two output functions can be assigned to the same pin within a configuration, but only one function can be enabled at a time.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.01.00.3089 10/27/2020
XL2; Phantom Shear Capability for Stitch Part Feature.
XL200

On Feed to Stop applications, while Stitching parts, this change allows the Shear press operation to be selectively omitted without stopping at the shear target. It does this while still accurately tracking material and part completion for the parts that have the omitted press fires.

Internally, tracking part completion without stopping and without firing the shear press has been described as a Phantom Shear.

Some feed to stop machines don't have a physical shear tool. A future, generic implementation of a phantom shear for those machines will be able to make use of this same mechanism that has been implemented for Stitching.

This feature is not currently compatible with the SGF option. We have a customer waiting for this for a Brake and Hump line. There are too many concerns with the target adjustments for the Weld Station and the Weld Knockoff station to consider right now.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL2CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL220OL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL220CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL2; Enable Stitching Feature, Omitting Shears, on the XL200 OL and CL.
XL200

Allow the Stitching Feature on the XL200 OL and CL. Since an XL200 has no gag outputs, short parts are stitched together by leaving out shear operations. The parts must be separated by cutting them down by hand in post operations.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL2CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL220OL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL220CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
5226; Always Request from FoldGuard Before Moving Clamp Down
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The Request Clamp Move Down output and Enable Clamp Move Down input were created to work with the FoldGuard laser system. The Request Clamp Move Down will send a signal to FoldGuard saying it wants to move the clamp down. FoldGuard will then process if the move will be safe and sends a signal to the Enable Clamp Move Down input of the controller. The controller will then turn on everything needed to move the clamp down. If the Enable Clamp Move Down input turns off during the move the controller will attempt to stop. For more information refer to:

SCN 3621 - 5223, 5225, 5226; Added Request Clamp Down Move Output SCN 3622 - 5223, 5225 5226; Added Enable Clamp Move Down Input

The way this was implemented though it seemed like the controller could possibly try to move the clamp down without doing the request. Because of this a last line of defense was added to make sure we are requesting and FoldGuard is giving permission. This fix ensures a proper handshake logic happens between the 5226 controller and the FoldGuard system.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.00 10/28/2020
5226; Changed Double Folder Expected Movement
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

This is now the expected movement for double folders with and without FoldGuard for all modes.

Full Automatic Mode

Required Features:

Grippers, Hazard Zone/Area Light Fence

Description:

To enter this mode the Grippers must be closed and the Light Fence must not be Blocked. The machine will move in Fast Speed once the Full Automatic/Hazard Area Clear input has been turned on.

Expected Movement When:

Light Fence is Clear:

Light Fence has to be Clear to Start Movement. Clamp will not stop at Safety Stop. Once each Operation is finished it will transition to the next one without any stoppage. The only time the machine will stop when the Light Fence is Clear is if there is a Manipulation Operation, the Step is set up for a Pause Mode or the Part has been finished.

Light Fence Becomes Blocked:

If the machine is in Full Auto Mode and the Light Fence becomes broken the machine will stop the machine, but not drop out of Run. The machine cannot go back into Full Automatic Mode until the Light Fence has been Cleared. Once Cleared pressing the Full Automatic/Hazard Area Clear button will put the machine back in Full Automatic Mode.

Semi-Automatic Mode w/ Grippers Closed and w/ FoldGuard

Required Features:

Grippers, Hazard Zone/Area Light Fence, FoldGuard Laser

Description:

To enter this mode the Grippers had to be Closed and the user has decided to initiate movement with the Next Step Pedal. The machine will move in Safe Speed and anytime the Next Step Pedal is released the machine stop all movement, but not drop out of Run.

Expected Clamp Movement:

Hazard Zone/Area Blocked:

For FoldGuard to be Active the Light Fence has to be Broken. Pressing the Next Step Pedal will start the Clamp moving. When the FoldGuard Laser is not Broken the Clamp target will be fully clamped and not stop at the safety stop height. If the Laser is Broken then FoldGuard will require the Pedal to be Released and a Second press to get in an override state. The Clamp will then move in Slow Speed down to FoldGuard's Safety Stop Height. Pressing the Pedal again will move the Clamp into a Clamped position. If the Clamp starts moving with the Laser clear, but then becomes broken FoldGuard will stop the Clamp. A Second press will get Foldguard into the override state and movement will begin again in slow to FoldGuard's Safety Stop Height.

Hazard Zone/Area Clear:

For the machine to be in Hazard Zone/Area Clear Mode the Light Fence has to be Clear. FoldGuard will no longer be Active in this situation. Pressing the Next Step Pedal will start the Clamp moving. The Clamp target will be the Safety Stop Height in Pathfinder. Once the Safety Stop move has finished Second Press will move the Clamp into a Clamped State.

Expected Movement Once Clamped:

Hazard Zone/Area Blocked:

If this step is a Load or Re-Load of the material then the Next Step Pedal must be pressed again for all other Axes to start moving. Holding down the Pedal will complete the Operation. Once the Operation is complete the controller will move on to the next Operation. If the Pedal is being continuously pressed the controller will Run through all of the steps without stopping. FoldGuard is Active during this time and is Allowing Clamp Movement if the Laser is not Blocked. The only time the machine will stop is if the Next Step Pedal was Released, the Operation is a Manipulation Step, the Step has been set up to be a Pause Mode Step or if the Part is finished being made.

So this is running the machine using the NS pedal but outside haz area?

Hazard Zone/Area Clear:

If the Light Fence is not broken then the controller will continue with the rest of the operation once clamped. Holding down the Pedal will complete the Operation. Once the Operation is complete the controller will move on to the next Operation. If the Pedal is being continuously pressed the controller will Run through all of the steps without stopping. There will be no stops at the Safety Stop Height once the initial Load has been completed. The only time the machine will stop is if the Next Step Pedal was Released, the Operation is a Manipulation Step, the Step has been set up to be a Pause Mode Step or if the Part is finished being made.

Semi-Automatic Mode w/ Finger/Nose Gauge and w/ FoldGuard

Required Features:

Finger/Closed Grippers for Gauging, Hazard Zone/Area Light Fence, FoldGuard Laser

Description:

To enter this mode the Step has to be set up to use a Finger or Closed Grippers for Gauging. The machine will move in Safe Speed and anytime the Next Step Pedal is released the machine stop all movement, but not drop out of Run.

Expected Clamp Movement:

Hazard Zone/Area Blocked:

For FoldGuard to be Active the Light Fence has to be Broken. Pressing the Next Step Pedal will start the Clamp moving. When the FoldGuard Laser is not Broken the Clamp target will be fully clamped and not stop at the safety stop height. If the Laser is Broken then FoldGuard will require the Pedal to be Released and a Second press to get in an override state. The Clamp will then move in Slow Speed down to FoldGuard's Safety Stop Height. Pressing the Pedal again will move the Clamp into a Clamped position. If the Clamp starts moving with the Laser clear, but then becomes broken FoldGuard will stop the Clamp. A Second press will get Foldguard into the override state and movement will begin again in slow to FoldGuard's Safety Stop Height.

Hazard Zone/Area Clear:

For the machine to be in Hazard Zone/Area Clear Mode the Light Fence has to be Clear. FoldGuard will no longer be Active in this situation. Pressing the Next Step Pedal will start the Clamp moving. The Clamp target will be the Safety Stop Height in Pathfinder. Once the Safety Stop move has finished Second Press will move the Clamp into a Clamped State.

Expected Movement Once Clamped:

FoldGuard Active:

The user must release the Next Step Pedal and press again. This will start the rest of the operation and holding down the Pedal will complete the Operation. Once the Operation is complete the controller will raise the Clamp. The controller will now require another Pedal press and will go through the same rules that apply for Clamp Movement explained above for when the Light Fence is Broken.

Hazard Zone/Area Clear:

The user must release the Next Step Pedal and press again. This will start the rest of the operation and holding down the Pedal will complete the Operation. Once the Operation is complete the controller will raise the Clamp. The controller will now require another Pedal press and will go through the same rules that apply for Clamp Movement explained above for when the Light Fence is Clear.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.00 10/28/2020
5226; Pause on Step Mode Logic
Pathfinder

Change made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The big advantage in having grippers on a machine is that the user can grip on to the material and then just let the machine run through multiple steps without additional pedal or button presses. One problem does come from this though in that if something happens like not a successful hem smash or the material is no longer fully against the backstop the machine will keep going and potentially cause more harm to the part.

To counteract this the Pause on Step Mode was added to bend and hem steps to help with steps that are known to have problems. When selected this will make the machine pause once the clamp is fully closed. At this time the user can open the clamp and manipulate the grippers. If the user thinks the step ended up successfully they can just press the Full Automatic button or the Next Step pedal and it will move on to the next step if the clamp is closed. This allows the user to potentially re-smash a hem or adjust the material to the correct position.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.00 10/28/2020
5226; Added Mechanical Air Gap Parameter and Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some folding machines have an automatic radius adjust that controls the air gap between the nose of the clamp and the bending beam. This allows users the ability to adjust the gap depending on the thickness of the material. In most cases to achieve this adjustment the radius adjust usually moves the position of the clamp nose. Double folder machines do this adjustment for both the lower and upper bending beams. Since this adjustment can be made for both that means that the clamp nose can be moved past the zero point to have the air gap for the upper beam. A rule was then made to make sure the machine does not damage itself. This was that the beam could not be past its zero point in reference to which bending beam it is being moved for. As in the clamp cannot be at a negative position for the lower bending beam and cannot be positive for the upper beam.

It turns out though that some double folders are actually fine with going past the zero point to get a tighter air gap to get more bend out of the material to make up for the mechanical gap that is always there for both beams. To adjust for this the generic parameter Mechanical Air Gap was created. This parameter can be set to move the clamp past its zero points. So if this parameter is non zero the controller will subtract this parameter from the target radius adjust position for the lower beam and add on when using the upper beam. This allows the user to get more bend out of the material.

As a disclaimer if this parameter is used then the user will have to adjust backgauge offsets to make up for the extra space that is now between the nose of the clamp and the backgauge. If this gets set up in the material table then the backgauge position will be adjusted for every step to account for this parameter.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.03.00 10/28/2020
PF: Enable Overriding a Single Calibration Table
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder that allows overriding a single axis calibration table in an override file. Previously, calibration overrides could only be done by overriding the entire set of all axis calibration tables. Now, both methods are supported.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.00.00.3073 10/20/2020
PF: .NET Framework Upgrade
Pathfinder

The .NET Framework used by Pathfinder has been upgraded from .NET Framework 2.0 to .NET Framework 4.6. This breaks compatibility with Windows XP. Windows 10 comes with .NET Framework 4.6 installed by default. Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8 support .NET Framework 4.6, but the framework must be installed manually.

For Pathfinder installations on 7000 series PC hardware, .NET Framework 4.6 is already supported, so no additional work is needed to install this update.

Pathfinder installations on 6000 series or earlier PC hardware do not support this update. The last major Pathfinder version supported on 6000 series PC hardware is Pathfinder version 4.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.00.00.3073 10/20/2020
PF: SQL Compact Version Upgrade
Pathfinder

The version of SQL Compact used by Pathfinder for profile and diagnostics database storage has been upgraded from v3.5 to v4.0. SQL Compact v4.0 includes bugfixes that should resolve some database-related Pathfinder crashes seen in the field.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 5.00.00.3073 10/20/2020
XL2OL; Added the Part RS232 Baud Rate Parameter.
XL200

This parameter was added to the Closed Loop in SCN 4337 and was not added, due to an oversite, to the Open Loop.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL2CL; Added the Hole Correction Feature in Feed to Stop mode
XL200

The Hole Correction feature was added for Feed to Stop to the Models listed below. Some of these controllers do not have a Feed to Stop shear but they already support Hole Correction in Flying Cut so they are still listed here.

XL200CL XL202CL XL206CL XL212CL XL244CL XL200MDA2 XL200SPD

Model Version Released
XL2OL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL2CL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL220OL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL220CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Added Parameter 311 - Clamp Positioning Tolerance - to JornsSingleBendFullRetrofitV2ClosedLoop configuration
  • Removed backgauge enable output from ASCHydraulicV2 configuration
  • Added new JornsSingleBendHydraulicUpgradeV1 configuration for single-bend machines outfitted with a double-folder hydraulic upgrade package
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.17.00.3054 10/12/2020
PFv4: Serial Number Not Populating in Edge Settings
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder such that the serial number would not get populated under certain conditions when loading the Edge Settings view. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.17.00.3054 10/12/2020
PFv4: Pause on Step
Pathfinder

A new feature has been added to Pathfinder that allows the user to pause while running a part. This is for cases where the operator wants to inspect the part and potentially open and re-close the clamp, such as on a hem smash, for example. This feature is engaged by checking the "Pause on Step" on a particular operation. This will cause the controller to stop motion but remain in run mode when that step is completed. Running the part can be resumed by the normal methods for initiating run.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.17.00.3054 10/12/2020
PFv4: Translation Issue in Handling Steps
Pathfinder

There was a bug in Pathfinder where the labels for the Clamp Open Height and Gripper Pressure fields in part handling steps would not be translated. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.17.00.3054 10/12/2020
XLOL; Missed Target or Out of Tolerance Errors with Hole Correction Feature
XL200

The Hole Correction Feature adjusts Shear Targets based on the detection of a hole within a tolerance range of the expected shear location.

This feature worked for the most part but in Feed to Stop configurations there are certain parts that have been discovered to cause Missed Shear or Missed Press Target Errors.

On a feed to stop controller, the controller moves to the target that is closest. The software was correctly adjusting the shear target but it did not account for the fact that the shear target may now be closer or another press target may now be closer. If the adjustment was far enough the controller would later detect and out of tolerance or missed target condition and report an error.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL2CL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL220OL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL220CL 4.72.00 11/17/2020
XL2; Punching Tolerance Mode
XL200

A setup was created in a theorized attempt to improve tolerance. After a move, rather than test to see if other presses are within tolerance, this new setup would allow each press to do its own move.

The Setup is called Punch Tolerance mode and has two settings, Individual and Parallel. The intent is that Independent will force each press to do its own move to get as close to its target as possible. Parallel is the legacy operation where a press will test to see if it is within tolerance and will not attempt to move.

When beginning to implement the actual run logic of the setup it became apparent that it was a larger job than it sounds like on the surface. It will require a lot of changes and an approach similar to the one 5226 motion controller uses where a 75% threshold within the tolerance is used to decide if the press needs to attempt its own move. It is a little more complicated because not all lines are able to back up like the folding machine axes the 5226 deals with.

For now, until/if we decide to revisit this, the setup will be hidden and will have no effect.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL2CL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; Punch Combination Tolerance
XL200

If a press punches too close together it can damage press tooling and it is inefficient time wise. Sometimes customers program patterns with overlapping punches that span the trailing edge of one part and the leading edge of the next part so that the first and last parts will both get all of their holes. We detect the redundant press hits in the middle and remove the duplicates. Press hits, with gags are OR'd together to become one press hit with the gags of both operations.

SCN 2585 changed the threshold of +- one encoder count to be equal to the part tolerance. However, this can result in holes that can be as much as two times the tolerance out of spec. In addition, the change was made for one customer for a problem we were unable to duplicate.

We have added a new setup called "Punch Combination Tolerance". This provides independent control over how close targets can be before they are OR'd together.

For now it will be available on controllers that are configured with Gags. When unavailable the tolerance will be the equivalent distance of 1 encoder count, which reverts it back to the original tolerance prior to SCN 2585.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL2CL 4.71.00 10/16/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
FlashDoctor; Current Versions file left open after use.
AMS Tools

Pivotal stores the most recent software versions in a CurrentVersions.txt file that Flashwizard opens and reads the current versions out of. However, it was failing to close the file, allowing it to be used by others until the application was closed.

It now closes the file as soon as it is finished reading from it.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.39 12/8/2023
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Updated JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV2 configuration with changes from first install
  • Updated JouanelPTS31 configuration to support 6mm and 19mm geometries
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.03.3030 9/24/2020
PFv4: Move Batch Stop From Manipulation Bit Field to Separate Property
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder to move the Batch Stop indicator out of the manipulation bit field to a separate property in the sequence step object. This change was originally made on the new sequencer branch and originally only deployed with the special sequencer release, but has now been ported to the main branch in order to alleviate database version conflicts between the two branches. The remaining changes on the new sequencer branch will be merged at a later date.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.03.3030 9/24/2020
PFv4: Fixed French Translation
Pathfinder

The French translation in Pathfinder for the abbreviation "LB" (Lower Beam) was set incorrectly. This has been corrected to "Tablier".

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.03.3030 9/24/2020
5223, 5225; Clamp Slow Speed Limit Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5223 and 5225 controllers.

The FoldGuard safety system has an output called Force Slow Speed. This output is turned on when FoldGuard has been overriden to move the clamp even though something is blocking the laser. This output goes to the Clamp Slow Speed Limit input on Pathfinder controllers so that it can adjust outputs and analog signals to a slow speed. There is a bug in the 5223 and 5225 controllers where this input was not looked at in all of the spots where the clamp is told to move. There is a separate clamp movement function that is used in automatic that looks at pedal presses, timers and lasers associated with the clamp. The input was only put into the generic two speed move function that all the axes use. This means the clamp was only switching to slow for this input when the clamp was being jogged.

The solution to this bug was to monitor this input in all functions that deal with clamp movement.

Model Version Released
5223BB 4.02.03 9/24/2020
5225BB 4.02.03
5226; Stopping Reaction Distance/Time Update Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The stopping reaction time/distance is used in an open loop system to determine the amount of distance an axis will coast to a stop after a move. This is based on the feedback of the axis letting the open loop know how close it is to the target and whether or not the axis should transition into a coast to stop. Pathfinder has a feature the user can turn on where the controller will look at where the axis ended up after the move compared to the target position and determine if the reaction time/distance needs to be adjusted to get closer to the target the next time a move happens in that direction. The controller will then send up the new value to Pathfinder. The problem is that the 5226 can calculate the parameter to go negative which can cause the controller to never go into coast to stop which leads to the move never ending.

A fix was put into the controller to make sure the parameter would not go negative. The problem is that the wrong check was put into place and ended up making the controller never adjust the parameter. The bug fix was to check on the correct calculation which makes the parameter never go negative.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.16 9/24/2020
XL2; Top Line Hole Detect Display Error
XL200

Dual Die Accelerator controllers operating in Hole Detect or Hole Correct mode had the potential of displaying an ever increasing hole count number on the Top Line portion of the display.

The sum of the Hole detect counts on Inputs 23 and 24 were displayed on Hole Enabled controllers. Input 23 is used for the Home Switch input for the second die accelerator. Any time the second die hit the Home Switch, a hole was added to the hole queue for that input and was never being cleared out.

This has been resolved.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.69.03 9/25/2020
XL2CL 4.69.03 9/25/2020
XL2; SCN 4323 Caused RE and MRE reference issue

SCN 4323 made a change to prevent infinite loops when integrating eccentric angles from eccentric linear position. The method used had a flaw in the logic.

The method in SCN 4323 assumed that the absolute of the position error would always be decreasing, moving closer to zero. This was not true. The new method looks for the position error to change sign twice in a row. If that happens we are ping ponging between values and the position error is never going to fall below the threshold we are looking for.

This bug caused the home switch position on an eccentric and most likely a BOSS shear to be incorrect if the position was located between the Axis home position and the Axis full Extend position.

The bug was also causing the eccentric to rotate through 360 degrees to get to the home position after a reference.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 4.69.02 9/17/2020
XL2CL 4.69.02 9/17/2020
XL2; SCN 4338 Caused Video Jet Driver bug
XL200

The VideoJet Driver uses the Height Multiplier field in an unconventional way. It is used as a modifier to the selected Font to select Single, Double or Triple line depending on the selected Font. Typically a multiplier should be 1 or higher. In the case of the VideoJet driver a Height of zero has meaning so changing a zero to a one is undesirable. However, this is what SCN 4338 did in the base driver code.

This was fixed by adding a virtual method to allow the VideoJet Driver to override the standard default of one with a zero.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.69.02 9/17/2020
XL2CL 4.69.02 9/17/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
5226; Added Minimum Gripper Pressure Parameter
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On some double folder machines the grippers are controlled through the hydraulics. Usually when controlled like this the pressure used to close the grippers can be adjusted depending on how tight you want the grippers to grip onto the material. Since too little pressure can make the grippers not grip tight enough and make the material slip out its good to have a minimum in case the user enters a bad percentage.

The solution was to create a Minimum Gripper Pressure parameter. If the gripper pressure entered in falls under this parameter then it will be changed to this parameter. Ensures the grippers will always have enough force to hold onto the material.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.15 9/15/2020
5226; If Previous Step Was a Batch Stop Release Part to Operator
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A batch stop is a feature in Pathfinder where you can end the part creation at a certain step and return to the beginning. There was a bug in the controller for double folders where once it finished the last step before the batch stop it was not allowing the user to open the grippers and let the user move on to the next part. Essentially it was not acting as if it was the last step of the part like it should have been and was not releasing the part to the operator before going back to the beginning.

The solution was to have the step check if the previous step was a batch stop. This means the part was finished and we need to release the part to the operator. This allows the user to open the grippers and move on to the next piece of material.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.15 9/15/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Added JouanelPTL31 configuration
  • Updated JouanelPGL configuration with parameter changes
  • Updated JouanelPTS24 configuration with parameter changes
  • Updated JouanelPTS31 configuration with parameter changes
  • Updated JouanelPTS33 configuration with parameter changes
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.02.3021 9/14/2020
PFv4: Update French Translations
Pathfinder

The French translations in Pathfinder have been updated to include new strings.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.02.3021 9/14/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Updated JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV2 with new default parameter values and calibration
  • Corrected Gripper01 and Gripper02 machine options to include open limits in JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV2 configuration
  • Added AltGripper01 and AltGripper02 machine options to JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV2 configuration
  • Updated JouanelPTS31 with new parameter defaults
  • Removed MaximumMeasurementCount field as a required field in calibration data
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.01.3016 9/2/2020
PFv4: Unhandled NullReferenceException in DisposeCurrentDialogPresenter
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where an unhandled NullReferenceException could be thrown by DisposeCurrentDialogPresenter if the current dialog presenter was null. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.01.3016 9/2/2020
PFv4: Changing Available Geometries Causes Material Validation Failure
Pathfinder

A regression was introduced in Pathfinder with the material validation changes such that modifying the list of available geometries would cause Pathfinder to begin failing the material validation check at startup. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.01.3016 9/2/2020
PFv4: Clarify Material Validation Failures
Pathfinder

Material validation failure reporting in Pathfinder has been updated to clarify the reason for a material failing the validation check in order to distinguish between a failure due to a missing geometry in the material definition and a failure due to a missing upper or lower tool in the material definition.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.01.3016 9/2/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Added Load Assist parameters to JornsTwinProClosedLoop configuration
  • Disabled Gripper Open limits in JornsTwinProClosedLoop configuration
  • Fixed parameter 748 name and description in Jouanel and Premel configurations
  • Added parameters 240 and 288 to JornsTwinmaticClosedLoop, ThalmannTDv1, ThalmannTDv2, and ThalmannTDv2ClosedLoop configurations
  • Modified bending beam raw count offset in JouanelPTS31 and JouanelPTS33 configurations
  • Added backstop extend I/O to JornsTwinPro configurations
  • Added ThalmannThakoV2OLBG configuration
  • Added SchroederMAKIIV2 configuration
  • Added JornsTwinmaticClosedLoopV2 configuration
  • Removed parameter 457 from SASV2 configuration
  • Added shear slow limit inputs to SASV2 configuration
  • Added parameter 728 to JornsTwinPro and JornsTwinmatic configurations
  • Added parameters 422, 423, 425, and 426 to all 5223 and 5225 configs
  • Added parameters 727, 728 and 731 to every configuration that did not have them already
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Profile Categories Can't Be Edited Under Some Conditions
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where the user was unable to edit profile categories under some conditions. This was a result of the profile category editing being grouped with the graphical/non-graphical selection for first-time profile creation. This bug has been fixed and profile category editing is now allowed all the time.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Refactor Material Mismatch Handling
Pathfinder

Changes have been made to Pathfinder concerning the manner in which material mismatches are handled when the user attempts to enter Run mode.

If the selected geometry does not match the geometry used to generate the current operation values, the user will be prompted to either regenerate operation values using the current selected geometry or back out. If the user wants to revert back to the geometry that was used to generate the profile's operation values, they must back out and follow the normal process for doing so (in addition to performing the appropriate tooling swaps).

If, after the geometry check has passed, the selected material does not match the material used to generate the current operation values, the user will be prompted to select one of the following options:

  • Select the material used to generate the current operation values and then run the profile using the current operation values
  • Regenerate the operation values using the currently selected material
  • Cancel and exit Run

This replaces the previous message scheme for handling geometry and material mismatches.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Log Profile Data to Diagnostics When Profile is Sent to Controller
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder such that profile data will be logged to diagnostics each time a profile is sent to the controller. This data includes identifying information for the profile, the sequence used, the bend sequence, manipulations, and operation values.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Avoid Gripping on Hems
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to avoid gripping on formed hems whenever possible. When calculating operation values, Pathfinder will now attempt to choose a gripper offset that avoids closing the grippers on the flange of an already-formed hem. It will only grip on a hem as a last resort if there is no viable alternative when using the gripper.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Backstop Extend Selection Wizard
Pathfinder

A new feature has been added to Pathfinder to aid in selecting the correct gripper offset to correspond to a given backstop extend position. When multiple backstop positions are available, a button will appear next to the Gripper Offset field. Clicking this button will display a dialog where the user can select which backstop extend position they would like to use on that step, which will then populate the Gripper Offset field with their selection. The Gripper Offset field is used by the controller to determine what, if any, backstop extend position to use for that step.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Second Hem Close Has Clamp Position of Zero
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where the clamp closed position populated in a second hem close operation would be zero. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Validate Selected Configuration Name at Startup
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to validate the selected configuration filename against the configuration name stored within the configuration file. Previously, a vulnerability existed where these names could differ, which would cause unexpected behavior in saving and recalling parameters, calibration, etc. This change ensures that issue will be detected right away at startup.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Preferred Gripper Offset
Pathfinder

A new feature has been added to Pathfinder to allow the operator to select a Preferred Gripper Offset using Parameter 890. This value establishes the gripper offset that the operator would prefer to use by default barring any problems with gauging or interference at that position on a given step. As long as this gripper offset is valid, Pathfinder will use this value by default. If this gripper offset is not usable on a given step, then Pathfinder will deviate to use whatever gripper offset is necessary to grip the part on that step. This parameter can be used in conjunction with an extendable backstop to gauge parts using a preferred extended backstop position instead of the default, fully-retracted backstop.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Dashes in Geometry Name Cause Failure to Save or Load Selected Geometry Properly
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where the presence of a dash character ('-') in a geometry name would cause the selected geometry to be both incorrectly loaded and saved. This bug has been fixed, and any number of dashes can now be included in geometry names.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Calibration Not Re-Sent When Geometry Is Changed
Pathfinder

A regression was introduced in Pathfinder such that calibration data would not be re-sent to the controller when the selected geometry was changed. This regression was introduced with previous changes to move the sending of calibration data to a background thread to prevent a deadlock in status processing. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Added Support for ClampPressureReached Input Function
Pathfinder

Support has been added to Pathfinder for the ClampPressureReached input function. This input signals when a given pressure threshold has been reached.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Errors in French Translations for Minimum and Maximum Velocity Errors
Pathfinder

Errors in the French translations for axis minimum and maximum velocity errors have been corrected.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Pathfinder and Maintenance App instances not being correctly stopped
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder such that the method for force-killing an instance of the Pathfinder executable or the Maintenance executable would sometimes fail. When this happened, it would require the user to manually kill the process via Windows Task Manager. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Maintenance App Intermittently Throws Cross-thread Exception
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in the Pathfinder Maintenance App such that it would intermittently throw an exception for cross-thread access to a user control in the progress window. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
PFv4: Middle Hem Mode
Pathfinder

A new feature has been added to Pathfinder to control the method used for forming middle hems. New parameters have been added that allow the operator to choose whether a middle hem is formed by performing a single bend with a single close, two bends with a single close, or a single bend with two closes (Parameter 754 - Middle Hem Mode), as well as the offset for the first of the two hem closes if that option is selected (Parameter 755 - Middle Hem Mode - First Hem Close Offset). This replaces the functionality provided by Parameter 714 - Add Second Bend on Inside Hem Close. The default setting is to use a single bend with a single close.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.16.00.3007 8/31/2020
XL2; Printer Communication Issues with Image Printers (Binary)
XL200

Two issues were found that prevented the Image printer from communicating. The Image printer requires the binary communication commands with the 6370. Neither issue was in the driver itself but in the common communication code that passes binary data to and from the 6370 board.

  1. Single character commands would not be sent to the printer. There was a bug with a single character string that resulted in the command not being sent. This was intrroduced in the restructuring done in SCN 4139.

  2. For binary communication the code did not wait long enough for the response when using the new protocol introduced in SCN 4138.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.69.01 8/26/2020
XL2CL 4.69.01 8/26/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
5223, 5225; Power Off Command Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5223 and 5225 controllers.

Pathfinder communicates with the 5223 and 5225 controllers through a communication protocol. One of the ways the controller checks a command is by checking how much information it got and if it gets more than what the command was supposed to send it won't proceed. When Pathfinder transitioned from V2 to V4 the communication protocol changed which meant some commands would be sending more or less information in a different way. The bug that came from this is that the power off state command was checking the wrong packet length so the controller would not reset itself when Pathfinder told it to. This problem led to the controller instead raising the clamp when the e-stop input was taken away on a power down. This ended up leading to the clamp having to be referenced on a power up because it was still moving up when the machine lost complete power.

The fix to this bug was to make sure the correct packet length is looked at for the power down command.

Model Version Released
5223BB 4.02.02 8/26/2020
5225BB 4.02.02 8/26/2020
5223, 5225; Transitioned Default Delays Into Parameters
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5223 and 5225 controllers.

In Pathfinder V2 there was a set in stone block of delay times used for certain safety and production features. If a certain machine needed the time to be different then the time had to be changed in the machine setup and built into Pathfinder. When moving to V4 and the configuration format this block of delays were turned into parameters for the 5226. The problem is that this was not implemented for the 5223/5225's which means they were stuck with default times built into the firmware.

The solution was to convert some of these delays into usable parameters. The delays that transitioned are the one man two man, hem in position and wait for pump active. One man two man is the amount of time the second operator has to press their pedal after the first operator pressed theirs. Hem in position is the amount of time the controller will wait after a hem smash before opening the clamp. Wait for pump active is the amount of time the controller will wait for the Hydraulic Motor Status input to turn on.

Model Version Released
5223BB 4.02.02 8/26/2020
5225BB 4.02.02 8/26/2020
5223, 5225; Added Reverse Direction Parameters for BG and RA
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5223 and 5225 controllers.

Axes need bi-directional parameters to account for the axis moving differently in one direction compared to the other. With separate control of the axis the user is able to get more accurate results. The problem is that the backgauge and radius adjust were not updated to have bi-directional parameters like the clamp and bending beam.

The solution was to add the reverse directional parameters for the backgauge and the radius adjust. For the backgauge that meant adding the reverse slow distance and stopping reaction time. The radius adjust needed the reverse fast and slow speed in addition to the slow distance and stopping reaction time.

Model Version Released
5223BB 4.02.02 8/26/2020
5225BB 4.02.02 8/26/2020
5226; Pedal Confirmation Required Once Clamped
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On single folder machines the operator uses the clamp down pedal to get into a clamped state and then has to press another pedal to get the bending beam to come up. On double folder machines the need for pressing a pedal is sometimes not needed since the part could be gripped and the operator is not holding on to the material. The problem is that if the part is not gripped the controller is also not requiring that pedal press. This should not be the case since the operator is potentially holding the material and close to the machine. Having the bending beam move without a confirmation from the operator could cause injury.

The solution to this problem was to require a confirmation pedal press once clamped when the material is not gripped. This is safer and gives the operator the opportunity to re-position the material if needed.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.14 8/20/2020
5226; Added Hydraulic Gripper Logic for Initialization
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On some double folding machines the grippers are controlled through the hydraulics and have sensors that are hydraulic based for the state of the grippers. One problem that comes from this is that if the system does not have enough pressure built up the sensors will not detect the state of the gripper, but when the pressure is built up it will turn on the states input. Since the controller did not tell the gripper to move this unexpected state change creates an error.

To counteract this some logic was put in to initialize when needed. The controller now checks if the system pressure is under 20% and if the grippers have pressure feedback it will let the system get to 70%. During this time limit switch error conditions for the gripper are ignored. Once at 70% the controller will re-initialize the grippers and move on to what was going to happen.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.14 8/20/2020
5226; Changed Clamp Pressure Moves
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 controllers were initially implemented to do open loop moves to become clamped in a position based way. As in the move would be still be doing an open loop controlled move to get to the clamped target. The goal being the clamp ends up in tolerance of the clamped target and the machine is now clamped. When we started implementing for more machines the need for a pressure based clamped move was needed. As in the machine is not considered clamped until the pressure target has been reached. The controller still did open loop moves to the clamped closed position to try and reach this pressure target. A bug arose from this though because even though the goal is pressure reached, the controller was considering the move done if the closed position was reached. This means if the user set a closed position that did not reach the pressure target the machine could not get into a clamped state.

The solution to this problem was to make the controller make the clamp keep moving until pressure was reached. The controller knows the move is pressure based so it can identify when this needs to happen and not do it on other moves. This change allows the machine to get to a clamped state regardless of how low the closed position is.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.14 8/20/2020
5226; Gripper Jog Buttons Toggle All Grippers Regardless of Zone
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On some double folder machines the grippers can be split up into zones to control them separately based on the zone. Through Pathfinder you are able to jog the grippers open and closed if you want to. The problem is that it was set up to only jog whichever grippers were set up as zone 1. This doesn't really make sense because the user probably wants all the grippers to open and close for testing.

The solution was to make sure that the gripper jog buttons will open and close all of the grippers regardless of zone.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.14 8/20/2020
5226; Added FoldGuard and Retract Conflict Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The FoldGuard safety system has two initial setups that have to be performed before the machine can be put into production. They are the overrun test and the mute point set. To do these setups the FoldGuard laser needs to be clear so it can get good values. In some cases though the machine might have something attached that blocks the laser. In this case it was a shear attached to the lower bending beam. Since this machine was a double folder it meant the shear can be moved out of the way by moving the lower bending beam retract down. This will be forced to happen if the Overrun Test Active input is on and the machine has a shear. The controller will also attempt to move the shear out of the way in run when it can.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.14 8/20/2020
5226; Added Ability to Have 2 Alternate Gripper Zones
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Jorns Twinmatic machines have two different kinds of grippers. One is called the sheet gripper which is used most often for production and a flange/alternate gripper that is used for gripping over a flange and/or hem. On some machines these grippers can be split up into zones to be able to use them separately. As in the one set will be opened and closed with a gripper pedal and the other set of grippers will be opened and closed with a different gripper pedal. This is done with separate I/O for each zone to control the grippers. Having zones was implemented for the sheet gripper previously, but not for the alternate gripper.

The solution was to add the ability to split the alternate grippers into zones like the sheet grippers. This gives separate control of the alternate grippers.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.14 8/20/2020
5226; Finished Correct Implementation of Alternate Gripper Feature Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Jorns Twinmatic machines have two different kinds of grippers. One is called the sheet gripper which is used most often for production and a flange/alternate gripper that is used for gripping over a flange and/or hem. The initial implementation of using the alternate gripper was not thorough enough to use them in a production setting.

The solution was to implement the correct functionality of the alternate grippers. If the Alternate Gripper is chosen for a step the alternate gripper will extend and open to be able to load the material. Using the gripper pedal will close the alternate gripper and it will stay extended and gripped until another step uses a different backgauge mode or the part is finished. If that is case the gripper pedal can be used to open the gripper and pressing the next step pedal will close and retract the alternate gripper.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.14 8/20/2020
5226; Change When Operator Mode has Changed Error is Thrown
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The Operator Mode has Changed error was created to let operators know that the machine has switched from one man mode to two man mode or vice versa. The problem with that is that it turned into more of a nuisance error instead of a safety acknowledgment. This is because this error is mainly thrown when someone turns the key switch and knows they are changing the man mode. This error really just needs to catch when the machine goes from two man to one man mode, but without a turn of the key switch. This means a failure has occurred and the machine is in an unsafe mode.

This error is now only thrown if the machine is using the legacy Two Man input where turning on the input puts the machine in two man mode. This is because a loss of input puts the machine in input one man mode which means the machine is less safe now. The loss of the input could be from a loose wire that the operator is unaware of and needs it to be known that the machine is less safe. If the machine is using the One Man input a loss of input would put the machine in two man mode and makes the machine safer. Therefore this error would not have to be thrown in this case.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.13 8/20/2020
5226; Added Gripper Backstop Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On some double folder machines the backstop of the backgauge is adjustable to be able to take advantage of the grippers. The biggest advantage is that it can get the material closer to the zero point without having to change the position of the backgauge. This allows the user to get closer to the clamp with the material gripped, which means a different form of backstop(finger or the grippers closed for gauging) does not need to be used. To use these gripper backstops new I/O and logic had to be added and work in unison with Pathfinder to know when to use them.

Pathfinder now has a gripper backstop offset field in each operation step. To have the backstops work for that step the exact amount the backstop moves out compared to its zero point of the backgauge needs to be put into the field. The controller will also receive generic parameters that need to match this offset distance. If during operation the offset distance matches the generic parameter the controller will turn on the output associated with that backstop and adjust where the backgauge needs to move. That backstop will then be used for the entirety of that step and subsequent steps until the gripper backstop offset changes.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.13 8/20/2020
5226; Added Clamp Pressure Reached Input Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some folding machines have a dedicated pressure switch instead of a transducer that gives feedback. The switch will turn on an output when it feels pressure has been reached on the machine. The 5226 has only ever gotten to a clamped state by using some kind of feedback(position and pressure). To utilize the pressure switch a new input would have to be added.

Clamp Pressure Reached input was created to use this pressure switch. The controller will now say the machine is clamped if the clamp is moving down and this input turns on.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.13 8/20/2020
5226; Fixed Clamp and Backgauge Collision Crisis Conflict Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

If the backgauge or the backgauge finger is within a certain distance from the zero point it can run into the clamp if the clamp is not high enough. The controller is supposed to use Clamp Collision Crisis Distance and Backgauge Collision Crisis Distance to handle this situation. If the backgauge is moving into the Clamp Collision Crisis Distance area then the clamp needs to move to the Backgauge Collision Crisis Distance instead of the operation step height. The problem was that the controller was not looking at the target based on whether the backgauge finger was up or not. This causes the clamp to not use the collision height when the fingers are up causing crashes.

The solution to this problem was to look at whether the finger is up or not. If the finger is going to be used then check if the backgauge target - the finger offset distance is going to be in the collision area and adjust clamp height accordingly.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.12 8/20/2020
5226; Added Gripper Clearance Height and Gripper Collision Crisis Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On most double folder machines the backgauge will have grippers attached which are used to handle the material. Sometimes when the grippers are open and the clamp is low they can collide with each other. To make sure this doesn't happen the Gripper Clearance Height and Gripper Collision Crisis parameters were created.

The parameters work together to make sure the clamp is high enough to make sure the grippers do not run into the clamp. If the backgauge is going to be moving into the Gripper Collision Crisis area then the clamp will move to the Gripper Clearance Height instead of the operation step height. The Gripper Clearance Height needs to be set to a high enough height for this to work correctly.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.12 8/20/2020
5226; Created Generic Parameter for Idle Delay Timer
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Idle Command Value was created to help with valve leakage and Idle Delay Timer was added for a time delay before turning on the Idle Command Value. For more information refer to:

SCN 4346 - 5226; Added an Idle Output and Idle Output Delay Feature

It was found that the valves were not acting the same from axis to axis and the set in stone delay time was not enough for some of the valves. To have more control of the delay time the Idle Delay Timer generic parameter was created. This allows the user to have control of how many milliseconds the controller will wait before turning on the Idle Command Value.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.12 8/20/2020
5226; Calculate Correct Tolerance Calculation and Set a Low Limit
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Indra Drives have a tolerance parameter that is used by the drive for positioning. The drive won't say the move is done and report back to the controller until within this tolerance. Pathfinder also has a tolerance parameter which is what the 5226 uses to set the tolerance on the drive. Before the 5226 sends the tolerance though it needs to be adjusted for how the drive interprets counts and position. A bug came from this in which originally the controller was taking the Pathfinder parameter and getting a count value from the calibration table. This is wrong since it is just getting a raw value that lines up with the position in the table and not the resolution of the drive. This bug essentially made the drive think its tolerance was zero and caused big pauses in machine time because the drive was having a hard time getting the axis exactly on target.

The solution was to calculate the correct tolerance for the drive to make positioning easier. A limit was also created to make sure the drive is never sent a tolerance lower than 0.001".

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.12 8/20/2020
5226; Added a Proportional Gain Timing Feature
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

In a closed loop system the motion of an axis is based on calculated set points of where it should be in real life. If the real life feedback is not matching up with the set point positions then the control will be adjusted with a PID system to try and match the actual position with the set points. Factors like friction, gravity or physical limitations can all cause the closed loop system to adjust the analog accordingly. Another feature we have that adjusts the signal is the velocity table which is created to multiply the analog signal based on where it is in the travel. To utilize this feature even more each calculation of the PID is multiplied by this table before the final calculation. This allows the loop to have each component of the PID to have an adjustment based on where the axis is in travel.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.11 8/20/2020
5226; Added a Proportional Variable
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

In a closed loop system the motion of an axis is based on calculated set points of where it should be in real life. If the real life feedback is not matching up with the set point positions then the control will be adjusted with a PID system to try and match the actual position with the set points. Before when the final calculation for the adjustment the proportional part was just part of the final calculation and not put into a variable. Therefore a variable was created to save the proportional calculation so it could be used for diagnostics and proportional gain timing adjustments.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.11 8/20/2020
5226; Fixed a Force Loss of Reference Bug
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 has a section of magnetic memory that can save information even when the controller is powered off. The referenced status of an axis is one of these things. There is a problem though where if somebody chooses the wrong machine type in Pathfinder in which the axis on the machine has an incremental encoder and talks to the controller the referenced status could be cleared. If the correct machine type is chosen in which the axis has an absolute encoder then Pathfinder will be stuck in a needs reference state because there is no way to reference that axis on the machine. The only solution right now is to create a special build that will clear that section of magnetic memory and have it re-initialize with the correct machine type. The bug though is that the special fix was checked-in and released. This caused the reference status of axes with incremental encoders to lose their reference every power cycle because it was being re-initialized at start up.

The fix to this bug was to remove the special build changes from this release.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.11 8/20/2020
5226; Don't Force Slow for Adjusted Velocity for Closed Loop
Pathfinder

Change made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A velocity multiplier feature was implemented on 5226 controllers to help certain machines make smoother moves. This works by having an additional number associated with a certain range in the calibration table that will be used to multiply the analog control signal when the axis is moving in that position range. This allows the user to have more control over the entire range of movement since they can adjust certain ranges accordingly. A cutoff was put in though that if the adjusted velocity is lower than the slow speed, but the original velocity is supposed to be bigger than slow speed don't take the adjustment and set it to slow. This is fine for open loop, but not for closed loop. This forced adjustment will throw off the loop and cause erratic movement.

The solution to this problem was to not force the velocity to be slow speed in this situation when the axis is setup as closed loop.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.11 8/20/2020
5226; Added an Idle Output and Idle Output Delay Feature
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

When not engaged some proportional valves can leak that can cause unexpected results compared to what should happen. One way to remedy this problem is to give a voltage when enable valve is off. To accomplish this the parameter Idle Output Value was created. This value is the amount of voltage that will be sent to the valve when not being used. So when an axis is not being moved it will be getting a signal from -10 - 10 V based on the parameter and will not be enabled. This can also help with keeping system pressure from dropping at a high rate.

The Idle Output Delay logic was also added in conjunction with the Idle Output parameter because it was found that after a move the valve was not fully closing quick enough before the Idle Output voltage was being sent to the valve. This caused additional movement even without the enable signal. The logic is that once an axis is done moving and in its idle state the controller will wait 50ms before sending the voltage signal.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.11 8/20/2020
5226; Add Command Value Acknowledgement for Indra Drive CS Ethernet/IP
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

There was a bug in the communication between the 5226 controller and the Indra Drive CS where the controller was able to send a command before the drive was done processing the previous command. This caused the communication to get into a stalled state where the drive was sitting there waiting for a command and the controller was sitting there because it already sent the command.

The fix to this was found when looking at available status bits the drive sends back through implicit messaging. One of them was Command Value Acknowledgment which can tell the controller that it received the message. The controller was then set up to use this status to check before sending another command.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.11 8/20/2020
XL2; VideoJet Printer Communication Error
XL200

From the very first instance of the Videojet print driver, the driver did not report communication errors with the printer as long as communication with an x370 was active.

The driver attempted to configure a two byte response in the printer when a new message was sent but in fact, due to a documentation discrepancy it actually turned off the response it was looking for and turned on status messages that it was not looking for.

In the past few years Rondo noticed that a printer was not even required to make the XL happy, as long as an x370 was connected and communicating. They asked us to add additional checks to detect when the printer failed to respond correctly. However, this was a risky task since we had no printer to test it with. Their initial testing appeared to work on the surface.

We now have a printer simulation from Videojet that allows us to test communication on the PC simulation. Using this, the configuration issue was discovered and corrected so that the response we are looking for will be generated.

The command in question was being sent as [18][01][06][04] when it should have been sent as [1B][01][06][FB]. The last byte is a mask byte and the purpose of each bit to enable or disable a response was backwards. A zero bit enables the response rathers than a one.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 4.68.06 8/19/2020
XL2OL 4.68.06 8/19/2020
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
FlashWizard; Add Warning about MAC Address Generation.
AMS Tools

Added a test to check OLD software against NEW hardware.

Old software cannot generate MAC Addresses on controllers with newer serial numbers greater than or equal to 13389. If a customer is not using the Ethernet port for Eclipse this is OK. If they are using it, the controller cannot operate on the network without newer software.

To make sure Production, Support and hopefully customers are made aware of this before it turns into a problem, FlashWizard has been modified to test the Serial number and the software version and warn the user if there is an issue.

The user can still program the file if they want to but they have to acknowledge that it may not work.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.34 8/18/2020
FlashDoctor; Add Warning about MAC Address Generation.
AMS Tools

Added a test to check OLD software against NEW hardware.

Old software cannot generate MAC Addresses on controllers with newer serial numbers greater than or equal to 13389. If a customer is not using the Ethernet port for Eclipse this is OK. If they are using it, the controller cannot operate on the network without newer software.

To make sure Production, Support and hopefully customers are made aware of this before it turns into a problem, FlashDoctor has been modified to test the Serial number and the software version and warn the user if there is an issue.

The user can still generate the file if they want to but they have to acknowledge that it may not work.

Model Version Released
FlashDoctor 2.35 8/18/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Update Jorns TwinPro configurations
  • Update JouanelPTS33 geometries
  • Disable ThirdManPedal in JornsFlexAnalog configuration
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.02.2935 7/2/2020
PFv4: Add Norwegian Translations
Pathfinder

Norwegian language translations have been added to Pathfinder.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.02.2935 7/2/2020
XL2; AMS Generic Driver improvments
XL200

All communication was modified to allow the printer 500msec to respond.

The 6370 was not responding to a protocol version request from the printer due to an unneeded carriage return in the command string interfering with the 6370 command communication.

The Ams Generic interface version command was modified to allow the response of "1" to be equivalent to "1.00". The printer is no longer required to send the ".00" part of the version number.

If Eclipse does not send the point size, the point size will default to 14 as the spec says.

The Clear Print Queue and Check Status commands were waiting for too many characters.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.69.00 8/24/2020
XL2CL 4.69.00 8/24/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; Height and Width multipliers in Print Drivers

If Eclipse does not set the Height and Width multiplier or if it sends a zero, the Height and Width multipliers will be defaulted to 1.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.69.00 8/24/2020
XL2CL 4.69.00 8/24/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; RS232 Baud Rate Selection on Ams Generic Print Driver
XL200

Historically all print drivers have been developed and tested with one RS232 baud rate. This baud rate is configured in the x370 by the driver when the x370 is identified.

The AMS Generic print driver will be used by numerous printers as printer manufacturers develop plugins or inserts to allow their printers to more easily integrate or simulate other printers.

ReaJet has developed an integration. Rather than force them to use the default rate that the AMS generic print driver selects, 57600, a new setup has been added. The parameter is currently available only when the AMS Generic Driver is selected. All other drivers will continue to use their defaults for now.

The new setups are called "Part RS232 Baud Rate" and "Bundle RS232 Baud Rate"

The selection options are 9600, 14400, 28800, 38400, 57600 and 115200.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.69.00 8/24/2020
XL2CL 4.69.00 8/24/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; MODBUS Causing Eclipse to have Setups or Tools Locked Error Messages
XL200

The Error messages that Eclipse has Setups or Tools Locked are normal under some conditions. For Example, Setups cannot be modified while Eclipse is uploading or updating setups. The same goes for Tools or any of the record chains in memory.

However, MODBUS, when the PLC Remote Setup or Tool Configuration Selection features are enabled was causing this condition to be much more likely. The MODBUS code was reading the current configuration ID's from the PLC and should have been looking for a change before making a selection. Since it did not look for a change, every manual shear(for example) would cause the Setup and or Tool Configuration to be re-selected. If an operator tried to clear the queue with two manual shears in a row, depending on how quick Eclipse was, Setups and or Tools may have been locked and the operator would get a message indicating such on the second shear attempt.

This has now been resolved by only attempting to update the Setups and Tools when the PLC has actually changed its selection to be different from the current Setup or Tool configuration.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.68.05 6/24/2020
XL2CL 4.68.05 6/24/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
PFv4: Move Auto-Backup Archive Copying to Background Thread
Pathfinder

Pathfinder installations that have a large size on disk can take a significant amount of time to copy a backup to the USB drive. This can cause the startup process to take a long time. To alleviate this, the copying of the backup archive to the backup drive has been moved to a background thread. This will allow Pathfinder to quickly start up, even if the process of copying the backup takes a long time.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.01.2922 6/18/2020
PFv4: Malformed PathfinderSpec File Causes Unhandled Exception
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where a malformed PathfinderSpec file would cause a seemingly unrelated unhandled exception later in the startup process. This bug has been fixed, and an incorrectly formatted PathfinderSpec file will now be handled gracefully.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.01.2922 6/18/2020
PFv4: Change Diagnostic Naming Structure for I/O
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to change the diagnostic naming scheme for inputs and outputs such that any inputs or outputs that are directly related to an axis will use the name of that axis as their naming prefix. This will allow related I/O to be easily grouped with their related axis in the diagnostics viewer, and any filtering that captures an axis will also capture its related I/O.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.01.2922 6/18/2020
PFv4: Warn User if Automatic Backup Fails
Pathfinder

Previously, if an automatic Pathfinder backup failed, it would only log this failure to the system logs. This could allow a backup failure condition to continue unnoticed for a long time, which could result in data loss. A change has been implemented to display a warning message to the user at startup if the automatic backup fails.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.01.2922 6/18/2020
PFv4: Display Warning if No Backup Drive Found
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to display a warning message to the user at startup if no USB backup drive is found on the system. A USB backup drive comes installed in new machines, and is not typically removed in the course of normal operation. If a user has removed the drive in order to transfer backups, this warning message is to remind them to put the drive back so that Pathfinder can continue creating automated backups.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.01.2922 6/18/2020
PFv4: Clarify Diagnostics Settings Options
Pathfinder

The Diagnostics Settings page in Pathfinder has been changed such that the "Write Diagnostics Info To Disk" setting is now named "Enable Diagnostics".

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.01.2922 6/18/2020
PFv4: Diagnostics Settings Allows Invalid Combination
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in the Pathfinder Diagnostics Settings view where it would allow the "Send Diagnostics Info to AMS" setting to be checked while the "Write Diagnostics Info To Disk" setting was unchecked. This is an invalid condition. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.01.2922 6/18/2020
PFv4: Nuisance Error Related to HandleManipulationChanges Fills Logs
Pathfinder

Changes have been made to Pathfinder to mitigate issues with a nuisance error filling up the logfiles. Many instances of NullReferenceExceptions thrown in HandleManipulationChanges were being logged, but this condition is not necessarily invalid or worthy of a log entry. Checks have been implemented to reduce the logging of this exception to only noteworthy cases.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.00.2905 5/22/2020
PFv4: Warn User When Creating an Open Hem With Size Zero
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder such that a warning message dialog will be displayed to the user if they enter a dimension of zero for an open hem feature in the graphical profile editor. Users might think that entering a dimension of zero will cause the feature to become a closed hem, but this is not the case. An open hem with a dimension of zero is not equivalent to a closed hem. The warning prompts the user to replace the open hem feature with a closed hem feature if they intend to create a fully smashed hem.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.00.2905 5/22/2020
PFv4: Non-Graphical Profile Saving Regression
Pathfinder

A regression was introduced in Pathfinder that prevented new, non-graphical profiles from being saved. The root cause was that the success of the base profile update operation was not being checked prior to attempting to update profile operations or sequence steps. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.00.2905 5/22/2020
PFv4: Pathfinder Crashes If No Serial Number Defined
Pathfinder

Pathfinder would crash with an unhandled exception if no serial number was defined in the PathfinderSpec file. This has been fixed, and now Pathfinder gracefully exits with a user warning if no serial number has been defined.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.00.2905 5/22/2020
XL2; Run Output Sticking ON with Feed to Stop Presses.
XL200

SCN 4248 Enabled the Maximum Backup Distance parameter on Open Loop Feed to Stop applications. This edit opened up a code path that failed to clean up/free up presses that were waiting on a feed to complete. Since those presses were stuck waiting for a feed to complete, they were unable to signal that they had exited the run mode and the Run output would stick on because the controller failed to completely exit the run mode.

The only way out was to power cycle the controller and then it would display a "Power Off in Run Mode" error.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 4.68.04 6/4/2020
XL2CL 4.68.04 6/4/2020
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL220OL 4.68.04 6/4/2020
XL220CL 4.68.04 6/4/2020
XL2CL; 0x800004FF Task Error during RE Calculations

The RE and MRE models do calculations to create a cam table that is used to position the die.

A recent SCN, SCN 4266, fixed a bug that artificially limited where the home sensor could be due to incorrect calculations that resulted. Fixing that bug opened up those same calculations to an infinite loop.

The calculations in question, iteratively determine the angle of the rotor (motor) given a linear position of the die.

The initial calculations had an error if the initial guess provided to the iteration resulted in a negative error. When that bug was fixed using an ABS comparison, unknowingly, the function was then open to new failure. The error could begin to ping pong between positive and negative values, failing to get below the accuracy threshold.

The infinite loop was resolved by requiring the absolute error to be constantly decreasing. Once it fails to decrease, we have found the closest angle, within the resolution our available math functions provide.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.68.03 5/26/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Added Parameter 352 - Gripper Clearance Height - to Jorns TwinPro configurations
  • Added Parameter 889 - Gripper Collision Crisis Distance - to Jorns TwinPro configurations
  • Added IO for status lights to JornsFlexAnalog configuration
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.00.2905 5/22/2020
PFv4: New Sequencer Crashes When No Sequences Found
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where it would crash with an exception related to GDI+ if no sequences were found using the new sequencer. The root cause of this bug was a mismatch in return type for a method in the native sequencer DLL. The native assembly was returning a double, but the managed wrapper was expecting a long.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.00.2905 5/22/2020
PFv4: Provide Serial Number to Ingress Settings Endpoint
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder such that it will now provide its serial number in the request to fetch diagnostics ingress settings. This enables the server to dynamically change the preferred diagnostics block size being published by a specific Pathfinder system based upon whether a web user is currently live-streaming or has recently live-streamed data from that system.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.00.2905 5/22/2020
PFv4: Service Locator
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to allow service endpoints to be migrated seamlessly without requiring a new release of Pathfinder. Previously, all service endpoints were hard-coded, some with the option of a user-defined override, which meant that migrating a service endpoint would require a new release of pathfinder or a manual update on each Pathfinder installation. With this change, Pathfinder fetches all service locations from a service locator api each time it starts up. These locations are persisted locally in case a connection to the service locator endpoint cannot be established. In the request to the service locator, Pathfinder provides its serial number, application id, application version, operating system, and operating system version - this information can be used in the future to selectively point different Pathfinder systems at different endpoints.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.15.00.2905 5/22/2020
PFv4: Parameter 166 Displayed Twice
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where Parameter 166 - Backgauge Stopping Reaction Distance - was displayed twice in the UI. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.04.2858 5/13/2020
PFv4: Make New Backgauge Parameters Visible
Pathfinder

New backgauge parameters were recently introduced in Pathfinder, but were not made visible in the UI because the hard-coded range for backgauge parameter keys was not updated at the time. This has been fixed and the new parameters (178, 179, and 180) are now visible.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.04.2858 5/13/2020
PFv4: Reduce Store and Forward Max Retry Time
Pathfinder

After failing to post data to the diagnostics endpoint, Pathfinder will wait a period of time before retrying. After each consecutive failure, this wait time is doubled up to some upper limit. After a successful post, this retry time is reset to the minimum. The max retry time limit was originally set to 20 minutes. This has turned out to be too long for cases where there is a brief outage while diagnostics is actively being used. To speed up the process of recovering from an outage, this max retry time has been reduced to two minutes.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.04.2858 5/13/2020
PFv4: Fix Ingress Settings Error Handling
Pathfinder

There existed an issue in Pathfinder with the error handling for fetching diagnostic ingress settings from the server. If the server returned a value that Pathfinder couldn't deserialize, Pathfinder would log an error and then write a null value to the ingress settings. This would in turn prevent Pathfinder from publishing diagnostic data to the endpoint. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.04.2858 5/13/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Added ASCV3 and ASCV3_Hemmer configurations
  • Added Backgauge Slow Distance Forward (p127) to ASCHydraulicV1 configuration
  • Added Backgauge Stopping Reaction Time (p130) to ASCHydraulicV1 configuration
  • Added new Backgauge Slow Distance Reverse (p178) to ASCHydraulicV1, ASCHydraulicV2, BradburyV2, JornsSingleBendFullRetrofitV2OpenLoop, PremelV2, PremelV2_WithFinger, and SASV2 configurations
  • Added new Backgauge Stopping Reaction Time Reverse (p179) to ASCHydraulicV1 and BradburyV2 configurations
  • Added new Backgauge Stopping Reaction Distance Reverse (p180) to ASCHydraulicV2, JornsSingleBendFullRetrofitV2OpenLoop, PremelV2, PremelV2_WithFinger, and SASV2 configurations
  • Added Backgauge Stopping Mode (p128) to SAS configuration
  • Corrected negative Clamp Stopping Reaction Distance Reverse (p344) in ASCV2 and ASCV2HeavyDuty configurations
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.03.2845 5/7/2020
PFv4: Bug in Generic Parameter Overriding Logic
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where the presence of a generic parameter (ParameterStore) in an override file would cause the set of generic parameters in the base file to get dropped. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.03.2845 5/7/2020
PFv4: Expose Configuration Validation Error Messages to User
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to expose all configuration validation errors to the user when a validation check at startup fails. Rather than simply displaying a generic, top-level error message, the entire chain of validation error messages will be displayed. This will help the user more quickly identify the specific problem that triggered the validation failure.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.03.2845 5/7/2020
5226; Made the Backgauge Slow Distance and Reaction Parameters Bi-Directional
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

In open loop control the controller will use the slow distance parameter to transition into slow to be able to make a more controlled stop and the reaction distance to coast into a full stop. The problem is that there is only one dedicated parameter for both the slow and reaction distance parameters for the backgauge. Meaning both forward and reverse movement will use the same parameters to stop. This can be a problem if each direction reacts differently when stopping.

The solution to this problem was to give dedicated slow and reaction distance directional parameters for the backgauge. Now the user can tune the machine for both forward and reverse moves.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.10 5/5/2020
5226; Added Hemmer Active Generic Parameter and Logic
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A hemmer is an add-on to a machine that is similar to a shear in the way that it moves across the machine except instead of cutting the material it creates a hem. The 5226 does not have a dedicated hemmer operation though so the idea was to use the shear operation to move the hemmer across the machine. The one problem that came from this though is that the shear comes back right away since the material has been cut. With the hemmer though the customer wants to remove the material so that the hemmer does not come back over the created hem.

The solution was to add a generic parameter that can be set to let the controller know there is a hemmer on the machine instead of a shear. Knowing this allows the controller to use the shear operation, but in a slightly different way. The logic with Hemmer Active is that once the hemmer gets to the end of the machine the controller will stop the hemmer and leave it there. The user can then press a pedal to raise the clamp and get the material out of the way. Another pedal press will make the hemmer return to its home position.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.10 5/5/2020
XL2; Asynchronous Print Queue Bug
XL200

When using Asynchronous printing, the controller attempts to treat the line as Shear-Only Line if there is only one other press and there are no gags. It does this by clearing the Part Queue on every halt. It also replaces the last part in the Print Queue when entering run. This allows the operator to set next and have it take effect immediately. However there were some holes in the logic that caused the print queue to get out of sync.

  1. If the last part in the print queue had already been triggered by the sensor but not yet been cut off, entering the run mode queued another message for the part in progress.

  2. Halting and restarting with more than one part in the print queue.

Both scenarios resulted in an extra part in the print queue. Eventually, with enough run cycles the print queue would fill up.

The logic for this was incorrect and was spread out over the code. The existing implementation was removed and replaced with a simpler one.

If the controller is operating in the simulated shear only mode:

  1. When initializing the Part Queue, if there are messages in the Print Queue, replace the last Print Queue added with the first part in the Part Queue.
  2. When initializing the Part Queue, if the printer sensor is blocked, the first part has already been printed on so don't add the first part in the Part Queue to the Print Queue.
Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL2CL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; Resize Asynchronous Print Buffer Display
XL200

When displaying the Asynchronous Print Buffer, the buffer text box was covering the OK button. The solution was to resize the window to allow all of the controls to be displayed correctly.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL2CL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; Enable Async Printing for AMS Generic Print Driver
XL200

Enabled Ansynchronous Printing with the AMS Generic Print driver.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL2CL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; Printer Simulation with the XL PC Simulation
XL200

The AMS Generic and the other Matthews drivers like the ViaJet and PM5100 already had the ability to connect to an MPERIA windows simulation via a Tcp/Ip Ethernet socket. They could also connect to an actual printer by specifying the printers IP Address and Port using command line arguments.

This change allows the PC simulation to connect to any printer, including bundle ticket printers, that support Ethernet Tcp/Ip socket connections.

New command line arguments have been defined that allow the IP address and Port for the bundle ticket printer be specified.

The command argument format for the bundle printer IP address, using the loop back address as an example is: bip127.0.0.1

The command argument format for the bundle printer port number, using 4567 as the example port is: bpor4567

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL2CL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; VideoJet Column Limit

The VideoJet driver, in its extended mode, uses row and column numbers to locate field data within the print message format.

The XL print driver allowed for 3 rows and 4 columns but the Eclipse driver allows 4 row values 0-3 and 5 column values 0-4.

The XL protects its array bounds by converting any index with a range error to 1.

Rondo was trying to use 5 columns. Since a bug with logo printing in SCN 4304 is also being fixed, an additional column is also being added in the same release. To avoid having to change and release Eclipse as well to allow them to use the 5th column, the XL driver will now stop converting column 0 to column 1. This effectively changes the column index field from a 1 based index to a zero based index.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.68.01 4/29/2020
XL2CL 4.68.01 4/29/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; VideoJet 1510 Logo Printing Bug
XL200

In 2016 we added logo printing to the 1510 printer for Rondo, based on the latest ESI printer protocol spec, because we have no printers to test with. Now in 2020 when they try to use it, it does not work.

We have discovered today, the latest ESI protocol document from VideoJet has an error in it. Yet somehow we got it correct when logo printing was added for the 1520 printer.

The [1B][84][38] command required an 8 character file name. It had to be 8 characters. This is the command we were attempting to use but the latest ESI protocol document actually documents the [1B][84][43] command, which has an argument to specify the file name length. Instead of adding the [1B][84][43] command, someone edited the [1B][84][38] command in the document instead.

Both the 1510 and 1520 drivers are now using the correct [1B][84][43] command.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.68.01 4/29/2020
XL2CL 4.68.01 4/29/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
5226; Bug Fix for Setting Up Analog Inputs on the Slave Controller
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

If a machine has too much I/O, feedback, etc. a second 5226 controller will be added to accommodate the extra devices. To do this the main controller will talk to the added controller though CAN bus to find out what all of the sensors connected to the second controller are doing. The problem is that the master controller is the only one communicating with Pathfinder so it has to configure the slave controller what port is being used for what. A bug came from this in which the master controller was only setting up one of the four analog input ports. This means that anything plugged into the other three ports would be ignored.

The solution to this problem was to make sure that all analog input ports are configured so that the slave controller can relay the information to the master controller board.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.10 5/5/2020
5226; Use Adjusted Position to Decide Target Direction for Backgauge
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The target position of the backgauge can change if the main backstop is not the backstop that is going to be used for that operation. This can mean a finger or closed grippers used for gauging. In these cases the backgauge needs to be offset to account for the length of the finger or grippers when closed. There was a bug where the target direction was being decided by the original target instead of the offset position of where the backgauge is actually moving to.

The solution was to make sure the new target that was calculated is used for deciding target direction for that move.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.10 5/5/2020
5226; Added New Parameter Axis Conflicts for Bending Beams and Retracts
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 controller uses axis conflict tests to decide when its safe for an axis to move based on certain parameters set by the user. Previously there were only parameters for the maximum angle the bending beams could be at to move the retracts. To have as much safety as possible for the machine parameters 240 Max Lower Retract Position to Move Lower Bending Beam and 288 Max Upper Retract Position to Move Upper Bending Beam were added. Having these parameters give more flexibility to the user for when it is safe to move the bending beams.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.10 5/5/2020
5226; Made Bending Beams and Retracts Home Limits Interrupts
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The bending beam and retract home limits were previously checked on a polled basis. They were changed to interrupts to try and see the transition from off to on as quickly as possible so that other axes could start moving.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.10 5/5/2020
5226; Added Pressure Test Ports A and B Axes
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The hydraulic units we are using going forward have test ports that give the pressure at a given axis if the sensors are connected. Axis Pressure Test Ports A and B were added as axes in the 5226 controller to get this feedback so it could be seen in diagnostics.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.10 5/5/2020
5226; Added Upper Bending Beam Home Limit
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The upper bending beam home limit was added so it could be used as a reality check for the 5226 controller if the feedback of the upper bending is no longer valid. This will stop the controller from moving other axes that could cause harm to the machine if the beam is not at its home position regardless of where the feedback is saying the beam is at.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.10 5/5/2020
PFv4: Error in Modify Offset Logic
Pathfinder

A bug was introduced to Pathfinder with the recent changes surrounding raw count offsets and the Modify Offset behavior. An error in the logic for whether or not to allow a Modify Offset was introduced that resulted in incremental encoders being blocked from modifying the calibration offset. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.02.2824 4/20/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • JornsFlexAnalog: Added parameters 251, 346, 350
  • JornsFlex: Added parameter 346
  • ASCV2: Added parameter 346
  • ASCHydraulicV2: Added parameter 346
  • BradburyV2: Added parameters 346, 410
  • ASCV2HeavyDuty: Added parameter 346
  • JornsRabco: Added parameters 346, 410
  • JornsSingleBendAnalogV2ClosedLoop: Added parameter 346
  • JornsSingleBendFullRetrofit: Added parameters 346, 410
  • JornsSingleBendFullRetrofitV2ClosedLoop: Added parameters 346, 410
  • JornsSingleBendFullRetrofitV2: Added parameter 346
  • JornsSingleBendFullRetrofitV2OpenLoop: Added parameter 346
  • Fixed "CanBeCalibrated" setting for shear axis in all Thalmann configs
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.01.2821 4/13/2020
PFv4: Cross-Thread Exceptions in Edge Settings View
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where cross-thread exceptions would be thrown when updating Edge status with the Edge Settings view open. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.01.2821 4/13/2020
PFv4: Dynamic Diagnostic Datablock Size
Pathfinder

An enhancement has been made to Pathfinder to allow Pathfinder machines to use a dynamic block size for sending diagnostic data to the cloud. Each Pathfinder machine will periodically poll the diagnostic endpoint to find out what block size it should be using, and will adopt that block size on the next created block. This will allow for efficient storage use under normal circumstances while also facilitating lower latency from Pathfinder to diagnostic viewer during live diagnostic streaming.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.01.2821 4/13/2020
PFv4: Early Exception at Startup Causes Unhandled KeyNotFoundException in DependencyInjector
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where, if any exception was thrown early on in the startup phase, it would cascade into an unhandled exception and crash due to a KeyNotFoundException being thrown by the DependencyInjector. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.01.2821 4/13/2020
PFv4: Fetching raw count offset quietly fails if parameter doesn't exist in config
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where, when sending down calibration data, if the Raw Count Offset parameter for an axis was not present in the configuration, it would quietly fail and revert to an offset of zero. This bug has been fixed. A new validation step at startup has been created to detect this problem, and a unit test has been created to detect it as well.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.01.2821 4/13/2020
XL2; PC Simulation; Printer command line arguments added.
XL200

To facilitate printer driver protocol testing the windows simulation is able to communicate to a printer simulation through the Loopback address on a hardcoded tcp/ip port.

This change allows the IP address and the port to be specified so that an actual printer on the network can be used as well.

The command argument format for the printer IP address, using the loop back address as an example is: pip127.0.0.1

The command argument format for the printer port number, using 4567 as the example port is: ppor4567

both arguments are case sensitive.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2OL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2CL 4.68.02 5/4/2020
XL220OL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL220CL 4.70.00 9/30/2020
XL2; Disable the use of the FM31265 Watch Dog for Rev G and higher 5386
XL200

This is no longer the case. This change was removed prior to the software being released. The 5386 Watch Dog signal notifies the ARM chip that the 5386 Watchdog has failed.

The FM31265 will no longer be responsible for the 5386 Watch Dog on Rev G and higher boards. In the Rev H hardware the ARM processor will take over this responsibility with much more control and less 5386 overhead.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2OL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2; Add new Segment and Descriptor for the Rev G ARM program.
XL200

A new segment was required to store and access the ARM application required for the Rev G and higher 5386 board. This change reads the descripter table and populates the hardware structure so that the 5386 application can access the ARM application and program the ARM if required.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL220OL 4.75.00 6/9/2021
XL2CL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
XL2OL 4.74.00 5/24/2021
5.01.00 11/26/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
FlashWizard; Correctly Identify IntelHex Files as Version 4
AMS Tools

Using the full size of the Flash Chip on the 5386 Rev D and higher broke the test FlashWizard used to identify the controller version and be able to look up the Application Start Address.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.34 8/18/2020
First Pass at Adding ARM S-Record Files for the 5386 Rev G and higher.
AMS Tools
Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.34 8/18/2020
FlashDoctor 2.35 8/18/2020
Parse S0 and S5 S-Records correctly
AMS Tools

S0 and S5 records in S-Record files were not being parsed correctly.

Model Version Released
FlashWizard 2.34 8/18/2020
FlashDoctor 2.35 8/18/2020
XL2; Terminate Item Complete on Estop or Sys Ready
XL200

MRS discovered an issue one their machines with the Item Complete output on an E-Stop. After a reset of the E-Stop circuit, the Item Complete output would turn back ON.

They requested that we add an E-Stop input to all of their models and that it terminate the Item Complete timer early. They have been assuming that all XL controllers had an E-Stop input and have wired all of their machines this way.

Only Closed Loop controllers have an E-Stop input. Since our controller is not a safety rated device we are uncomfortable adding a new input to a controller with the name E-Stop to avoid potentially invalid assumptions about the purpose of that input.

A new input will be added to all XL Open Loop models that have an input available. It will be added based on DIP switch selection to avoid impacting legacy installations. The new input will be called "Sys. Ready". If the Sys Ready input is configured it will terminate the Item Complete timer if the input turns off. If configured, the input will also be required to enter the run mode and will also terminate any run mode in progress.

On Closed Loop models, losing the E-Stop input will terminate the Item Complete Timer.

The DIP switch configuration and the input location of the Sys Ready input will be defined in the Switch and IO documents for each controller model.

Model Version Released
XL2OL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2OL 4.68.00 3/18/2020
XL2CL 4.68.00 3/18/2020
XL220OL 4.68.00 3/18/2020
XL220CL 4.68.00 3/18/2020
XL2CL; Added Auxiliary Compensation Parameter
XL200

Until now the Auxiliary Compensation Parameter was only available on Open Loop Controllers.

The Auxiliary Compensation parameter did not make sense on a Closed Loop until the addition of the Open Loop Shear option on some Die Accelerator controllers.

The parameter will now be available if the main shear press is configured as open loop and the controller has the slave option enabled.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.66.05 3/10/2020
PFv4: Basic Pro Integration
Pathfinder

Pathfinder now reports enough basic information for Pro to compute runtime, cycles, part counts, and downtime. This includes a configuration panel for configuring the network location of the Pro server.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.00.2796 3/10/2020
Pathfinder PC 4.14.00.2796 3/10/2020
PFv4: Display Warning When Disk Usage Blocks Edge Sync
Pathfinder

Pathfinder will block Edge Syncing when disk usage reaches the "Constrained" level, and will display a warning to the user when attempting to save profiles. However, users do not always save Edge profiles in the course of their normal workflow, so they would not see this message. An additional warning has been added for when disk usage is "Constrained" and Edge Sync is enabled but blocked to notify the user at login that Edge Syncing is suspended until disk usage is reduced.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.14.00.2796 3/10/2020
Eclipse Pro can recall and order and keep it scheduled
Eclipse

By setting the req_seq and req_mach fields, Comm will not unassign orders like it typiclally does and keep it assigned to the machine

Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.184 3/7/2020
Per Machine license set by Pro
Eclipse

Pro can now set a new field NoLicense to true when there is no pro.machine.classic claim. This will cause Comm to not communicate with the controller.

Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.184 3/7/2020
5226; New Error Message Axis Move Direction Mismatch
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

To move an axis with the 5226 controller the run task first sets up a moves for all axes for what the operation needs at that given time. Once everything is set up axes are allowed to move as long as there is no conflict with any axis at a given time. A problem that can arise from this is that all of the movement of the other axes could affect the position of an axis that hasn't moved yet through drift or jerkiness. In some extreme cases this could have moved an axis to be on the other side of the target and the direction it was supposed to move has changed by the time it is allowed to move.

To solution to this problem was to re-check the direction the axis thinks it is supposed to move based on the target against the direction the axis thought it was going to start moving when the move was set up by the run task. If there is a mis-match the machine will be halted with the error message 360 Axis Move Direction Mismatch. This error will also catch cases where something happened to the axis feedback or if the clamp offset based on radius adjust position feature created a problem.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.09 3/5/2020
5226; Don't Set Up a Clamp Down Move When Not a Known Down Move
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A clamp position adjustment based on the radius adjust position was implemented to keep the machine safe by offsetting the clamp to its physical position for moves. For more information refer to:

SCN 5226; Clamp and Radius Adjust Position Interaction

A bug came from this in which the clamp would start moving down when the move should have been up. The solution to this was to only move the clamp down when the run task wanted to do a move down. Error message Axis Move Direction Mismatch was also created as an extra line of defense for this problem.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.09 3/5/2020
PFv4: Improve Edge Status Logging
Pathfinder

Changes have been made to Pathfinder to improve status logging related to Edge Sync. More detailed information will be recorded to the system logs, and more information will be displayed in the Edge settings view.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.13.21.2769 2/28/2020
PFv4: Firmware Update
Pathfinder

The 5226 firmware packaged with Pathfinder has been updated to resolve issues related to the new Offset Table functionality.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.13.20.2761 2/27/2020
5226; Adjust Clamp Offset From Radius Adjust Position in Jog
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

A clamp position adjustment based on the radius adjust position was implemented to keep the machine safe by offsetting the clamp to its physical position for moves. For more information refer to:

SCN 5226; Clamp and Radius Adjust Position Interaction

The problem is this adjustment to the target was not implemented for when a jog occurs. The solution was to also adjust the clamp target and position based on where the radius adjust is positioned.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.08 2/26/2020
PFv4: Configuration Updates
Pathfinder
  • Jorns Twinmatic backgauge calibration updated
  • Backgauge home limit input removed from ASCV2 and ASCV2HeavyDuty configurations
  • Radius Adjust to Clamping Beam Offset Table added to ASCV2 and ASCV2HeavyDuty configurations
  • Clamp calibration updated in ASCV2 and ASCV2HeavyDuty configurations
  • Added Parameter 332 - Maximum LBB to Move CB - to JornsRabco and RoperWhitneyElectric configurations
  • Added Parameter 159 - Minimum CB to Move Backgauge - to RoperWhitneyElectric configuration
  • Added new ThalmannThakoV2OrigServo configuration
  • Added homing direction for backgauge and bending beam to ASCV2HeavyDuty configuration
  • Added new JornsFlexAnalog configuration
Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.13.18.2754 2/25/2020
PFv4: Unhandled NullReferenceException Thrown When Modifying Offset
Pathfinder

There existed a bug in Pathfinder where an unhandled NullReferenceException would be thrown when performing a Modify Offset if no Radius Adjust to Clamping Beam Offset Table was defined. This bug has been fixed.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.13.19.2757 2/25/2020
PFv4: Hydraulic Oil Temperature Display
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder to display the hydraulic oil temperature in the axis position display when the machine has a temperature sensor.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.13.18.2754 2/25/2020
PFv4: Dependent Axis Offset Table
Pathfinder

A new feature has been introduced to Pathfinder to alleviate positioning issues with mechanically-dependent axes by accounting for movement that is invisible to the feedback device. A dependent axis offset table models the relationship between an independent axis and its dependent axis. The table consists of a mapping from absolute positions to relative position offsets. The table is sent to the controller, which uses it to correct the reported position and positioning targets for the dependent axis. Pathfinder also uses the table when performing a Modify Offset operation. When setting up a machine, the independent axis must be referenced first. Currently, the only supported table type is a Radius Adjust to Clamping Beam Offset Table.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.13.18.2754 2/25/2020
PFv4: Change Shear Position Format
Pathfinder

A change has been made to Pathfinder to clarify the shear position display. Instead of displaying a simulated position, the shear position will be displayed in terms of time.

Model Version Released
Pathfinder PC 4.13.18.2754 2/25/2020
XL220CL; Two Encoder Feed to Stop not functional
XL200

Two encoder feed to stop failed to function on the XL220CL. The Switch setting caused all of the correct setups to appear but the line was uncontrollable.

The cause was due to a failure to send the System and Axis configuration to the DSP processor. The 386 processor was functioning in Two Encoder Feed to Stop but the DSP processor responsible for the Loop Calculations was still functioning in Single Encoder Feed to Stop.

Model Version Released
XL220CL 4.67.04 2/24/2020
XL2CL; XL200CL-MRE2 DIP Switch 11 and 12 Error.
XL200

DIP Switch 11 and 12 on an XL200CL-MRE2 controller is supposed to invert the assumed logic of the Home Sensor. However, those switch settings were being prevented by the Switch Validation test.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.66.04 2/19/2020
XL2CL; Incorrect Refererencing with some Home Switch Positions on Crank/Eccentric dies.
XL200

Any Home Switch Postion between 0" and the Start Match Position would result in the die referencing to 1/2 of the Die Travel (Auto) value.

There is a function that finds the Rotor angle for a given Die Position in inches. It is given an initial guess angle and iterates to the actual angle. The function made an assumption about the initial guess that was resolved by adding an absolute test rather than assuming the error in the guess would always be positive.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.66.04 2/19/2020
XL2CL; Home Switch Position range error bug on Crank/Eccentric Dies
XL200

The range test on the Home Switch Position for Crank/Eccentric Dies was invalid.

Some valid positive values were not being allowed.

The valid range for the Home Switch Position is any value between +- Die Travel (Auto) as long as it is also outside of the Start Match to Stop Match Position Range.

Model Version Released
XL2CL 5.80.00 11/30/2021
XL2CL 4.66.04 2/19/2020
5226; Make Max Travel Range of Indra Drive CS Within the Drives Range
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 controller has the capability to talk to drives through the Ethernet I/P protocol to control an axis. Ethernet I/P uses implicit messages to receive constant information from the drive like feedback and to control messages to tell the drive to do something like move to a position. The protocol then uses explicit messages to directly change or request a parameter in the drive. One of the drives added was the Indra Drive CS. For more information refer to:

SCN 4236 5226; Add New Ethernet I/P Driver IndraDriveCs

When the user disables limits to move the backgauge the controller takes a large default position to tell the drive to move to. This is essentially a target that the backgauge cannot reach without hitting a physical limit. The problem is that the target is even bigger than the allowed travel range in the drive so an error is always thrown when trying move the backgauge with limits off.

The solution was to make sure the default target in the controller is within the max travel range of the drive. This ended up being 250 inches.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
5226; New Logic for When to Turn Off Throttle Bypass Output
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some folding machines have a throttle valve that restricts the flow of fluid to force the axes to move a certain slower speed. On some Jorns machines there is a valve that when turned on will bypass the throttle valve and allow faster controlled movement. To make sure the machine is not always moving in slow because the controller is not bypassing the throttle valve the Throttle Bypass output was created. For more information refer to:

SCN 4172 - 5226; Added Throttle Bypass Output and Logic

Previous logic for this output was to always turn it off when the clamp slow speed limit is on and the clamp is moving in slow. Now FoldGuard Active also has to not be on to clear this output.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
5226; Correct Acceleration/Deceleration Calculation for Indra Drive CS
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The 5226 controller has the capability to talk to drives through the Ethernet I/P protocol to control an axis. Ethernet I/P uses implicit messages to receive constant information from the drive like feedback and to control messages to tell the drive to do something like move to a position. The protocol then uses explicit messages to directly change or request a parameter in the drive. One of the drives added was the Indra Drive CS. For more information refer to:

SCN 4236 5226; Add New Ethernet I/P Driver IndraDriveCs

Two of the parameters sent over to the drive through the implicit messaging are the acceleration and deceleration. The 5226 controller calculates these parameters for the drive based on Pathfinders acceleration and deceleration parameters. The problem is that the calculation was being done incorrectly and the drive was not moving the motor in the way it was expected to.

The solution to this problem was the calculate the acceleration and deceleration correctly for the Indra Drive CS.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
5226; Add FoldGuard Active Logic to Single Bend
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

FoldGuard is an external laser safety system that is put onto folding machines to allow an operator to safely lower the clamping beam onto the material. It uses lasers to stop the clamp when moving down if a laser is not broken by the clamp. The 5226 controller looks at the input FoldGuard Active to tell what kind of move it will do based on whether FoldGuard is Active or not. For more information refer to:

SCN 3929 - 5226; Added Foldguard Active Input

The problem is that this logic was only added for double folding machines. The solution to this problem was to add the logic for single folders too.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
5226; Raise Clamp On E-Stop Would Not Disable Bug Fix
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

The raise clamp on e-stop parameter is a safety feature that will move the clamp up on an e-stop and out of harm’s way. The parameter also has an option to disable this feature and not raise at all. At some point though the logic to handle this was removed from the 5226 and setting it to disable will not turn off this feature.

The fix to this bug was to get the logic back into the controller and actually disable the feature when the parameter is set to disable.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
5226; Added Logic for Shear Cut Pedal Input
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some folding machines have a shear/slitter to cut the material to a certain length. Most of the time there is no dedicated pedal to start shear motion and the bending beam cycle or clamp down pedal is used to move the shear. Some machines do come with distinct shear pedals which are the shear cut and shear return pedals. The 5226 already had the inputs for these kinds of pedals, but not the correct logic to control the shear when either was pressed.

The solution was to add the logic for these pedals. When running a shear operation if the shear cut pedal is pressed the shear will start its defined move. If the pedal is released then the shear will stop. If the cut is pressed again the shear will continue with the move, but if the shear return pedal is pressed the shear will move to its home. If the operator holds down the shear cut pedal all the way to the defined target and keeps holding the pedal the shear will return home without having to press the return pedal. Once the shear reaches its home target the operation is over and will move on to the next.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
5226; Clamp and Radius Adjust Position Interaction
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

Some folding machines have an automatic radius adjust that controls the air gap between the nose of the clamp and the bending beam. This allows users the ability to adjust the gap depending on the thickness of the material. In most cases to achieve this adjustment the radius adjust usually moves the position of the clamp nose. On some mechanisms though this changes the physical clamp open position which can be dangerous when considering safety stop heights.

The solution to this problem was to create a new calibration table that takes into account the relationship of where the of the radius adjust is and the corresponding clamp position. Having this information the controller is able to internally adjust its actual position and help it set up the correct target positions for moves.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
5226; Added Logic for Hydraulic Oil Temperature Sensor
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On hydraulic machines letting the oil get overheated can cause problems like damaging seal compounds and accelerate degration of the oil. To keep the oil from overheating too quickly a machine will sometimes be equipped with some form of cooler. Then to know when to turn on the cooler a temperature sensor can be used to get feedback.

The 5226 controller logic uses a temperature sensor to automatically know when to turn the cooler on and off based on the reading. The controller uses 3 parameters to make this logic happen. A Max Hydraulic Oil Temperature, a Hydraulic Oil Cooler Temperature Threshold and a Hydraulic Oil Temperature Hysteresis. The cooler will turn on when the Threshold is reached and stay on until the temperature is lower than Threshold minus Hysteresis. During this time the machine can still be run in Full Automatic. If the temperature reaches the Max then the machine will drop out of run and only jogging will be allowed.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
5226; Once Error is Clear on Drive Send Another Command to Clear Bit
Pathfinder

Changes made for Pathfinder 5226 controllers.

On Indra Drives there is a bit that can be set in a certain parameter that will clear drive faults. Once the fault has been cleared the bit needs to also be cleared so that the next time there is a drive fault the bit can be set again. If the bit is not cleared the drive will be stuck in a limbo state where there is a drive fault that will not let the drive move the axis.

The bug fix was to make sure the controller clears the bit after the drive fault has been cleared. Once the bit is clear the controller should be able to clear the next fault that occurs on the drive.

Model Version Released
5226BB 4.02.07 2/18/2020
Add setting to automatically refresh screen when the screen resolution changes
Eclipse

When the PC resolution changed, like when logging on via RDP, Eclipse shows a dialog asking if it should update the screen size. A new setting will allow this to automatically happen.

Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.182 2/4/2020
Add support for Keyence part printers
Eclipse
Model Version Released
Eclipse-Standard 4.1.182 2/4/2020